Juniors German 
 
 ^4W 
 
 Dr, E Lange 
 
BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME 
 FROM THE 
 
 SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND 
 
 THE GIFT OF 
 
 Henrg M. Sage 
 
 1891 
 
 A..-?rr^.a.^.f.^.. ,^//jSy<?.^.... 
 
 3513-I 
 
arVieZs/"™" ""'"^^I'y Library 
 J""'?,';*' German, com 
 
 olin,anx 
 
 3 1924 031 308 095 
 
The original of tiiis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031308095 
 
UNIFORM SERIES 
 
 OF 
 
 GRADUATED lilUAGECOlSES, 
 
 BASED ON THE NEW 
 
 "ANALYTIC METHOD OF LEARNIM LANGUAGES" 
 
 BY 
 
 FRANZ LANGE, Ph. d. 
 
 PEOFESSOE AT THE ROYAL MILITABT ACADEMY, WOOLWICH; LATE BXAMINEK 
 
 IN THE QEBMAN LANGUAGE AND LITBEATUEE AT THE VICTOBIA ITNIVEESITT 
 
 MANCHESTER; EXAMINEE TO THE COLLEGE OP PEECEPTOES, LONDON; AT THE 
 
 ROYAL NATAL COLLEGE, GREENWICH; etc. 
 
 I. JUNIOBS' OEBHAN. 
 
NEW 
 "ANALYTIC METHOD OF LEARNING LANGUAGES". 
 
 I. 
 
 JUNIORS' GERMAN 
 
 COMPRISING 
 
 A METHODICAL PART; A SYSTEMATIC GRAMMAR 
 
 PART; AND A GERMAN READING PART, WITH 
 
 A GRADUATED GLOSSARY 
 
 FRANZ LANGE, Ph. d. 
 
 "J? faut apprendre la grammaire par la langue 
 et non la langue par la grammaire". 
 
 SECOND EDITION. 
 
 HACHETTE AND COMPANY. 
 
 LONDON: 18, King William Stbebt, Chasing Cross. 
 
 PARIS: 79, Boulbvabd Saint-Gbemain. 
 
 BOSTON: Cabl Schoenhoi'. 
 
 1895. 
 
 [All rights reserved.] 
 
CHIEF FEATUEES 
 
 of 
 
 The „New Analytic Method of Learning Languages". 
 
 1 Every subject of instruction should be grraduated so as to 
 accord with the slow growth of the learner's mind. 
 
 2. This method, an analytico- synthetic or inductive process, is 
 based on what we may call the fundamental ''Beading Passage". 
 
 The Reading Passage, instead of simple words or disconnected 
 sentences, is thus the centre round which the whole instruction in all 
 its details moves. 
 
 3. The introduction to a foreign language should begin with its 
 Sonnds, but with those only that are illustrated by the 'Reading 
 Passage' of each lesson. It is monstrous to teach children the whole 
 alphabet and the pronunciation of all the letters at one time. Pronun- 
 ciation must thus be in strict accordance with the 'Reading Passage' 
 and be taught only so far as it refers to liiis one passage. Reading, 
 committing to memory, and reciting short passages of poetry, which 
 should be at first simple and prose-Uke, and simplified by phonetic 
 transcriptions, should be specially used at the begmning in order to 
 accustom tongue and ear to the sounds of the new language. Owing 
 to its musical character and its simpler construction poetry is more 
 easUy committed to memory than prose. 
 
 4. Aecidence and Syntax are not treated as separate elements, 
 learned by heart without the proper application of their various rules 
 to speech, but are combined with, and inductively inferred from, the 
 Beading Passage of each lesson. 
 
 Thus nothing is taught that is useless at the time. 
 
 5. The Sentences of the Exercises (for translation into the 
 foreign language) are composed of the words contained in "the Reading 
 Passage" now familiar to the student, and are arranged by means of 
 permutation; that is to say, by adding the stock of words of the 
 preceding lessons to all the subsequent ones, and by thus repeatedly 
 re-revising the contents of the Reading Passage, ever new ideas and 
 sentences are formed. 
 
 Moreover, the ability to translate into the foreign language will be 
 acquired in a simple and easy manner well-suited to the attainments 
 of the pupil. 
 
 6. Conversation in the foreign language is practised from the 
 very beginning, and is based on the ReMing Passage of each lesson, 
 in the contents of which the student is now quite at home. 
 
VI Chief Features of the Method. 
 
 7. After the methodical part or some portion of it is gone 
 through, and the student is acquainted with the chief elements of 
 grammar as inferred from the Keading Passage, he should study 
 the following Systematic Grammar Fart which will impart to him 
 grammar as a whole and teach him to comprehend the true genius 
 of the grammatical iirame-work and its contents. 
 
 8. Special care has been taken to impart a knowledge of Every 
 day Phrases and Idioms, without which no study of a foreign lan- 
 guage can be complete. 
 
 9. A Beader with a complete Graduated Glossary is added to 
 each Course, the poems in the £lementary German Course being for 
 the sake of convenience printed in English type. 
 
 10. It is calculated, that by using these courses the time of 
 learning a language at school will be about two years less than 
 is wanted for any other method (supposing the same number of 
 hours a week is allowed to each); whilst a private student, with proper 
 time at his disposal, will be well able in twelve months to master a 
 language, so as to read and write it fluently and also to converse in it 
 (in the case of a modem language). 
 
 Each course is intended for one school-year, so that the study of 
 the whole 'accidence' and of the 'syntax' will extend over, and be 
 competed within, two years. 
 
 The QradMated Prose Writing should be used side by side with 
 the ordinary Jimiors', and Seniors' Gou/rses, with which its chapters 
 correspond. 
 
 This method should be rightly called anal^tieo-synthetic, because 
 it resolves the Beading Passage into its constituent elements or com- 
 ponent parts and again combines them, in the course of the in- 
 struction, into a whole; but, for the sake of convenience, we call 
 it „Analytic Method", analysis being the chief process employed. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 Chief Featnres of the neAr Analytic Method of teaching and 
 
 learningr Languages V 
 
 Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 (Msister's Part.) 
 
 1. Organs of speech 3 
 
 2. Pronunciation of Vowels 4 
 
 3. Pronunciation of Consonants . . 10 
 
 4. Grerman Accentuation ...... 15 
 
 5. Symbols used in the Phonetic Transcriptions 22 
 
 6. Phonetic Transcriptions 23 
 
 7. Diyision of words into syllables 25 
 
 I. Methodical Part. 
 
 Lesson I. ] 
 
 jt 
 
 II. 
 
 
 III. 
 
 
 IV. 
 
 j; 
 
 V. 
 
 
 VI. 
 
 
 VII. 
 
 
 VIII. 
 
 
 IX. 
 
 
 X. 
 
 
 XL 
 
 
 XII. 
 
 
 XIII. 
 
 
 XIV. 
 
 
 XV. 
 
 
 XVI. 
 
 it 
 
 XVII. 
 
 Beading Passage: ©et ^rfi^Iing . . . 
 (Continued.) .... 
 ®er ©ommet . . . 
 Ser §erbft . . . 
 Ser aSinter .... 
 grii^IitigSKeb . . . 
 Slorgentieb .... 
 ®ie ®tenerfc^o|t 
 SSinter6na^en . . . 
 3tt>et 33aare uiib IStner 
 
 IRu^e 
 
 S)a« aStot .... 
 Sie 3nt . 
 
 ffier §trantel .... 
 ®a« 9io6 unb bet ©tier 
 Siebe ct«c8 Btoxd)tS 
 ®cr SKorgen .... 
 
 32 
 34 
 36 
 39 
 42 
 44 
 47 
 50 
 54 
 57 
 60 
 63 
 67 
 72 
 78 
 83 
 89 
 
VIII Contents. 
 
 
 Lessoo XVUI. Eeading Passage: WntttxfttAi . . . 
 „ XIX. „ „ SBa^te S^Bflid^t . 
 „ XX. „ „ S)tr Hat tini) §ttfe . 
 „ XXI. „ „ Set BawrtSmg .... 
 „ XXII. „ „ miijtlmS etiie Seife 
 „ XXin. „ „ 2)te Selo^Hung . . 
 „ XXIV. „ „ ein greunb bet «ihiet 
 
 Page 
 
 . 94 
 101 
 109 
 115 
 123 
 131 
 139 
 
 n. Systfflnatic Grammar Part. 
 
 iHtroduction: The German Alphabet. 
 
 Elements of German Grammar. 
 
 (I.) AeeMence. 
 
 A. Deelensien, treating of inflections to mark gender, number, 
 and case: 
 
 1. Nocms, with thar three genders .... 163 
 
 2. Adjeetrycs, with their degrees of comparison . 171 
 
 3. Numerals ... 174 
 
 4. Prcmouns ... 174 
 
 B. Conjugation, treating of inflections to mark Voice, Mood, Tense, 
 Ntimber, and Person: 
 
 5 Verbs 
 
 a) Weak Verbs . . 179 
 
 (2) Strong Verbs . ... 180 
 
 C. Uninflected Words: 
 
 6. IndecHnalries. 
 
 (1) Prepositions . . 187 
 
 (2) Adverbs ... . 187 
 
 (3) Conjunctions 189 
 
 (4) Interjections . 189 
 
 (n.) Syntax. 
 
 A. The ^mple Seatoace, and its order of Words. 
 
 1. Predicatiye Selation ... . . 189 
 
 2. AttiibutiTe Belation 189 
 
 3. Adrerbial Belation . . . . 190 
 
 4. Otgective Belation ... 190 
 
 B. The Compoimd Se^^nce, and its construction. 
 
 1. The Co-ordinative sentence . 190 
 
 2. The Subordktatire sentence 190 
 
 in, German Reading Part. 
 
 1. Der Mai ... 193 
 
 2. Lamm und Ejiabe . 193 
 
Contents. IX 
 
 Page 
 
 3. Vogel und Knabe 193 
 
 4. Das Tropflein 193 
 
 5. Ser @fel mtb bcr Solf 194 
 
 6. Knabe und Schmetterling 194 
 
 7. Ser SSeri"d)ttienber 194 
 
 8. ■Wandersmann und Lerche 196 
 
 9. Scr gierige §oBtc^t 195 
 
 10. Ellengrosse .... ... 195 
 
 11. ®er fvof* uiib Me 3Kau8 . 196 
 
 12. Gott grusse dich! 196 
 
 13. Siet SBmt, btr SBSr uiib ber Self 196 
 
 14. Das Vffllchen 166 
 
 15. SDie beiben grofdie 197 
 
 16. Fuchs und Ente 197 
 
 17. ®et affe ntib ber SBiber 197 
 
 18. Vogel am Fe^ster 198 
 
 19. ©ie St&im utib ber aBafferlrag 198 
 
 20. Eabe 198 
 
 21. Set ^tbiS unb ber ^Potmbaum 199 
 
 22. Dra Paare und einer 199 
 
 23. ®er ebelfieiti 200 
 
 24. ®te «orn«^ven 200 
 
 25. Mopschen und Spitzchen 200 
 
 26. ®er ^utigrige Straoet 201 
 
 27. G<rf;tes treue Hand 201 
 
 28. Sie S[Roo«ro[e 201 
 
 29. ®er Betabene efel 202 
 
 30. Der Habicht und die Storche 202 
 
 81. Ser |?rof(^ anb bet ©tier • 202 
 
 32. S)er efel, ber Stabe unb ber $irt 203 
 
 33. ®er gro^c «ol|lto))t 203 
 
 34. SSefonberer £if^ 204 
 
 35. Der Schmetterling 204 
 
 36. ©Ic mit SSkile 204 
 
 37 Die Kapelle ^^ 
 
 SS. ein Sfinger uttb' gt'oc^otger SRu^amntebg 205 
 
 39. Das Schwert 206 
 
 40. ©It braber ©olbat 206 
 
 41. Gute Nacht 206 
 
 42. 2)ie ©c^ilbfrote unb ber mier 207 
 
 43. Der Herbst . . 207 
 
 44. ®a« @(i&af ^° 
 
 45. Alexanders Vermachtnis .... 208 
 
 46. fCrtebrid^ ber ©ro^e unb fetn !page ^08 
 
 47. Im Walde 209 
 
 48. grtebricf) ber ©rogc unb bie ©trngenjungen ^09 
 
 49. griebricti ber ®ro|e in Stffo ^JO 
 
 50. Gefunden ^}" 
 
 51. ®ei(^i(fte SRebe ^j" 
 
 52. Die Gartaeiin und die Biene . . . .^11 
 
Contents. . 
 
 Pago 
 
 53. SDte MBc gJoMe ... 211 
 
 54. Die Rache ... . . 212 
 
 55. ©elBfifiberwinbung .212 
 
 56. 3o, toenti tetn Sammerc.ertc^t toiire . . 212 
 
 57. SttoBtfd^e ©aflfreunbfc^aft .... 213 
 
 58. Schafers Sonntagslied 214 
 
 Graduated German and English Glossary . . . 215 
 
Phonetic Indroduetion. 
 
 (Master's Part.) 
 
German Spoken. 
 
 1. Organs of Speech. 
 
 1. Sounds are produced by the organs of speech making 
 some movements or articulation, by which the current of air 
 or breath, passing from the lungs through the glottis, as voice, 
 is modified on its way up to and out of the mouth. 
 
 2. When a continuous current of air passes through the 
 lungs it first enters the wind-pipe, thence it goes up to the 
 larynx, sets the vocal chords in it in vibration — the sound 
 of which is called 'voice' — and emerges through the narrowed 
 glottis, the outlet of the larynx. If the glottis is wide open, 
 the air passing through it not affecting the chords, we speak of 
 'breath' J and of 'whisper' if the chords are approximated, 
 but prevented from vibrating. The glottis is protected by the 
 epiglottis, which prevents food or drink from entering the 
 larynx instead of the gullet (the passage destined to take it 
 down into the stomach). 
 
 3. Having left the glottis, the current of air enters the 
 pharynx, which has two outlets: the one leads along its back 
 up to the cavity of the nose and more or less closing the 
 entrance to the cavity of the mouth by depressing the uvula 
 produces nasal sounds, (used especially in French loan-words)^ 
 the other passes through underneath the movable soft palate 
 with the uvula into the cavity of the mouth with the ton- 
 gue, the lips, and the movable lower jaw. These latter are 
 instrumental in producing pure sounds by the cavity of the 
 nose being shut up by the soft palate, whereupon the current 
 of air is brought up straight into the mouth. All these human 
 parts are called organs of speech. 
 
 4. The distinctive character of a sound depends on the 
 
Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 narrow (convex) or wide (flat) position of the tongue, and on 
 the narrow or wide opening (angle) of the lips. The opening 
 of the lower jaw is a great help to pronunciation, but not in- 
 dispensable, as most sounds can be formed without our using it. 
 
 Note. The difference of pronunciation in English and German is mainly due 
 to the different mode of articulation, particularly to the different position 
 and shape of tongue and lips. Thus, the round labial sounds are formed 
 ill the same determined way both in English and German, but in English 
 without protruding the lips. These are in German pronunciation more freely 
 used, thereby giving a vowel, for instance, a pure and distinct sound instead 
 of the low sound in English. 
 
 2. Pronunciation of Vowels. 
 
 (i.) Division of Vowels. 
 
 5. Vowels (Vokale) are voice-sounds modified by the 
 varying shape of the cavity of the mouth, their natural resonance- 
 chamber, chiefly caused by the varying position and shape of 
 the tongue. According to their place of articulation there are 
 
 (a) guttural or back vowels, their place of articulation lying 
 farthest back: the rounded u and o, and the not rounded a; 
 
 (b) palatal or front vowels, their place of articulation being 
 the front part of the mouth: e, i, — and further the modified 
 vowels 6, and ii, pronounced with protruded and rounded lips. 
 
 The English vowel-sound nearest resembling the German 6 
 is expressed by u in fur, e in her. or i in bird, and is (c) a 
 guttural-palatal or mixed vowel-sound, formed midways 
 between the back and front. It is somewhat represented by 
 German unaccented e (a) in prefixes and suffixes, the only mixed 
 vowel in German, (as in ®abe); it is, however, pronounced with 
 a higher position of the tongue than in English. 
 
 6. The above u, o, a; e, i; 6, and ii are pure and simple 
 
 vowels in German; ai, au, and oi are the only diphthongal 
 
 sounds, the first vowel predominating, however, over the second, 
 
 i u i 
 as-a , a , o . 
 
 Note I. The voiceless aspirate h is sounded when initial before 
 vowels, and when medial before an accented (strong, or semi-strong vowel, 
 as — l^abcn, gotten, att'ijoben, 3ln=^att. Otherwise it is mute, as in gc-ften, 
 wahren, ehe, also after t, as t^un, j£^at. 
 
 Note 2. In German most initial vowels of a word even of the second 
 components in compounds are in pronunciation preceded by a kind of 
 
Pronunciation of Vowels. 
 
 glottal check or stop (') which prevents the vowel from being slurred over 
 to the preceding sound, as — geierabeilb — faier'abent, not faierabent; 
 tntt^eiteit = mlt'ailen 'run in company of (with)' as distinguished from mit« 
 tciten, mitailen. This glottal stop may be heard by pronouncing Mad ocks 
 and mad 'ox (with glottal stop before o.) This glottal stop is, however, 
 generally omitted in singing, and frequently in speech when initial vowel 
 is preceded by an unaccented vowel. 
 
 (2.) Simple Vowel-Sounds. 
 
 7. If we place the front part of the tongue close to the 
 upper part of the lower teeth, raise the flat but a little rounded 
 tongue up to the hard palate and allow the outgoing voice just 
 enough space to pass through the passage (between the hard 
 palate and the tongue) with its narrowest point (place of arti- 
 allation) quite in the front part of the mouth, we obtain: — 
 
 long i, a close high-front-narrow vowel | °g| J^^^}^ 
 
 It is spelled: i, ie, ih, ieh: Mr, t^n, fie^, 9Ste^. If we somewhat 
 widen the above passage by lowering the tongue and retracting 
 its front part from the teeth, but maintaining the place of arti- 
 culation at the above point of the tongue, we obtain: — 
 
 short i, an open high-front-wide vowel | l^^^ -^ /^^n 
 
 It is spelled: i, ie, y: mit, oierje^n. ®^mnaft. 
 
 Pronouncing these two vowels with rounded lips (as is done 
 
 when sounding the guttural u and o, we obtain respectively : — 
 long ij a close high-front-narrow-round 1 not occur- 
 vowel and short ii, an open high-front- | ring in 
 wide-round vowel: J English. 
 
 They are spelled: ii, iih, ue (in French loan-words) when long; 
 
 and ii, y (in Greek loan-words) when short: (Sit^tie, fil^n, iibix; 
 
 ®iiiibe, fctiil^en, W&^t, §utte. 
 
 8. By changing and drawing back a little the narrowest 
 
 point (place of articulation) i. e. the highest raising of the tongue 
 
 in front, we pass from the i-sounds on to the e-sounds. Thus, 
 
 it is the i-position of the tongue with its highest raising or place 
 
 of articulation lying a little further back in the front part of 
 
 the mouth. We obtain in the same way as marked before: — 
 
 . , - . , f English e 
 
 long e, a close mid-front-narrow vowel j (in gre(y) 
 
 It is spelled: e, ee, eh: reben, m^, Sect, SKeer, get); and 
 
6 Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 short accented e, long e (before i English: short e (in 
 b and rd), and long or short a, J get) or lang a in 
 a mid-front-wide-vowel: I care. 
 
 It is spelled: e, a, ah:: §eft, ^eften, @rbe, e&en, werbcn, ^Snbe, 
 iiia^en, jaen. 
 
 By pronouncing these two vowels with rounded and pro- 
 truded lips, we get respectively: — 
 
 long 6, a close mid-front-narrow- j nearest Engl, i 
 , round vowel: j (in bird). 
 
 ^^ short 6, an open mid-front-wide- j nearest Engl, e 
 round vowel: [ (in her). 
 
 They are spelled: 6, oh, eu (in French loan-words), when long; 
 6, when short: ©iJ^ne, l^Bren, |)(5^te, 3tbteu; ©tiJdEe, SBde, ®8tter. 
 If we further draw back the place of articulation and lower the 
 tongue from the position it holds when pronouncing short 6, 
 we obtain: — 
 
 unaccented e (a), a mid-mixed vowel I ,. °^^L ^ 
 ^' [ (m butter). 
 
 It generally occurs in prefixes and suffixes, as — ©efal^r, be= 
 
 fonberS, ©c^neiber, ©ruber. 
 
 Note. The corresponding English mixed vowels, e in her, i in bird, 
 u in far, bum, are formed by again drawing back the place of articulation 
 and fiirther depressing the tongue as frequently indicated by lowering the 
 movable (lower) jaw. 
 
 9. By further drawing back and lowering a little the highest 
 raising of the tongue, the place of articulation is made to re- 
 treat from the middle somewhat back, and we pass on to the 
 pure a-position: — 
 
 long or short, a, a low-back-wide vowel | English a 
 
 [ (m far). 
 It is spelled a, aa, ah and has only this sound which, in Eng- 
 land, is often called Italian a. German a never approaches the 
 other English sounds of a in hat, man, warm, hall, case, 
 care, nor the u-sound in but whose place of articulation lies 
 further back towards the soft palate: 
 
 (Sage, ^oar, Slfincn, frogen; §anb, was, Oarten. 
 
 Note. In saying that the opening (angle) of the jaws is not exactly 
 necessary in forming vowels, it must be owned that it is, however, of great 
 help in clearly bringing out a sound, and according to our accustomed way of 
 speaking, it is a useful criterion of sound-regression and sound-progression. 
 Thus, though the gradual series — i — e — a — a can, no doubt, be pro- 
 
Pronunciation of Vowels. 
 
 nounced if we place a pen.cil between our teeth and close them, we are 
 yet in the habit of gradually widening the angle formed by moving the 
 lower jaw when passing from i to ». 
 
 10. Whilst the climax of articulating points when passing 
 from i to e, and further to a, is retreating and lowering, there 
 is a reverse climax noticeable when passing again up from a to 
 o, and further to u, which externally and according to our 
 accustomed way of speech, may be observed by gradually clos- 
 ing again the jaws and at the same time narrowing the opening 
 of the lips which are wide open when pronouncing a, until they 
 reach the smallest opening which is naturally rounded. 
 
 A similar process of climax or gradual rising takes place 
 at the back of the mouth, as the low place of articulation main- 
 tained by the a-position gradually rises towards the soft palate 
 first from a to open o and then to close o, which form the 
 centre of the climax, and hence to the highest place when 
 sounding first the high-back open u, and further the high-back 
 close u. 
 
 Note. Another climax can at the same time be observed with 
 reference to the lips. They are wide open when pronouncing a, and as 
 we pass on to the o-sound and u-sound the lips gradually close, first when 
 pronouncing English o in note, then more so, in a naturally rounded form, 
 when sounding German u, (in fo), until they reach their smallest rounded 
 opening in sounding German u (in bu). 
 
 We have thus obtained the following vowel- sounds: 
 
 1. Long close o, a mid-back-narrow- f English o 
 round vowel [ (close) 
 
 It is spelled: o, oo, oh: fo, Di)x, oor, ^^or, SSoot, ro^. 
 
 2. Short open o, a mid -back -wide- f English o 
 round vowel { (not) 
 
 @to(f, ob, S3(o(f. 
 
 Note. It is also spelt au (in words from the French), as — @auce, 
 ow (in some proper nouns), as — @u^!oh), SBorfefoln; eau (in French loan- 
 words), as — !)3lateou; ow (in English loan-words, as-S3ott)Ie; and oe (in 
 Low German proper names, as-©oeft, 
 
 3. Long close u, a high-back-narrow- f English 00 
 round vowel \ (in pool) 
 
 It is spelt: u, uh: bu, Su^, 9?u]|, SEuten. 
 
 4. Short open u, a high-back-wide- f English u 
 round vowel \ (in full) 
 
 !urj, tunft, unfa, SBunber. 
 
g Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 Note I. It is also spelt OU in a few words borrowed from the 
 French, as — Sout. 
 
 Note 2. Modification or Umlaut is the change of a (and aa) into a, o 
 (and 00) into 6, U into ii, au into au, and was due to the influence of i in the 
 following syllable which has now become unaccented e (a). Thus, although 
 we classed the modified vowels with the sounds to which they are nearest 
 related, the above origin should be clearly remembered. 
 
 (3.) Compound Vowel-Sounds or Diphthongs. 
 
 II. If two different vowel-sounds are compounded with one 
 another the former predominating over the following one, they 
 are called diphthongs or compound vowels. 
 
 The following diphthongs only are now used: — 
 
 a 4-i = ai 
 
 It is spelt: ai, ei, ay, ey: §ain, SRetS, mein, §et)ne, 
 33oiern, §at)bn. 
 
 It is the vowel a in 'father' followed by a short 
 i-sound which often approaches the mixed e-sounds, thus — 
 
 a or a , similar to i in 'shrine'. 
 
 If the a-sound is connected with u, we obtain another 
 diphthong; it is: — 
 
 a-|-u = au. I 
 
 It corresponds to English ou in proud, and is invariably 
 spelt au: ^au8, (aufen, faufen, barauf. 
 
 If we connect the vowel-sound o with i we get the third 
 diphthong used in modem German: — 
 
 o -|- i = oi 
 
 It may be noticed that frequently a mixed e-sound, or. 
 owing to the rounding of the lips (when sounding o), an ii-sound 
 is substituted for the customary i-sound. 
 
 It is spelt: oi, eu, and au: SBoimobe, ^cute, Seutc, ^ijuiev, 
 9Baufe, 8eutnont (also spelled gteutenant). 
 
 Note. German ie is a simple vowel, being another spelling for long i 
 
 (cf. English ie in field), as — Stener, 93iene. 
 
Pronunciation of Vowels. 
 
 Table of German Simple Vowel-Sounds. 
 
 
 German : 
 
 English: 
 
 •a 
 c 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 (A 
 
 1 
 
 Long close i: i^n, SSic^, bit 
 Short open i: mtt, Sitte, StjUnber 
 
 Long close u: ta^n, Sii^ne, TlM)i 
 Short open u: Sftrger, ^iltte, pfle 
 
 eel, peal, facile 
 
 bit, lid, brick 
 1 The former two vow- 
 \ els pronounced with 
 J rounded lips. 
 
 M 
 
 ■a 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 Ul 
 
 Long close e: SSe^, 33eet, §ecr 
 Long or short open e: @rbe, werbcn, 
 
 §)anbe 
 Long close 6: ©b^ne, ftb^nen 
 Short open 6: grbfi^e, ©btter 
 
 case, gre[y], ma[y] 
 
 |bear, there, hence 
 
 bird 
 
 flirt, her, fur 
 
 •S 
 
 c 
 
 3 
 O 
 
 < 
 
 Long a: aSatcr, ®abti, §aar 
 Short a: ©orten, gel^obt 
 
 father, farm, far 
 not-used in English 
 
 ■o 
 c 
 
 3 
 O 
 
 ■ 
 
 Long close o: ®o^n, ^^or, rol^ 
 Short open o: ©tod, Sotf 
 
 close, no, so 
 not, got, block 
 
 ■ <o 
 
 •a 
 c 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 Long close u: 9?u^, bu, Sul^ 
 Short open u: Suube, munb 
 
 pool, Hindoo, rude 
 full, hook, book 
 
 CD 
 
 Always short e: ©ttnbe, Oebtrge 
 
 ashamed, evasive 
 
 Table of Diphthongs. 
 
 
 German: 
 
 English : 
 
 «+i 
 
 geier, Saier, £otfer, retd) 
 
 rise, height, wire 
 
 a-\-tt 
 
 §au8, ©c^taucf), a)?au§ 
 
 house, mouse, fowl. 
 
 o+i 
 
 l^eute, SJJeute, (Sugen, fdumcn 
 
 coin, toil, boil 
 
10 Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 Note I. It should never be forgotten that the German vowel-sounds 
 are simple and not diphthongal, and that, consequently, in the correspon- 
 ding English examples the customary second vowel sound (cf. o in no ^ 
 
 no ) should be disregarded in German pronunciation. 
 
 Note 2. Nasal sounds are formed by depressing the soft palate with 
 the uvula, and thus allow of the resonance-chamber of the nose being used 
 besides the mouth. They are frequent in words of French origin, as — 
 Stance, 33affin, Cuft^ballon, SJiioncc. 
 
 3. Pronuneiation of Consonants, 
 
 (i) Division of Consonants. 
 
 12. Consonants (Sonfonatltett) are voice -checks or 
 speech -sounds. They are produced by entirely stopping, or 
 squeezing the outgoing current of breath, chieily by means of 
 the tongue and the Ups. 
 
 (a.) If the passing current of breath is completely stopped 
 the sounds produced are called explosives (also shut, or mutes, 
 5yerfd)Iu|Iaute): 
 
 p, t, k: they are voiceless (ftimmtoS) as the vocal chords 
 are not vibrated when they are sounded. 
 
 b, d, g: they are voiced (fttmtn^aft) as the vocal chords 
 are vibrating when they are sounded. 
 
 By g we understood the sound corresponding to g in 'go'. 
 
 (b.) If the passing current of breath is only squeezed or 
 partially stopped on its way out, so that it may escape through 
 the nostrils or rubbing past the tongue, the sounds produced 
 are called fricatives (9tcibelaute) or spirants (also open, or 
 continuous): 
 
 ch (in ai) and id); s (ss in fo|); sch (in STofrfie; f infoft): 
 
 voiceless. 
 
 g or j (in ©oge, Sffitcge, jo, je), s (s in fa^); g and j fm 
 French loan words); w (in JBetn): voiced. 
 
 (c.) To these latter sounds are to be added the voiced 
 nasal sounds: m, n, and ng (in 3unge), when the breath 
 stopped in the mouth escapes through the nose; and the liquids 
 (or semi-consonants): I and r. 
 
 13. If we arrange the various speech-sounds according to 
 the place of articulation and the different organs of 
 speech instrumental in producing these sounds, they will be 
 divided into the following classes: — 
 
Pronunciation of Consonants. 
 
 11 
 
 c. palatal (or front) consonants: 
 
 d. guttural (or back) consonants: 
 
 a. labial (or lip) consonants: p, fa; and the labio-dentals: 
 f and w. 
 
 b. dental (or tooth) consonants: t, d; s (voiceless and voi- 
 ced); sch (voiceless), g and j (voiced in French loan words); 
 trilled voiced r (point-tongue); and voiced I. 
 
 voiceless: oh (in id)); or 
 final g (in lieg). 
 voiced: j (ja, aJJajor); or 
 medial g (ticge). 
 
 I voiceless: k (®ebanfc); 
 oh [adj), or final g (in S^ag); 
 voiced: initial g (gut) and 
 ng (tang); medial g (Stage). 
 
 Note I. By aspirates we now understand one of the explosives 
 (or mutes, SSerfct)lu6faUte) followed by the breathing sound, (§au(^, 
 aspirate), as p-|-h ; by affricates we understand one of the explosives 
 followed by one of the spirants (©piratiten, 9iet6elaute) as p-)-f. 
 
 Table of German Consonant-Sounds. 
 
 Explosives 
 
 Spirants 
 
 Labial p 
 
 b 
 
 f 
 
 w 
 
 Dental t 
 
 d 
 
 s 
 sch 
 
 s 
 
 (French) g or j 
 
 Pal. Guttural 
 k 
 
 (German) g 
 (in go) 
 
 ch 
 
 (German) g or j 
 
 Voiceless 
 
 Voiced 
 
 Voicel 
 
 ess Voiced. 
 
 (2) Simple Consonant-Sounds. 
 A. Explosives, or stopped consonants. 
 
 14. They include the following voiceless and voiced sounds: 
 
 The labials p and b. They are sounded by pressing 
 
 the breath or air, compressed behind the lips, through the latter 
 
 by more or less force, thus causing some kind of speech-explosion. 
 
\2 Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 The dentals t and d. They are formed by slightly pres- 
 sing the point of the tongue to the upper teeth, thus stopping 
 the breath, and then more or less forcibly ejecting it by remo- 
 ving the tongue-point. 
 
 The guttural k and initial g. These are produced by 
 compressing and stopping the air or breath in the mouth by 
 raising the back of the tongue to the palate and then forcibly 
 ejecting the breath by removing this stoppage. 
 
 Note I. There are in German no voiced final consonants (except the 
 liquids); final b and final d should therefore always — even in compounds 
 — be pronounced voiceless, i. c like p andt; as-ab (= ap), afitegcn (=ap- 
 leggn); Sailb (= lant), ganbjira^e (= lantstrasa). 
 
 Note 2. The gutturals g and k must be sounded before n, as — ®iiobe 
 mercy; Snte, knee. 
 
 B. Fricative (or continuant) consonants or spirants. 
 
 15. They comprise the following sounds: 
 (1.) The labials f and w. 
 
 Their formation is labio -dental, the chief organs in pro- 
 ducing these sounds being the upper teeth pressed against the 
 lower lip, through the narrow opening of which the breath is 
 ejected. We distinguish again voiceless f, and voiced w 
 (English v); as faft, vufcn, loufen, ©affen; wcr, tto, ttarunt, be» 
 Joetnen, ©eitiittcv. 
 
 Note. The narrow opening through which the breath escapes is often 
 formed, in sounding w, by pressing the upper lip against the lower lip; its 
 formation is then no longer labio-dental but bilabial, 
 
 (2.) The dentals s; and sch. 
 
 (a.) By forming a kind of channel along the surface of the 
 tongue raised up to the back of the upper teeth, and ejecting 
 the breath along this channel through the small opening 
 between the upper and lower teeth, so as to cause a friction by 
 the breath hitting the upper teeth, we produce the voiceless 
 sound s (in 8aft, 8uft, taffen, SBaffer, miiffen, ntu|, gu^), Eng- 
 lish s in 'listen', 'say'; if we produce the same sound but flat and 
 voiced, we obtain voiced s (in fogen, ^a.ai, tafen, JKofa, fo) 
 English z in 'zeal'. 
 
 Note I. We thus find the voiced s, in German, only when initial 
 before a vowel (as ©ajjp), betwen vowels (SRofe), or between a liquid and 
 a vowel (jjvanfe); otherwise German s is voiceless §au3, §au§(i)en, %a,^, 
 bag, 9Jaffe). 
 
Pronunciation of Consonants. 13 
 
 Note 2. Initial s (also after prefixes) before p and t is sounded 
 sch + p, sch + t, as ftanb, ©tabt, ©jirocJ^e, SSerftanb, 3}er|t)tccl)eu. 
 Voiced s is spelled: s. 
 Voiceless s is spelled: s, (final) 8, ss, g (= final ss). 
 
 (b.) By producing the s-sound but broader and with 
 protruded Ups, the ejected breath hitting both the upper and 
 the lower teeth, we obtain the voiceless sibilant sch (English 
 sh). It seems that sch generally speaking, stands in the same 
 relationship to s, as ii does to i. 
 
 The sch is much modified by the articulation of the pre- 
 ceding (or even the following) vowel, and may be back-dental 
 (JBujd), rafl^), mixed-dental (l(jjd)en), or front-dental (Wtfc^en, 
 ©ifc^t). 
 
 The same sound pronounced flat and voiced is unknown 
 in German, except in some loan-words from the French, re- 
 presented by g and j (corresponding to English voiced s in 
 pleasure), as in ©etlte, 8ogt8, Souvnat. 
 
 (3.) The palatal-gutturals, oh, g andj. We have to distinguish 
 between (a.) the palatal or front-continuant sounds, the 
 voiceless ch or g, when final in accented syllables (in idt), 
 mi^, vdd), rci(^en, Sd&^ix, greunb-dien, 3)iatna=(^en, ticg, bteg, 
 3etg»te, teg^te, <Sieg, fteg»te, ©erg, ^Bnig); i. e. after the front vowels: 
 e. i, 6, ii, au; after consonants: and in the diminutive suffix 
 chen; and including also the voiced spirant g after these vowels 
 or consonants, when it is initial in unaccented syllables (as — 
 He^gen, bie^gen, @te»ge, 93er»ge, Kont^ge = Koni-ya). The voiced 
 explosive may be substituted for voiced spirant. 
 
 and (b.) the guttural or back continuant sounds, the 
 voiceless ch or g when final in accented syllables (in ad^, 
 ffluc(), iod), Slag, fog, Bog, trug); i. e. after the back vowels: a, o, u, 
 au; including also the voiced spirant g after these vowels, when 
 initial in unaccented syllables (as — 5tagc, to=gen, bo«gen, 
 tru=^gen). The voiced explosive maybe substituted for voiced 
 spirant. 
 
 Note I. The back continuant sound (ad^^Saut) is formed between 
 the middle of the soft palate and the farthest end of the tongue by raising 
 its back as if going to pronounce English k in book; and the front con- 
 tinuant sound (i(!^«Saut) is articulated in the front part of the mouth bet- 
 ween the middle of the hard palate and the tongue, which is somewhat 
 raised as if going to pronounce English k in lick. 
 
 Note 2. Medial g (i. e. g between two vowels) may be pronounced 
 
14 Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 either as voiced explosive (S8erfct|lu§taut) , as in SRegeil (=re-g3«)> o'' ''■■• 
 voiced spirant, as in 5Regen (re-yan), both after front and and back 
 vowels. 
 
 C. The liquids I and r. 
 
 1 6. By raising the point of the tongue up to the gums of 
 the upper front teeth, the breath escapes on both sides of the 
 tongue, and we obtain voiceless I (as in fitnf, ^lage, ©c^Iag), 
 and voiced I (as in fatten, letbcn, Biel, SBogel). 
 
 Voiceless I occurs after a voiceless consonant only. 
 
 Note. In sounding German 1 the back (guttural part) of the tongue is 
 not raised, and differs in this from English 1 which is guttural. 
 
 17. The sound of r is double, it is either lingual, or 
 uvular (guttural). It may be produced by means of the point 
 of the tongue (3utigeil=r) which is raised towards the hard 
 palate and trilled under the influence of the outgoing breath; 
 or it may be formed by means of the back of the tongue, for- 
 ming a channel in which the uvula (3fi^)fcf)en=r) swings owing 
 to the influence of the outgoing breath. 
 
 They are voiceless after voiceless sonsonants and before 
 voiceless dentals (as in tragen, jd^retcn, breift, 3Birt); otherwise 
 they are voiced (as in Sfanb, breit, faffren, Srbe, SBurm). 
 
 D. The nasals m, n, and ng. 
 
 18. If, in producing sounds, the outgoing breath is stopped 
 in some part of the mouth and allowed to escape through the 
 nose, thus adding the resonance chamber of the nose to the 
 more or less closed resonance-chamber of the mouth, we obtain 
 nasal sounds or nasal consonants. We have, again, to distin- 
 guish here between labial m, when the voice is suddenly 
 stopped from escaping through the mouth by forcibly closing 
 the lips (bilabial as in sounding p and b); dental n, when the 
 point of the tongue, pressed to the upper teeth, stops the out- 
 going voice in the front part of the mouth, the opening of the 
 lips being in the same position as when sounding d or t; and 
 guttural ng formed near the middle of the soft palate. It only 
 occurs medial or final, and as n before k (as in English 
 'singer", but never as in 'fimger"): (3ungc, SJange, 35unger, Singer, 
 jung, lang, gtng; benfen, finfen, banten). 
 
German Accentuation. 15 
 
 M and n are voiceless after voiceless consonants only (as 
 in ©dimeicj, ®cf)neiber, Snabe). 
 
 Note I. It should be observed that the place of articulation where 
 the friction occurs producing the sound characteristic of I, »•, n, and ng, 
 varies, according to their being preceded by a front or a back vowelj 
 thus, the place where the friction occurs producing the sound ng, is different 
 in Jung and gittg, the former being influenced by the back vowel u, the 
 latter by the front vowel i. 
 
 Note 2. Frequently m is substituted for n before a labial consonant 
 (spoken filnif instead of fiinf), and in the ending, «en (as geben pronounced 
 gebm). 
 
 (3.) Compound Consonants-Sounds. 
 
 19. These occur as: t-|-s (spelled z, also tz), and 
 
 k-j-s ('spelled x, also gs and chs). 
 Pronounce the following words: 
 
 9?ei3, ©etj, iwax, jwtngen, S^t^d; frozen, SRt^c, Sifec, 
 
 aijt, ^eye, 3nbcf, Xerje«; Dc^fe, ©adifc, 8aii|«, ©ac^s, 
 aBod&8, 8ud^8; flugS. 
 
 20. Further: p4-f = (pf), k-j-w (qu), sch-|-p (initial root- 
 sp), sch-)-t (initial root-st). Pronounce: 
 
 «Pferb, ^fanb, ^funb; JRumpf, 5«a(3f, 9^a--pfe, ftam=)3fen, 
 far^^fcn, 3;riim=i3fe. (Initial pf often sounds like f in 
 Northern Germany). 
 
 Oua{, Ouettc, Ouatm, Ouar!, Quartier, Outttung. 
 ©pra^e, f^jrei^en, fparen, tjcr^fijred^en, Ber^^jottcn. 
 ©tobt, ftanb, otronb, ©e^ftabc, oer=fte^en. 
 But: roftcn (ros-ten), 5Dre«ben, JRaft, gaften, SDBeS^e, §o8<3ct, 
 SBiS^jet, iDtg^jern. 
 
 Note. The nz (and no) in French loan words (as Sgtonje, Sconce) 
 sounds like ng-j-s (voiceless); and z after a vowel in French loan words is 
 generally sounded like voiced s, as in ~ 
 
 4. German Aeeentuation. 
 
 I. Quantity (Ouatttitat). 
 
 21. This treats of the long or short duration of sounds, 
 and may be said to consist of three degrees of length: long 
 sounds, (marked-, or doubled), half-long sounds, and 
 weak sounds; the two latter are not distingusihed in our pho- 
 netic transcriptions. 
 
Ig Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 Note. For practical purposes the above mentioned degrees of length 
 are sufficient; but it should be noticed that there is another degree of 
 length, double-long, for instance in monosyllabic words, such as Soot, 9'Jot, 
 tiat, 9tot, tot, which are decidedly longer than the same sounds in the 
 dissyllabic 58bte, yiott, baten, raten, tote. These double-long sounds are very 
 frequent in English, where all accented long vowels when final or followed 
 by a voiced consonant, are double-long, (but long only, when followed 
 by a voiceless consonant). 
 
 Compare the following double-long and long sounds: 
 peas: piece seed: seat 
 
 prize: price grade: grate 
 
 wade: wait sea: seaman 
 
 vague : wake. 
 
 22. Final vowels (except conversational no = nun (tDO^t) 
 'well', and unaccented final e (a)) are long in German, as — 
 \o, ba (there) which is sometimes shortened, Wte (how), tt)0 (where), 
 bu (thou, you); also ei in dissyllabic words, as — SSraiterei (brew- 
 -ery); and o in the termination -tion, as-S'iotion (nation); but 
 Soube, §arfc, ^afe, @mitt»e. 
 
 23. Vowels, followed by two or more consonants, 
 are short, as — §anna, Saften, Sonne, burcl), fjacEe, %aU, but 
 8abcn, §)a!cn, Sol^n, §o&n, na^m, fa^t, the h before these con- 
 sonants being merely the sign of the length of the preceding 
 vowel (35et)nun9S^ci(f)en), which, however, is always simple (and 
 not diphthongal as in English). 
 
 24. Whilst in English final consonants of stressed 
 .syllables are short after a long vowel (gate — ■ gaat), and 
 long after a short vowel (get — gett), in German all final 
 consonants (even the voiced liquids, 1, m, n, r) are short, and 
 (except the Hquids) voiceless; as — §anb (hand) = hant; 
 ^oU = fal, aBa^n (fancy) = van; 
 
 Note. It should be observed that the length 9f a final voiced con- 
 .sonant following a short vowel is often equally shared both by vowel and 
 consonant, as — had, bad, round. Unstressed syllables, however, are mostly 
 short. 
 
 25. Frequently long consonants occur in compound 
 words, or in speech, when the first component ends in the 
 flame voiceless consonant which begins the second component, as : 
 
 2Banb=tofct (blackboard) — want^fel 
 iDort'treit (true to one's word) — wdrtroi. 
 If a voiceless consonant in a compound word is followed 
 by its corresponding voiced equivalent, as t-|-d, p-|-b, or s (= g) 
 
German Accentuation. 17 
 
 -j-s (=: z in zeal) the voiced consonant (except in stressed 
 syllables) is dropped in pronunciation, and the voiceless con- 
 sonant lengthened, as: 
 ab = (ap)-|-6ei|cn (bite off) = ap^isen 
 aug+je'^CH (look) = auseen 
 
 bij't bu gcfommen = bistu gekomen 
 
 but bift bu gefommen = bistii gekdmen or bisdii gekomen 
 
 (not unfrequently the voiceless consonant of two successive but 
 independent words is dropped). 
 
 Note. If a voiced consonant in such a compound word is dropped or 
 two voiceless consonants are lengthened into a long one, the following 
 vowel is not preceded by the glottal stop. The latter is, however, generally 
 audible (except perhaps in rapid speech) if the second word begins with a 
 vowel. This will be seen from the following pronunciation: 
 
 llttt-|-tet(ett (communicate to) mi'tailen 
 
 jnit-j-cilctt (hurry with, accompany) mi't'ailen 
 
 mit bit (with you) mi'tir 
 
 Jtttt ijr (with her) mi't'Ir. 
 
 26. Frequently the sound pf (whether initial or not) and 
 nz (=nts) are reduced in quantity to f and ns, as: 
 
 Satnpf (steam) = damf (or damp-j-f) 
 5|5fab (path) = fat (or p-f fat) 
 ganj (quite) = gans (or gant-f s). 
 This reduction generally takes place if the above sounds 
 are followed by another consonant-sound, as: 
 
 ©am^f=fe[fel (steam-kettle) = damfkfesel. 
 
 n. Accent or Stress (S^Otlftarle). 
 
 27. By stress or accent we understand the emphasis 
 with which one word, or syllable of a word, is more distin- 
 guished than the others. If we speak of single words we have 
 to consider word-accent; if we speak of words connected in 
 a sentence, we speak of sentence-accent (or speech-accent). 
 
 (i.) Word-Accent (SBotrtetonuttg). 
 
 28. According to the varying degree of emphasis or in- 
 spiratory force with which we pronounce words independent 01 
 one another, we can destinguish three different accents : strong, 
 half-strong, and weak. The strong accent is marked ('), the 
 half-accent ('), and the weak accent is not indicated. 
 
 If two or more syllables of a compound word or so many 
 
18 Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 words of a sentence have equal accent or stress, i. e. are pro- 
 nounced each with the same expiratory force, we speak of 
 level accent. This is especially the case if the first word of 
 a compound comprises a meaning to which the second word is 
 compared (cf. the first attributive component in an English com- 
 pound, such as Evening-stir), as: 
 
 fteinretrf) (very rich) shtiinraich (level stress) 
 
 ftein^reid^ (rich in stones) shtainr^ich (different stress) 
 further bttter^tott (very cold) bitarkalt (level stress) 
 
 bitter^bbfe (inimical) bitarbo'ze „ „ 
 
 maufC'tOt (stone-dead) miuzatdt „ „ 
 lft6)']d)toaXi (pitch dark) pechshvdrts „ „ 
 
 29. Unless stress is, for special reasons, laid on mono- 
 syllabic particles, they are unaccented, as — sehr wohl 
 (very well), gar leicht (very easily). Prepositions generally are 
 imaccented; but with personal pronouns they take a strong 
 accent imless special stress is laid on the pronoun, as: 
 
 bet feinem 25ater (with his father) = bai zainem fater; 
 but bei il^ttt (with him) = bai im; 
 
 bet i^ltt (with him [and with no one else]) =:r bai i'm. 
 
 If the preposition governing a personal pronoun is, however, 
 immediately preceded by a strong accented syllable both the 
 preposition and its case remain almost unaccented, as: 
 ic^ {dirt'eb an tl)n (I wrote to him). 
 
 30. Monosyllabic adjectives, adverbs, and nouns 
 usually take the strong accent, as: 
 
 att, tto^I, gut, §aue, ©tod. 
 
 31. Dissyllabic words generally take the strong accent 
 on the root, as, ne^mcn (take) = nemen; l^olen (fetch) = hdbn. 
 Except bo8 8ebe«, but lebenbtg (alive) = bbendig; 
 
 IDO^r^Oft but Wa^rl^aftig (truly) = warhdftich; 
 Sutler but lutl^erijc^ (Lutheran) := luterish 
 
 Note. The final syllables ei, ie (in Greek loan words) and on (in 
 tion) always have the strong accent, as: 
 
 Sraderei' (printing-house); SSSderet (bakehouse); 
 SP^ilofoJJ^i'e (philosophy); g^eijlte (chemistry); 
 SJJatib'n (nation). 
 
 32. The root syllable of the first component in a com- 
 pound word generally has the strong accent, the root-syllable 
 of the second component a half-accent; but if the two com- 
 
German Accentuation. J 9 
 
 ponents are monosyllabic, the second usually has a weak accent 
 only; as: 
 
 S3erg=gi^)fel (mountain-top; 9I6f(^teb8=feft (farewell dinner) 
 ^otijet'be^iSrbc fpolice-magistrate) ; 
 Sanbsinann (country-man, farmer); 
 8anb=gut (farm). 
 
 33. All the inseparable prefixes of compound verbs 
 are unaccented, also with nouns and adjectives, as — 6c, ge, 
 emp, cut, er, Ber, jcr, etc., and £)intcr, and tuibev, if compounded 
 with a verbal noun ending in iittg or tt} as: 
 
 toer^j'te^cn (understand) : 25erftanb (understanding); 
 iiber»fe^en (translate) : liberfe^ung (translation); 
 um=armen (embrace) : Umarmung (embrace); 
 »Btber4egen (refute) : SDBtberte'gung (refutation); 
 l^tnteti^brtngen (inform) : ^interbri'ngung (information) 
 ^tnterbri'nger (informer); 
 but n)tber»fte^en (resist) : Sffit'berftanb (resistance); 
 
 ^inter^Iiften (cheat) : ^i'nterlift (cheat, cunning); 
 also iji'ntiX-'XMS (from behind). 
 
 The prefixes Utt^', ant', and ttt= (the two latter of derivative 
 words) always have the strong accent, as: 
 mil'fti'ninen (put in an ill humour) : SWi^fttntmung (ill-humour) 
 mi|4rauen (mistrust) : SlWigtrauen (distrust) 
 
 inti=tretcn (shimble) : 3Wi|trttt (false step) 
 
 antoorten (answer) : SlnttBOrt (answer) 
 
 UrteUcn (judge) : Urtett (judgment); 
 
 34. All the separable prefixes of compound verbs, (and of 
 nouns and adjectives compounded with these prefixes) have the 
 strong accent; as: 
 
 awS-f-gel^en (go out) : SluSgang (way out) 
 
 ab-j-tcgen (lay ofif) : Slbleger (layer), Iblegung (rendering); 
 
 iibcr-^-Iaufen (desert) : flberlfiufer (deserter) 
 
 fort-j-gelen (go away) : gottgang (departure, continuation)- 
 
 35. If the root-syllable of the second component of a 
 compound word has the half-accent, the latter is weakened 
 if a third component is added, which then takes the half- 
 accent; as: 
 
 SIpfetmetn (cider), but 9lpfcf=tt)etn»fd)(it(I (draught), 
 gru£)tin9S4ieb (spring-song) griif)fingg4ieb§=tDetfe (tune) 
 
go Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 (2.) Sentence-Accent or Speech-Accent (©o^Setonung). 
 
 36. Frequently the above rules referring .to separate words 
 are set aside in speech, and stress is laid on any word or 
 syllable of a word the speaker wishes to emphasize. Thus the 
 flexible speech-accent is often quite different from the steady 
 word-accent, according to the idea and meaning of a. word to 
 be clearly brought out. It may be laid on any word- of a 
 sentence which, according to the different accent, expresses 
 different meanings. 
 
 This will be seen from the following sentences: 
 jDtttft in mit wir gel^en? will you go with me? 
 i) vilstu mi't mir gean? (merely) will you go with me? 
 
 2) vi'lstu mit mir gean? (will you come or not?) 
 
 3) vilstu mit mir gean? Cwill you [instead of someone else] come?) 
 
 4) vilstu mit mi'r gean? (will you come with me [instead of 
 
 going with some one else]) 
 
 5) vilstu mit mir g^an? (will you walk [instead of driving, etc.] 
 
 with me?) 
 
 6) ttir ttwren gattj auf^tt un§ C')' ^^ ws'f^ l^i^e beside ourselves, 
 but au^et un§ C"") tear utentanb ia, there was nobody 
 
 present besides ourselves. 
 
 7) er fa| untcr un8 C^""), be sat below us; 
 
 e8 bieifit unter unS ("" ), it remains between ourselves 
 
 (entre nous). 
 Thus, by emphaszing any special word in a sentence, its 
 meaning is constantly changed. 
 
 37. Of great importance, in this respect, is the use of the 
 particles, (such as — bod), no(^, UJOl^t, fd^on, gar) which, 
 according to being accented or unaccented often imply quite 
 opposite meanings; as: 
 
 ^u {ommft boii^: 
 
 i) du komstoch? (I hope you will come?): Question expressing 
 
 certainty. 
 2) du komst6ch? (You really come after all?): Question expressing 
 
 astonishment. 
 The difference of meaning is rendered all the more varied, 
 as these particles are connected with each other and with the 
 negation nicht; as: 
 
 i) du komstoch nicht? (I hope you will not come?) 
 2) du komstoch noch nicht? (I hope you will not yet come?j 
 
German Accentuation. 21 
 
 3) du komstoch nicht sh6n? (to be sure you won't come yet?) 
 Further X)u fommft bod) wol^t? 5Du fommft bo(f) wo^t nttfit? 
 S)u fommft bod) mol^t jd^on? etc. 
 
 ni. Pitch, Modulation, or Tonic Accent (^onP^e). 
 
 38. Voice-sounds naturally have a certain pitch or modu- 
 lation, according to their utterance in high tone, or deep tone. 
 If the voice dwells for some time on one note or keeps a 
 certain pitch, we speak of monotonous voice, but generally 
 speaking voice is constantly rising (crescendo), or falling 
 (decrescendo). In questions voice usually rises, and falls 
 in answers. 
 
 39. Of importance too is the duration of a sound, or of 
 an interval between different sounds, which may greatly influence 
 the meaning that is to be expressed; as: 
 
 jo? ja! (merely means: yes?) 
 
 ja^! (would imply: yes don't bother me by asking 
 
 again) 
 Wie? vi? (merely means: how?) 
 
 vi'i? (implies: what? you dare . . .?) 
 
 40. We may assume three different degrees of modulation: 
 l«vel (-), rising ('), and falling ('). 
 
 ®er gro^e Srieger fam, fiegtc uttb ftel. 
 
 The great warrior came, conquered, and fell. 
 
22 
 
 Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 p 
 
 >. Symbols used in 
 
 the phonetic transcriptions. 
 
 
 German letter: 
 
 repre- 
 sented 
 
 by 
 
 the 
 
 Phonetic symbol: 
 
 
 a (or aa, a^) 
 
 jj 
 
 )r 
 
 » 
 
 a (in arm) 
 
 
 e (or a, fi^) 
 
 )» 
 
 » 
 
 j» 
 
 e (in there) 
 
 
 e (or ee) 
 
 » 
 
 }j 
 
 » 
 
 e (in gre[y]) 
 
 
 e (especially in pref. 
 
 » 
 
 )) 
 
 » 
 
 9 (in brother) 
 
 m 
 
 and suffixes) 
 
 
 
 
 
 *-* 
 u 
 
 i (or ie; t^, »J) 
 
 J) 
 
 J» 
 
 )j 
 
 i (in mien) 
 
 ^ 
 
 (or 00, 0^) 
 
 )) 
 
 » 
 
 )j 
 
 (in note) 
 
 o 
 
 U (or ul^) 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 u (in sure) 
 
 > 
 
 i (or 15^) 
 
 ?? 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 6 (i in bird) 
 
 
 ft (or il^) 
 
 )) 
 
 »> 
 
 ») 
 
 ii (ee in keel)i 
 
 
 at (or a.% ei, et)) 
 
 ?» 
 
 )» 
 
 J? 
 
 ai (i mine) 
 
 
 au 
 
 J) 
 
 j» 
 
 » 
 
 au (ow in fowl) 
 
 
 ot (or ou, au) 
 
 jj 
 
 » 
 
 )) 
 
 oi (in coin) 
 
 
 ( (final and p 
 
 b ( „ and t (or t^) 
 
 j» 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 p (in snap) 
 
 
 V 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 t (in Kent or time) 
 
 
 f or t)) 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 V 
 
 f (in fur) 
 
 . 
 
 i in German words) 
 
 J) 
 
 » 
 
 >i 
 
 y (in yes) 
 
 +J 
 
 f^ O(i^-sound: back) 
 m (i^-sound: front) 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 ») 
 
 ohi do not occur in 
 chj Engl. (roDugcinlion 
 
 
 jj 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 a 
 
 ff^ (English sh) 
 
 » 
 
 ?j 
 
 » 
 
 sh (in share) 
 
 o 
 
 t/l 
 
 [g and \ (in French words] 
 
 )) 
 
 »} 
 
 » 
 
 j (= s in pleasure) 
 
 G 
 
 ng (or n before t) 
 
 » 
 
 jj 
 
 >' 
 
 ng (ng in sing) 
 
 o 
 
 f (voiced) 
 
 7) 
 
 M 
 
 » 
 
 z (in zeal) 
 
 U 
 
 g (or ff, g voiceless) 
 
 J) 
 
 )) 
 
 )) 
 
 s (in say) 
 
 
 to 
 
 )J 
 
 J7 
 
 »j 
 
 V (in vain) 
 
 
 I (or g«, c^«, c^O 
 
 ?) 
 
 J> 
 
 >j 
 
 X (k-j-s or X in axe) 
 
 
 S (01^ fe) 
 
 ?? 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 3 = t-|-s 
 
 
 strong accent is 
 
 » 
 
 M 
 
 }} 
 
 (') 
 
 en 
 
 half-strong accent is 
 
 »? 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 C) 
 
 bO 
 
 the glottal stop is 
 
 » 
 
 »J 
 
 » 
 
 (') 
 
 XJl 
 
 a long vowel is 
 
 J) 
 
 )J 
 
 » 
 
 (-) 
 
 
 a short vowel is 
 
 »J 
 
 )) 
 
 )' 
 
 n 
 
 Note. The other letters remain the same in the phonetic trajiscriptions. 
 ' It is English ee pronoimced with protruded and rounded lips. 
 
Phonetic Transcriptions. 23 
 
 6. Transcription of the German Poetic Passages of 
 the following lessons. 
 
 Note. These phonetic transcriptions are not intended for copying. 
 They should be read out aloud by the student till the German sounds are 
 completely mastered by him. 
 
 1. dor frtiling. 
 
 di vi'z9 grtint, der fo'gal baut, 
 dor kiikuk ruft, dar morgan taut. 
 
 2. (Continuation.) 
 
 das failchen bliit, di Le'rcha zingt, 
 
 der o'bstbaum prangt, dar frtiling winkt. 
 
 3. der zomer. 
 
 di zona brent, di ro'za blut, 
 di bona rankt, das vu'rmchan gltit, 
 di kirshe raift, di zenza klingt, 
 di garba rausht, dar zomar blinkt. 
 
 4. dar herbst. 
 
 das laup farve'lkt, di shvalba fli't, 
 dar lantman pMcht, das rep'-M'n ji't, 
 di trauba raift, di ke'ltar rint, 
 dar 'apfal lokt, dar he'rbst bagint. 
 
 5. dar vintar. 
 
 dar zang farshtumt, di axt ershalt, 
 das shne'felt glenjt, das valthom halt, 
 di flut ershtart, dar shne'bal fli'cht, 
 dar shlitshii' aUt, dar vintar zi'cht. 
 
 6. friilingsli't, 
 
 diliift ist blau, dasta'l 'istgru'n, 
 diklainan maianglokan bliin 
 
24 Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 untshluselblumen druntar; 
 darvi'zangruiit ist shonzobiint 
 Tintglenjetg'chlicli buntar. 
 
 7. morgenltt. 
 
 morgan' arwaclit, dasdTinkal'ontfli't. 
 golden'amhimal fi?ti'ro't argliit; 
 muntsrali'dar fulandiliift, 
 blumen ferbraiten K'blichendiiffc 
 zi'a, amgre's-chan glenjtzilbam dartau, 
 bi'nan durchji'sn suinant di'au. 
 
 8. didinershaft. 
 
 ichha'be guta di'narsliaft, 
 diknechta haisan: se'lbstgashaffc 
 untshpe'tjubet unt'aufbai^ait, 
 dime'cMa ordnung, raiidichkait; 
 diirst, Mngar haisan shengkuntkoch; 
 hab 'auchjvai 'e'dalkna'benoch, 
 ganS,ntgabe't untgutgavisan. 
 
 9. vintarsnaan. 
 
 darhe'rbst gitbrauzant durchfe'ltuntvalt, 
 darg'ganraushat, darvint vetkalt, 
 dishvalban jo'ganfondanan; 
 dishtoVcha ailtanvait'iibardasme 'r : 
 davartas'imlanda'6'd'unt le'r, 
 untitraurigenta'ga baganan. 
 
 10. jvaipa'ra unt'ainar. 
 
 1. duhastjvai 'o'ran unt'ainan miint; 
 vilstusbakla'gan ? 
 garfi'les solstuho'ran unt 
 ve'nich draufza'gan. 
 
Phonetic Transcriptions. 25 
 
 2. duliastjvaihe'nda unt'ainan miint; 
 le'mos'errae'sen ! 
 gvai sinta jur' arbait, unt 
 'ainer gum'e'sen. 
 
 11. ru'a. 
 
 1. di'a'bentglokan loitan 
 d8nmud8nta'cli juru. 
 diblu'mgn aufderhaidan 
 tunsUeMcli di'augenju*. 
 
 2. dishifa run'imhafan, 
 kaineve'la re'chtsichme'r: 
 soge''auchdu' nunshlafen, 
 untbangeniciit zoze'r. 
 
 12. dasbro't. 
 
 derbauor baut initmii"untno't 
 daskom fur'unzartechliclibro't; 
 zummubr wirtaskorn gebracht 
 untfainesbro't darausgamacht; 
 darbe'ker nimtasmi'l instaus 
 untbektim'o'fen mS'ldaraus; 
 dimutar straichtnochbuterdrauf 
 untwi'r, vir'esen'ales'auf. 
 
 '■} 
 
 Appendix. 
 
 8. Division of Words into Syllables. 
 
 (i.) German words are divided into syllables according to 
 pronunciation, not in accordance with etymology or derivation (as 
 ■ in English) J thus grammatical terminations are not separated; as ; — 
 lieben: Iie=ben, not Iieb--en (love) 
 enbung: ©n^bung, „ @nb=ung (end-ing) 
 fle^enb; ge^enb, „ gc£)=cnb (go-ing). 
 
26 Phonetic Introduction. 
 
 (2.) Only compound words are divided according to the 
 different components of a word, not according to their pro- 
 nunciation; as: — 
 
 :^etauf: ^ct=ouf, not ^e»rouf (up-on) 
 toatum: War»um, „ tt)0=tum (where-fore) 
 herein: ^er^ein, „ j^e^rein (in, in-to) 
 becftac^ten; beoboo^tett/ „ be=o*boc^«ten (ob-serve) 
 gnteteffe: 3ntcr»effe, „ 3nste=rej;fe (in-ter-est) 
 a;Eteflo<»; $ete=jtop, „ %^Ai\Axi^ (te-le-scope) 
 (3.) A single consonant between two vowels is, as in Eng- 
 lish, joined to the latter (except 2); as: — 
 
 Bluten: blu=ten, not btut=en (bleed) 
 fdgen: ja^gcn, „ JSg^en (saw) 
 SBtubet: ©rubber, „ i8rub»et (brother) 
 (4.) Two vowels coining together and not forming a diph- 
 thong, should be separated; as: — 
 
 fa=en: ffien (sow). 
 (5.) The consonantal combinations, (J, f(^, JjJ, t^ and bt 
 (unless b and t belong to different components of a compound 
 word) are never separated from one another but are joined to 
 the following syllable; as: — 
 
 @tidu(|e: @trau'(i)e (shrubs) 
 Joafc^ert: wa^^cn (wash) 
 ©tttbte: @ta=bte (towns) 
 but aSBonbte^Jpi^ : 2Bonb'tc^Jpt(| (tapestry) being a comp. word. 
 (6.) If two (or more) consonants occur between two vowels 
 they are separated, as in English; thus: — 
 uitter: un»ter (un-der) tupfen: rup=f en (pluck) 
 
 §drte: §at=te (hard-ship) f taien : frat=jcn (scratch) 
 aSoffei: aSBaJ'fer (wa-ter) 9locfen:5RaWen(neck),'(f=:f-f-!. 
 
 2Seg»>e: 2Bc8=pe (wasp) Sl^fet: Sl^^fet (axis, axle); 
 
 Toftett: roHen (rest) ct)f = f-j-f. 
 
 but ^)f after m or r, and ft after any consonant, are joined to 
 the following syllables ; as : — 
 flam:pfen: ftam»<)fen (stamp) gorftia: gar^ftig (naughty) 
 .Sat^)fett: S'or^jjfen (carp) ^iirflen: gUr^ftcn (princes) 
 
 Note I. The sign indicating the separation of syllables is («) in words 
 written with German characters; (-) in those written with Romas characters. 
 
 Note 2. No apostrophe is used before 8 ('s) of the genitive, as: — 
 SBruberS brother's; SleyanDerS Alexander's; 
 
 but notice Semofl^eiieS' SRebcn Demosthen speeches, when the apostrophe is 
 used instead of 8 of the genitive, with aouns ending in 9. 
 
1. 
 Methodical Part. 
 
A. 
 German Poetry. 
 
 (Of Prose-like Construction.) 
 
 Lesson I. 
 
 Sounds, and Letters. 
 
 Letters are symbols by which sounds are re- 
 presented. Sounds and the spoken language should 
 be clearly distinguished from letters and the written 
 language. 
 
 OAsring to the fact that our present spelling 
 of the written language is based upon a pronun- 
 ciation of the past which has since undergone 
 great changes, modern spelling and modem pronun- 
 ciation are frequently at variance. Thus it comes 
 to pass that now one letter represents different 
 sounds, or different letters represent one and the 
 same sound. This will be obvious by comparing 
 the pronunciation of Enghsh gh in borOUgh, COUgh, 
 Gough, ghost; of a in care, case, calf, call, candle; 
 of Grerman d in Land (= lant), and landen (= Idn- 
 ddn); of s in Gras (=gras), and Graser (== gre-z8r). 
 
 Note. The German alphabet may be spelled both with Oerman 
 and Roman (or English) characters. The so-called German (or Gothic) 
 letters are only corrupt Eoman letters which under the arbitrary in- 
 fluence of the monkish writers of the middle ages changed their round 
 shape into pointed figures , the outcome of which is the modern Ger- 
 
30 Methodical Part. 
 
 man letter. In the older stages of the German language Eoman 
 characters alone were employed. 
 
 I. Pronunciation. 
 
 Bearing on the following Reading Passage. 
 Vowels. 
 
 1. The German letters ic (ie), or long and short 
 t (i) have the sound of EngHsh ie in 'field'. Pro- 
 nounce: bte, 
 
 2. German o (long or short) always sounds 
 like in 'note'; and u (u) like long oo in 'boot' or 
 short u in 'hussar'. 
 
 3. German c (e) sounds: a.) like e in 'grejj]' 
 when close; or (b.) like short e in 'shell' and long 
 a in 'hare' when open; in xmaccented syllables it 
 sounds like e in 'father'. Final e (a) is always audible. 
 
 4. The diphthong ci (ei) sounds like ei in 
 'height'; and the diphthong wx (au) like OW in 'cow'. 
 
 5. German a (a) has the one sound only of 
 EngHsh a in 'far'. 
 
 6. The sound represented by the letter ft (u, 
 formerly u) is obtained by pronouncing English ee with 
 protruded and rounded Ups; as — Eriihling =fruhng. 
 
 Note. German vowels arepztre and simple sounds, no following 
 vowel-sound being, accordingly, heard after e and o, as would be the 
 case in English 'no' (o = o»). 
 
 Consonants. 
 
 7. If the vocal chords are vibrating when a 
 consonant is sounded we call it voiced; if the vocal 
 chords are not vibrating we speak of voiceless con- 
 sonants. 
 
 German and English ^, t, t, and final German 
 b and B are always voiceless. 
 
 German )t) (w); initial and medial [ (s = English z) 
 between vowels and after a liquid (1, r), and initial 
 and medial 16 and b axQvoiced. 
 
Lesson I. 31 
 
 Note. Pinal 6 and b, even when forming compounds, remain 
 Toiceless; as — ab 'ofi' (= ap), Ab-grund 'precipice' (dpgrunt). 
 
 8. German to (w) sounds like English v; Ger- 
 man U (v) like English or German f; initial g (g) 
 like English g in 'go' (never like g in 'wages'); 
 pronounce the termination =Kttg as in 'shilling'. 
 
 To pronounce German (^ in td^ try to sound 
 ik, but instead of raising the tongue up to the hard 
 palate when pronouncing k leave just enough space 
 between to squeeze and eject the air past and out 
 of the mouth. 
 
 Pronoimce: Wie-se (vi'zo), Vo-gel (fo'gel), Mor- 
 gan (morgen). 
 
 Accent and Length of syllables. 
 
 9. The emphasis with which we pronounce one 
 word or syllable more than another is called 'accent'. 
 We distinguish a 'strong accent (')', and a 'half 
 accent Q'. The accent of a single word often differs 
 from the accent placed on the same word in a 
 sentence. Thus, we speak of 'word -accent', and 
 of 'sentence-accent'. 
 
 10. Eegarding long and short vowel- sounds 
 notice the general rule, that a long vowel is followed 
 by a single consonant, and a short vowel by a double 
 or compound consonant; thus the ie in Wie-se, o in 
 Vo-gel are long; the u in Kuk-kuk (kukuk), and the 
 o in Mor-gen are short; initial and final (unaccented) 
 syllables are short. 
 
 II. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Eeading aloud , For Translation into English , and For 
 Committing to Memory. 
 
 Der Friihling. 
 
 (Eoman or English characters.) 
 
 Die Wiese grtint, der Vogel baut, 
 Der Kuckuck ruft, der Morgen taut. 
 
32 Methodical Part. 
 
 S)er t5tu^4ing. 
 
 (German Characters; division of syllables.) 
 
 SDie SBte=fe grflnt, ber 2Jo = geI Baut, 
 ®er ^uf=IulE ruft, ber 9D?or=gen taut. 
 
 Note. Substantives and words used substantively are in German 
 spelled with capital letters. Bee the phonetic transcriptions on p. 25. 
 
 III. Vocabulary and Conjugation. 
 
 To be committed to memory. 
 
 Vocabulary 
 
 griint ■- is green, is dec- 
 ked wit green 
 hant V buUds [its nest] 
 ruft (ruft) calls 
 taut dews, is dewy 
 
 jj)te SBtefe the meadow 
 ®er ^riil^Kng (the) spring 
 5)er SSogel the bird 
 35er ^udul the cuckoo 
 1£)£r SHorgen the morning 
 
 Conjugation. 
 Pres. Ind. of ^aben 'have'. 
 S. 1. td^ l^aBe (ich ha'be) I have the bird 
 ben SBosgel, 
 
 2. bu l^aft (du hast) (thou hast), or you (sing.) 
 
 ben ^O'gel, have the bird 
 
 3. er l^at (Sr ha't) ben he has the bird 
 
 2?o=geI, 
 PL 1. toir l^aBen (vir we have the meadow 
 
 ha'ben)bte9Bie4e, 
 
 2. tl^r l^aBt bte ifi}te=|'e you have the meadow 
 
 3. fie l^aBen bte SBte^e they have the meadow. 
 
 Note 1. Observe that German transitive verbs, such as ^oBen take 
 an accusative object; and that the ace. sing, masculine of the definit. 
 article ber (the) is ben, the nomin. and ace. feminine bte (sing. & plural). 
 
 Note 2. 'I' is in German id; with a small letter, unless it begins 
 a sentence. 
 
 Note 3. An e turned headway down (a) is the phonetic symbol for 
 short unaccented e, a mixed vowel-sound; the long syllables only 
 have been marked (— ), as — grunt. 
 
 Note 4. The phonetic trans( wption of the German text will be 
 found on page 23. 
 
Lesson II, 33 
 
 Lesson II. 
 
 I. Pronunciation. 
 
 Bearing on the following Reading Passage. 
 
 1. The nasal sound ng (ng) ip always pronoun- 
 ced like ng in 'singer' (never lake ng in 'finger'). 
 
 2. Q-erman f (s) is voiced and sounds like Eng- 
 lish z in 'zeal' when initial before a vowel (ftngt), 
 when medial between vowels (Stefe), or when 
 medial between a liquid (f, r, and rat, n) and a vowel 
 (SBtnfe); otherwise German f, final 9 (s), ff ($s), and 
 final I (ss) are voiceless. 
 
 3. Q-erman ]§ (h), unless it is initial, is mute; 
 it lengthens the preceding vowel (^rfll^nng, Blul^t). 
 
 4. The compound letter ^ (ch) represents a 
 simple sound which has no equivalent in English. 
 It is pronounced in two different ways, according 
 to the position or articulation of the pi-eceding 
 vowel- sound by which it is affected. 
 
 We must, therefore, distinguish: 
 
 a) The front - vowel -^ (ch), after ihe front-vowels 
 i, c (or a), 0, ftj after the diphthongs ctt or 
 an (= oi), and ctj further after consonants; 
 and in the diminutive suffice s^cit (chen); 
 as — i^ J, SSetI=(^en, Ser-d|e. 
 
 b) The back- vowel -^ (ch), after the back-vowels 
 II, 0, Hf and the diphthong an^ as — adp! 
 alas! aud& (also). 
 
 We form these sounds by trying to sound f 
 (k) iu if or at but, instead of entirely stopping the 
 outgoing current of air by pressing the back of 
 the tongue against the hard palate (as in ik and 
 ak), we let just enough space between the palate 
 
 3 
 
34 Methodical Part. 
 
 and the tongue to eject the air past them and out 
 of the mouth. 
 
 Pronounce the following words: — 
 ©onne sun iBaffer water 
 
 ©ommer summer effen eat 
 
 ©onntag Sunday Ipaffen hate 
 
 ©onnabenb Saturday ^a§ hatred 
 
 II. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Eeading aloud, Translation into English, and Committing 
 to Memory. 
 
 Der Frvihling. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 (Boman or English Characters.) 
 
 Das Veilchen bluht, die Lerche singt; 
 Der Obstbaum prangt, der Fruhling winkt, 
 
 (German Characters.) 
 
 5Da8 SSetI=(i^en Bliil^t, bie lOetfd^e ftngt; 
 
 ®er £)6p»Baum ^Jrangt, ber %xix^'linQ totiilt. 
 
 Ill, Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered viva voce. 
 
 toer? who? toae? what? 
 \Da9 t^ut . . . ? what does ... do? 
 
 Model. 
 Questions : Answers : 
 
 1. gBa« t^ut bag SSexi^cn? ®a6 SSetlc^en BW^t. 
 
 2. SBer ftngt? SDte Cerc^e ftngt. 
 
 3. SBae t^ut ber DBfiBaum? SDer OBjlBoum pxangt 
 
 4. 2Ber totnit? S)er ?friip«g toinlt. 
 
Lesson III. 35 
 
 IV. Vocabulary and Conjugation. 
 
 To be committed to memory. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 baS SJetld^en (failchan) the 
 violet 
 bte Cerd^c (le'rche) the lark 
 ber OBfttaum (o'bstbaum) 
 the fiiiit-tree 
 ber ^tii^Kng (fruling) spring 
 
 6Iul^t"'(blut) blooms 
 
 ftngt (zingt) sings, warbles 
 ^3rangt^'(prangt) shines 
 
 (brightly) 
 toinlt (vinkt) winks, greets. 
 
 Conjugation. 
 Preterite Ind. of ijobm 'have'. 
 
 S. 1. i^ ^aUie (hate) etnen SSmm, I had a tree 
 
 2. bu ^atteji einen S3aum, (thou hadst) or you had 
 a tree 
 
 3. er l^atte einen Saunt, he had a tree 
 
 PI. 1. totr l^atten ein SSetlc^en, we had a violet 
 
 2. il^r l^attet etn iBetld^en, you had a violet 
 
 3. fte l^atten etn JBetld^en, they had a violet. 
 
 Note. Observe that the accus. mascidme of the indefinite article 
 etn (a, an) is einen, and that the nomin. and accus. neuter is etn. 
 
 Lesson III. 
 
 I. Pronnnciation. 
 
 Bearing on the following Beading Passage. 
 
 Pronounce \^ (sch) always like English sll 
 (in 'shall'), never like English sch (sk) in 'school'; 
 as — ^tr4(^e, raufc|)t. 
 
36 Methodical Part. 
 
 II. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Reading aloud, Translation into English, and Committing 
 to memory. 
 
 Der Sommer. 
 
 (Roman or English Characters.) 
 
 Die Sonne brennt, die Hose bliiht, 
 
 Die Bohne rankt, das Wiirmchen gliiht, 
 
 Die Kirsche reiffc, die Sense kliagt, 
 
 Die Garbe rauscht, der Sommer blinkt. 
 
 Set @om=itter, 
 
 (German Characters.) 
 
 SDte ©ottsne fcrennt, bte IKosfe Bliil^t, 
 S)ie §9oi^*ne vantt, bag 2Biirm»(i^cn gfiil^t, 
 ^ie ^tr^c^e retft, bte @en=fe fltngt, 
 S)t« (Bax'ie rauf^t, ber @om=raer Blinft. 
 
 III. Conversation. 
 
 The questions to be answered vivS. voce. 
 
 1. aSa* t^ut bte (Sonne? 5. SBae reift? 
 
 2. mas ranit? 6. fBaS t^ut bte ©enfe? 
 
 3. SBa« glil^t? 7. SBaS raufc^t? 
 
 4. Ba9 t^ut bte JRofe? 8. SBae t^ut ber (Sommer? 
 
 IV. Vocabulary and Conjugation. 
 
 To be committed to memory. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 bte (Sonne (zo'ne), the sun 
 „ Stofe (ro'ze), the rose 
 
 „ Soigne (bona), the bean 
 
 e (kirshe), the 
 
 cherry 
 
 Brennt (brent), (he) burns 
 ranft -y (rankt) (it) chmbs, 
 runs 
 raufc^t (rausht), (it) rustles 
 [in the wind] 
 retft ^ (raift), (it) ripens 
 
Lesson III. o<y 
 
 bte@ar6e (garba), the sheaf 
 
 bte @enfe (ze'nz9),the scythe 
 
 bag 3Biirm(!^en (vii'rmchen), 
 
 little [glow-]worm 
 
 fUngt (klingt), (it) clinks, 
 
 tinkles 
 
 BHnlt (blinkt), (it) shines 
 
 gm^t (glfit), (it) glows, 
 
 glitters. 
 
 ber ©om=mer (zomar), (the) summer. 
 
 Conjugation. 
 Conjugate the Present and Preterite Indie, of %obtn interro- 
 gatively and negatively. 
 S. ^aBe id^ etne 5ftofe? PL ^afien toir eine ^irfd^e? 
 
 ^aji bu etne 9io[e? l^aBt i^r etne ^trjd^e? 
 
 Ipat fte etne 9tofe? l^aBen fte etne ^irfc^e? 
 
 S. ^atte id^ nii^t (not) etne 8?ofe? 
 l^atteft bu ntd^t eine S^iofe? 
 I^atte er ntd^t eine 9?ofe? 
 PLMten toir nic^t ein aBiirmd^en? 
 ^atiii x^i ni6)t etn SBiirm(|en ? 
 l^atten jle ntd^t ein SBiirntd^en? 
 
 Note. The nomin. and accus. feminine of the indefinite article 
 (a, an) is eine. 
 
 Exercise. Conjugate in the same manner and 
 write out: — 
 
 ^abt x6) nid^t etn SJetld^en? 
 I^atte tc[; ntd^t etnen SJogel? 
 
 V. German Handwriting. 
 
 To be copied. 
 
 yt^jy^ .=^.:£j^yC/<-^.^ ^^ 
 
 yO^ 
 
 y^ yC^ y<a^ 
 
38 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
Lesson IV, 39 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 I. Pronunciation. 
 
 Bearing on the following Reading Passage. 
 
 1. Pronounce final b like p, thus — Sau6 like 
 laup'. 
 
 2. Notice that words of common Teutonic origin 
 with the English initial letters: si, sm, sn, sw are 
 in High Grerman spelt fc^ni (schm), fci^n (schn), fd^to 
 (schw) ; as — 'swallow' ©d^toalBe, 'smuggle' fd^muggeltt, 
 'Sweden' ©(i^toeben, 'sling' ©c^tinge. 
 
 3. The letters ^jf (pf) are pronounced ^)+f. iu 
 some dialects like single f ; as :|)f[ugett plough, ^ferfc 
 horse. 
 
 II. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Reading Aloud, Translation into English, and Committing 
 to Memory. 
 
 Der Herbst. 
 
 (Boman or EngliBh characteis.) 
 
 Das Laub verwelkt, die Schwalbe flieht, 
 Der Landmann pfliigt, das Rebhuhn zieht. 
 Die Traube reift, die Kelter rinnt, 
 Der Apfel lockt, — der Herbst beginnt. 
 
 25er ^ertft. 
 
 (German characters.) 
 
 SDae SauB ber*toelltt, bte @d^toal»6e fftel^t, 
 SDer Sanb*mantt ))pgt, has 9ie64"^n i^^% 
 SDte S;rau=6e reift, bte ^el=ter rtntit, 
 2)er 2l|)sfel lodt, — ber §er6ft Be^ginnt. 
 
 The definite article the is in German diffe- 
 rent for the three genders of the singular, as — 
 Nom. Sing. Ace. Sing. 
 
 bcr (masc.) ben (masc.) 
 
40 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 btc (fern.) bie (fern.) 
 
 has (neutr.) baS (neutr.) 
 
 The definite article is thus used to indicate the 
 genders of German nouns which are either mas- 
 culine, feminine, or neuter, 
 
 III. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be ansvered vivS voce. 
 
 1. 28a8 t^ut bae 2a\xh? 5. fSiaS retft? 
 
 2. aaSer flte^t? 6. 2Bae tl^ut bie ©c^toalBe? 
 
 3. S33a8 t^ut berSanbmann? 7. Ba9 tinnt? 
 
 4. SBer jie^t? 8. Sae focft? 
 
 9. Sae Beghmt? 
 
 IV. Vocabulary. 
 
 To be committed to memory. 
 
 SDaS SauB (laup), the leaves 
 bte 
 
 ©(i^toalBe (shvalba) , ' ^'fliel^t (flit) flies away 
 the swallow 
 
 ber 
 
 bag 
 
 Sanbmann (lantman), 
 the farmer 
 9ieBl^u^it (re'p-hun), 
 the partridge 
 bte SCrauBe (traubo), grape 
 bte defter (ke'ltar), the wine- 
 press, 
 ber Sl^jfel (apfel), the apple 
 ber ^erBfl (herbst), the au- 
 tumn 
 
 trertoelft (farve'lkt) wither (s) 
 
 ^pgt (pflflgt) ploughs 
 
 jtel^t (tsit) wanders 
 
 retft (raift) ripens 
 rtnnt (rint) runs 
 
 iodt (lokt) entices, attracts 
 Begtnnt (bagint) begins 
 
 V. German Handwriting. 
 
 To be copied. 
 
 fie- -A^-m-^ 
 
 :r=*raa.-e«--r' 
 
 /y^^^ 
 
Lesson V, 41 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 I. Pronunciation. 
 
 Bearing on the following Reading Passage. 
 
 1. The letter g (g) represents the sound g in 
 ■go', as — gWnjt, and the sound otherwise expressed 
 by d) (ch; see lesson I, 5) if followed by another 
 consonant, or when final. It is then, like d^, either 
 a front-vowel-sound (see 1. I, 5. a), or a back-vowel- 
 sound; thus fitegt, ftegt (preceded by a front-vowel) 
 like JBcht, zlcht; but their g is again pronounced 
 like g in 'go' when an unaccented e (a) follows, as 
 in the Infinitive fitegen (= fli-g9n), ftegen (= zi-gen). 
 
 2. The simple letter y (x) represents the double 
 sound k+8 (never g+s). 
 
 3. Double vowels are pronounced Hke long 
 simple vowel-sounds. 
 
 4. Whilst English initial si, sm, sn, sw (see 1. 
 IV.) are now in High German spelt and pronounced 
 fd^f, fd^m, fd^n, fc^to, it is otherwise with initial sp 
 and st. These have still the same spelling in Grer- 
 man, ^p and ft, but are pronounced ]<^p, fd^t, also in 
 compounds or derivatives, as — ftumm and ber= 
 ftummen (= shtum), ftarr and er^ftarren (= shtar). 
 
 Medial f^j, and medial and final ft, however, are 
 pronounced as spelled; thus Staft (rest) = rast 
 (not 'rascht'), (bu) loBft ('you praise') =^ lobst (not' 
 lobscht). 
 
42 Methodical Part. 
 
 II. Reading Passage. 
 
 For reading Aloud, Translation into English, and Committing 
 to Memory. 
 
 Der Winter. 
 Der Sang verstummt, die Axt erschallt, 
 Das Schneefeld glanzt, das Waldhorn hallt, 
 Die Flut erstarrt, der Schneeball fliegt, 
 Der Schlittschuh eilt, — der Winter siegt. 
 
 Sier SBintet, 
 S)er ®ang ber=fiumtttt, fcte Slyt er»f(^allt, 
 5Da6 ®(^nee=felb glcinjt, ia9 SBaIb=l^orn l^allt, 
 SDie ^fut erstarrt, ber ©d^nee^Batt fftegt, 
 SDer ©(^litt^fd^u^ etit, — ber 2Btn=ter ftegt. 
 
 III. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered vivH voce. 
 
 1. 2Ba8 t:^ut ber @ang? 6.2Bae fttegt? 
 
 2. 2Ba8 erfd^aat? 7, 5!Bae t^ut bag ©c^nee^felb ? 
 
 3. SBag glfinst? 8.aBaSt^utber(S(i^att=fd^u^? 
 
 4. aSaSt^utbaeaBafb^orn? 9.2Ba« ftegt? 
 
 5. 2Ba« erftarrt? lO.SBaS berftummt? 
 
 IV. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Beading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 I. The Infinitive of all German verbs ends in 
 =cn the e being, however, dropped after I and r in 
 unaccented syllables. 
 
 The root of a verb is found by dropping this 
 inflection »(e)n of the Infinitive (or the other inflec- 
 tions of tense and person); the vowel of this root 
 is called the root-vowel; as — 
 
 l^aQ=en, root: 6all», root-vowel: a 
 
 ftteg»eii, „ ftieg^, „ „ ic 
 
Lesson V. 43 
 
 glanj=en, root: gWnj*, root-vowel: ft 
 feer»fiumttt*e«, „ t)er=ftiiinm», „ „ n 
 
 Note. As Bet* in »ev«iiummen and et* in etfc^affcn are prefixes the 
 vowel of the following syllable, the base of the word, is the root-vowel. 
 
 2. The Present Indicative of all verbs is con- 
 jugated by adding the following inflections (marked 
 black) to the root: 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 Sing. 1. x^ etic I hurry 
 
 2. bu etift (thou hurriest), you hurry 
 
 3. er, (jte, eS) exit he (she, it) hurries 
 Plur. 1. totr etlctl we hurry 
 
 2. tl^r eil(c)t you hurry (the e is now optional) 
 
 3. fie eticn they hurry. 
 
 Note. The 2nd pers. sing, bu (thou), you (speaking to one per- 
 son only) and i^r you (speaking to more than one person) are used in 
 poetry, in vmagvnary conversation in ancient history, and in addressing 
 children, relatives, intimate friends, and animals. In addressing ac- 
 quaintances and strangers use the 3rd pers. plur. ftc written with a capital 
 letter, ©ie you, both for one person or more than one; as — @ie 
 ficgen you conquer, but jie ftegen they conquer. 
 
 Exercise. Conjugate in the same way the Ger- 
 man and English of [tieg^en, and fieg*en. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 3. The two main parts of a simple sentence are: 
 the subject which is a nominative, and the predicate 
 which may be a finite verb. The construction is 
 alike in English and German if the nomiriative-sub- 
 ject begins the sentence. 
 
 The subject answers to: who? or what? 
 bet SBtnter ftegt: 
 Subject: (who conquers?) ber 2Biuter. 
 Predicate: ftegt. 
 
44 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 IV. Vocabulary. 
 
 To be committed to memory. 
 
 ber ©a«9 (zang), the song 
 
 the skate 
 
 winter 
 
 toerftummen (fershtuman), 
 cease, (become silent) 
 
 bte Slfft (akst), the axe 
 
 baS ©c^neefelb (shne'felt), 
 
 the snowy fields 
 
 bae aBatb^orn (valt-horn) 
 
 the bugle-horn 
 
 bte glut (floot) the flood 
 
 ber ©d^neefeatt (shne'bal) the 
 
 snow- ball 
 
 ber ©(^Kttfd^u]^ (shlitshii)^ etfen (ailon), hasten, glide 
 
 erf d^atten (ershalen), resound 
 glanjen (glentsen) , shine, 
 ghtter 
 fatten (hakn), sound 
 
 erftarreti (ershtaran), freeze 
 fitegen (fleegen), fly 
 
 along 
 
 ber SBtnter (vinter) (the)^'fiegen (zeegen) conquer, be 
 
 victor. 
 
 Lesson VI 
 
 I. Pronunciation. 
 
 Bearing on the following Beading Passage. 
 
 1. The letters t^ (th) merely represent a single 
 t (t), the English sound expressed by th being unknown 
 in German pronunciation. 
 
 2. In a few words at (ai) is found for ct (ei). 
 
 3. The simple letter 3 (j) represents a double 
 sound, t-|-s, as — gtan3t. 
 
 II. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Reading aloud, Translation into English, and Committing 
 to Memory. 
 
 Fruhlingslied. 
 Die Luft ist blau, das Thai ist grlin, 
 Die kleinen Maienglocken bliihn 
 Und Schliisselblumen drunter; 
 
Lesson VI. 45 
 
 Der "Wiesengrund ist schon so bunt 
 Und glanzet taglich bunter. 
 
 gtiii§4tngS4teb. 
 
 S)te Sitft tft blau, has Z^ai tft griln, 
 
 3)ie Ifet=nen 2nat»en=g{oI=fen Blitlpn 
 
 Unb @(^Iiif4ef=BIu=men brun=ter,' 
 
 ®er 9Bte=[en*grunb ifi fd^on fo Bunt 
 
 Unb gISn=jet tcig^Kd^ 6un=ter. 
 
 III. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered viva voce. 
 
 toie ? how? 
 
 1 SBte tfi bte Suft? 7. 2Bte ftnb bte mai(eny 
 
 2. 2Bae tfl griin? gfocEen? 
 
 3. Sag Blii^t? 8. SBaS t^un fte? 
 4 aSag tft b(a)runter? 9. S33a« ifi Bunt? 
 
 6. aSte tft ber SBiefengrunb? 10. SBae t^ut ber 28tcfen= 
 6. 2Bte gfanj(e)t ber Siefen* grunb? 
 grunb ? 
 
 IV. Grammar. 
 In accordance with the Reading Passage. 
 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. The Comparative is formed as in English by 
 adding the inflection »cr; as — 
 
 Bunt, compar. Bunter 
 Bku, „ Blaucr 
 
 2. Weak Declension of Nouns; Adjectives, and 
 Pronouns. Declension of nouns, adjectives, and pro- 
 nouns is said to be weak, if all cases of the plural 
 (also the sing, of some classes of masc. nouns, etc.) 
 end in the consonantal -n (or =en). 
 
 Most dissyllabic feminine nouns, such as — 
 @IoMe, S3Iu=me (in the compounds SO?aten*gIocEe and 
 
46 Methodical Part. 
 
 N. hit 1 
 
 
 G. bet 
 
 SBlnmen 
 
 D. ben 
 
 the flowers 
 
 A. bie 
 
 
 ©c^IiiffelsBrume) form the plural with the inflection 
 'tt (for all cases). 
 
 The whole singular of all feminine nouns is un- 
 declined. 
 Sing. K bie ] Plur. 
 
 G. ber SSfume 
 
 D. ber the flower 
 
 A. bie j 
 
 Note. The dative pkwal of all nouns , pronouns , and declinable 
 adjectives must take the inflection «tt, unless the word ends in n, in 
 the nominative singular. 
 
 3. An adjective is attributive if it is joined 
 (as attribute) to a noun with which it must agree 
 in gender and number; it takes the inflection =en 
 for all cases of the plural if preceded by any articU or 
 pronoun; as — 
 
 SDie fleincn llWaienglodeii. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 4. The Predicate of a simple sentence may also 
 be expressed by a verb which is incomplete in sense 
 (such as be, become) and an adjective. 
 
 This latter is then called predicative adjective 
 and is undeclined (contrary to Latin and French), 
 as — 
 
 bie Suft tfl Bfau 
 
 Subject Predicate 
 
 V. Vocabulary and Conjugation. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 tJrfll^tingStieb (frfi'lingsli't) Spring Song. 
 
 bie Suft (luffc) the air 
 
 tfi (ist) is 
 
 6Iau (blau) blue 
 
 bag 3;^at (tal) the dale, valley 
 
 griin (grun) green 
 Ilein (klain) small, little 
 b(a)runter (drunter) , am- 
 ongst them 
 
Lesson VII. 47 
 
 bet SBtefengrunb (vi'zen- 
 grunt) the meadows 
 f^on (shon) already 
 
 v 
 
 Bunt (bunt) gay-coloured, 
 bright 
 gWnjen (glSntsen) shine 
 tfigltd^ (tech-Hch) daily 
 
 btc 9Kai(en)gIode (maiengldke) the lily of the valley 
 
 bliil^en (bluen), bloom, 
 
 bie @d^IiiffeI6Iume (sblii'sel-blu ma) the primrose. 
 
 Conjugation. 
 Conjugation with the Present Ind. of |ein 'be'. 
 S. \. \i^ Bin Weitt, I am little 
 
 2. bu Bift Ifetn, (thou art) or you are little 
 
 3. er, (jle, e«) ift Iletn, he, (she, it) is little 
 PI. 1. toir finb flein, we are little 
 
 2. tl^r feib Iletn, you are little 
 
 3. fie finb Ilein, they are little. 
 
 Lesson VII. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Reading aloud, translation into English, and Committing 
 to Memory. 
 
 Morgenlied. 
 Morgen erwacht, das Dunkel entflieht. 
 Golden am Hitnmel Prlihrot ergliiht; 
 
 Muntere Lieder fiillen die Luft, 
 Blumen verbreiten HebHchen Dufl. 
 
 Siehe, am Grras-chen glanzt silbern der Tau! 
 Bienen durchziehen summend die Au. 
 
 SD?or*flen cr*toac^t, ba8 5Dun=!eI ent^fltel^t, 
 @oI=ben ant $tnt*mel fjriil^'rot er*glil^t; 
 
48 Methodical Part. 
 
 Wnn^U-'Xe Sie=ber fiiWett bte Suft, - 
 S3Iu=inen ber=6ret4en iieMui^en ®uft. 
 
 (Siesl^e, qm @ra8=d^en gfanjt ftI=Bern ber Stau! 
 Sle=nett burd^^gte^en fum=menb bte Slu. 
 
 Note. Pronounce the nasal nf in Suntet as in English 'sink' ; the 
 ^en in ©rii^'d^en is diminutiTe suffix and must not be sounded together 
 with the preceding S. 
 
 II, Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered viyS, voce, 
 tote, how? too, where? 
 
 1. SBer ertoad^t? 6. 2Bae tl^uit bte Slumen? 
 
 2. SSag t^ut bae ©unlef? 7. 2Bo erglSnat ber Stau? 
 
 3. aBa8er0ril^tattt$itnmeI? 8. SBte ergWnat ber Zau? 
 
 4. aBteerglfl^tbag^riiM? 9. 2Ba8 t^un bte Stcnen? 
 
 5. SBag fMt bte Suft? 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accorcfance with the Reading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. The inflections oi attributive adjectives without 
 any article or pronoun are in the nominative sin- 
 gular =cr (masc), =c (fern.), =cg (neut.); -tXi in the 
 masc. accusative of the singular, and =c in the nomin. 
 and accus. plural. Thus: — 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 Sing. Nom. tnuutercr 1 
 
 Ace. inunteren } "'""*"'^' "'""^^'^'^^ 
 Plur. N. & Ace. tnunter=e (for all three genders). 
 
 2. The inflection -tx in the plural of nouns is 
 anomalous. It is added to most neuter monosyllabic 
 nouns; they take =cS in the genitive singular. The 
 root-vowels a, o, u, are modified in the plural and 
 become S, 'i, ii; as: — 
 
Lesson VII. 
 
 49 
 
 bag Steb genit. beS Siebcg, plur. Stebcr (dat. Stebern. 
 has Sanb (laud), genit. beg Sanb*c^, plur. Sonbcr (dat. 
 
 ?finbern). 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 3. The def. art. is sometimes dropped ia poetry, 
 when it would be commoner to use it in prose; as: — 
 
 3Jlorgen, commoner ber SWorgen, 
 %x^tot, „ bag ^xn^xot 
 
 4. The order of words in a simple sentence 
 often deviates in poetry from the general rule; thus 
 we should say in prose: — 
 
 SDaS ^vix^xot ergliil^t golben am ^immet. 
 
 IV. Vocabulary. 
 
 To be committed -;fco Memory. 
 
 SDtorgenUeb morning song 
 ertoad^en, awake 
 baS S)un!el the darkness, 
 dusk (adj. used as subst.) 
 entfltel^ett flee, wane 
 bag griil^rot the morning- 
 red, dawn 
 ber ^immel in the sky, 
 
 (heaven) j^ur^jtelpen 
 golben golden, like gold 
 ergtiil^en glow 
 muntere Steber merry songs 
 fiiCen bte Suft fill the air 
 
 i-cerBretten spread 
 
 KeBUd^en 3)uft sweet scent 
 
 ftelpe see! look! 
 
 am ©ragd^en on every blade 
 of grass 
 the dew 
 silvery 
 the bee 
 fly (through), 
 about 
 themeadow(s) 
 buzzing 
 = an bem. 
 
 ber ^an 
 ftlBern 
 bte S3tene 
 
 bte 2tu 
 
 fummenb 
 
 am 
 
 Note. See the phonetic tranacriptions on p. 24. 
 
50 Methodical Part. 
 
 Lesson VIII. 
 
 I. Fronanciation. 
 
 Bearing on the following Keading Passage. 
 
 1. Pronounce t (k) and g before n; as: — 
 ^ne(^t, ^na=6e, @na==be, (mercy), I being never 
 mute in Grerman. 
 
 2. Remember that German ttg has the one 
 somid only of ng in 'singer'; thus ^urisger should 
 not be pronounced as in English 'hunger', 'finger'. 
 
 II. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Eeading aloud, translation into English, and Committing 
 to memory. 
 
 Die Dienersehaft. 
 Ich habe gute Dienersehaft; 
 Die Knechte heissen SelbstgfeschajBFfc 
 Und SpatzuBett und AufbeiZeit; 
 Die Magde: Ordnung, ReinUchljeit; 
 Durst, Hunger heissen Schenk ufid Koch, 
 Hab' auch zwei Bdelknaben noch, 
 Grenannt Gebet und gut Grewissen. 
 
 S^ l^a=6e gu=te ©ie^ner^ffJ^aft; 
 S)te ^nei^^te ^et=§en: ©elBft^^ge^d^afft 
 Unb ®^)cit=ju=a5ett unb Stuf^Bci^^eit, 
 5Dte 3iRctg»be £)rb»-nung, dtein4ii^'hit', 
 SDurft, ^un=ger l^ets§en ©d^en! unb ^od), 
 ^ab' au^ jtoet (S=beI»Ina»16en nod^, 
 ®e»nannt ®e=6et unb gut ©e^toif^^fen. 
 
Lesson VIII. 51 
 
 III. Conversation. 
 
 The Questious to be answered vivS, voce. 
 Ste lange? How long? 
 
 1. 2Ba6 IpaBe i^? 5. 2Bie ^ei^t ber ^oc^? 
 
 2. mk ^etgen bte ^nec|te? 6. SBag ^aBe td^ nod^? 
 
 3. Bte ^et^en bte 9Jicigbe? 7. 2Bte ftrtb fte aenannt? 
 
 4. Bix tft ber ©c^enl? 
 
 IV. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Rea'ding Passage. 
 a. Accidenee. 
 
 1. There are tkree auxiliary verbs of tense in 
 German, used in the formation of compound tenses: — 
 
 ^aB'Clt (have), fetji (be), h)erb=cn (become, get). 
 
 Note. §a6en and wetben (with some deviations} are conjugated in 
 the Pies, tense like ftiegen; fetn is irregular. 
 
 Present Indicative. 
 
 5. tc^ l^aBc (I have) bie Slyt. S. id^ Bttt (I am) !(ein. 
 
 y S. 1. tc^ toerbe \ I become 
 
 2. b« toirft I 
 
 3. er toirb I 
 PL 1. totr toerbcn 
 
 2. tl^r toerbct 
 
 3. fte toerbcn. 
 Pronounce: ich verda giit 
 
 du virst gut. 
 
 Note. In bu ^ajl and er £|at the 6 of the root 5aB« is dropped; 
 the 'i^^ and S'li ^ers. sing, of ttierben change e into t and whilst the 
 2'>d person bu totrji drops the b of the root werb*, the Z'^^ person er 
 Witb drops the inflection = t. The auxiliary verb fetn is throughout 
 irregular, its conjugation being made up of diflferent roots. 
 
 2. Strong Declension of nouns, adjectives and 
 pronouns. Declension of nouns, adjectives, and pro- 
 nouns is said to be strong if the nominative plural 
 ends in the vowel =c, and the genitive sing, of 
 masc. nouns in =[e]g. 
 
 4* 
 
 gut 
 
52 Methodical Part. 
 
 Most monosyllabic Masculine and feminine nouns 
 form the plural by adding the inflection --t (dat. 
 =cn)j at the same time most of the take a modi- 
 fication (Umlaut) of the root-vowels a, o, u, -which 
 become ft, ii, il. 
 
 The singular of the feminine and masculine 
 nouns is unchanged except the genitive of the masc, 
 which takes the inflection =e« (or =g). 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 bcr ^ne(^t 
 
 S. bie 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 bc§ ^ned^to? 
 
 ber 
 
 3«agb 
 
 Dat. 
 
 bcm ^ne^t 
 
 ber 
 
 Ace. 
 
 bctt ^nec^t 
 
 btc 
 
 
 Kom. 
 
 bie ^ned^te 
 
 PI. btc 
 
 aWogbc 
 
 Gen. 
 
 bcr ^ne^tc 
 
 ber 
 
 ar^ftgbc 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ben ^ned^ten 
 
 bett 
 
 3Jlogbctt 
 
 Ace. 
 
 btc ^nec^tc 
 
 bie 
 
 aRiigbc 
 
 s. 
 
 PL 
 
 3. All masculine nouns ending in c take =jt for 
 all cases of the singular (except nominative) and 
 plural, as: — 
 
 ber ^na»Be: sing, and plural ^naBe=n (see Sbet^fnaBe). 
 
 4. The neuter inflection =e8 of attributive 
 adjectives, not preceded by an art. or pronoun, is 
 sometioaes dropped, especially in poetry. 
 
 lb. Syntax. 
 
 5. If the nominative-sudjeci does not begin a 
 simple sentence, but some other part of it (such as 
 an adverb, the predicative adj., or an objective case), 
 then the order of words is inverted i. e. the verb 
 precedes the nominative-subject; as: — 
 
 ■ 1. (ordinary order): ber ©d^enl (nom.) l^et^t 
 plunger, the butler is called hunger; 
 2. (inverted order): ^unger l^eigt ber ©c^enf, 
 hunger the butler is called. 
 
Lesson VIII. 
 
 53 
 
 V. Vocabulary. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 bie SDtenerf d^af t the dome- 
 stics 
 
 ber ^nec^t the servant, 
 (farm- labourer) 
 
 l^ei^en be called 
 
 ©elBfisgefd^afft Help-your- 
 seK 
 
 Sauf*Bei=3ett 
 bte aJlagb 
 bie Orbnung 
 
 Late-to-bed 
 Up-in-time 
 the maid 
 the order 
 
 bie 8ieinft(^Ieit (the) clean- 
 liness 
 
 ber SDurft (the) thirst 
 
 ber ^unger (the) hmiger 
 
 ber ©d^en! the butler 
 
 ber ^0^ the cook 
 
 ber SbeilEnaBe the noble 
 
 jtoei 
 
 genannt 
 bag ®e6et 
 has ©etoiffen 
 
 page 
 
 the two 
 
 for td^ l^aBe 
 
 besides 
 
 named 
 
 the prayer 
 
 the con- 
 science. 
 
 Note. See the phonetic transcription p. 24. 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 
 I. Pronunciation. 
 
 Bearing on the following Reading Passage. 
 
 1. There' are some vowels which, under the 
 influence of a following e (old i) in the next syllable 
 have modified their sound and are spelled now with 
 two dots (former e) over them, as a, 'i, ii, ciu (= eu 
 or oi). This modification is in German called 'VLxn- 
 laut'. Modified a: & sounds like a in 'hare'; modi- 
 fied o: sounds nearest to English i in 'bird' or e 
 in 'her'; modified u: ii is sounded by pronouncing 
 EngHsh ee with rounded and protruded Hps; and 
 modified au; an is pronounced like English oi in 
 'coin', being the same sound as German Ctt. 
 
54 Methodical Part. 
 
 II, Reading Passage. 
 
 For Beading aloud, Translation into English, and Committing 
 to Memory. 
 
 Wintersnahen. 
 Der Herbst zielit brausend durcli Feld imd Wald, 
 Der Eegen rauschet, der Wind weht kalt, 
 Die Schwalben flogen von dannen; 
 Die Storche eilten weit iiber das Meer: 
 Da ward es im Lande 6d' und leer, 
 Und die traurigen Tage begannen. 
 
 SSin=tct§=na=15en. 
 25er §er6fl gtel^t Brau=fenb burd^ ^elb unb Salb 
 ®er ^e=gen rau^fc^et, ber SBinb toel^t fait, 
 S5te ®d^toaI=Ben flosgen toon ban»nenj 
 ®te ®t3r*d^e dUten toeit ilBer bag 3Jieer: 
 ®a toarb e8 im San=be Sb' unb leer, 
 Unb bte trau*rt*gen S^a*ge Be=gan=nen. 
 
 in. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered viva voce. 
 
 too? where? toaS tipaten...? what did... do? 
 
 1. 3Ber Braufet? 6. SBol^tn (whither) jogen bte 
 
 2. 2Bo jtel^t ber ^erBjl? ©tiirc^e? 
 
 3. SBae t^ut ber Stegen? 7. 2Bie toarb e8 im ?an=be? 
 
 4. S33te toel^t ber SKinb? 8 SBag Be^gann? 
 
 5. SBaS tlpaten bte ©d^toal* 9. SBerjog toeit tjon bannen? 
 
 Ben ? 10. 2So toarb e8 ob' unb leer ? 
 
 IV. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Reading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. Conjugation is said to be strong: if the 
 Preterite Ind. is formed by means of a vowel-change 
 of the root without any inflection ; as : — 
 
Lesson I3i. 55 
 
 " toerb«en, root: toerb, Preterite: id^ toarb (or tojttbe) 
 >. ftieg-en, „ fiteg, „ „ flog 
 
 Beginnsen, „ Begtnti, „ „ Begann 
 
 Strong Preterite Ind. 
 
 Sing. 1. x^ flog I flew Plur, 1. toir fio^'ttl 
 
 2. bu flog^t 2. t^r flog<c)t 
 
 3. er flog 3. fte flogsCtt 
 
 2. Conjugation is said to be weak: if the Pre- 
 terite Ind. is formed by adding the inflection =tc to 
 the root, without changing the root-vowel; as: — 
 
 etl^en, root: eti, Pret.: id^ eiUtt 
 Un^'ettt „ U^, „ „ Unb'tt 
 glctna^en, „ gianj, „ „ granj=tc 
 Weak Preterite Ind. 
 Sing. 1. iH} eil-'U^) Plur. 1. totr etl=tctt 
 
 2. bu etWcft 2. i^r txUid 
 
 3. er dUtt 3. jte dUttn. 
 
 3. German Prepositions take different cases: 
 
 1. Prepositions with an accusative. 
 bur^ (through), fflr (for), ilkr (over) tit (in[to]: 
 
 where to?) 
 2. Prepositions with a dative. 
 tion (from, of), ttttt (with), 5u (to), ttt (in: where?) 
 
 Note 1. U6ei and in take an accusative in answer to the question: 
 whither? or where to? the daiise in answer to: where? as: — 
 ev flog il6et !io8 iDteer (ace.): whither did it fly? 
 es iji tm Sanbe (dat.) i5b' unb leer: where is it dismal? 
 Note 2. Some prepositions are often contracted with the dM. of 
 the def. article, bem, as — 'oxtvx = Don bem, int = in bent, junt = ju 
 bem; and with the accus. of the neuter of tJie def. art. bo8, as — inS 
 = in ba8, &UxS = flfier ba8, int(t)S — burd^ bas. 
 
 >) The inflection »te (Engl, -ed) originally was a Pretepte corre- 
 sponding to tjat, 'did' (from t^un, 'do*); thus i^ eiWe mejiio ie^ eilfen] 
 t^ot, 'I hurry did', 'I did hurry'. On aqcount of this iiiflecticjp foreign to 
 the verbal root, all verbs that admit of it are called weak verbi, the others, 
 forming their Preterite from their own root, are called strong verbs. 
 
56 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 4. A Compound sentence consists of a com- 
 bination of two or more clauses forming a complete 
 whole. It is called, co-ordinate if a clause is joined 
 to a simple or (we call it now) the principal sen- 
 tence by means of one of the so-called co-ordinative 
 conjunctives, such as: — 
 
 itnb and attetn | 
 ober or akr >but 
 
 bcnn for, as fonbcritj (after a negation if 
 
 there's a contrast.) 
 The construction in a co-ordinate compound sen- 
 tence, the principal (or simple) clause of which stands 
 first, is the same in English and German. 
 
 Examples: 
 e8 toarb obe, nnb bte traurtgen Stage Begantten im Canbej 
 eg toarb obe, bcnn (for) bte traurtgen Soge Begannen ttn 
 
 Sanbe, 
 it became duU for the sad days began in the land. 
 
 V. Vocabulary. 
 
 To be committed to memory. 
 SBinterSnal^en, approach of winter. 
 
 jtel^en march, go 
 
 Braufenb roaring 
 
 Sfelb unb SBalb field[s] and 
 
 wood[s] 
 ber Stegen the rain 
 raufd^cn pour down, rustle 
 ber Stnb the wind 
 toel^en blow 
 
 latt cold 
 
 toon bannen away 
 ber (Stord^ the stork 
 
 etien 
 toett ^ 
 baS aWeer 
 ba 
 bag Sanb 
 
 hurry 
 far away 
 the sea 
 there, then 
 the land 
 
 Note. See the phonetic transcription on p. 24. 
 
 i}b'(e) unb leer drear and 
 desolate 
 traurtg -^ sad 
 ber Stag (pi. not modified) 
 the day 
 Begtnnen begin. 
 
Lesson X. 57 
 
 Lesson X. 
 
 I. Pronunciation. 
 
 Bearing on the following Beading Passage, 
 
 1. Pronounce the suffix sfg like i^, unless it is 
 followed by an unaccented e (e) ; thus toentg like 
 've-nich', but toenige like 've-ni-ge'. 
 
 2. Pronounce c (e) before double f, I, m, it, r 
 or any two of these consonants open like e in 
 'herring' (not like e in gre[y]) ; as — ermcff en, cff en, 
 Icrnen* 
 
 II. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Reading aloud, Translation into English, and Committing 
 to Memory. 
 
 Zwei Paare und einer. , 
 
 1. Du hast zwei Ohren und einen Mund; 
 WiUst Du's beklagen? 
 
 G-ar vieles sollst Du horen und 
 Wenig drauf sagen. 
 
 2. Du hast zwei Hands und einen Mund; 
 Lem' es ermessen! 
 
 Zwei sind da zur Arbeit, und 
 Einer zum Essen, Bdokert (itsb-ism). 
 
 gmi ^aa-'Vi unb et=ner» 
 
 1. ®u l^afi jtoet £)pxixi unb et^nen SDtunb; 
 Siaft SDu'g 6e=Ka=gen? 
 
 ®ar bte»Ie8 foUft ®u :^o»ren unb 
 2Be=ntg branf fa^gen. 
 
 2. 5Dn l^aft jtoet ^cinsbe unb et*nen SOtunb; 
 Sern' eS er=tttef=fen! 
 
 3toei ftnb ba jur 2lr*Bett, unb 
 
 @t=^ner jum @f=fen. ssuaert (nss-isee). 
 
68 Methodical Part. 
 
 III. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be asked viva voce. 
 
 tote totel(e)? how many? tooju? what for? 
 
 toa8 nod^? what else? t^utt do. 
 
 1. aBie »tel O^reit l^aBe ^? 5. Ste bid ^aitbe ^ajl bu? 
 
 2. 2Bae l^aBe i^ ttoc^? 6, 2Ba8 l^aBett totr nod^? 
 
 3. aBa8 follfi bu l^oren? 7. Sa8 foafi bu lerneu? 
 
 4. aBagfoCftbubajufagen? 8. 28oju fmb jtoet? 
 
 9. aBoju ift ber eine? 
 
 IV. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Reading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. Most German auxiliary verbs of mood have 
 the same roqjfc in common with the English auxi- 
 /haries of mood; as: — 
 
 id^ — er foil ifernen I — he 
 
 Sing, tc^ — er totll l^oren I 
 — he will hear 
 bu toiHft l^oren (thou 
 wilt), you will hear. 
 
 Plur. totr — fte Juollen l^oren 
 we — they will hear. 
 
 shall, I am (he is) to learn 
 bu foffft lernen — (thou 
 shalt), you shall learn 
 totr — fte follen lernen we — 
 they shall (or are to) learn. 
 
 Note. The singular of the Pres. Ind. of these verbs being an 
 old strong Preterite, the 1" and S'd persons sing, are uninflected, as in 
 English. 
 
 2. The definite article^ 'the' is declined as foUows : 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. - 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. Neut. 
 
 For the three genders. 
 
 Nom. ber . . 
 
 bte . . has>... 
 
 
 bic... 
 
 Gen. beg . . 
 
 ber . . beg . . . 
 
 
 bcr... 
 
 Dat. bent . 
 
 ber . . bent . . . 
 
 
 ben . . . 
 
 Ace. ben • . 
 
 bte . . has... 
 
 
 bte . . . 
 
 Decline 
 
 in the same way, 
 
 but 
 
 change ^aS 
 
 (neut.) into »cg, and =te into »c 
 
Lesson X. 59 
 
 btef'Cr (masc), btef^c (fern.), btef»c8 or bteS (neut.), this 
 jen=cr, ien=c, j;en=c0, that 
 
 toeld^=er, tod^'t, tod^'tS, which, who. 
 
 Notice other contractions with prepositions, 
 
 as: — 
 
 auf (upon) bag = auf S; in (into) boS = iuS (ace. neut.) 
 
 ju (to) ber (dat. sing, fern.) = gur. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 3. Transitive verbs take the od/ea, towards 
 which their action' ox feeling is directed, in the 
 accusative case, in answer to the questions: whom? 
 or what? 
 
 \S^ !^aBe etnen SKunb; — 
 nominative — subject: tt^ (in answer to: who has?) 
 accusative — object: etncn S)?unb (in answ. to: [whom? 
 or] what have you?) 
 
 4. If an Infinitive occurs in a simple sentence, 
 or in a coordinate compound sentence, it is always 
 removed to the end of the sentence; as : — 
 
 bu foCft toteleg l^dren, 
 
 you shall hear many things. 
 
 5. Any G-erman Infinitive with the neuter def. 
 art. ba§ may be used as a substantive and is then 
 equivalent to the English verbal noun in -ing as : — 
 bag @ffen (the) eating. 
 
 The Infinitive is then written with a capital 
 letter. 
 
 V. Vocabulary. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 etn a, an; one bir SWunb the mouth 
 
 etner the one v e^S Beflagen complain of it 
 
 einen is accus ^'^ar bieleS very much, 
 
 bie Ol^ren the ears (many things) 
 
60 Methodical Part. 
 
 J^oren hear 
 
 toenig little 
 
 brauf for barauf to it 
 
 fagen say 
 
 gtoet two 
 
 bie ^citibe the hands 
 
 Note. See the phonetie transcription on p. 24. 
 
 lern' (= terne) learn 
 ermeffen comprehend 
 jur 2lr6ett to work 
 junt ©ffen to eat, for 
 eating. 
 
 Lesson XI. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Reading aloud, Translation into English, and Committing 
 to Memory. 
 
 Ruhe. 
 
 1. Die Abendglocken lauten 
 Den miiden Tag zur Ruh. 
 Die Blmnen auf der Heiden 
 Thun schlafrig die Augen zu. 
 
 2. Die SchiflPe ruhn im Hafen, 
 Die Welle ruht im Meer: 
 
 So geh auch du nun schlafen, 
 Und bange nicht so sehr! 
 
 1. ®te 2t=6enb>gIof=Ien Iciu«tett 
 S)en tttii^ben S^ag jur 9?ul^. 
 S)te S3Iu=men ouf ber ^et^ben 
 Z^rni fd^Iaf=rtg bie Slu^gen ju. 
 
 2, ®te @c^tf=fe rul^n im ^a^fen, 
 ®te 2BeI4e xvi^t tut 3Jteer: 
 ®o gel^ aud^ bu nun [d^k^fen, 
 Unb 6an=ge ntc^t [o fel^r! 
 
Lesson XI. 61 
 
 II. Conversation. 
 
 Questions to be asked in German. 
 
 1. 9Ber Iciutet? G.SBte ftnb bte Slu^men? 
 
 2. 2Bo=ju Iciuten bte ©lodEen? 7. SBo ru^n bte ©d^iffe? 
 
 3. 28en Iciuten fte gur 9tu^? S.SBa? 4ut bte SSeCe? 
 
 4. 2Bae t^un bie S3rumen? 9. Sag foCfi bu au^ t^un? 
 
 5. 2Bo (where) ftnb bte lO.SBaS foUftbuntc^t t^un? 
 
 a3ru=raen? 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Beading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. If two words are compounded the last com- 
 ponent determines the gender of the whole; as: — 
 
 ber 3lbenb — bte ©lode: bie 2l6enb=gl[ode. 
 bag DBft — ber Saum: ber £>Bft=6aum. 
 ba§ ?anb — ber 3Kann: ber ?anb=mann. 
 
 2. In the early stages of the German language 
 weak feminine nouns had the inflection =n also 
 in the oblique cases of the singular; hence such 
 remnants as — ouf ber ^etbe(tt) (dat. sing.). 
 
 3. All monosyllabic neuter nouns take in the 
 genit. singular «[c]§J for the plural they have three 
 forms of declension: 
 
 (1.) the strong inflection «c, as — bag ©d^iff, pi. @(^tffc; 
 (2.) the weak inflection =[e]u, as — bag Dl^r, pi. Oi^rctt ; 
 (3.) the anomalous inflection =er, as — bagSteb, pl.?teber. 
 
 The dative plural takes an »n in addition, ex- 
 cept in (2.) when the whole plural ends in »n. 
 
 The greater part of the neuter monosyllabic nouns, 
 however, follows the anomalous declension under (3.), 
 with the plural in =cr and a modification of the root- 
 vowels, a, 0, u into ft, ij, it. 
 
62 Methodical Part. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 4. Notice the order of words if the verb is in 
 the Imperative mood with a negation. The auxiliary 
 do not being used in German the negation is placed 
 after the Imperative* as: — 
 
 Sing. Bange ntd^t! i 
 
 p, jBangct ntc^t! | do not be afraid! 
 
 Sing. 9el^(e) nti^t! Plur. gel^et (or ge^en ©te) ntd^t! 
 do not go! 
 
 5. The subject or object of a simple sentence 
 may be enlarged by attributive adjuncts (such as ad- 
 jectives or adverbs), as — ber ntJibc S^ag, bte S3Iu=men 
 aitf ber ^eibe. Attributive adjectives are inflected: 
 
 (1.) "With the definite article bcr 'the': 
 Norn. Sing, bet (m.), bie (f.), ts^ (n.), ntiibe 
 
 Ace. Sing, bett (m.) miiben . . ., { ^ ^ "tfth^ - - -' *^^ ^^^ 
 
 , ntube . . .] 
 1 I 
 
 ^ utiibe . . .J 
 
 All the other cases of the adj., singular and 
 plural, take the weak inflection =en- 
 (2.) With the indefinite article etll 'a', 'an', or without 
 any article: 
 Nom. Sing, (eiii) utitbet (masc), 
 (eine) mitbe (fem.), 
 (etn) ntitbeS (neut.). 
 The same inflections are added to the adj. after 
 lettt (no). 
 
 IV. Vocabulary. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 bie 9?u:^(e) rest 
 bie 2l6enbgtoc£e the evening- 
 bell 
 fSuten (weak) toll, ring 
 
 miibe tired N^f^Ififrig sleepy 
 
 bie 53Iuttte the flower 
 auf (dat.) upon, on 
 auf ber§etbe(n) on the heath 
 tl^un . . . 3U shut, close 
 
Lesson XI. 63 
 
 ha9 @d^tff the ship lein no (adj.) 
 
 ru]^(e)n (weak) rest, lie at bte SeUe the wave 
 
 anchor ge^(e) fd^tafen go to sleep 
 bag Sluge, pi. *n, the eye <m^ also, too 
 
 ber ^afen the haven, har-vHBangen (weak) be afraid 
 
 hour 
 
 fo felpr so (very) much. 
 
 Note. See the phonetic transcription on p. 25. 
 
 Lesson XII. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Reading aloud, Translation into English, and Committing 
 to Memory. 
 
 Das Brot. 
 Der Bauer baut mat Mtih und Not 
 Das Korn fur unser taghch Brot; 
 Zum MiiUer wird das Kom gebracht 
 Und feines Mehl daraus gemacht; 
 Der Backer nimmt das Mehl ins Haus 
 Und backt im Ofen Brot daraus; 
 Die Mutter streicht noch Butter drauf, 
 Und wir, wir essen aUes auf. 
 
 S)a§ SBtot. 
 ©er ©aU'Cr Baut mtt Wtu^ unb 9?ot 
 SDa8 ^orn fiir un*fer tcig4id^ SBtot; 
 3um 'Mttl'Ux hJtrb bag ^orn ge=Bra(^t 
 Unb fet^neS We^t ia^vanS ge^ntod^t; 
 S)er 33acfer nimmt ba8 3)te^I tnS ^au8 
 Unb Bocft tm 0=fett SSrot ba=rau8; 
 ®ie 9Kut4er ftretd^t noc^ Sutler braitf, 
 Unb totr, toir ef^fen aUteS auf. 
 
 Note. Pronounce the e in 3KeI|( like a in 'pale' (not like a in 'ail'). 
 
64 Methodical Part. 
 
 II. Conversation. 
 
 Questions to be asked in German. 
 
 1. 3BaS tfynt ber SSamv? 6. SSer nimmt bann (tten) 
 
 2. Ste Baut er fein ^orn? bag STie^I? 
 
 3. SBoju kut er ee? 7. SBol^tn mtnmt er e«? 
 
 4. 2Bo|tn totrb bag ^orn 8. SBae tScft er barauS? 
 
 ge6ra(i^t? 9. SBo BMt er S3rot? 
 
 5. iBaStoirbbarauggemad^t? 10. 2Bag tl^ut bte SKutter? 
 
 11. Sae t^tt toir? 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Reading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 1. Strong and Weak Conjugation: Active voice. 
 The Perfect Participle of strong verbs ends in 
 *Ctl, of weak verbs in «t, with the prefix gc=. 
 
 Characteristics: 
 (strong): flnbctt, Pret. fanb, Perf Part. gc^funb^Ctt; 
 (weak): Bauen, „ Bau^tC, „ „ gc4au4. 
 
 No|e. Mgst strong verbs and a few weak verbs change in the 
 Preterlie and ijie Perf. Participle their root-vowel; as — fttibcn — fanb 
 -^ gef unben — ffltrong) ; (irregular) bringen — 6to(^te — gebrad^t (weak) ; 
 i^rennen — Bronnte — gebratint (weak) bum. 
 Simple Tenses. 
 The only difference between strong and weak 
 verbs exists in the simple tenses of the Active 
 voice, the only distinction in the compound tenses and 
 the Passive voice consisting in the different inflection 
 of the Perf. Participle of strong and weak verbs. 
 Indicative. Subjunctive, 
 
 (strong) Present, (strong) 
 
 S. l.id) finbe Ifind baue (weak) S. finbe [Que(weak) 
 
 2. bu finbeft ""TT"""; ' finbejl '~~^ ' 
 
 3.er ftnbet ll'^s'^^';'- fi«^e °»H 
 
 PI. 1. wirfinben ?%^^P%s.% Pl.finbett l^i 
 
 2. i^v ftnbet i.:M||-^ ftnbet f^ 
 
 3. fie finbeit finbett 
 
Lesson XII. 65 
 
 Note. The e in bu fiiibefi and et ftnbet is inserted after b, t, and 
 nt (preceded by another consonant). 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 S. 1. tc^ fanblfound S.Bautdbuilt S. ffinbc Baute 
 
 2. bu fanbft Bautcft fonbcft 
 
 3. er fnnb Bautc ffinbc 
 P1.1. totr fanbcn P.Bautcit P. ffinbcn 
 
 2. tl^r fanbet Bautct fiinbct 
 
 3. fte fanbcn Bautcn fanbcn 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Present, ftnbcn find — Baucn build. 
 
 Participles. 
 Present, flnbenb finding — Bauenb building. 
 ^^ Perfect, gcf nnbcn found — gcBaut buUt, 
 
 Imperative. 
 Sing. 2. ftnbc! (find thou!) — Banc! 
 Plur. 1 . ftnbcn tail ! (let us find ! — Banen ttltt ! 
 
 2 1^"^^* I rfind ve n — f ^""* ' (friends : plur.) 
 ''•IftnbenSicP ^ ^^ JBaucn ©ie! (stran- 
 
 I gers : siag. u. plur.) 
 
 Note 1. The Pret. Subjunctive is formed from the Pret. Ind. by 
 modifying the root vowels a, o, u (into a, o, ft) and adding — e. 
 
 Note 2. Most strong verbs with the root-vowel e change it in the 
 2iid and 3'* persons sing, of Present Indicative and in the Imperative 
 (2nd p. sing.) into i, or te; most of those with the root- vowel a change 
 it in the 2'^^ and 3"^* pers. sing, of Present Indie, only intO/ft ; as — 
 •^ Pres. Indio. ^ 
 
 Sing. 1. iii ne^tne I take S. bode I bake 
 
 3. bu nimmfi (for tit^mfi) fifidfl 
 
 3. er nimmt ( „ mi)mt) bttdt 
 Plur. 1. wirne^tnen P. batfen 
 
 o fibr nel^mt fbadt 
 
 \@te ne^tnen Iboden 
 
 3. fie ne^men Mitn. 
 
 Imperative. 2. p. Sing, niititnl (take thou, yel) bac((e)l 
 2. p. Plur. ne^mt! (take ye!) bad(e)t! 
 
 Conjugate in the same manner: — 
 
 geben give; ^elfen help; 
 
 gcltett be worth; Berqeff en forget; 
 
 effen eat (of man) freffen eat (of beasts). 
 Pret. ag, frag, bergag, golt, l^alf, gab. 
 
 5 
 
66 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 2. The Passive Voice of verbs is in German 
 formed by joining the auxiliary verb toerben, become 
 (not fein be), to the Perfect Participle of a verb. 
 Thus, throughout the Passive voice, the correspon- 
 ding tense of toerben must be used. 
 
 Preterite Indie, of toerben (strong verb). 
 Sing. 1. t(i^ tourbe (or toarb) Plur. 1. toir toltrben 
 
 2. bu tottrbeft (or roarbfi) 2. Sfyc tourbet 
 
 3. er tojirbe (or toarb) 3. fte toiirbciu 
 Examples: eS totrJj geBrad^t, it is (becomes) brought. 
 
 e8 tuati) „ it was (became) „ 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 3. The Perf. Participle of a compound tense 
 in a simple sentence is, like an Infinitive, removed 
 to the end of the sentence; as: — 
 
 bag SDtel^I totrb gum 3JluHer gcBraiJ^t; 
 t<i^ toiU bad ^elp( gum 'SkvSitx Btingett. 
 
 IV. Vocabulary. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 bet SBauer the peasant 
 Baucn (weak) (buUd), grow 
 SKiil^ unb Slot great difficulty 
 bag ^orn the com 
 un[er (poss. adj.) our 
 tagltd^ daily 
 
 bag Srot the bread 
 ber SKiJlIer the miller 
 Srtngen (P.P. geBrac^t), bring 
 fettt fine 
 
 bag SDZel^I the meal, flour 
 baraug from it 
 
 madden (weak) make 
 ber 23fi(Ser the baker 
 nel^men (strong) take 
 bag §aug the house 
 tng (= in bag, here for in 
 
 fein), into his 
 ber Ofen the (oven), stove 
 bie 3Kutter the mother 
 jireid^cn (strong) lay, put 
 barauf on it 
 e[fen . . auf eat up 
 atteg (neuter) all. 
 
Lesson XIII. 67 
 
 B. 
 
 German Prose. 
 Lesson XIII. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Heading aloud, Translation into English, and Repetition 
 from Memory. 
 
 3)te Seit- 
 25te 3ett t|i unenbfic^. SBtr f))red^en ton 3ol^ren, 
 Momten, SBoc^en unb Stagen. Qebeg Sa^t ^at f«tne 
 gtoiilf 3Jionate,. gtoeiunbfunfgig Sodden ober breil^unbert* 
 fiinfunbfed^gtg Stage, din ZaQ ^at toterunbjtoan^tg ©tunben, 
 unb etne ©tunbe l^ot fed^jig SWtnuten. Sin Qa'^t ^at 
 oud^ bier ^dUn, toeld^e 9a;^re8getten l^ei§en. SDtefeS jtnb 
 ber griii^Iing, ber ©omater, ber ^erfiji unb ber SBinter. 
 
 Note. Pronounce German j (^) like English y in 'yarn' (not like 
 English j in 'jar"), thus ^aiix — lite 'yar'. 
 
 II. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered vivS, voce. 
 
 1. SBte ift bte 3eit? 8. SBic biel ifi jtoei mal 
 
 2. fSott toaS (or toobon) (times) ac^t? 
 f|3re(^en ioir ? 9. SBie biel ift ge^ maUt\ ? 
 
 3. SBte toiel aWonctte ^at ein 10. SBie btel aWtnuten ^at 
 3a^r? bie ©tunbe? 
 
 4. SBie btel Sodden l^at eS? 11. 2Bie toiel ©hmben l^at 
 
 5. Unb toie bielf Stage? ber ZaQ? 
 
 6. SBie biel Stage ^at ein 12. SBie lpei§en bte bier Qa^^ 
 Momt? reSjeiten? 
 
 7. aBie biel 2:age l^at bie 
 2Bod^e? 
 
 5* 
 
68 Methodical Part. 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Reading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 1. The Cardinal andi Ordinal Numerals. They 
 are: — 
 
 The Cardinal Numerals. 
 100 ^unbert 
 200 jhieil^unbert 
 312 brct^uttbert unb jtoiilf 
 625 fc^Sl^unbert funfunb= 
 
 gtoanjtg 
 1000 taufenb 
 2000 jhiettaufenb 
 one million etne 2)?iQion 
 in 1686 im Qal^re |e{^8je^n= 
 ipunbert fe^g unb ac^tjtg. 
 The units precede the decimals in compounds: — 
 21 = etn unb Jtoanjtg (one and twenty), 67 = fieben unb 
 fed^jtg; we may either say fteBen^ei^n (17) or fteBjel^n, 
 jte6enjtg or fieBjtg (70), but feij^jel^n (16). 
 
 Note. @in(8) drops the 8 if followed by another numeral or a 
 substantive; breilgutibett unb eitt SKonu 301 men, cinunbjtBangtfl 21; but 
 im Satire fieBgel^n^unbert unb einS in 1701 ; bie ®tn§ the 1 (all" cardinals 
 are feminine when used substantively). 
 
 The Ordinal Numerals. 
 
 They are derived from the cardinals, as in 
 English, by adding »te (Engl, -th), up to 19 (except 
 the 1st and the S'd), and by adding ^tc from 20 
 upwards to form the even tens. In compounds the 
 tens, and not the units, take the ordinal degree 
 («fte), thus the twenty -first would be the one and 
 twentieth. They are: — 
 
 the 1st i,er erftc the S^d ber brittc 
 
 „ 2Jid „ jtoeitc „ 4th ^^ t,iejtg^ etc. 
 
 1 etn8 
 
 11 elf 
 
 2 jtoei 
 
 12 jtoolf 
 
 3 bret 
 
 13 breigc^tt 
 
 4 bier 
 
 14 bterjcin 
 
 5 fiinf 
 
 etc. up to 19. 
 
 6 fed^8 
 
 20 atoanjtg 
 
 7 jteBen 
 
 30 btet^tg 
 
 8 ac^t 
 
 40 toter^tg 
 
 9 neun 
 
 50 filnf^tg 
 
 10 se^n 
 
 etc. up to 90. 
 
Lessoa XIII. 69 
 
 the 20*11 tier jvuanjigfte the Sl^t ber ein unb brei§tgftc 
 „ 30*11 ^^ bret§tgftc „ 42id „ ^tod unb bterjtgjjc. 
 etc. etc. 
 
 the 1562iid ber fituf^ie^n^mtbert 0d unb fctfjjigftc. 
 2. The indefinite article cttt (masc), ctttC (fern), 
 Ctn (neut.) 'a', 'an' is declined Uke the definite ar- 
 ticle ber, but with some deviations in the nominative 
 and accus. singular. Naturally it has no plural. 
 Masc. Pern. Feut. 
 
 !^ 
 
 o 
 
 1 — ' 
 
 hi 
 
 Decline all the possessive adjectives (placed before 
 a noun or another adj.) like the indef art. ein in 
 the singular, and like ber in the plural with the in- 
 flections sc (nom. and ace), =er (genit.), =en (dative). 
 
 Note. These possess, adjecthes correspond with the personal pro- 
 nouns and are : — 
 
 , S Sing, id), I . . 
 '\ Plur. vnir, we 
 8ing. bu, (thou), you 
 
 Sing. K 
 
 ein 
 
 etnc 
 
 ein a, an 
 
 G. 
 
 eincS 
 
 einer 
 
 etnc§ of a . 
 
 D. 
 
 eincm 
 
 etucr 
 
 eincm to a . 
 
 A. 
 
 etncn 
 
 etnc 
 
 ein a, an 
 
 {8ing. bu, (thou 
 
 !fer, he (masc.) 
 Sing. •{ fie, she (fem.) 
 [eS, it (neut.) 
 
 — mem, my 
 
 — unfer, our 
 
 — betn, (thy), your 
 
 — euer 1 
 
 his 
 her 
 its 
 
 — i^r, their. 
 
 — ffein, h: 
 
 — W, h( 
 
 — (fcin, it 
 
 \ Plur. fie, they 
 
 Exercise. Decline in the sing, and plural: mein (ra.), 
 ntetnc (f), mein (n.); 3^r (m), 3^rc (£), -S^r (n.). 
 There is one gender only for the plural of all pro- 
 nouns. 
 
 3. There are three genders in German, mas- 
 culine, feininine, and neuter. 
 
 To the masculine gender belong: — 
 
 1) male beings and beasts of prey ; 2) most words 
 expressing violence^ strength and greatness in nature ; 
 
70 
 
 Methodical Fart. 
 
 3) the names of the week-days, months, and seasons; 
 they have always ber before them, as — ber SBtnter 
 winter; ber 3}tontag Monday; 4) most derivative nouns 
 in =cl, 'tXL, >ct, =ig, =ing, 4tng; 5) most living beings 
 ending in =c. 
 
 Examples: — 
 
 (2) 
 
 gucBa the 
 
 fox. 
 
 (3) 
 
 ber SRontag Monday. 
 
 2BoIf „ 
 
 wolf. 
 
 
 „ ajJittlDod^ Wednesday. 
 
 Siget „ 
 
 tiger. 
 
 
 „ ©onnabenb Saturday. 
 
 sat 
 
 bear. 
 
 
 „ Sanuar January. 
 
 SKann „ 
 
 man. 
 
 
 „ ge6ruat February. 
 
 abter „ 
 
 eagle. 
 
 
 „ Sugujl August. 
 
 §unb „ 
 
 dog. 
 lightning. 
 
 
 „ ©otniner Summer. 
 
 SBli^ 
 
 
 „ SBtntet Winter. 
 
 2)onnei „ 
 
 thunder. 
 
 (4) 
 
 „ SSiffen the bit. 
 
 $agel 
 
 hail. 
 
 
 „ ©(filUffel „ key. 
 
 ©titrm „ 
 
 storm. 
 
 
 „ tBnig „ kmg. 
 
 S3erg 
 
 mountain. 
 
 (5) 
 
 „ Sftabe „ raven. 
 
 §tmthri „ 
 
 heaven. 
 
 
 „ §ofe „ hare. 
 
 aStnb „ 
 
 wind. 
 
 
 but ble Saube „ pigeon. 
 
 SRegen „ 
 
 rain. 
 
 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 4. If the def. article, a demonstrative pronoun 
 (biefer, jener etc.), or the interrogative pronoun toddler 
 are joined to the auxiliary verb fetn, the pronoun 
 takes the neuter inflection =68 (for the sing, and 
 plural) and does not agree with the noun to which 
 it refers, as: — 
 
 btefcl (not btefe) ftnb bte 3a!^re8jetten. 
 
 IV. Permutation-Exercises. 
 
 For Translation into English and German respectively. 
 
 1) SBtr f:|jred^en i?on bem 2Bte[engrunbe. 2) SBte 
 (what) l^etfett btefe S5Iunten? 3) ©te l^et§en aWatgtoden 
 unb ©d^IitffelBfumen, 4) SDa8 (jfal^r l^at biele SBod^en. 
 5) Ste biel(e) l^at e«? 6) Sd^ gtauBe, eS ^at ffinfjig 
 SBod^en. 7) Sffetn, bu trrft (you are mistaken), e3 |jat 
 3toetunbfunf3ig. 8) 2Ba8 l^orft bu int (= in bem) ©arten? 
 
Lesson XIII. 71 
 
 9) 3d^ l^ore ntuntere ?teber. 10) 3d^ fel^e Bunte 93Iumen. 
 
 11) Ser fitelpt tm §erBfi? 12) S)te ®(^toaI6en flte^en. 
 13) Sae t^ut ber Sanbmann in btefem SI»onat(e)? 14) (Sr 
 1)Pgt 15) Sffiag ergtu^t am ^tmntel? 16) 5Da8 golbene 
 ffrfllrot erglil^t. 17) SBte tft bie Suft unb ber ®iefen<^ 
 grunb? 18) 2)te Suft tfi Blau unb ber SBiefengrltnb 
 gtfinjt Bunt. 19) 35te (Sd^IiiffelBIumen Bliii^en ba (there) 
 unb am ®r28d^,en gtfinjt ber 2:au be8 ilWorgenS. 20) SBu> 
 nen funtmen, bie ^rfd^en reifen, unb SSIumen berBreiten 
 IteBIid^en SDuft. 
 
 Exercise. 
 1) Have you cherries and flowers? 2) "We have 
 grapes. 3) The swallows fly away. 4) The leaves 
 wither and the partridges wander (away). 5) The 
 apples and grapes of [the] autumn attract (us). 
 6) In [the] summer the scythes cUnk and the sheaves 
 rustle in the wind. 7) We had cherries. 8) The 
 violets bloom in the meadows. 9) The snowy fields 
 shine and the skates glide along. 10) The song 
 of the lark ceases, [the] winter conquered. 11) The 
 flood freezes, and no (!eine) merry songs fill the air. 
 
 12) How many months are there in (has) a year? 
 
 13) There are twelve months and three hundred and 
 sixty-five days. 14) What do the bees do? 15) They fly 
 about the meadows buzzing. 15) Who is singing 
 (== sings) ? 1 6) Merry boys are singing in the meadows. 
 1 7) The wind blows and the rain pours down on field 
 and wood. 18) The sad days of [the] winter begin. 
 1 9) The storks and swallows are hurrying over the 
 sea. 20) Spring, summer, autumn, and winter are 
 the four seasons. 
 
72 Methodical Part. 
 
 V. Vocabulary and Phrases. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 ber Stag the day 
 bie ©tunbe „ hour 
 „ SKtnute „ minute 
 „ 3alpre03eit „ season 
 Ipetgen be called. 
 
 bie 3ett pl' =«" {^^^) ti'^e 
 unenbKd^ infinite 
 f^red^en toon speak of 
 bag Qafyx the year 
 ber Wonat „ month 
 bie SBod^e „ week 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 ®ae iji red^t! That's right! 
 
 v ®ut gcmac^t! "Well done! 
 
 - SDaS ge^t. That wiU do. 
 
 S)a8 gel^t ntc^t. That won't do. 
 
 ®a8 iji tjortrepc!^. That's excellent. 
 
 >-■ 9Bie bu totfift! As you hke! 
 
 SDa9 Icigt ftc^ l^oren! That's good news! 
 
 -/ @8 gelingt tl^tn ntd()t! He won't succeed. 
 
 Lesson XIV. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Eeading aloud, translation into English, and Repetition 
 from memory. 
 
 S)ej; ^iutmcl. 
 
 ©er ^immrf ftel^t tote ein ^dt ilBer un8. ^te 
 (Sonne jlra|lt ant S^cjge unb gteBt ben SD^enfd^en tote auc^ 
 ben 3;teren unb ber Slatur Std^t unb Scirme. "Ra^ts 
 leuc^tet ber SWonb unb bie ©terne funfein au8 unnal^Barer 
 ^6^e. S3alb ift ber ^immel i^eiter, ein IBtIb beg grtebene, 
 Balb tji er BebecEt luit 2Bot!en, ber @turm 6rauft burd^ 
 bie ®eftlbe unb ilBer bie Serge, unb bie ganje S^atur 
 
Lesson XIV. 73 
 
 fd^etnt in Slufru^r ju fetti. @tn getoalttger SBec^fel 6e= 
 l^eiifci^t bte 9?atur unb ben SWeufc^en. 
 
 II. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered vivS, voce. 
 
 1. 28ie fte^t ber ^immef 6, Bie ift ber ^imntet? 
 
 ilBer une? 7. SSaS t^ut ber ©tiinn? 
 
 2. 2Sa§ tl^ut bte Sonne? 8. SBie [d^eint bte S^atur ju 
 
 3. 3Bem (to whom) gteBt fetn? 
 
 fte a^firme? 9. 2Ber Bel^errf d^t bte 9?atnr ? 
 
 4. SBae t^ut ber 2»onb? lO.Ser gieBt bent 2)?enfd^en 
 
 5. SSon too funlein bte ©ter* Cid^t ? 
 
 ne? 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Reading Passage. 
 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 Strong Declension of Nouns. 
 
 1. To the strong declension belong masculine, 
 feminine, and neuter nouns: — 
 
 Characteristics: genit. sing. =(e)§ (except fern.). 
 nom. plur. =e, or uninflected. 
 
 1) Most monosyllabic masc. nouns, especially 
 those denoting living beings, as ber ©tord^ stork; 
 
 ?, fox; ©ol^tt, son; also ber ©tnrnt the storm. 
 
 2) Most monosyllabic femin. nouns (but the whole 
 sing, is undeclLned), as — bie Sl^t axe, ^anb hand, 
 fjfluft fist, ©tabt town, 
 
 3) All masc. and neut. nouns ending in =cl> 
 'tXii 'CXt and the diminutives in -^tXi and =Ietn, as 
 — ber SSoget bird, ber 33iirger citizen, baS SSeild^en 
 violet. These take no inflectional =e, thus in the 
 genit. sing. =§ (not-eS) and no --t in the plural (in 
 the dat. pi. =n only unless the nomin. sing, ends in n). 
 
74 Methodical Part. 
 
 4) Masc. nouns ending in *af, *tg> 4tng; as ber 
 3Rcnat month. 
 
 Note. All these nouns change their root-vowels a, o, u into a, B, 
 il in the plural except some masc. nouns, such as — ber Sag day, ber 
 @(i)u5 shoe, bet SKonat month. The dat. sing, of monosyll. masc. and 
 neut. nouns may have an optional =e. 
 
 (1) Masculine. 
 Smg-u/ar. 
 
 Nom. biefct ©turm tliis storm. 
 
 Gen. biefcS ©turm^cS of this storm. 
 
 Dat. btefcm ©turtn(=e) to this storm. 
 
 Ace. btefctt ©turtn this storm. 
 
 Plural. 
 Nom. btefc (Sturnt'C these storms. 
 G-en. btefcr ©turm=c 
 Dat. btefcn ®turm=en 
 Ace. btefc ©turnt'e 
 
 (2) Feminine. 
 
 Sing. K btefc ] Pl'M-r. btefe %'!l^'t 
 
 G. btefcr I ^^ ^j^-^ ^^^ btefcr %X:'^''t 
 
 D. btefcr I * btefen Sttyt=ctt 
 
 A. btefc j btefc i[yt*c 
 
 (3) Neuter. 
 
 Sing. N. t)iefc§ SSetld^en Plur. btefc 
 G. btefcS SSetl4ett=S biefct 
 
 D. btefcm SSettc^en btefcn 
 
 A. btefcg SSeilc^en 'btefc 
 
 2. Many adverbs are formed by means of the 
 genitive sing, of masc. nouns; as — 
 
 (ber) 3)brgen morning: adv. morgenS in the m. 
 „ 2I6enb evening: „ aBenbg in the e. 
 ^ „ Slitfang beginning: „ anfangg at the b. 
 
 SBetld^en 
 
Lesson XIV. 75 
 
 After the analogy of these masc. nouns na(|t8 
 at night is formed with an g, although bie 'RoiSiji^ 
 the night, is feminine; gen. ber S'Zad^t. 
 
 3. Some masc. nouns, originally ending in =c, 
 as — ber ^riebe, are now not only declined weak 
 by adding =tt in all cases, but take, besides, an --^ 
 in the genit. sing.; thus — beg ^riebe^nS. The no- 
 minative sing, has an optional =n, ber fjrtebe(n). Such 
 nouns are — ber ©ebanfe thought, ber ©lauBe belief, 
 ber 9'iame name. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 4. Abstract nouns generally have in G-erman 
 the de/. article before them, especially if dependent 
 on another noun, when the possessive case should 
 be rendered by the genitive with the de£ art., as — 
 etn 93ilb bc§ S^rteben^ a picture of peace, 
 etn ©efii^I ber (genit. fem.) ©l^re a "feeling of honour, 
 ber 2D?enf(i^ man; genit. beg iWenfci^en of man; 
 
 ace. ben SWenf^en man. 
 
 IV. Permutation-Exercises. 
 
 For Translation into English and German respectively. 
 itdung. 
 
 1) -®te tootten ntd^t lernen. 2) ^orft S)u ben 
 2Btnb raufc^en? 3) 3a, id^ ^ore auif ben 9?egen. 
 4) ^^ \fi)Xit gar toteleS. 5) S)a8 !2anb tft ob unb leer, 
 bie ©d^toalBen unb ^tord^e flogen iiBer baS SWeer unb 
 letne 93tume Blitl^t auf bem 2Bte[engrunb, 6) 3c^ Be= 
 Ifage S)etne traurtge SlrBett. 7) SBtr tuollen ntd^ts brauf 
 fagen; e« tft %\x traurtg. 8) SSiUft ®u l^ijren, toaS td& 
 fage? 9) SBtr ^aBen letne 3ett, biefee gu lernen. 10) 
 SDu foCfl e« ntd^t l^firen; bn Btft mube; ge^ gur JRn^e! 
 11) aSir ^aBen jtoei Slugen, gtoet D^ren unb etnen SDlunb. 
 
76 Methodical Part, 
 
 12) Bex ift ttiiibe unb fd^fafrta? 13) Sl^uft ®u bie 
 2(ugen gu? 14) 3a, tc^ Bin felpr ntitbe. 15) Ste ift ber 
 ^immel? 16) 35er |)immel ftral^It tote ein Stib beg 
 §rieben8. 17) (£r ift Bebetft mit Solfen unb ^orfl S)u? 
 bee SJegen raufd^t* 18) 3n unna^Barer ^ol^e fnnfein 
 bie ©terne ber '>fla^t. 19) Sim Stage gieBt un8 bie 
 ©onne Sic^t. 20) SSBer l^at mein IBilb? 
 
 Exercise. 
 1) I have your picture. 2) Do you hear the 
 storm and the wind? 3) No stars sparkle in the 
 sky; it is covered with clouds. 4) The sun and 
 the moon give light to man and beast. 5) "We have 
 a tent in our garden. 6) From an unapproachable 
 height I see the stars sparkle. 7) The sun shines 
 and gives us light and warmth. 8) An all-power- 
 ful change rules man and nature. 9) These (bteiS) 
 are sad days ; the whole land (country) seems to be 
 in an uproar. 10) Who gives us light? It is very 
 dark. 11) Men and beasts are afraid. 12) They are 
 tired and sleepy and go to rest. 13) These beasts go 
 to sleep; they are tired. 14) [The] storm roars 
 over meadows and mountains ; the whole [of] nature 
 is in an uproar. 16) Who is afraid? The storm ceas- 
 es, and the stars sparkle in the sky. 16) The 
 whole [of] nature is like an image of peace. 17) We 
 are sleepy and go to rest. 18) At night I see the 
 stars and the moon. 19) Men and beasts are in the 
 fields ; the sun shines and the sky is blue and bright. 
 20) You have no flowers in the garden; the fields 
 and meadows are drear and desolate. 
 
Lesson XIV. 
 
 77 
 
 V. Vocabulary and Phrases. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 ®er ^tmmel the sky, hea- 
 ven! 
 fte^en stand 
 Xoit like 
 
 baS ^dt the tent \- 
 
 liBer (dat, & ace.) over, 
 above 
 unS (dat. & ace.) us 
 tie (Sonne the sun 
 ftra!^Ien (to) beam 
 ber Sag the day 
 geBen (3"^^ p. ^jieU) give 
 bag Std^t the light 
 bte 3Barme the -warmth 
 tote auc^ as well as 
 baS Xkx the animal 
 bte Slatur nature 
 m^tS at night 
 leud^ten shine 
 ttt SfJionb the moon 
 
 ber ©tern the star 
 fnnfeln glitter, sparkle 
 unna^ar unapproachable, 
 bie ^ol^e the height 
 'talh — Balb now — then 
 l^eiter serene, bright 
 bag 23tlb the picture, image 
 ber i5rtebe[n] peace 
 J^Bebetft covered 
 bte 2Bo{fe the cloud 
 ber ©turm the storm 
 braufen roar, rages 
 baS ®efi(be the meadows 
 ber SSerg the hill, mountain 
 ganj entire, whole 
 fd^etnen seem 
 ber Stufrui^r uproar 
 getoatttg all-powerful 
 ber SBet^fel the change 
 Bel^errfc^en rule. 
 
 ^maS tft log? 
 ©afiir banfe ic^! 
 SBae toirb benn ba«? 
 SarauS totrb nt(|t«. 
 SBaS ift au8 il^m getoorben? 
 aBag faat ®tr eln! 
 S)er 9?ame fSHt inir nid^t ein. 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 What's the matter? 
 No, thank you! 
 What is that to be? 
 Nothing will come of it. 
 
 What has become of him? 
 
 How dare you! 
 
 I can't recall the name. 
 
78 Methodical Part. 
 
 ®ae berftei^t ftd^ bou [eI6ft! That's a matter of course ! 
 2)a8 berftel^t ftc^. That is understood. To 
 
 be sure. 
 
 Lesson XV. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 for Keading aloud, Translation into English, and Repetition 
 from Memory. 
 
 2)ai$ 9tog nnb bev Stitu 
 @tn ^naBe ritt einft auf etnem 9ioffe, aU ein ©tier 
 3U bem legteren foste: „®d^anbe! id^ tourbe letnen ^naBen 
 auf ntir bulben unb t^m ge^ord^en." „2lBer td^," i>erfe|te 
 bag ebte 8fo§; „benn eS tourbe ntir toentg @]^re Bringen, 
 etnen ^naBen aBjutoerfen." SDamtt eilte ba« 9Jo§ batoon 
 unb ber ^uaBe jaud^gte bor greube unb Cuft. 
 
 11. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered vivS, voce. 
 
 1. SBaet^at einft ein ^naBe? 5. SBie tear bag «Pferb? 
 
 2. aSer f^jrad^ mit (to) bem 6. Sag tooEte eg nid^t (would 
 
 Sii^ffe? it not) t^un? 
 
 3. 2Bag fagte ber Ie|tere? 7. Sarum ntd^t? 
 
 4. aBemtoiirbeber®tternid^t 8. SBaS ti^at bag 9?og bann 
 
 ge^ord^en? (then)? 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Eeading Passage. 
 / a. Aeejdence. 
 
 1. SBenig little, biel'^uch, ettoag'^sbme, may be 
 used as attributive adjectives but are undeclined 
 before nouns in the singular; as: — 
 
 toenig ©i^re, btel @l^re. 
 
 2. Strong and Weak Conjugation; Active Voice. 
 
Lesson XV. 
 
 79 
 
 Strong and weak verbs form the compound tenses 
 by means of the auxiliary verbs l^aBett 'have', fctn 
 'be', and bierbett 'become' (English 'shall' of compound 
 tenses). 
 
 Note 1. The auxiliary verb ^afien is weak; but, \y assimilation, 
 it changes the root-consonant b into t in the Preterite Ind. and Bubj. 
 i^ ^otte (instead of ^ob='te); and drops the b altogether before the in- 
 flection t in the 2"* and S^a persons sing, of the Present Indicative, 
 thus — t4 ^obe, bit ^aft (not gab^jl), er %<A (not ^ab«t), but keeps it in 
 the Perf. Part. ge>^abt. The other tenses are regular. 
 
 Note 2. The auxiliary verb tverben is strong; Pret. tc^ wutbe (or 
 an older form is used in the sing, ic^ morb), Perf. Part, gewotben; the 
 Perfect tenses are conjugated with fet«, as — id^ bin getootbeit I nave 
 become, i^ war geworben I had become; tc^ Wiirbe getootben fein I should 
 have become. 
 
 Note 3. The auxiliary verb feitt is strong, but is composed of 
 three roots: Pres. Ind. i(S) bin; Pres. Sulg. iti) fei; Pret. Ind. Of hjor 
 (originally waS, from old mefen; cf. English 'I was'). Its Perfect tenses 
 are conjugated with fein; as — ici^ bin ge^wefen I have been, ii) mar ge= 
 ttjefen I had been, i(i^ mcrbe getocfen fctn I shall have been. 
 
 strong: ftnbcn find, Pret. fanb, Perf Part, gcfunben 
 weak: Baucn build, „ haute, „ „ gcBaut. 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 They are for the strong and weak verbs alike, 
 the Perf. Participles only being different. 
 
 Indicative. , Subjunctive. 
 
 \-^ Future Indefinite. 
 
 Sing. 1. td^ ttJcrbe 
 
 2. bu toitft 
 
 3. er,fte,eSJ»tt;b 
 Plur. 1. toir toerben 
 
 2. i^x toerbet 
 
 3. |te toerben 
 
 Sing. 1. id^ lucrbc 
 2. butoirft 
 
 etc. 
 
 I shall S. id^ JBcrbc 
 
 find (or bu taJcrbcji 
 
 build) er toerbc 
 
 ftnbcn P. toit toerben 
 
 (or i^x toerbet 
 
 fioucn) fie toerben 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 gcfunben S. i^ tticrbc 
 
 (orgel5aut)l5a6cn bu merbcft 
 I shall have etc. 
 
 found (or built) 
 
 ftnbcn 
 
 (or 
 
 kucn) 
 
 gcfunben 
 
 (or ge= 
 Baut) 
 
 l^aBen 
 
80 
 
 Methodicil Part. 
 
 v/ Present Perfect. 
 
 Sing. 1. i^ l^nk 
 2.bu |afl 
 3. er |at 
 
 Plur. 1. toirl^aBen 
 
 2. t^r l;a^}t 
 
 3. fie ^a6enj 
 
 I have found S. t(^ j^aBc 
 bu laBcft 
 
 
 gefuubcn 
 
 (etc.) 
 
 er ]|o6e 
 P. h)trl^a6en 
 
 fte ^abeti 
 
 gefunben 
 
 (etc.) 
 
 Past Perfect (Pluperfect). 
 
 Sing. 1. tc|) l^attc 
 2.bu ^atteft 
 3. er l^atte 
 
 Plur. 1. hjir l^attcn 
 
 2. i^r ^attet 
 
 3. jte fatten 
 
 I have found S. {(^ ^Mte 
 bu mteft 
 
 gefunben 
 
 (etc.) 
 
 er 
 
 P.totrtattenffl'^M'^n 
 ti^r l^cittet j 
 fie i^atten J 
 
 ^ Present. S. tc^ Jnijtbe 
 bu toiirbeft 
 er tofttbe 
 PI. h)ir hsitrben 
 tl^r toiirbet 
 fte hjitrbeu 
 y Past. S. id^ tDfirbe 
 bu toiirbeft 
 etc. 
 
 Conditional IVIood. 
 
 I should find 
 
 ftnben 
 
 I should have found 
 
 gefunben l^akn. 
 
 Perfect Infinitive, -^ 
 
 gefunben (in) ^ahtn (to) have found. 
 gckut (ju) IjaBen (to) have built. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 3. A compound sentence ie subordinate if its 
 
 clauses are joined together by one of the so-called 
 
 subordinative conjunctions, or a relcUive pronoun (or 
 
 relatvie adverb). All the parts of a verb are then 
 
Lesson XV. 81 
 
 removed to the end of the clause, the auxiliary verb 
 of a compound tense being last of all 
 Such conjunctions are: — 
 jc>a§ that. ate when (of past time). 
 
 V^toetl because. toenn when (of future time); 
 ->' ba as, since. if 
 
 Examples. 
 
 (a) al« ber ^naBe auf bem Sfioffe ritt, 
 when the boy rode on the horse. 
 
 (b) ba er ntit bem ^naBen gef:|)tB^en l^attc, 
 as he had spoken to the boy. 
 
 Note. The subordinative eotyimetional clause supplies either the 
 siibstamtive, adjective, or adverb of the principal sentence; and the re- 
 lative clatise takes either the place of the subjeot-nom/inative of the 
 principal sentence, or the object, or an attribute. 
 
 IV. Permutation-Exercises. 
 
 For Translation into English and German respectively. 
 
 1) 2)a8 dii>% unb ber ^naBe ftnb miibe. 2) S)tefer 
 ©tier tear auf bem SBtefengrunbe, 3) @« ift etne ©c^anbe, 
 bte« ju tl^utt. 4) SBenn bu milbe Btfi, (fo) gel^ gur 8iu^! 
 5) ^omm', toenn bu auf bem 9toffe retten toittft! 6) S)te 
 ©oune ftral^Ite am $tmmet, al8 bte ^naBen auf bem 
 Serge toaren, 7) SSer totH auf bem 9ioffe retten ? 8) @r 
 rttt auf bem 9toffe, al« ber ©turm burd^ bte ©eftlbe 
 BrauPe, 9) 2Btr toaren auf bem Stefengrunbe , al« ee 
 %x^linQ tear unb bie Stumen Bliil^ten. 10) SBoffen Be= 
 beef ten ben ^tmmel, unb ber Stub raufd^te im SauBe. 
 11) (Sr fagte eg mtr, aU e8 ^erBft tear. 12) Sm 
 (z= tn bem) ^erBft toerloelfen bte tinmen unb bag 2auB» 
 13) ^firft bu, tote ber (Sturm im SauBe Brauji? 14) ©e 
 tft toortreffttc^, bag bu gu un« fommen totflft, 15) SDa8 
 tear gut gemac^t, mein ^uaBe! 16) 2)te IBenbgtocEen 
 
82 Methodical Part. 
 
 fSuten, toenn bte ^naBeti jur fftn^e gel^en. 17) Sir 
 lul^ten nld^t, toett totr fo fel^r Bangten. 18) ®e^t f^Iafeit, 
 benn e8 ift fd^on fel^r f^cit! 19) SBir t^vm bie 2(ugen 
 ju, toeil toir f($tSfrtg ftnb. 20) ®er SKenfc^ ift miibe; 
 Slugen unb D^xen rulpen; e8 ift Slad^t. 
 
 Exercise. 
 1) Man has his hands to work (with). 2) At night 
 men and beasts rest. 3) The boy rode over the moun- 
 tain when the storm was raging (roared). 4) Flowers 
 and leaves wither ia [the] autumn. 5) In winter all 
 (the whole) nature seems to rest. 6) The stars sparkle 
 at night from an unapproachable height. 7) The sky 
 is serene and stands above us hke a blue tent. 
 8) "We covered the whole tent with flowers. 9) The 
 boy said to the bull: it is a shame to throw me. 
 10) That would have done you much honour. 11) They 
 have suffered much, but they enjoy (have) now (jefet) 
 rest and peace. 12) Now the sun shines and gives 
 us Hght, then the sky is covered with clouds. 
 
 13) Don't be afraid; there is nothing the matter! 
 
 14) "What has become of the boy and the horse? 
 
 15) I can't recall the boy's name. 16) That will 
 not be taken as granted. 17) The latter would not 
 put up with it. 18) No, thank you! repHed the boys 
 and began to hurry away. 19) It is aU right, you 
 are to (shall) go now. 20) What are these flowers 
 called? 
 
 Y. Vocabulary and Phrases. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 bag 9?o§ the horse >|reiten (Pret. rttt, P. P. ge» 
 
 ber ©tier the bull | ritten) ride 
 
Lesson XV. 
 
 83 
 
 einfi once 
 
 ber le^tere the latter 
 fagen say 
 ©c^anbe! shame! 
 intr (dat.) me 
 bulben suffer, bear 
 i^m (dat.) (to) him, it 
 gel^ord^en obey 
 bamtt thereupon 
 batoon away 
 
 Ph 
 @e tji fc^on jtemfid^ fijjcit. 
 
 @« tfi !art Ipeute. 
 
 @§ tear geftern fel^r toarm 
 
 berfe^en (weak) reply 
 ebet noble 
 
 toenig little 
 
 bte dl^re (the) honour 
 Brtngett bring, do 
 
 a6(ju)toerfett (to) throw 
 jaud^jen (weak) shout 
 bor t^reube unb Sufi with joy 
 and delight. 
 
 rases. 
 It is getting rather late. 
 It's too early yet. 
 It is cold to-day. 
 It was very warm yester- 
 
 5Da8 ift nt(^t fo iool^r, tote 
 eg fd^eint. 
 SBte gut, ia% bu lamft! 
 ©d^on gut! 
 SBa8 foff bas! 
 SBJte ]pei§t er? 
 
 That is not so true as it 
 appears. 
 How kind of you to come! 
 Very well! All right. 
 What do you mean (by it) ! 
 What's bis name? What 
 is he called? 
 
 Lesson XVI. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Eeading aloud, Translation into English, and Eepetition 
 from Memory. 
 
 2itbe etttrS <Btot^t§. 
 
 @tnjl toiitete etn fitr^terltd^er SBtavb ju ®elft in 
 
 ^oCanb. SDie glammen ergitjfen aud^ etnen Sturm, auf 
 
 beffen S5ad^ etne ©tord^famtUe tool^nte. Uuifonfl toerfud^te 
 
 ber Slfte, fetne Sungen toegjutrageu, ®te toareu ju fd^toer 
 
 6* 
 
34 Methodical Part. 
 
 fiir fetnen @d^naBeI. ^'i^ev unb yo^ex totrBette bie fjfamme 
 unb entjitnbete je^t [d^on ba« 9left. ®er treue ©tord^ 
 fanf auf fetne ^tnber, Bebetfte fte tnit fetnen gfiigeln unb 
 berBrannte lieBer nttt il^nen ju 2l[d^e, aU fte ju toerlaffen. 
 
 II. Coaversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered viva voce. 
 
 1. 2Ba8 to)iiteteeinfltnS)eIft? 6. 2Bie ioaren fte fitr fetnen 
 2.aBo Kegt (is) SDelft? (S«*naBeI? 
 
 3.SBa8 ergriffen bie giant* 7. 2Ba8 t^at bie glantme? 
 
 men? 8. SBaS t^at ber ©tord^? 
 
 4. SSer tool^nte ba? 9. 3Bomit (wherewith, with 
 5. 2Ba8 toerfud^te ber alte what) Bebedte ex feine 
 ©torc^? ^nngen? 
 
 10. aSaS t^at ex lieBer? 
 
 in. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Reading Passage. . 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. The comparative of adjectives is formed by 
 adding =tt, the Superlative with ber (bie, or baS) by 
 adding =ftc, as in English. The root vowels a, o, u, 
 however, are mostly changed at the same time into 
 a, b, itj as: — 
 
 tief, comp. tiefet, superl. ber tiefftc; 
 toartn, „ toormcr, „ „ toftrmficj 
 toeit, „ toeiter, „ „ toettcfic 
 Notice further: '^od) (high), comp. pl^et, superl. 
 ber l^ijd^'jie. 
 
 Note. The Inflection of the superlative is =eftc after b, t, or a si- 
 bilant; as — bet tDcit^efte, ber jilt^efte (the oldest). 
 
 The conjunction 'than' after a comparative is nt§ ; 
 the foUowing verb is removed to the end of its clause. 
 
 The adverbial superlative with aui and the in- 
 flection =jicn (dat. sing.) of the adj. is used with 
 
Lesson XVI. 
 
 85 
 
 verbs only, especially after fetn (be), and must not 
 be joined to a noun ; as : — 
 
 boS p^jie ^aue, the highest house; 
 but bag ^au8 tft MX p^ftcn, the house is highest. 
 
 2. Weak Declension of Nouns. 
 To this declension belong masculine and femi- 
 nine nouns: — 
 
 (1) All masculine nouns ending in e, as: — ber 
 ^tiaBe (boy); ber Ortec^e (Greek); ber ^afe 
 (hare); ber S3ote (messenger); ber Sllte (adj. 
 with ber or a pronoun ending in ^er), the 
 old man. 
 
 (2) Most fem,inine nouns of more than one syll- 
 able; as: — bte 3lo[e, bte 2Biefe, bte Serd^e, 
 bie Slutne, bte ^irfc^e, bte ©d^toalBe, bte S^rauBe. 
 
 Characteristics : 
 whole sing, (except of femin. nouns, and nom. sing, of 
 masc. nouns) =n; 
 whole plural of masc. and f em. nouns «tt. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Singular. 
 K jener ^nafie that boy. 
 G. jeneg , 
 D. jenem \ ^naBen 
 A. jenett ^ 
 
 Plural. 
 
 K jette 
 
 ^itaBen 
 
 G. jener 
 D. jenen 
 A. jene 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 bte[e 
 biefer 
 biefer 
 biefe 
 
 btefe 
 btefer 
 btefen 
 biefe 
 
 this flame, 
 glamme 
 
 ^tammen 
 
 Note. Some masculines originally also ending in e have now 
 dropped it in the nominative sing, but are still dechned as above. — 
 These are: — 
 ber aWenfd^, man (kind), ber ®raf, the count 
 
 g'j the prince, 
 §Mr, Mr., the lord, 
 
 §elb, 
 
 hero. 
 
86 Methodical Part. 
 
 All cases (sing, and plur.) take *en : but the singular of §err (see gelb= 
 Ijttt) takes =tt only. 
 
 3. Many simple verbs are compounded with 
 prefixes. If the latter are no longer used by them- 
 selves, they term with the simple verbs the so-caUed 
 inseparable compound verbs; such inseparable prefixes 
 
 are: cttt=, cr=, ucr=, 5cr=, ge^ nti§=, l^mterv tt>tbcr=, and 
 tnjll=. These inseparable compound verbs do not 
 admit of the prefix 8c= in the Perf. Participle: 
 as — Bebecfett, P. P. BebecEt; toerlaffen P. P. berfaffeti; 
 ju Bebedfen to cover; ju Derlaffen. 
 
 Most of the other prefixes are prepositions or 
 adverbs with which simple verbs form the so-caUed 
 separable compound verbs; if ju 'to' occurs beforfe 
 an Infinitive of such a separ. comp. verb, it is in- 
 serted between prefix and simple verb; as — 
 
 Infinitive: toeg+tragen carry away; but; 
 toeggtttragen to carry away. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 4. Adverbs are generally placed after a simple 
 verb; as: — er fal^ tl^n oft he often saw him. 
 
 IV. Permutation-Exercises. 
 
 For Translation into English and German respectively. 
 iifiiing. 
 1) |)0rteft bu bte SlBenbglode IMen? 2) 9tein, 
 tc^ l^aBe fte' nt($t^ ge^iirt. 3) Set ISutete bte ©locEe? 
 
 * The sign + indicates a separable compound verb. 
 
 ^ German nouns being either masculine, femmme, or neuter, Eng- 
 lish 'it' referring to them must be rendered by et (masc), fie (femin.), 
 eS (neut.), when nominative; by i^u (masc), fie (fern.), tS (neut.) when 
 
 ' The negation nic^t should be immediately placed before the In- 
 finitive or Perfect Participle of a compound tense. 
 
Lesson XVI. g? 
 
 4) ®etn ©ruber l^at fte gelSutet. 4) ©el^fi bu jefet (now) 
 jur dluj? 5) 9tetn, td^ Bin md^t fii^Icifrtg. 6) Sa8 
 toiitete tm ^afen? 7) gin fiird^terltd^er S3ranb toiitete 
 ba? 8) SDte[e ^tnber miiffen gu SBett ge^en; fte fmb 
 mitbe. 9) SDer ©tord^ lantt fetne Sungeii ntd^t toegtragen. 
 10) SBaS berfud^te ber alte Wtam? 11) (gr berfud^te 
 bie ^tnber toegjutrogen. 12) 35elft tfi eine @tabt (town) 
 tn §oQanb. 13) i[uf bem SDad^e etneS ZnxmeS tool^nte 
 elite ©tord^familte. 14) SDie fjfatnmett toiitetett in ber 
 ©tabt. 15) SBaS ergriff ber ©ranb? 16) @r ergriff 
 aud^ jenen S^urnt. 17) 2)a« tft umfonft; bn fannft baS 
 ^inb nid^t toegtragen. 18) 5Die %iammen toerben ba« 
 9?efi be« ©tord^eg anjiinben. 19) ©iefer @tord^ ift fe^r 
 treuj er Bebedft feine Sungen mit feinen fjfiigetn. 20) ®er 
 alte ©tord^ toirb mit feinen ^inbern ju Slfd^e DerBrennen, 
 ba er fte nid^t fcerlaffen toitt. 
 
 Exercise. 
 1) We rested, as we were very tired. 2) Who 
 is that boy? 3) He is my brother. 4) Those ships 
 lay at anchor in the harbour. 5) Can you ring (toll) 
 the beU? 6) Yes, I often used to ring (rang) it. 7) Men 
 and animals rest, for they are tired. 8) We (have) 
 heard the evening-bells. 9) A terrible conflagration 
 raged in the village. 10) The flames seized a large 
 tower. 11) These storks have their nest on the 
 roof of the house. 12) The old stork covered its 
 (his) young [ones] with its (his) wings. 13) The 
 swallow tried to carry away its young [ones]. 14) They 
 are too heavy for its beak. 15) You will hear it, 
 but you are to say little. 16) Who lived on the 
 roof of the tower? 17) A family of storks that 
 (which) had their nest there. 18) The flames rose 
 higher and higher and seiedz the nest of the faithful 
 stork. 19) The old stork and its (his) young (ones) 
 
88 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 burned to ashes. 20) We are not afraid, and we 
 will not leave the town. 
 
 V. Vocabulary and Phrases. 
 
 To be committed to memory. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 bie CteBe (the) love 
 ber ©tord^ the stork <- 
 tofiten rage 
 
 fiird^terltc^ terrible 
 ber S3ranb the conflagrar- 
 tion 
 ju (of place) at, in 
 bte ^lantme the flame ^ 
 ergretfen (Pret. ergrtff) seize 
 ber %mva. the tower 
 beffen whose 
 
 bag S)ad^ the roof 
 bte ©tord^famifte the family 
 of storks 
 dwell, hve 
 
 tDol^nen 
 utnfonfi 
 tierfuc^en 
 ber mtt 
 
 ba8 Qunge the young one 
 toeg(ju)tragen (to) carry off 
 f(i^iDer heavy 
 
 ber (Sd^naBel the beak 
 
 ^0^ high 
 
 totrSeItt whirl, rise 
 bag S^eji the nest 
 anjiinben kindle 
 je^t fd^on already 
 ftnfen (Pret. fani) sink 
 Bebeden (weak) cover 
 fte (ace. pi.) them 
 ber O^fitgel the wing 
 terBrennen (weak) burn 
 lieBer rather 
 
 in vain tlpnen (dat. pi.) them 
 
 try ^u Slfd^e to a,shes 
 
 the old [stork] Heifaffen leave, desert. 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 ^ann td^ btr l^elfen? 
 SBar ee bir toon 9'Ju^en? 
 S35a« Begtnnft bu nun? 
 
 33ea(^te, toaS er fagt! 
 
 (SteB aS}t\ 
 
 25ae ift mtr ganj gleid^! 
 
 Can I help you? 
 "Was it of any use to you? 
 What are you going to 
 do now? 
 Pay attention to what he 
 says! 
 Mind! 
 That's all the same to me! 
 
Lesson XVII. 89 
 
 ©aS fiimmert mici^ xd^t tm 
 gertngflen ! 
 
 2Bte gut toon tl^in! 
 
 That does not trouble me 
 in the least! I do not 
 mind this! 
 How good of him! 
 Be that as it may! 
 
 WiaQ ba« fetn toie ee totif 
 
 Lesson XVII. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Reading aloud, Translation into English, and Repetition 
 from memory. 
 
 9iul^tg Uegt ©tabt unb Sanb. 3D?enf(^ rntb Ster 
 fd^fafen; bod^ ^)Io|Kd^ ertoac^eti bte ©cinger be8 SSalbeS, 
 frol^ erfd^attt il^r Sieb toon §Bufc^ unb S3aum, unb aud^ 
 ber 3Jien|d^ ertoad^t unb neueg SeBen unb neue SlrBeit 6e= 
 gtnnt. |)ter toerben bte genfter geof^net, bort bte Spren 
 ber ^fiufer aufgef(i^Ioffen, neugtertg fd^aut ber ajJenfd^ 
 l^tnetn in ben SKorgen unb tft erfreut, bag tl^n ber S5ote 
 be8 ^oge« gefunb unb i^etter Begrii§t, S)te ©tragen ftnb 
 nid^t mel^r leer; fte erf^atten toom ©ef^srad^ ber 9ta(|Barn 
 unb toon bent Sadden frofer ^inber, toeli^e in bte ©d^ule 
 eWen. 
 
 II. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered in German. 
 
 1. 2Bte ttegt ©tabt unb Sanb ? 8. Sag off net ftd^ ? 
 
 2.mn fd^rSft? 9.2BaStoirbaufgefc^l[offen? 
 
 3.aBer ertoad^t \>Wi^? 10. SBa« tl^nt ber a)ienfc|? 
 
 4. Sag erfd^allt? ll.SBorflBer (at what) ijl 
 
 5. SSon too erfc^attt bae frol^e er erfreut ? 
 
 Sieb? 12.Ste ftnb bte ©tragen? 
 
 6. Ser ertoad^t noc^ (else)? 13. Sotoon erfd^aHen fte? 
 
 7. ^a8 Begtnnt er? 
 
 14. So^in (whither) etlen bie ^inber ? 
 
90 Methodical Part. 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Eeading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. Declension of strong Adjectives and Pronouns. 
 
 If the genitive sing, ends in --tS, and the nominative 
 plural in 't, the declension of any declinable word is 
 said to be strong; if these two cases (or the plural 
 only) end in =cn, the declension is said to be weak. 
 All attributive adjectives (i. e. those joined to a 
 noun), and adjectives used substantively (i. e. by them- 
 selves), are declined strong (like ber, bie, ba?) if not 
 preceded by an article or pronoun. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Masc. Fern. 
 
 Neut. one gender only. 
 
 K alter, altc. 
 
 altcg, old . . olte 
 
 G. alteg (or =en), alter, 
 
 oltcS (or »en), alter 
 
 D. altcm, alter, 
 
 altem, altcit 
 
 A. altcti, altc, 
 
 alteg, arte. 
 
 Note. For the sake of euphony the genit. sing. (masc. and neut.) 
 may end in =en (instead of »e8) to avoid the two final sibilants of two 
 successive words; thus — nom, olter greurib, genit. a(te§ (or alten) greunbe8. 
 
 Examples : 
 
 Masc old man, olter 2Wann, or merely Sllter. 
 
 Note. If an adj. is used substantively, it is written witii a capital 
 letter. 
 
 Fern, new street, neu=c ©trage. 
 Neut. old house, alt=c0 ^wai. 
 S3e!annt, known, bertoanbt, relative; retfenb, tra- 
 velling: SSertoanbtc, relatives; er fagte e8 SSertoanbtctt 
 unb 58e!annten (dat. pi.), he said it to (his) relatives 
 and acquaintances. 
 
 9Jetfenber, traveller; 9?etfenbc, travellers. 
 AWpronouns ending in =er (masc.) are also declined 
 strong as above. They are : — the demonstrative and 
 relative pronouns (or adjectives), such as — biefer, e, eS 
 
Lesson XVU. 91 
 
 (this), toeld^er, e, e6, (which, who), etc.; and )^q posses- 
 sive pronouns (when not directly used before a 
 noun) such as — metnct, e, e8, (mine), tJ^rct, e, eS 
 (hers, theirs); further: etncr 'one of ' (with genit.), and 
 fetner 'none of (with genit.), 
 
 2. There is another anomalous declension of 
 masculine nouns with strong genit. sing, in *g, and 
 the whole plural weak in »jt. 
 
 In this manner are declined: — 
 ber S^od^Bar, neighbour ber S3auer, peasant 
 „ SSetter, male cousin „ ©tac^el, sting 
 „ ©ttefel, boot „ ^antoffef, slipper, 
 
 genit. sing. beS SRnd^Bar^g (the other cases un- 
 inflected) ; all the cases in the plur. — 5>?ac^Barn. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 3. The object of a verb is often expressed by 
 a case with a preposition, as: — 
 
 erf(^aQen (weak) toon (dat.) resound of; lac^eti (weak) 
 ilBer (ace.) laugh at ; as — er lad^te uBer ben ^naSen. 
 
 IV. Permutation-Exercises. 
 
 For Translation into Englisb and German respectively. 
 
 U6unB. 
 
 1) 3c^ fann bir ttid^t l^etfen. 2) SSer fann utir 
 ^dfen? 3) SBa« foQ er nun Begtnnen? 4) SBaS foil er 
 Bead^ten? 5) @r foil Beac^ten toaS ic^ fage. 6) ®ie 
 g^enfter unb 2:^iiren toerben geiiffnet. 7) So8 fagte er 
 barauf? 8) @r fagte: Beac^te, toaS bu Begtnnft! 9) SDa8 
 tfl il^m ganj gletd^ unb !nmmert il^n ntc^t. 10) SBtr 
 fd^Iafen be8 9lad^t« unb ertoac^en am (in the) SWorgen. 
 
 11) SDae 2)0Tf erfii^aate »on bent ©efange ber ^inber. 
 
 12) Sa8 liimmert ba8 mt(^? 13) Sir finb erfreut, am 
 SWorgen neue SIrBett ju Begtnnen. 14) ^aBen ®te bag 
 
92 Methodical Part. 
 
 ®ef^3rct(^ ber 9ia^iatn gel^ort? ©te ftnb fel^r neugtertg. 
 15) ®er 2Rorgen tji ber fro^e Sote be« Sageg. 16) 2«en[^ 
 unb Ster ftnb erf rent, ioenn ber SWorgen ertoad^t unb 
 SSufd^ unb S3aunt bom ©efange ber ©anger be8 2BaIbe8 
 erf^aCt. 17) 2Bte ru^tg ber Satb Itegt! SDte Stere 
 f(i^Iafen, ©aunt unb S3ufd^ ftnb leer unb rulpen. 18) Gft 
 btr bteS ganj gletd^? 19) 2Ba8 liimntert bag nttd^! WtaQ 
 ba8 Cteb fein tote eg totC» 20) SDte ^tnber, toefc^e am 
 aWorgen in bte ©d^ule eilten, toaren je^t miibe unb 
 f^Iafng. 
 
 Exercise. 
 1) Will you help me? 2) He cannot help me. 
 3) How bad of him! 4) How good of you! 5) He 
 wiU not help you. 6) We will help him. 7) Will 
 you help the boy (dat.)? 8) We began to open the 
 doors of the house. 9) I will pay attention to 
 (ace.) my work. 10) That may be so. 11) That's 
 all the same to (dat.) the boy. 12) Do you 
 (®te) mind this? 13) Not in the least. 14) Is 
 it of use to him? 15) Man wakes up and begins 
 to work. 16) These beasts sleep in [the] winter. 
 17) The singer was very curious to see it. 18) Did 
 you hear the conversation of the neighbours and 
 of the children who were hurrying (hm-ried) to 
 school? 19) They have unlocked the doors and 
 opened the windows. 20) These children laughed 
 at the boy's song (render by: the song of the boy 
 [genit.]) and hurried to school. 
 
 V. Vocabulary and Phrases. 
 
 To be committed to memory. 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 ber SDZorgen the morning liegen (strong) lie (of place) 
 
 rul^tg quiet, calm 
 
 bie ©tabt the town 
 
Lesson XVII. 
 
 93 
 
 bae I2anb the country 
 fd^Iafen (strong) sleep 
 -boc^ but 
 
 ^)Io^Itd^ suddenly 
 
 ertoac^en (weak) wake up 
 bet ©anger the singer 
 ber SBalb the wood 
 frol^ joyful 
 
 bag Steb the song 
 erfd^aCen (weak) resound 
 ber SSufc^ bush 
 begtntien begin 
 neu new 
 
 bag SeBen the life 
 bie SIrBeit the work, la- 
 bour 
 Ipier — bort here — there 
 off nen (weak) open 
 ba^^enfier (Latin: fenestra) 
 the window 
 bie 2^1pur[e] the door 
 
 Phr 
 ^aji bu je^t ^erien? 
 ^etn, aSer nfid^fie Soc^e. 
 SBel^en ^a^ fangen fte on? 
 
 9JJorgen ilBer a^t 5£age? 
 SBie lange bauern fte? 
 
 3m ganjen bret SBod^en? 
 
 2Bte gel^t eg beinem ^reunbe 
 
 ^eute? 
 
 3c^ ban!e, er Beftnbet ftc^ 
 
 toteber ganj toolpl. 
 
 auf +f (^Itegen (Pret. f c^Io^ auf, 
 P. P. aufgef(^Ioffen unlock 
 bag ^au» (pt ^aufer) the 
 house 
 neugterig curious(ly) 
 fc^auen (weak) peep 
 (l^inein) in into 
 erfreut pleased 
 ber 33ote the messenger 
 gefnnb healthy 
 Bfegriigen (weak) greet 
 bie @tra§e the street 
 leer deserted, (empty) 
 in bie <Sd^uIe to school 
 Inciter bright 
 
 ge^en go 
 
 bag ©ef^jrSd^ the conver- 
 sation 
 ber 5Rac^6ar the neighbour 
 bag Sa^en the laughter 
 
 ases. 
 
 Have you hoHdays now? 
 No, but next week. 
 What day do they com- 
 mence? 
 To-iQorrow week. 
 How long will they be 
 (last)? 
 Three weeks altogether. 
 How is your friend to-day? 
 
 Thank you, he is quite 
 well again. 
 
94 Methodical Part. 
 
 Lesson XVIII. > 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Beading aloud, Translation into English, and Repetition 
 from Memory. 
 
 SSKuttetftoIs. 
 Sine Same aitS ^am^anien, toel^e fel^r retd^ unb 
 auf ^om^} unb @taat fe^r ettel tear, tnad^te etneS SCagee 
 etnett Sefud^ in 9?om 6et Cornelia, ber Beriil^tttten iD?utter 
 ber jungen ®racc^en. ^ter pxa^Ut jtc tntt tl^ren loflBaren 
 SDtantanten unb 3utoelen auf eine auffaCenbe SBetie unb 
 erfnc^te Cornelia, tl^r io^ auc^ tl^re 3utoelen ju getgen. 
 9lis in biefem SlugenBHcEe Cornelias ©ii^nc in bag ^ivn' 
 nter traten, fagte bie SWutter jiofj ^u ber SDante: „5DiefeS 
 jtnb meine Sntoelen; ber Bejie ©d^ntud, ben i^ Beftge." 
 
 Note. Pronounce ©rocd^en = 'grfichan', and Sutoeten = 'yuve'lan'. 
 
 II. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered tIvS. voce. 
 
 1. Ser tear etnfi 6ei Cornelia 5. Somit ^sral^Ite bie 2)atne 
 
 3um (on a) Sefu^? au8 ^am^sanien? 
 
 2. SBorauf (of what) tear fte 6. 2Bie ^jral^tte jte bamit? 
 
 eitel? 7. BaS erfuij^te fte tornelta? 
 
 3. Ser tear Cornelia? 8. SBer trat in biefem 2lugen» 
 
 4. SBo lebte fte? BUct inS 3iwmer? 
 
 9. Ba» fagte Cornelia flolj? 
 
 ni. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Reading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. Declension of weak Adjectives (ind. Participles), 
 and Pronouns. 
 
 All attributive adjectives (i. e. placed before a 
 
Lesson XVIII. 95 
 
 noun) are declined weak, if preceded by an article or 
 pronoun. 
 
 Characteristics: 
 All cases of the singular (except the nom. & 
 the /em. andneut. ace), and ihe whole plural tsk.e ttVl. 
 
 Note. As for the inflections of the nominative and the fern, and 
 neut. aceusative of the adjective they depend on the preceding article 
 or pronoun. For the sake of euphony either the article or the follow- 
 ing adjective takes the sonant »ct; in the nom. sing, masculine, and 
 »el in the nom. & ace. neuter. Thus, as the def. article, the demonstr. 
 md relative adjectives, (such as — bcr, btefer, hjelc^er) end in this 
 sonant »er and cannot drop these inflections, the following adjective 
 takes the inflection «e only; on the other hand after the possessive 
 adjectives which do not end in «cv, (such as — mein, betn, also eucr, 
 unjer, [with root — er] the following adjective takes the full inflections 
 'tv (nom. masc), and «e§ (nom. & ace. neut.), the feminine retaining ^e. 
 
 Examples: 
 
 2)er |unge Wtann (the young man); bie junge ^rau 
 
 (the young woman), baS junge ^inb (the young child). 
 
 Singular 
 Masc. Fern. 
 
 N. bcr junge 5D?ann, bic junge 
 
 Gr. bee jungen 3Jlanne8, ber jungcn 
 
 D. bem jungcn S(Kann[e], ber jungen 
 
 A. ben jungen Maim, bie junge 
 
 Neut. 
 ]Sr. bag junge ^inb, 
 Gr. bee jungen ^tnbee, 
 D. bem jungen ^tnb[e], 
 A. bae junge ^inb. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 (alike for the three genders.) 
 
 N. bie ] 
 
 Gr. ber jungen 2)?cinner (dat. SRiinnern) — 
 
 D. ben | iJrauen — ^inber (dat. ^tnbern). 
 
 ^rau, 
 
 A. bie 
 
96 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 Singular. 
 The adj. with a possessive adjective. 
 
 Masc. Fem. (nom. & ace.) 
 
 Nom feiit junger ^reunb; feinc jungc ^reunbtn; 
 Neut. (nom. & ace.) 
 fcitt jungeg ^tnbj 
 The other cases of the singular and the whole 
 plural of the adj. are the same with any pronoun; — 
 i. e. they take =cn. 
 
 2. To the feminine gender belong: — 
 
 (1) Female beings, except baS SSetB the woman; 
 bag 3D?cibc^en the maid, girl; bog ^rciufetn Miss. 
 Thus all nouns ending in =in formed from the 
 mascuHne are also feminine. 
 
 (2) Most things or beings of a refined character 
 in nature, such — as most trees, plants, in- 
 sects, and singing birds. 
 
 (3) Most names of rivers. 
 
 (4) Most derivative verbal nouns ending in =e, *ll, 
 
 and =t, further in »ct, =l§Ctt, =fctt, ^^^ft, *ttng. 
 
 Examples : 
 the mother. (3) bte @tbe 
 
 „ daughter. „ Sonau 
 
 „ wife, woman. ^ 2;jcnife 
 
 ,, countess. 
 
 (1) bte SKutter 
 „ Kod^ter 
 
 (2) bte Eeber 
 
 the Elbe. 
 „ Danube. 
 „ Thames. 
 
 cedar. 
 
 lime-tree. 
 
 fir-tree. 
 
 oak-tree. 
 
 beech. 
 
 rose. 
 
 tulip. 
 
 thistle. 
 
 bee. 
 
 ant. 
 
 thrush. 
 
 lark. 
 
 nightingale. 
 
 Except: — 
 bet 
 
 Qetn 
 „ iKain 
 ,, aiedar 
 
 „ gjti 
 
 „ aKiffifflpt 
 (4) bte Sflge 
 
 Bhine. 
 Maine. 
 
 Neckar. 
 Nile. 
 
 Stnbe 
 
 „ SContie 
 
 „ (gid^e 
 
 „ fflu^e 
 
 „ atofe 
 
 „ 2;ul))e 
 
 „ Stfiel „ thistle. „ Sagb 
 
 „ S3tene „ bee. „ Suc^t 
 
 „ Slmeife „ ant. „ ©d^ttft 
 
 „ ®toffel „ thrush. „ grei^eit 
 
 „ Sftdtie „ lark. „ grcuubfii^oft 
 
 „ 9ta(^ttg«U „ nightingale. ^ „ Stibttttj 
 
 3. The two feminine nouns — tie aJhitt?t 'the 
 mother', and bte Sod^ter 'the daughter' take in iile 
 
 lie, false- 
 hood. 
 chaSe. 
 discipl|pp. 
 writing, 
 liberty. 
 frienasI^P- 
 
Lesson XVIII. 97 
 
 plural no inflection (except =n in the dative), but 
 modify their root- vowels; thus — 
 
 pi. bte mutex, bte Zb^tev; 
 
 all the cases in the singular are unchanged. 
 I). Syntax. 
 
 4. A noun added to another noun (or to a 
 pronoun) in order to qualify or explain it, is said 
 to be m apposition to the preceding noun or pro- 
 noun, with which it must in German agree in gender, 
 number and case. 
 
 Feminine. 
 N. torndta, bic SRutter . . . 
 Gr. ber Cornelia, bcr SWutter... 
 D. (Bei) ber Cornelia, bcr SKutter . . . 
 A. Cornelia, bic 3Jlutter. 
 Masculine. 
 N. ^arl, tnetn g'reunb Charles, my friend. 
 Gr. ^arifi, tttetnci ^Jreunbc^ ofCharles, [of] my friend. 
 D. ^arl, metnent|5reunb[e] to Charles, [to]my friend. 
 A. ^arl, metnctt S^reunb Charles, my friend. 
 Example : id^ f dptdte ba8 ®ud^ ^arl, bcm greunbe betnee 
 S3ruber«, I sent the book to Charles, your 
 brother's friend. 
 
 5. All expressions of time with the indef. article 
 ettt are put in the genitive case in answer to: When? 
 "With a pronoun, however, or in answer to: How long? 
 they are always in the accusative. 
 
 Examples: — 
 er font einCi? 2;age8, he came one day: when? 
 er BlieB einen Stag, he remained [for] one day: how long? 
 
 IV. Permutation-Exercises. 
 
 For Translation into English and German respectively. 
 iitnng. 
 1) ®ie junge SDame ift retd^. 2) ^^xt WlvXizx l^at 
 
 7 
 
98 Methodical Part. 
 
 totele ©iamanten unb Qutoelem 3) 3Ber tft btefe Same? 
 4) Ser toaren bte ®racci|iett? 5) @8 (they, at the be- 
 ginniiig of a sentence) tear en eble 9t6mer (Romans), 
 bte <Bo^nt ber ^ornelta. 6) SDtefer SD?ann tft auf <Btaat 
 unb ^ont^) fel^r eitel. 7) 9Ber mad^te Bet ber Cornelia 
 etnen S3efud^? 8) Sine retdpe SDante au8 ^ant:|janten, 
 toeld^e auf ilpre S)tamanten fel^r ettel tear, 9) ®te Beften 
 3utoeten ber Cornelia toaren il^re jtoet ^naBen. 10) SDtefe 
 SKutter ift auf (ace.) ben ®e[ang il^rer Scd^ter fel^r eitef, 
 11) ®er arme ^naBe l^atte im ®orfe etnen ®tamant(en) ge= 
 funben, toelc^en (ace. object) bte retd^e Same au8 ^oU 
 lanb uerloren (lost) ^atte. 12) 3^ toerbe (eS) meinent 
 9?a(|6ar fagen, ba'§ bu feinen fd^Bnen ©efang ge^firt l^aft. 
 13) SSte lange totrb btefer retd^e SDiann nttt f etnen 3)ias 
 manten ^jral^len? 14) S^x l^aBt Bet (dat.) euereni fjreunbe 
 letnen S3efud^ gemad^t, 15) SBtfffi bu betne abutter er^ 
 fud^en, bieS Sud^ anpnelpnten (accept)? 16) 3n btefem 
 StugenBItde l^aBe td^ tetne 3^*; toiQfi bu tnorgen lomnien? 
 17) ®er Be^e @c^mu(f, ben etne abutter Beft^t, ftnb il^re 
 ^inber. 18) SDtefe 3Jiiitter l^aBen tl^re ^tnber toerloren. 
 19) 3)tefe SDamen, toeld^e ba8 ®e^pv&^ ber ^tnber l^orten, 
 finb je^t miibe unb fd^ISfrtg. 20) 2Btr l^aBen ba« neue 
 S3uc^ betnee ^reunbee Betounbert, ai9 totr Bet unferem 
 'SHai^iax einen S3cfud^ ntac^ten. 
 
 Exercise. 
 1) The children of that lady are very sleepy. 
 2) Have you been playing (= have you . . . played) 
 the whole morning? 3) Who heard the song of 
 these two ladies? 4) The ladies found many flow- 
 ers when they were in the meadows. 5) You 
 must ask (fragen) your neighbour, if you may ride 
 on this horse. 6) I cannot find the (ace.) diamond, 
 (which) you (have) lost. 7) These boys come from 
 Delft, a (dat., apposition to Delft) town in Holland. 
 
Lesson XVIIl. 99 
 
 8) The man seized tlie boy, who tried in vain to escape. 
 
 9) We bought a tent which we shall use in summer. 
 
 10) It appears, that your friends did* not see the 
 terrible conflagration. 11) It is a shame to ride 
 over the meadows. 12) It is night, you must go 
 to bed, children. 13) My flowers have withered, for 
 the dreary days of winter have begun. 14) To-day is 
 the warmest summer day which'* we have had'. 
 15) This mountain is much higher than the tower 
 of our town. 16) The highest house in your village 
 is smaller than the smallest house in our town. 
 17) I saw the old man's messenger (== the messenger 
 of the old man), who sent your (dat.) daughter 
 these nice flowers and cherries. 18) These swallows 
 have their nest on (auf, dat.) the tower of the 
 church. 19) I cannot carry (take) away these grapes, 
 as I have no time now. 20) We were pleased to 
 see your brother, for we had not seen him (il^n) the 
 whole week. 
 
 V. Vocabulary and Phrases. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 aWutterfioIj. Motherly Pride. 
 
 SSoxixi^m noble 
 retd^ rich 
 bie ©ante the lady 
 anS (dat.) from 
 ^am^anten Campania (a 
 Roman province in Italy) 
 
 etiten S3ef ud^ nta^en Bet (dat.) 
 pay a visit to 
 Cornelia Cornelia 
 Beriil^tttt famous 
 bie ©racc^en the Gracchi 
 (afterwards great Roman 
 tribunes) 
 
 1 'to do' as auxiliary verb is not used in German; translate 'did 
 see' = 'have seen'; 'see' fe^en, Pret. fa^, P. P. gefe^en. * The relative 
 pronoun must not be omitted in German. » 'Have', see p. 79, note 1- 
 
 7* 
 
100 
 
 Methodical Part, 
 
 ettel auf (ace.) vain of 
 ^omif) unb ®taat stately- 
 pomp, pomp and splen- 
 dour 
 et^ud^ett (weak verb) ask 
 tl^r (dat.) [to] her 
 ber SDiamant the diamond 
 taS Sntod (yuve'l), pi. 3u= 
 toelen, jewel 
 
 jetgen (dat. of person) showv'^duf en (weak) buy- 
 in bte[em 2lugenMt(fe at this.'ieriaufen (weak) sell 
 moment>/^6rand^en (weak) use 
 ^jral^Ien boast 
 bie ^trd^e the church. 
 
 fagen (weak) say 
 ftolj (tuf (ace.) proud of 
 gut, Beffer, ber Befte good, 
 better, best 
 ber @d^mnd the ornament 
 BetoUttbern (weak) admire 
 
 entlaufen escape 
 
 in has ^mmet treten enter 
 
 the room 
 treten, Pret. trat, P. P. ge= 
 
 treten step 
 
 Note. ®er ©tatnant is declined by adding sen in all cases of the 
 singular and plural. 
 
 'Phrases. 
 
 Q^ fel^e tl^n jeben Stag. 
 
 S3ei Za^ unb Bet '^fta^t. 
 
 S)er Xa^ Brid^t an. 
 
 ©8 ift f(^on ganj Stag* 
 
 Sag filr Sag. 
 
 Stage iiBer fe|e 16} tl^n felten. 
 
 3Bir fanien l^eute SDiorgen an. 
 @ute ^ai^t, mem ^reunb! 
 ^ottiraen ©ie l^eute SlBeub? 
 06) lomme ntorgen S'Jad^* 
 nttttag. 
 
 I see him every day. 
 By day and by night. 
 The day breaks. 
 It is quite day-light. 
 Day after day. 
 I seldom see him in the 
 day-time. 
 "We arrived this morning. 
 Grood night, my friend! 
 Shall you come to-night? 
 I will come to-morrow 
 afternoon. 
 
Lesson XIX. 101 
 
 Lesson XIX. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Keading aloud, Translation into English, and Eepetition 
 from Memory. 
 
 @tn armer SfJeger grii^te etnfi tm SSorBetgel^en ben 
 amertfanifci^en ^raftbenten Sefferfon, anb btefer Ie|tere er* 
 totberte ben Otu§ nttt ber grogten ^i^eunblid^feit. 2K8 ein 
 reic^er ^aufmann, bet gerobe ntit bem ^rSftbenten ^pxad}, 
 bteS bemerfte, fagte er gu i^xtt bertounbert: „9Bte fjnnen 
 ©te etnen folc^en ntebtigen Wlen^i^en gril^en? 3c^ toitrbe 
 bag nimmer t!^un." „SDa8 Bebaure i^ fel^r," entgegnete 
 ber ^prctftbent gelaffen; „i^ mod^te jebod^ toon ntemanb, 
 au(^ nid^t toon einem Sieger, an ^ofKc^Ieit ilBertroffen 
 toerben." 
 
 n. Conversation. 
 The Questions to be answered vivt, voce. 
 
 1. SSaS tjat einji ein armer SReger? 
 
 2. 2Bte ertotberte ber ^raftbent ben ®ru§? 
 
 3. mit toem f^)rad^ ber ^Praftbent? 
 
 4. SBoriiBer tear ber ^aitfmann bertounbert? 
 
 5. SBag fagte er gum ^rafibenten? 
 
 6. 2Ba8 toiirbe er felBfi tl^un? 
 
 7. SBa8 anttoortete ber ^praftbent? 
 
 8. SSon toem tooQte er ntc^t iiBertroffen toerben? 
 
 9. SBer toar ^efferfon? 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Eeading Passage. 
 a. Accideuce. 
 
 1. Declension of loan-words.* These words also 
 are either strong or weak. 
 
 1 These are foreign words and are mostly talcen from the Latin, 
 Greek, and French languages; most of them have the strong accent 
 on the last syllable; as ^Sriifibent ^ prazidfot. 
 
102 Methodical Part. 
 
 ^rciftbetttcit. 
 
 All those ending in =al, -an, *aft, »r (with the 
 accent on the final syllable) are declined strong; 
 they take =g (or *eg) in the genitive sing., and «c 
 in the plural (dat. plur. »en). Some change the 
 root-vowels, a, o, u in the plural into ft, o, it. 
 S. N. ber ©eneral (the general) PI. K bte ©enerfttc 
 G-. be« ©enerall Gr. ber Oenerftle 
 
 D. bem ©eneral D. ben ©enerfilctt 
 
 A. ben Oeneral A. bte ©enerftlc. 
 
 All the other loan-words, however, not ending 
 in sol, *an, =oft, »r, are weak, and take =cn in all 
 cases of the siag. and plural (except in the nom. sing.). 
 Sing. N. unfer ^rciftbetit Plur. N. unfere ] 
 G.unferee | ^v, „„ G-. unferer 
 
 D. unferem [ ^^J'^ D. unferen 
 
 A.unferen J A. unfere 
 
 2. Notice that comparatives are subject to the 
 same rules of declension as other adjectives. 
 
 Thus, — (1) ber le^tc 2;ri6un the last tribune 
 cin letter SSerfud^ a last effort 
 (2) ber le^terc the latter; 
 The comparative of gro§ 'large', 'great' is grower; 
 the superl. ber gro§tC (instead of grofeeftc). 
 
 3. The Passive Voice being in German formed 
 with toerben, the English 'be' should be rendered by the 
 corresponding tenses of 'become' toerben; thus: — 
 
 be surpassed liBertroffen tterbeit, 
 the Infinitive; in a compound tense the Infinitive 
 of the auxiliary verb is the last word in the clause. 
 
 4. The six auxiliary verbs of mood are con- 
 jugated weak and are almost identical with the Eng- 
 lish modal-verbs, but, while the corresponding Eng- 
 lish verbs have only two tenses, the G-erman modal- 
 verbs are fully conjugated. The singular of the 
 
Lesson XIX. 
 
 103 
 
 Present. Indie, being an old Preterite the l^t and 
 3rd persons are uninflected, as in English 'I can' 
 — 'he can'. 
 
 They are: — 
 
 foUcn: 
 
 Pres. 
 
 (1) With the root- 
 vowel which 
 never admits of 
 modification. 
 
 (2) "With the root- 
 vowel 8, the modi- 
 fication oi which 
 remains, how- 
 ever, only in the 
 Pres. Infinitive, 
 in the Plural of 
 the Pres. Jndic, 
 in the whole Pres. 
 and Pret. SubJ., 
 and in the Imper.; 
 in other tenses it 
 becomes o. 
 
 (3) With the root- 
 voweliithe modi- 
 fication of which 
 remains like 8 in ■' 
 (2) ; in other ten- 
 ses it is changed 
 into u. 
 
 Ind. td^ — er foltt- 
 I am to, I shall. 
 Pret. Ind. t(^ — er fottte 
 I was to, oughttojshould. 
 tOoKen: Pres. Ind. '\^ — er toill 
 I wiU, I wish 
 Pret. Ind. tdf> — erttotttc 
 I would, I was willing. 
 
 fiinttCn : Pres. Ind. td^ 
 
 I can, ] 
 
 Pret. Ind. \^ - 
 
 I could, I 
 
 tnfigcii: Pres. Ind. id 
 
 Pret. Ind. id^ 
 
 — er !ctttt 
 
 '. am able. 
 
 — erfonntc 
 
 was able. 
 
 I — er tnag 
 
 I may. 
 
 - er tno^te 
 I might. 
 
 bftrfcn: Pres. Ind. id^ — er barf 
 
 I am allowed. 
 
 Pres. Ind. td^ — er butftc 
 
 I was allowed. 
 
 tttiljfcn: Pres. Ind. id^ — tn«^ 
 
 I must, I am obliged. 
 
 Pret. Ind. id^ — er ntu^tc 
 
 I was obliged, I had to. 
 
104 Methodical Part. 
 
 The other tenses are regular and weak; thus 
 the Perf. Participles are — gefofft, getuottt, %timxA, 
 gemo^t, gebnrft, gctnup; as — td^ l^aBe gefonnt I have 
 been able. 
 
 Note. The Preterite Subjunctive \&i rcCii)\t (of jnBgen) haa the mean- 
 ing 'I should like to' ; as — 
 
 ic^ ntod^te baS md|t t^un, I should not like to do this. 
 
 Notice that 'to' before an Infinitive is in German omitted after 
 these aox. verbs of mood, and after laffett 'let', 'leave'; as — er fofite 
 lonttnen, he ought to come. 
 
 5. The Demonstrative adjs. and pronouns. 
 
 They are declined strong, like the def. art. ber 
 (see p. 58, 2): — 
 
 l&tcfer (masc), biefc (fem.), btefeS (neut.) or bteS this. 
 jcttcr, jenc, jenc? that. 
 
 folder, fol^c, folc^cs such a. 
 
 or etn fold^cr, etne foli^c, etn fold^cg declined weak like 
 
 an adj., but without a plural. 
 jebcr, jebe, jebcg (no plural) each, every. 
 
 bcHelBe, bie^elBe, bae^felBc L^^^^^T®" , 
 bernfimlUe, bienatnUd^c, bag namKd^cp^f^f ^^^'^^ 
 
 Note. There is another form for 'such a', fotdb etn, fold^ etne, foli^ 
 ein in which fold^ is indeclinable and etn is the indei. article; as Hiere is 
 no plural of fol^ ein, the plural of folder is used instead. 
 
 6. The Relative Pronouns. 
 
 They are also declined strong like the demonstr. 
 pronouns, and are: — 
 
 twcli^cr (m.), toel^c (£), toefd^cg (n.) \ , , . , 
 bcr, bte, ba« (with enlarged genit. sing., Iw 
 
 and genit. & dat. plur.) J 
 
 Sing. K ber, bie, ba§ PI. K bte who 
 Gr. bcffen, beren, beffcn Gr. bcrcn whose 
 D. bem, ber, bem D. bcncit to whom 
 
 A. ben, bte, ba« A. bte whom 
 
 These enlarged forms of ber (which is likewise 
 used as a demonstrative pronoun) are also used in- 
 
Lesson XIX. 105 
 
 stead of the regular forms of toelii^er if followed by 
 a case different from the demonstrative or ante- 
 cedent; as — 
 
 ba« SSui^y bcffctt (gen.) Stutor (ace.) i^ fel^r gut fenne, 
 
 tft fe^r unter^attenb, 
 the book the author of which I know very well, 
 
 is very entertaining. 
 The verb after these relative pronouns is put 
 at the end of the clause (see p. 80, 3). 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 7. Observe that co-ordinative clauses with «nb 
 joined to a subordinative clause, become part of 
 this clause and are subject to the subordinative con- 
 struction; as — 
 
 ber ^aufmann, toel^er mit tl^in ^ra(| uttb btes Bcracrftc . . . 
 the merchant who was talking to him and noticed this . . 
 
 IV. Permntation-Exercises. 
 
 For Translation into English and German respectively. 
 
 ttfiuttg. 
 
 1) ®te fonnen l^ier !eine ©tamanten laufen; ©te 
 ntiiffen in bte nSc^jie ®tra§e ge!^en, ba toerben ©te einen 
 Cabett (shop) mtt 3)tamanten ftnben. 2) ®ie jtoet ®tac^m, 
 toeld^e tm Sa^x !^unbertbreiunbbret§tg unb l^unbertetnunb* 
 jtoanjtg toor Sl^rijit ®e6urt (B. C.) leBten, toaren ebfe 
 dtomev. 3) ®te ntiiffen (6et) metnem g'reunbe eineu 
 93efuc^ ntac^en; er totrb erfreut (pleased) fttn, @te ju 
 fei^en. 4) 2)te ®onne, toeld^e j[e|t fo l^ell fira^It, totrb 
 Bolb (soon) toon ben SBoIfen berbecEt fetn.^ 5) OBgteid^ 
 bte ©onne l^eute ntc^t fc^eint, fo ifi e« boc^ ganj toarm. 
 6) 3^ ^abe ben ©c^ntud berlauft, toelc^ett ©ie Betounbert 
 fatten. 7) SDu ttm§t nun aufftel^en, benu eS t|l fc^on 
 
 ' Notice Bebeden 'cover', uwbedEen 'hide', 'conceal'. 
 
lOG Methodical Part. 
 
 ganj Stag. 8) StageilBer ^abe td^ bid ju arfieiten, aBer 
 :^eute 2l6enb toerbe x^ erfreut fetn, bid^ ju fel^en. 9) 2Benn 
 bi(^ (ace.) etn arraer fHftann gtii^t, fo ntu^t bu tJ^n (ace.) 
 flud^ griilen. 10) 3d^ Bebaure itietne f^reunbltd^Ieit nt(^t, 
 benn fonjl (else) lann er fagen, ba^ er inid^ an ^oftid^- 
 feit iiBertrtfft, 11) S5te SSlnmen, toeld^e beine ©^toefter 
 (sister) gefauft l^at, ftnb noi^ ganj fri[d^ (fresh). 12) ^^ 
 crfuc^te beincn ^reunb, in baS 3it"wer ju treten, aBer er 
 toottte ee ntc^t tl^un. 13) ®a8 23uc^, toeld^eS i^ in (bei) 
 @tabt gelauft ^abc, ift Beffer al« baS beineS ©rubers.^ 
 14) as toirb fc^on ganj fait, ©ie foflten (should) ftd^ 
 (for yourself) ©d^littfc^ulpe hufen. 15) ©eBraud^fi bu 
 biefe 21ft? '^dn, i<^ toiC je^t rul^en, benn id^ Bin miibej 
 id^ l^aBe ben gan3en S^ag gearBeitet (worked). 16) 933er 
 fann mir fagen, too $err S3» tool^nt? 3d^ IpaBe ben 
 5Raraen ber ®tra§e toeisgefffn. 17) 3d^ l^aBe ben Keinen 
 ^naBen Betonnbert; bag ^ferb, toeld^eS er ritt, tooHte il^m 
 (dat.) nid^t gel^ord^en, aBer er lad^te nur. 18) 2lfg ber 
 §err fein eblc8 ^ferb berfauft l^atte, Bebauerte er eS, 
 aBer e6 toor ju fpSt. 19) 3c^ l^aBe biefe ^irfd^en ^eute 
 5!JJorgen gelauft unb tooUte fie beiner (dat.) ©c^toefier 
 geBen. 20) 2Ba« ertoiberte ber ^raftbent, aU in il^m 
 (dat.) bie 3utoelen jeigteft? 
 
 Exercise. 
 1) You should always return the salute of a 
 poor man. 2) My brother who has been iU [for] 
 four weeks, has now quite recovered. 3) The dia- 
 monds which the merchant (has) sold are very nice 
 (fd^on). 4) Your brother surpasses you in friend- 
 liness, for you would not have done this for me 
 
 * If in English a word is understood after a genitive, the demon- 
 strative pronoun bet (m.), trte(f), boS(n.), (or berjenige, bieienige, bnSjctitge, 
 that) agreeing with the word omitted should in German be added before 
 the genitive; thus — 'it is better than youp brother's [book]', should 
 be rendered by — 'It is better than that (neut, of ber) of your brother'. 
 
Lesson XIX. 107 
 
 (fiir mtd^). 5) I hope you wilP tell (fageti, dat.) your 
 friend that I had no time to speak to him. 6) When 
 passing I saluted him but he did not notice it. 
 7) I am very glad to hear that you have now re- 
 covered. 8) The horse could not throw your little 
 brother who shouted with joy. 9) I just noticed 
 the conflagration when I was in the street. 10) "When 
 the birds of the wood wake up in the morning 
 (use the genit. with the def. aft.) they begin to 
 sing and (the) wood and (the) fields resound with 
 their joyful songs. 11) I was astonished when I 
 noticed that you did not return the salute of your 
 neighbour. 12) Our holidays (vacation) will not be 
 long; we begin work again next week. 13) The 
 messengers of spring went (gingen) over wood and 
 fields, and everywhere little flowers woke up. 14) These 
 young women entered the room when I was speak- 
 ing (= I spoke) to the merchant who had bought 
 my books. 15) The Ehine, the Maine, and the 
 Elbe are the largest rivers of Germany. 16) Berhn, 
 which is now a very fine (fc^Sn) town, is not so 
 large as (toie) London, the capital of England. 
 17) Paris, Vienna (3Bten), Berlin, Dresden, and 
 Munich (SRiind^en) are the finest towns in Europe 
 (@uro^)a). 18) You should not kill the nightingale, 
 the songs of which (say — whose songs) we ad- 
 mire. 19) The officer was not allowed (Pret. of 
 biirfen) to leave (bertaffen) the town, although (oBglet^ 
 — removing the verb to the end of the clause) he 
 was not able to defend (toerteibtgen) it(fte). 20) He could 
 not do the work, although I helped (^alf) him (dat.). 
 
 * If the conjunction bajj (that) is omitted, the order of the words is 
 the same as in a simple sentence when Infin. and Perf. Part, only are 
 put at the end of the clause. 
 
108 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 V. Vocabulary and Phrases. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 SBal^re ^oflic^Iett. True Politeness. 
 
 arm poor 
 
 ber 9?eger the negro 
 grii^en (weak) salute 
 borBet+fle^en go past ; tm iB. 
 when (in) passing 
 etnfi once 
 
 anterilatitfd^ American 
 ber ^rciftbent the president > 
 ertoibern (weak) return, 
 
 (reply), 
 ber ®ru§ the salute 
 bie ^reunbtt(i^fett the friend-y 
 hness 
 xd3} rich 
 
 ber ^aufmann the merchant 
 
 gerabe just, or render by 
 
 the verb 'happen to' 
 
 f;t5rec^en, Pret. ^pxad^, P. P. 
 
 gef^sroc^enmit (dat.) 
 
 speak to 
 
 Bemerlen (weak) notice 
 bertounbert astonished 
 ntebrtg humble, low 
 ber Wlen^^ the person, man 
 ntmmer never 
 t^un, Pret. t^at, P. P. ge* 
 tl^an do 
 Bebauern (weak) regret 
 fel^r very much, (very) 
 entgegnen (weak) reply 
 gelaffen quietly 
 jeboc^ however 
 auS) ntc^t not even 
 toon (of persons^ with Pass. 
 Voice) by 
 an (of quality) in 
 uBertreffen, Pret. liBertraf, 
 P. P. iibertroffen surpass. 
 Slmerila America. 
 
 Note. All adjectives denoting nationality are spelt with small 
 as — englifc^ English, amcritaiitfd& American, beutjc^ German. 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 Where do you come from? 
 I have not seen you for 
 a long time. 
 I have been ill' for four 
 weeks. 
 I am very sorry for it. 
 
 2Bo fommft bu benn l^er? 
 3d^ ^abt btd^ lange ntd^t ge= 
 fel^en. 
 3d^ Bin »ter ifiJoc^en franf 
 getoefen. 
 2)aS tr;ut ttiir fel^r leib. 
 
Lesson XX. 109 
 
 3c^ ^offe, bu Sift jefet toieber I hope you have quite re- 
 
 gatij i^ergeftefit. covered now. 
 
 ^^ banfe bit, t^ Bin toieber Thank you, I am quite 
 
 gattj tooi^I, l»ie bu fte^ft, well again as you see. 
 
 S)aS freut nd^ fei^r. I am very glad to hear it, 
 
 SSJo tool^nft bu je^t? Where do you live now? 
 
 3fn ber SBtl^ermftrafe. In William Street. 
 
 Lesson XX. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Beading aloud, Translation into EngUsh, and Repetition 
 from Memory. 
 
 S)et SiJtte uttb bet ^afe. 
 Sin SCtoe l^egte etne getoiffe 3"neigung gegen einen 
 broCigen ^afen unb tDiirbigte i^n feiner ncil^eren Sefannt* 
 fc^aft. „3lBer ift eg benn toa^r," fragte i^n einft ber 
 §afe, „ba§ eu(^ Sotoen etn etenber !ra^enber ^4n fo 
 letd^t toerjagen lann?" — „Sl[aerbtnge ift e« toa^r," ant= 
 toortete il^m ber Siitoe; „unb eS ift etne allgemetne Z'^aU 
 \a^e, ba§ loir gro^en Siere burc^gangig eine getoiffe 
 Heine ©d^toad^^eit an un« ^aBen. @o toirft ha jum 
 S3eif^)iel toon bem ©lefanten gel^ort l^aBen, ba§ il^m bag 
 ©runjen eineS ©c^toeineS ©c^auber unb @ntfegen er* 
 hjecEt". — „aBa^r]Jaftig?" unterBrac^ [i^n] ber §afe. 
 „3a, nun Begreif ic^ an^, toarum toir §afen fo fe^r 
 bie ^unbe fiirc^ten." 
 
 n. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered viv§. voce. 
 
 1. 2Ben toiirbtgte ein ?6toe feiner aScIanntfc^aft? 
 
 2. aSae fragte i^n ber ^afe? 
 
 3. Sag anttoortete ber Sotoc? 
 
 4. 2Bag ertoedt bag ©runjen eineg ©^toeineg? 
 
no 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 5. SBaS tttettite ber ^afe? 
 
 6. SBte tear ber ^a[e? 
 
 7. aSer toiirbtgte ben ^afeit feiner Sefanntfci^aft ? 
 
 8. 2Ba« t^ut etn ^ofe? 
 
 9. aiBa« l^aBen grofe 3:teve oft an ftc^ (reflex, pron.)? 
 
 10. Ser fonnte baS ©runjen nid^t bertragen (bear)? 
 
 11. SBen filrd^tete ber ^afe? 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Eeading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. The Declension of the Personal Pronouns. 
 They are: — !»* person i^, pi. n>ii;; 
 2Ddpers. tu, pi. i^v; 
 3rd pers. et fmasc), ftC (fern.), 
 e§ (neut.), pi. fte. 
 
 Pron. of the 2nd. pers. 
 
 Pron, of the 1st. person, 
 S. N. {c5 I 
 
 D 
 A 
 
 PL K 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 A, 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Gr. niein(er) of me 
 
 mtr 
 
 V)h 
 
 unfer 
 
 une 
 
 un8 
 
 Masc. 
 
 (to) 
 me 
 
 me 
 
 (Familiar address.). 
 S, N. tu (thou) you (one 
 person only) 
 Gr. betn(er) of you 
 '^ btr (to) you 
 
 btd^ you 
 t§t you (more 
 than one pers.) 
 euer of you 
 eud^ (to) you 
 eu4 you 
 Pron. of the 3i'<i. person. 
 
 Fern. Neut. 
 
 N. er he, |te she, e6 it, 
 
 Gr. fetn(er) of him, t^rer of her, fein(er) of it, 
 
 D. t^m (to) him, t^r (to) her, t^m (to) it 
 
 A. t^n him, fte her, e« it, 
 
 we 
 of us 
 (to) us 
 us 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 PL N. 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
Lesson XX. m 
 
 PI. N. fte they 
 Gr. t^rer of them 
 D. i^nen (to) them 
 A. fte them. 
 The plural of the pronoun of the 3^^ person, 
 written with capital letters, is now used in addressing 
 one or more strangers, and mere acquaintances; 
 
 as — N. Sie you, G. S^rcc of you, D. 3^ncn (to) 
 you, A. @ie you. 
 
 2. Irregular Comparison. The following adjec- 
 tives and adverbs are irregular in the formation of 
 their comparatives or superlatives: 
 
 aut good; Comp. beffer better; Sup. ber Bejie best 
 
 Jod^Tiigh; „ ^ij^er higher; „ „ ptfifle highest 
 
 nal^e near ; 
 
 gro6 large, big, great; 
 
 Diet much; 
 
 6 alb soon; 
 
 gem willingly, (I like) 
 
 nodljle nearest 
 „ griinte greatest 
 ant ntetfien most 
 „ e^efien soonest 
 „ Iiefi)l«n(Ilikebest). 
 the adverbial form of 
 
 miiix nearer; 
 griiger greater; 
 meijx more; , 
 
 e^er sooner , 
 
 KeBer (I like more) , 
 Note. Sie meijien means 'most people' 
 the superlative with am and the inflection ^ften of the adj. (being the 
 dative smg. as an bjnt l^Bd^ften = am pd^ften) is never placed before 
 a noun, but is genersuly used predicatively and placed last in a simple 
 sentence. Observe the following examples: 
 baS ^c^jie §au8 the highest house, 
 bo? |ii4iic ^K\tx §iiufer the highest of these houses. 
 bieS §au8 i^i am |oii)fien this house is the highest. 
 
 3. The adverb \t^x before an adjective means 
 'very' ; when used by itself it means 'very much' ; as — 
 
 2)ae 5Bu(| tft fe^t (very) unteri^altenb. 
 3fc^ HeBe baS S3ud^ fcl^r (very much). 
 
 4. The reflexive pronouns are identical with 
 the personal pronouns, except those of the third 
 person which (for the dative and accus. sing, as 
 well as the plural) are |t(^ (himself, herself, itself; 
 themselves). 
 
 5. Weak verbs having for the stem- consonant 
 b, t, or til and n preceded by another consonant 
 
112 Methodical Part. 
 
 (except r) , insert an t before an inflectional f or 
 t; as — anttoort=en, Pret. anttoortctc, P. P- geant* 
 toortet. 
 
 6. Prepositions with the accusative case. 
 Prepositions (originally adverbs) are words 
 
 placed before nouns or pronouns and indicate tke 
 relation of things, their actions and attributes with 
 one another. We use now the following prepo- 
 sitions with the accusative case: — 
 
 tturii^; fur; gegen (or ujtber); c^ne; and um 
 
 through; for; towards, against; without ;| 'round about' 
 
 \or'at'(oftime). 
 
 The preposition toiber means 'against' only; 
 
 notice that j^ig 'tUl' is more generally used together 
 
 with other prepositions such as — ju (dat.): thus 
 
 6t8 ju 'up to', Big nac^ as far as. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 7. Observe that the inseparable compound verb 
 unterBred^en 'interrupt', Pret. unterBrad^, P. P. unter= 
 Brod^en is never used without an accusative case, 
 contrary to the English custom; as — 
 
 er unterBrad^ i!^tt unb fagte . . . 
 
 he interrupted [him] and said . . . 
 
 8. Often the action of a verb affects two ob- 
 jects, a person and a thing, the one being the 'nearer 
 object'; this nearer (or direct) object of a transitive 
 verb is put in the accusative case, whilst the indirect 
 object is often expressed by a genitive, a dative, or 
 a case with a preposition; as — 
 
 er toiirbigte bctt attcit 25teiter fetitcg SJertraueng, 
 
 he favoured his old servant with his confidence. 
 
Lesson XX. 113 
 
 IV. Permutation-Exercises. 
 
 For Translation into English and German respectively. 
 
 1) dv l^egte bte gr6§te 3""fi9""9 S^flcti tnetuen 
 Sruber, oBgleici^ (although) btefer t^n m6)t feiner Se= 
 fanntfd^aft i»urbtgte. 2) ©age tntr, toer beine ^reunbe 
 ftnb, unb ic^ totH btr fagen, toer bu 6ifi. 3) SBir l^aBeit 
 einanber (each other) fd^on oft gefelpen, toenn tc^ nic^t 
 irre. 4) ®te toa!^re ^Sftid^fett !ommt bom ^erjen. 
 
 5) ©te tttiiffen etnen ®ru§ ertoibern, ober @ie jetgen 
 (show), ba§ @te etneS ©ru^eS niii^t toert (worth) ftnb, 
 
 6) 3eber 3Jien[(^ ^at etite Heine ©c^toac^i^eit an jtd^; 
 feiner tjt boQIontmen. 7) 3d^ Begreife biefen ^naBen 
 uic^t; etn elenber Jrci^enber ^a!^n fann tl^n toerjagen. 
 8) 9lnttoorte rair, l^aft bn Bemerit, bag bein fjreunb ben 
 ^rafibenten gru§te? 9) ®et ftiH (quiet) ntit beiner 
 f d^recflid^en ®ef d^id^te ; bu ertoecEfi un« ©c^auber unb @nt= 
 fe^eUt 10) 3^ tear fel^r bertounbert, ba§ biefer ffeine 
 ^naBe jeneS groge Siter fo leic^t berjagen lonnte. 11) 25er 
 ^nnb fanb ben ^afen ntd^t, ba i^n ber Suf(| berbecfte. 
 12) SBarum Bift bu fo iniibe? Q<S) Bin tut Beuad^Barten 
 ®orfe getoefen. 13) SBer bon Ol^nen, utetne ^erren, toiC 
 ntit bent ^anfntaun f^rec^en? 14) SoUen ©ie bte 
 fyreunblii^fett l^aBen, mtr jn fagen, toer jener 3Jiann tfi? 
 
 15) 5Der ntebrtge Warm tft oft Beffer afg ber 3ietd^e, 
 toeld^er tl^n feiner 33efanntfc^aft nid^t toiirbigen toitrbe. 
 
 16) Qi^ Bebaure S^xe ©c^toac^l^eit fe^r. 17) ©te toiirben 
 bte SJBal^rl^ett gefagt ^aBen, toemt ©ie ututig toaren. 
 18) ©tefer SHenfd^ nennt ftc^ eineu ameriJantfc^en 93iirger, 
 aBer id^ glauBe, er tft nie in STmerila getoefen. 19) ^a^ 
 bu bon bent ?otoen gelport, ben (or toeld^en) etnft etne 
 ffetne SJtaug (mouse) bom 2:obe gerettft l^at? 20) 3)ieg 
 ift ein mutigee ^tnb; eS tft biel Ileiner al8 jieneS, unb 
 
114 Methodical Part. 
 
 boc^ (yet) fiirc^tet eS uit^t einmaf (not even) ben gro§eit 
 ^unb BieineS 9lac|6or8» 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 1) Yoa ought to salute this man since (ba) you 
 had once (einft) favoured him with your friendship. 
 2) I was astonished to see him here. 3) I see his 
 httle weakness, but none of (bon) us is perfect, 
 4) He is much bigger than your brother but much 
 less (compar. of toentg) courageous. 5) It is a fact 
 that the little dog does not fear (transl. 'fears not') 
 the big horse. 6) We were cea-tain to have seen 
 him. 7) Will' you have the Vinrlnftas to ask the mer- 
 chant, if he has lost this jewel? 8) Are you not 
 mistaken (transl. 'err you [yourself] not'), Doctor? 
 I think your watch is slaw. 9) Truly I do not under- 
 stand your weakness that (which) is afraid of every- 
 body. 10) Spring witii its flowers spreads sweet 
 scent iu wood and field[8]. 11) Did you not under- 
 stand (transl. 'have you not (it) understood') that 
 (ba§) he would not favour you with his friendship ? 
 12) You will (Fwi. Indef tense) cause terror and 
 fright to the l^tle child, if you crow hke (tote) a 
 cock 13^) 'Hunger is the best sauce (which) we 
 can find (translate : 'best cook whom' etc.). 14) Can 
 you tell me what time it is? 15) You think it is 
 six o'clock, but it is only (erft) half past five. 
 16) The affisction (which, ace.) I feel for you is 
 greater than I thought. 17) The swallows and 
 storks that flew far over the sea, wiU soon return 
 (iuxMtommm). 18) We shaU soon see* again (toieber) 
 these droU httle animals, as (the) spring is near. 
 19) Is your watch too fast? No, my watch is 
 twelve minutes slow. 20) We are speaking of the 
 excellent book (which) your friend bought- (Per£ of 
 faufen) last (ace.) winter. 
 
Lesson XX. 
 
 115 
 
 V. Vocabulary and Phrases. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 ber ?otoe the lion 
 
 ber ^afe the hare 
 
 l^egen (weak) feel 
 '^getBt§ certain 
 
 bte ^"neigung gegett the af- 
 fection for 
 
 brolltg droll, funny 
 
 toilrbtgen (weak) etnen etner 
 @ac^e (genit.) fa- 
 vour one with 
 
 na^e near, intimate 
 
 bte 58ef anntf c^aft the friend- 
 ship 
 
 fragen (weak) ask, inquire 
 
 elenb miserable 
 
 IrS^en crow 
 
 ber ^a^n the cock 
 
 letc^t easily 
 
 berjagen drive away 
 ./aCerbingS certainly 
 
 anttDorten (weak) answer 
 
 aflgemetn general 
 
 bte S^atfac^e the fact 
 
 jum S3et||)tel (== g. 93.) for 
 instance 
 !^oren toon (dat.) hear of 
 ber ©lefant the elephant 
 gruitjett grunt 
 bag ©d^toein the pig 
 ber ©c^auber horror 
 baS Sntfe^en fright 
 ertoecfen cause 
 toal^rl^aftig truly 
 Begretfen understand 
 nun now 
 
 toarum (relat. adv., with 
 verb last) why 
 ber ^unb the hound, dog 
 "Ifiird^ten fear, be afraid of 
 toert (with genit.) worth 
 bte ®efc^t(J^te the story 
 ^^tedli^ terrible 
 ber SBufc^ bush, shrub 
 retten (weak) save 
 tooCfommen perfect 
 Benac^Bart neighbouring 
 
 bag £ier the animal, beast- -tie SBal^rl^eit the truth 
 
 nennen call 
 ber S^ob death 
 
 bur(i^gSngtg commonly 
 
 fletn small 
 
 bte ©(i^toac^e the weakness 
 
 Phrases. 
 5Dte ^dt Time. 
 Ste Diet ni^r tft e«? What time is it? 
 
116 Methodical Part. 
 
 (S8 tft fiinf U^r. It is five o'clock. 
 
 3(3^ glauBe, eg tft erfi IpalB I think it is only half past 
 
 fitnf ober bret ^iettel fiittf. four, or a quarter to five. 
 
 @te trren ftc^, ^err jDoftor, You are mistaken, Doctor, 
 
 eStftgenauetnSStertel(auf) it is exactly a quarter 
 
 fiinf. past four. 
 
 Wteine Vi^x tft jel^n 3Ktnuten My watch is ten minutes 
 
 toor fiinf. to five. 
 
 Q^ fiirc^te, (J^re U^t gelpt I am afraid your watch is 
 
 toor. too fast 
 
 3}letne U^r ge!^t oft nac^. My watch is often slow. 
 
 Lesson XXI. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Reading aloud, translation into English, and Repetition 
 from memory. 
 
 2)er 3itunfantg. 
 SWntter, fagte ber Ifetne SBtl^elm, ii^ moc^te etnntal 
 ^ontg toerben. — S5te Scatter fagte barauf: aBet§t bu 
 benn an^, toaS ein ^onig ift, unb ^aft bu jemals einen 
 gefelpen? — ®er ^na6e fagte: 9^etn. SDa nal^m ber 
 SSater ben ^naBen Bei ber §anb unb fiil^rte tl^n l^tnouS 
 in ben ^of in ben ©(^nee, benn eS tear SEBtnter unb 
 fel^r fait. §ter jetgte er t^ra etn SSogletn unb fagte: 
 „©tel^e, btefeS SSoglein tft ba« fletnfte toon affen unb l^at 
 fetne fd^onen f^ei'^m; aBer e« tft tntmer frol^tid^, toenn 
 avL^ ixhexaU nur dis unb ©c^nee tft. ©tel^, je^t f(tegt 
 e« auf bag ^a^ unb ftngt fetn ?tebd^en; unb nun lomnit 
 eg l^eraB unb f uc^t in ben f allien Saumen bte @ter ber 9Jau:j5en. 
 @g ^et§t ber aBtnter!ontg, toeil t^n felBft ber BiSfe Sinter 
 ntd^t BejhJtngen fann. ^nbere lOeute nennen tl^n aud^ ben 
 3aunIonig, toeil er in 5^»ne" tool^nt. Stimm tl^n btr 
 
Lesson XXI. 
 
 117 
 
 jum Setf^iel; toen nic^ts Bejtotngt, ber tft fo gut tote 
 ein 
 
 II. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered -yiva voce. 
 1. iJSaS tooHte ber Heine mu 7. 2Bie \a^ ber Heine iBogel 
 
 l^etra toerben? 
 
 2. Sa§ fragte i^n feine 3Knt= 
 
 ter? 
 
 3. 2Ba8 t^at fein SSater? 
 
 au8? 
 
 8. aSag t^at er? 
 
 9. 2Ba§ fuc^te er in ben 
 
 ©cinmen ? 
 
 4. Sel(^e3a^ie«3eit (season) 10. SBie ^et§t baS SSiJglein? 
 
 tear eg? 11. 2Barum :^ei§t er fo? 
 
 5. SBaS tag anf bent ©ofe? 12. SBer ift jo gut toie ein 
 
 6. 2Bag 3etgte i^m fein SSater ? ^onig ? 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Reading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. The Interrogative Pronouns. They are: — 
 
 tajcr? toa§? who? what? 
 
 tocl^er? mid)t? tocWjc^? who? which? 
 and toiaS fftr ein, cine, ein? what kind of (a)? what a? 
 
 (1) tott is used of persons, i»a§ of things. They 
 have no plural. 
 
 N. iucr? who? 
 
 G. tocffen? whose? y^n^po 
 
 J), mm? (tajwhom?^"""^* 
 
 A. tticn? whom? 
 
 what? 
 of what? 
 to what? 
 what? 
 
 Examples : 
 toer tear biefer Wlann? toaS tft bieS? 
 
 toeffen ^tnb ifi bag? anflatt (instead of) toag? 
 
 toem gel^ort bieg S3ud^? bon toag f^rac^en fte? 
 toen nal^ni er 6et ber ^anb? toag (ace.) ^afi'bu gefel^en? 
 
118 Methodical Part. 
 
 (2) toelc^ier ? toeld^e ? toelc^eS ? is declined like the 
 relative pronoun toeid^er. 
 
 toeld^er SSogel? which bird? what bird? 
 toel^eS SSogelS ^ebern ftnb griin? what bird's 
 
 feathers are green? 
 
 (3) in bias filr ein (or toeld^ ein) etn only is de- 
 clined in the singular; in the plural toag fiir is used 
 invariably. 
 
 toag fiir eincit (ace.) 95ogeI getgte tl^m ber SSater? 
 toaS fiir SSogel finb itn ^Sftg (cage)? 
 Notice the correlat, pronoun — ber toer for ber 
 tceld^er, or simply toer, he who. 
 
 2. The indefinite Pronouns. They are: — 
 jemanb (genit. jemanbcg) somebody. 
 nietnanb ( „ ntemanbcg) nobody. 
 jebermann ( „ jebermanng) everybody. 
 
 CtttmS something (sing.) ; eittige some (plur.), de- 
 clined strong. 
 nt^tS nothing, not — anything. 
 maitfi^ec, tnond|)e, ntanc^eS many a (declined like 
 
 btefer, btefe, btefeg). 
 alter, alte, aHeS all (decUned like btefer, but stands 
 generally in the uninflected form aC before pro- 
 nouns, as aC fetn ®elb 'all his money'). 
 
 3. The neuter gender. It is used with the fol- 
 lowing words: — 
 
 (1) the genera, species, types of living beings 
 (especially the young of animals) where the 
 neuter simply points out baS SBefen = the 
 being without reference to the sex; as — 
 bag ©d^toetn the hog; but bcr @6er the boar, 
 bie ^<x\!i the sow, where other words are 
 used to distinguish the sex. SDaS SBeiB 'the 
 woman' is anomalous. 
 
Lesson XXI. \]Q 
 
 (2) all diminutive nouns ending in s^Ctt and =Ictn. 
 
 (3) the letters of the alphabet, and to Infinitives 
 used substantively (English verbal nouns in 
 — ing). 
 
 (4) most proper names of place; they take b(l§ 
 before them only if preceded by an adjective. 
 
 (5) most collective nouns with the prefix @c=, 
 and to compound nouns ending in Awx (pi. 
 tiilttcr), as ber 9?etc^tuttt, riches. 
 
 (6) most nouns signifying some material or metal. 
 
 Examples : 
 
 (4) (Snglnnb England. 
 (?tntertla America. 
 IboS frete 21. free America. 
 ' (5) bag Oebtrge the range of monn- 
 tains. 
 
 (1) bag Stnb 
 
 the child. 
 
 „ Sii^en 
 
 „ chicken. 
 
 ;; SdB 
 
 „ calf. 
 
 „ 5^o^len 
 
 „ foal: 
 
 „ §u^n 
 
 „ fowl. 
 
 „ ©d^roetn 
 
 >. tog. 
 
 (2) „ SWabc^en 
 
 „ maid, girl. 
 
 „ grfiutetn 
 
 „ Miss. 
 
 ,, SniiSd^en 
 
 „ little boy. 
 
 (3) „ 21SB(5 
 
 „ ABC. 
 
 „ ®e§cn 
 
 „ walking. 
 
 „ Stauc^en 
 
 „ smoking. 
 
 „ %t\m 
 
 „ feeling. 
 
 „ ©ehJtffen 
 
 „ conscience. 
 
 „ Xv^ 
 
 „ cloth. 
 
 „ ©01} 
 
 „ wood. 
 
 „ ©fen 
 
 „ ircm. 
 
 „ ®otb 
 
 „ gold. 
 
 „ @tlb« 
 
 „ silver. 
 
 ber ©ta^t steel. 
 
 (6) 
 
 but 
 
 4. Prepositions used with the Dative or Aceasafive. 
 They are: — 
 
 in (in), an (at), anf (upon), 
 
 itficr (over), uttter (under), Dor (before, ago), and l^tntcr (be- 
 hind), ncBcn (next to, by the side of), gtoifti^cn (between). 
 They are used with a dative case in answer to: 
 where? with the accusative, in answer to: where to? 
 @r fi^t ttuf bent (dat.) @o^)^a he is sitting: wh^e? on 
 
 the safa; 
 er fe^te bag ^tnb ouf bug (ace.) <So^l^a he put the 
 
 child: where to? on the sofa. 
 er ritt Dor bcm 9tegiment he was riding: where? in 
 
 front of the regiment; 
 er ritt Dor b(l§ 9Jegtinent he rode: (and removed 
 where to?) to the front of the reg. 
 
120 Methodical Part. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 5. If a complement, referring to the nominative- 
 subject to which it is in apposition^ follows such co- 
 pulative verbs as fetn (be), tnerben (become), BletCeit 
 (remain), it must also be a nominative; as — biefer 
 junge SDtanti (nomin.) tourbe fetn (not fetnen) O'reunb. 
 
 IV. Permutation-Exercises. 
 
 For Translation into English and German respectively. 
 Utung. 
 1) SDer 3«""f''nifl> todd^en bu le^ten SBtnter ge* 
 fc!^en :^aft, tfl^ son bannen geffogen. 2) S)er ^aufmanu 
 aal^m ben Ileinen ^naBen Bei ber $anb unb fit^rte il^n 
 in fetn ^anS. 3) 2)u tottft ju f})cit fpntnten (be), toenn 
 bu ntci^t Beod^tefl, toa^ td^ bir fage. 4) ®eine SSettern 
 l^atten etnen Ileinen 2?ogeI gefangen (caught), aBer ale 
 \^ fie Bat (begged), l^aBen fte ilpm bie tjrei^ett toteber* 
 gegeBen (given back). 5) 2Bir fallen btele SSoglein im 
 ^ofe unfereS 9?ad^BarS. 6) aBtH^etm fit^rte fetnen Setter 
 in ben ©arten unb jetgte tl^m etnen ^''unlomg. 7) SDer 
 (Stord^, ber liBer unfer §au« f[og, ifi je^t auf bent 2Btefen= 
 grunb, 8) 5Da8 I^tebd^en, toeld^eS betne <Sc^toefier geftern 
 SlBenb (last night) gefungen l^at, tear fel^r ft^on. 9) SDiefe 
 ?eute grii§ten niic^, aBer td^ fannte (knew) fte ni($t» 
 10) §aBen ©te fd^on ju 2IJtttag gef^jetft? 9^etn, td^ 
 fpetfe erft (only) um ^eBen U^r. 11) SDetn jiingerer 
 iBetter Befu^te un« geftern SlBenb. 12) 92tmm btr ben 
 ^aunlontg gum SSetf^Jtel; tnt @ommer unb SQBtnter ift er 
 gfetd^ (equally) frol^ttc^> 13) SSBen ^Ben @te gegrii§t? 
 @8 tear metneg 9'?ac^6ar8 ©oi^n. 14) Sentanb ^at eS 
 nttr gefagt, aBer td^ ^aBe e« toteber (again) bergeffen.^ 
 
 1 observe that most intransitive verbs form their Perfect tenses 
 with the auxiliary verb fetn; as — t(^ bin ge!ommen I have come, id) 
 t»ar gelotntneit I had come, etc. 
 
 * Sergejfen. (Pret. Betgafi, P. P. oergeffen) forget. 
 
Lesson XXI. 121 
 
 15) 3c^ ban!e 3f;ueu, ba§ @ie nttr bag fd&one S3ifb 
 (picture) ge^etgt ^aten. 16) SBoKen (Sie mir gefciUtgft 
 ^rot unb Sutter reidpen! 17) S^el^men @te nod^ etloaS 
 SBafferlreffe? ©ie ift gan? (quite) frtfc^ (fresh). 18) S)er 
 tfeine iBogel ftog frii^Iic^ (adv.) bon bannen unb tear 
 erfreut, fret (free) ju fein, o6gIeic^ nbexaU nur (St§ unb 
 (Sconce tear. 19) 35er arme (poor) 9Jlann Bat ntid^ 
 unt ettoaS S3rot, afier ba t(^ feineS l^atte, ga6 td^ i^m 
 @elb, 20) ^^ toiirbe bic^ [ei^r gem geftern (yesterday) 
 in unfern Oarten gefii^rt ^aBen, oBer tc^ ^atte feine Qdt 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 1) The little wren (which) you see now in our 
 garden, lives in that hedge. 2) This bird was looking 
 for caterpillars in the big tree in our garden. 3) She 
 asked me to pass her (dat.) the salt. 4) My cou- 
 sins will dine with me to-night (Bente 5HBenb). 5) At 
 what time did you dine (Pres. Perfect tense) yester- 
 day? 6) She gave the (dat.) poor man some bread 
 and roast-beef 7) Shall I take you into the yard? 
 I shall show you (dat.) with pleasure our new 
 horse. 8) Your friends came only at half past 
 eight in the evening. 9) You see now only ice and 
 snow in the fields and meadows which, in summer, 
 were covered with flowers. 10) These two lime-trees 
 are very old; my father and grandfather (©ro^bater) 
 have known them [for] a long time. 11) These little 
 girls hurried to school as it was very late. 12) "Walking 
 and riding are excellent exercises, 13) The stork 
 which is sitting on the roof of our house is quite 
 young. 14) The officer who is riding in front of 
 the regiment is WilUiam's father. 15) Who is the 
 young man who became your cousin's friend ? 1 6) That 
 (baS) is nobody's business (bie ©ac^e), said the general 
 and rode to the front of the regiment. 17) What 
 
122 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 kind of a bird did your father show you (dat.)? 
 I forgot the name, it (cS) was a very small bird. 
 18) Some of my neighbours called the boy William, 
 but I think his name is Charles (^arl). 19) (On) 
 whose horse were you riding yesterday? It was 
 my neighbour's horse. 20) "Was the little song 
 (which) you sang last night quite new? No, I heard 
 it two years ago (lit. 'before two years'; box with dat.). 
 
 V. Vocabulary and Phrases. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 ber 3<iutt^on'9 ^^^ wren 
 
 fagen (weak) say 
 
 2Btf^erm WilUam 
 
 etnmal one day 
 
 ber ^ontg the king 
 
 barauf thereupon 
 
 benn is here pleonastic >4t6eraQ 
 and should bej^nur 
 omittedinEnglish 
 
 jemals ever 
 
 fe^en, Pret. fa^, P. P. ge= 
 feJ^ett, see 
 
 iiel^men, Pret. nal^m, P. P. 
 genommen take 
 
 Bet ber ^anb by the hand 
 
 f ii^ren (weak) take, conduct 
 
 i^inauS out 
 
 ber ^of (the court-)yard 
 
 ber ©c^nee the snow 
 
 l^ter here 
 
 getgeit (weak) show 
 
 bag SJogletu the little bird 
 
 fte^(e)! see! look! 
 fd^on beautiful 
 bte ^eber the feather, (pen) 
 immer always 
 frol^fid^ cheerftd 
 toenn au(^ although 
 
 everywhere 
 
 only 
 bag gie the ice 
 je^t now 
 
 fitegen (flog, geflogen) fly 
 bog 3!)ad|) the roof 
 ftngen (fang, gefungen) sing 
 bag Stebd^en the little song 
 l^erab down 
 fuc^en seek, look for 
 ber SBaitm the tree 
 bag @t the egg 
 bte 9Jau^e the caterpillar 
 auber other 
 
 bte ?eute (pi.) (the) people 
 U^ bare, desolate 
 
Lesson XXII. 
 
 123 
 
 nenuen call 
 toetl because 
 
 hex ^amx the hedge 
 tool^nen (weak) live 
 :^et§en be called 
 Sinterfotttg winter king 
 Se^toingen conquer 
 bofe bad, cruel 
 
 Phr 
 
 ®a8 2)?tttage[fen 
 
 SBann f:|>etfen@te juSJiittag? 
 
 2Qtr l^seifen geVDtS^nlic^ urn 
 
 fteSeti U^r aBenbe. 
 
 S^el^men ®ie noc^ ettoaS 
 
 53raten? 
 
 S3ttte ja! — 3c^ banfe. 
 
 23ebienen ©ie ft(^ gefaCtgft 
 
 felBft! 
 
 SJJoEen @te mtr Sitte bag 
 
 @afj ret(i^eti! 
 
 ^ter tft S3rot imb Sutter. 
 
 2)arf id^ um ettoaS ^afe unb 
 
 aBafferfreffe Bitten? 
 
 ©e^r geni! 
 
 felbft even 
 
 ntutra ! (Imp. of ne^mett) take! 
 bag Seifpiel the example 
 fo . . . toie as . . . as 
 ^um (= 3U bem) here: as an 
 toer (is sometimes used for 
 toelc^er when followed or 
 preceded by ber) who. 
 ases. 
 
 (The) dinner. 
 
 At what time do you dine ? 
 
 We generally dine at seven 
 
 o'clock in the evening. 
 
 Will you take some more 
 
 roast-beef? 
 
 (Yes,) thank you! — No, 
 
 thank you! 
 
 Please help yourself! 
 
 Will you pass me the salt 
 please ! 
 Here is bread and butter. 
 May I ask you for somn 
 cheese and water-cress ? 
 With pleasure! 
 
 Lesson XXII. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Reading aloud, Translation into English, and Repetition 
 from Memory. 
 
 SBif^cfmS erftc 9ictfc. 
 Site SBtl^efm etnft toon ber ©i^ute xiadi) f)«wfe Um, 
 fagte fetii iBater: 3n bierjei^n S^agen reife id^ mit ber abutter 
 
124 Methodical Part. 
 
 unb betnen citteren ©efd^toiftern nai^ ©eutfc^Ianb. „tlnb 
 toaS fofl au« tntr toerben?" fragte Sill^elm. „25u gel^ft 
 ju betnem £)nfel naii^ 2)orIf^ire," tear bie Slnttoort. „3d^ 
 moc^te aBer anH) nad^ ©eutfd^Ianb gel^en!" itef SBifl^efm. 
 ^Su nad^ SDeutfd^Ianb ?" fogte fetn S?ater lad^enb. „Unb 
 toaS toiQft bu ba mac^en? 2Bir atfe f^)re($en ®eut[c^, 
 unb bu lannft noc^ ntc^t etnmal tii^tig fonjugieren. S)u 
 lonnteji iuegen betner Untoiffenl^ett m^t fragen, um iote 
 \>xd U^r etn 3w9 aBgel^en toirb, unb toenn bu ben (= betnen) 
 SBeg berlteren foHteft, fo toii^teft bu ntd^t etnmal, toie bu 
 nac^ bent red^ten SBege fragen foOteft." ®tefe SBorte 
 Iranften SBtl^elm fel^r, unb er fagte: „SSater, fleCe mtr 
 eintge grammatif(^e fragen, nnb gieB mtr engltfi^e ©ci^e 
 uitb beutfc^e UBungSftiide jum ttSerfe^en. Unb toenn i^ 
 affee gut mad^e — " „®ann ge^ft bu mtt (unS) nad^ 
 2)eutfd^Ianb, Mnter6ra(^ (tl^n) |etn 55ater." Unb fo !am eS. 
 
 II. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered vivS A'oce. 
 
 1. 2?on too fam SBtl^elm eineS 2^ag§ nad^ ^aufe? 
 
 2. SE5a6 fagte t^m fetn iBater? 
 
 3. 2BaS ertoiberte 2BtI^crm? 
 
 4. SBol^tn (whitlier) foflte er gel^en? 
 
 5. SBol^in toitnfc^te SBtll^efm 3U retfen? 
 
 6. 2Bag fragte tl^n fetn SSater lad^enb? 
 
 7. 2Ber ^pxa^ ©eutft^? 
 
 8. Sag lonnte SU^elm nic^t etnmal t^^un? 
 
 9. SBag metnte (meant, remarked) ber SSater, ba§ 
 SBtll^elm nt^t t^un fomtte? 
 
 10. 2Ba8 fonnte Sil^etm berlieren? 
 
 11. 2Ba8 Bat.St%Im feinen 25ater? 
 
 12. aSae tooflte ber SSater t^un, toenn SBU^elm 
 fetne SlufgaBe (exercise) gut mai^te? 
 
Lesson XXII. 12c 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Reading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. Declension of Proper names. 
 
 (1) Christian names of persons take «8 for the 
 genitive^ the other cases remain uninflected; 
 if they end in -4, ^% fc^, J, or ^ they take 
 =cn§, but those of females ending in sc take 
 =ng; as — SBil^etmS 3D?utter (WilKam's mother) 
 iJranjcit^ SSu^) (Frank's book), Stnnag Dnfef, 
 @mtttett0 SSetter (Emily's cousin). 
 
 (2) Names of the ancient Greeks and Romans also 
 take =§ for the genitive, without changing 
 the other cases. If they end in one of the 
 above sibilants they are declined with the 
 art. bcr before them; as — bag ?e6en ^fatol 
 (the life of P.), but '^zs, ©ofrateS (of Socrates), 
 be§ 2luguftuS, of Augustus. 
 
 (3) Names of places also take =§ for the posses- 
 sive case, the other cases remaining unin- 
 flected; if they end in one of the above hiss- 
 ing consonants they take Uon instead of the 
 genitive; as — bie ^aufer ?onbong the houses 
 of London, but bie ^auf er Uoil ^ariS the houses 
 of Paris. 
 
 'To' before the name of a place is ttft^, 
 
 before the name of a person ju (dat.) ; as — 
 
 er gtng nu^ ^artS he went to Paris; er gtng 
 
 5lt ^arr ('to Charles'). 
 
 Notice cr ifl ju §aufe 'he is at home', and er gtng itnii^ §aufe 'he 
 went home'. 
 
 2. Prepositions used with the dative. 
 They are: — 
 flu§ (out ofj, ^ ou^cr (except). 
 
126 Methodical Part. 
 
 kt (at), mii (with), 
 
 itad) (after, to), famt and jtcBft (together 
 
 fctt (since), with), 
 
 t)on (from, of), 5U (to), v guiniber (contrary to), 
 no^ft (next to), - gcmii^ (according to), and 
 
 V gegettiil^ec (opposite to). 
 'ifla^ means 'to' before names of places; if placed 
 after a noun or pronoun it signifies 'according to'. 
 
 3. Compound nouns are declined according to 
 the declension of the last component which also de- 
 termines the gender of the whole word; as — 
 
 bte U6ung — bag ®tij(f = bag UBunggfiiid, 
 pi. bie libungeftiicEc 
 
 bte SBod^e — bcr S'ag = ber SBod^entag. 
 
 The first components of compound nouns take 
 either the inflection =en, or sg, or remain uninflected. 
 Compound nouns ending in — matm change =mann 
 into sleute, in the plural, as — ber ^aufmann, pi. bte 
 ^aufleute merchants. 
 
 4. Some weak verbs change their root-vowels. 
 There are a few verbs which follow the weak con- 
 jugation, but change, at the same time, their root- 
 vowels in the Preterite, and Perfect Participle. 
 
 They are: — 
 Infinitive. Preterite. Perf Part. 
 
 lirennen (burn) brannte geBrannt 
 
 fennen (know) fannte gefannt 
 
 nennen (name) nannte genannt 
 
 rennen (run) rannte geronitt 
 
 fenbeit (send) f anbte (or fenbete) gefanbt (gefenbet) 
 toenben (turn) tcanbte (toenbete) getcanbt (getoenbet) 
 JBtff Ctt (know) \Si)X%it getDtt^t 
 
 Notice further two verbs which drop the n of 
 
Lesson XXII. 127 
 
 the stem in the preterite and perf. part., and change 
 the stem-consonants g and f before the inflection t 
 into c^: 
 
 Infinitive. Preterite. Perf. Part. 
 
 Brtngen (bring) Broti^te gcBrar^t 
 
 bcnfcn (think) "isti^it gebo(|t 
 
 Note. The verb tviffcn (the Sing. Pres. Ind. of which is an old 
 Preterite \&i iweifi, bit ttictgt, er metg; pi. Itiit itiiffen, etc.) is used with 
 neid&r pronouns and ad/ecHves, or, when the accus. object is given in 
 the form of a clause, with or without, bofe ; as — 
 
 er tneig — fie toiffcn eg, nidftS, titereS (many things); 
 tn HBugte — fte wugten, ia% fie ntd)t ba War, 
 ler wufite — jte mugten, fie toat nid|t ba (when it is a principal clause) . 
 
 In all other cases fcnttcn should be used for 
 
 'know'; thus with any noun (person or thing), and 
 
 with the personal pronouns (except eg); as — 
 
 er fennt meinen 35ruber unb unfer §au8; 
 
 tDtr fanuten fte unb i^re i^amilie (family) fe^r gut. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 4. The Preterite Subjunctive is frequently used 
 for the Present Conditional, and the Present Ind. 
 for the Future Indefinite; as — 
 
 (1) fbu fiinnteft nic^t etnraal frageu, 
 
 or jbu ttiilrbcft nic^t einmal fraqen finiteit, 
 you would not even be able to inquire; 
 
 (2) bann gcl^ft bu mtt un8 = bann toirft bu mit uu« 
 gel^en. 
 
 5. If the subordinate clause of a compound sen- 
 tence is placed before its principal clause, this latter 
 is inverted, i. e. the nominative-subject is placed after 
 the simple tense (or the auxiliary verb of a comp. 
 tense) of a verb; as — 
 
 subord. clause: before principal clause: 
 al§ er bon ber (Seizure fam, fagte fcin 95atcr, . * . 
 when he came from school his father said, . . . 
 al8 er bon ber ©c^ufe fara, lpatfcinSStttcre8t!^mgefagt. 
 
128 Methodical Part. 
 
 or fetn SSater fagtc eS i^itt, alg er toon ber <S(^ufe fani, . . . 
 (with the principal clause first.) 
 
 IV. Permutation-Exercises. 
 
 For Translation into English and German respectively. 
 U6uttg. 
 1) SBU^elin ift in ber ©c^ule, aBer er totrb Balb 
 Tiac^ f)aitfe lommen. 2) @etn SSater !ann ntc^t mit uu8 
 fommen, ba er !ranf ift» 3) SBol^tn (where [to]) toiQft 
 bit mtt betnen ©efc^totfterit gel^en? SStr ge^en in bte 
 (Sc()ule. 4) 3d^ lenne betne cifteren ©efci^totfter; x6 ^ahe 
 fie aBer fange (for a long time) ntd^t gefel^en. 5) 2Bo 
 finb fte je^t ? @te ftnb nad^ 2)eutf c^Ianb gegangen, 6) Q^ 
 toei§ nid^t, toaS auS beinem cifteren Sruber toerben foC, 
 ba er nie^t arBeiten teill. 7) 2)u foflteft mit mtr !ommen; 
 xii) geBe ju tneinem Onfel, ben bn fd^on lange fennfi.^ 
 
 8) 3(^ module mit btr gel^en, aBer ic^ l^aBe leine 3"t. 
 
 9) 2lle er nad^ S^an\s tam, rtef er: 2D?orgen ge!^e id^ nad^ 
 ©eutf^Innb. 10) <B\>xe6}en ©ie ©eutfd^ ober g'ranjoftfd^, 
 mein ^err? 3c^ f^re^e ein toentg ®eut[d^, aBer ic^ fann 
 5ranji)fi|c^ ntc^t f^red^en. 11) ®er Offtgier, toeld^en bu 
 geftern im ^onjert gefe^en Baft, tool^nt un« (dat.) gegen= 
 iiBer. 12) Sarum (why) fanbteft bn beinen ^rnber nad^ 
 ^aufe ? @r l^atte feine Slicker bergeffen, 13) @etn jiingerer 
 ^ruber tousle nid^t, ba§ meine 9?ad^6arn nad^ ©eutfd^Ianb 
 gereift toaren. 14) ®aS fletne 3Jtab(^en Brad^te il^rer (dat.) 
 franfen Wtuttn fd^one Sluraen nad^ ^aufe, toetd^e eS im 
 gelbe gefunben ^atte. 15) ©iefer jnnge ^aufmann fonnte 
 toegen f einer UniBiff enl^ett ben S3rief nid^t fc^reiBem 16)2Biflft 
 bu fragen, toann ber 3u3 aBge^t? 17) 3d^ i^atte meinen 
 28eg berloren, aBer ber ©olbat, ben id^ traf (treffen, Pret. 
 Iraf, P. P. getroffen, meet), l^at mir ben re(^ten Seg 
 
 * Use the Present Perfect in English; fc^oit, 'already' is frequently 
 omitted in English. 
 
Lesson XXH. 129 
 
 gejetgt. 18) S3ttte, frage ben SD^ann na6f bent rcd^ten 
 Sege; iS} glauBe, toit ^6en i^n bertoren. 19) ^anitfl 
 bu biefe beutfd^en ©5^e uBerfefeen? @ie ftnb fe^jr letc^t, 
 ba bu atte SBortct' lennji. 20) SDte Sortc betnee^;gremibe« 
 ]^a6en nietnen Sruber fel^r gefranlt. 
 
 Exercise. 
 1) Are your brothers and sisters going to Grer- 
 many this year? 2) No, they were there last year, they 
 are going to (= they will) stay at home this (ace.) sum- 
 mer. 3) What has become of your uncle ? I have not 
 seen Inm [for] a long time. 4) When you come 
 to Yorkshire, he said, you must visit my Mends 
 at (in) Bradford. 5) Can you teU nae, what his 
 answer was? 6) I should like to go with you to 
 the concert this afternoon, but I have no time. 
 7) When you come to London, you should not 
 forget to buy note-paper (Srief^a^Jter , n.). 8) If I 
 lose this train, I shall take the next, as I have 
 plenty of time (3eit genng). 9) Will you please 
 take my ticket, as I have no time. 10) Your 
 younger brother cannot conjugate yet, but he will 
 soon learn [it]. 11) He wanted to ask what time it 
 was, but he could not speak BngHsh. 12) I should 
 like to know at what time our train leaves, it is 
 very late now. 13) These people had lost their 
 way in the mountains and did not know what to 
 do (render by: 'what they should .do'). 14) They 
 were, however, so fortunate (gliicfltc^) [as] to meet 
 a little boy who showed them (dat.) the way. 15) The 
 butter (which) you (have) passed me, is not .fresh; 
 you should not eat it. 16) Although the sky 
 
 ^ ®a« SBort 'the word', plur. tie Sffiiirter 'single words as sucli', 
 and Sie SBorte 'words in a sentence'. 
 
130 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 (f)tmmcl, m.) is cloudy, I do not think it will rain, as 
 the -wind is so cool. 17) If you knew (Pret. Subj.) 
 how much, ([el^r) yon have effended my friend you 
 would go to hiTin and apologise (il^n um SSerjet^img 
 Bitten). 18) These mountains are covered with snow 
 the (acG.) whole winter, so that the traffic (ber S?er» 
 lel^r) is interrupted [for] many months. 19) Did 
 you hear (render by : 'have you heard) of the brave 
 boy who jumped into the water and saved (retten, 
 Pret. rettete) his little sister? 20) It is a great pity 
 that you did not recognise me, as we would have 
 gone to the concert together (jufammen). 
 
 V. Vocabulary and Phrases. 
 
 To be committed to memory. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 We JReife the journey ^ 
 bte ©d^ule the school 
 fommen (fatn, gelommen) 
 come 
 in 14 Stagen in a fortnight 
 retfen (weak) travel, go 
 We ©efc^totfier (pi.) brothers 
 and sisters 
 3!)eutf(i^fanb Germany 
 toerben au8 (dat.) become of 
 bie Slnttoort the answer A 
 rufen (rief, gerufen) exclaim 
 lad^en (weak) laugh 
 madden (weak) (make), do 
 bcntfd^ (with capital, if it 
 refers to the language) 
 German 
 
 / 
 
 noS) yet 
 
 ntd^t etnoial not even 
 
 ric^tig correctly 
 
 lonjugteren conjugate 
 
 bie Untotffen^ett (the) ignor- 
 ance 
 
 toegen (genit.) on account of 
 
 um tote totel Ul^r at what 
 time 
 
 ber 3ug the train 
 
 aB-|-ge!^en start 
 
 ber S5eg the way 
 
 terlieren (toerlor, toerloren) 
 
 lose 
 
 retfit right 
 
 bag 3Bort the word 
 
 IrSnIen (weak) offend 
 
Lesson XXII. 
 
 131 
 
 fietten (weak) set, put 
 gtammotifd^ grammatical 
 bte ^rage the question 
 ber jSa^ the sentence 
 baS liBungSjiitd the exercise 
 liBerfe^en translate 
 
 Phr 
 
 <Spid^t betn Onfet 5Deutfc^? 
 
 3a, er \iptxi^t ©eutfc^ unb 
 ^ratijeftfci^. 
 dx i^at lange tit SDeutfd^Ianb 
 gelefit. 
 @^)rad^ji bu nttt iJ^m? 
 9tein, id^ er!annte i^n ju f:|)3t. 
 
 ®a8 iji red^t fc^abe! 
 2Ba« ^aft bu benn? 
 
 @S iji nid^t ber Siebe ioert. 
 
 jum (= ju betn) to [the] 
 aHeS all, everything 
 gut weU 
 bann then 
 
 lotnmen often means 'come 
 to pass'. 
 
 ases. 
 Does your tmcle speak 
 German? 
 Tes, he speaks German 
 and French. 
 He lived in Germany for 
 a long time. 
 Did you speak to him? 
 No, I recognised him too 
 late. 
 That is a great pity! 
 What is the matter with 
 you? 
 It is not worth mention- 
 ing? 
 
 Lesson XXIII. 
 
 I. Reading Passage. 
 
 For Reading aloud, Translation into English, and Repetition 
 from Memory. 
 
 2)te SBelo^nung. 
 3n etnem 25otfe in Zl)xol tool^nte eine arme fjrau 
 intt tl^retn fitnfjel^njcil^ngen ©ol^ne, ®e:|)pt. 5Dte[er attetn 
 fonnte ettoaS ®elb toerbienen, tnbent er ©d^afe auf bem 
 ©eBtrge l^iitete unb jeben SWorgen bte (SIocEe in ber ilas 
 ^jeOe ISutete, bte l^od^ o6en tm ®e6trge ftanb. @tne« Staged 
 
132 Methodical Part. 
 
 fffflte kie IDtutter ju tiprent ©ol^nc: „2)?orgen otu§ t(| bem 
 ^aa«]^aa3i fflafunbjtooajfig @ulben Bejol^Ien, fonft tretBt 
 er un« aa» hex ^iltte. 3f(^ l^aBe aBer gar fein @elb," 
 „Sk todleu ^i^ 4??en," anttoortete ©e|5|3t, „biettetc^t 
 ^ilft un« ber lieBe @ott." S)a er nun am nac^flen 
 Worsen to^en be« tiefen @<i^ee8, ber in ber 9?a(ij>t ge* 
 faOen tear, bicSc^afe ntci^t auf ben S3erg treiBen lonnte, 
 fo^^ng er -otteitt, um bie ©locfe gu ISuten. ^aum aBer tear 
 er ia iae ^a^fk getreten, unb l^atte guffillig bie Stl^itr 
 offen gekffen^ alS jn feinent gro§en ©rftannen ein 3BoIf 
 l^erein lata. D^nc Sebenf en f|)rang <Beifpi jur Stlpfire toieber 
 l^inauS, f^Io^ fte lutb eilte bann ju bem SDorfrid^ter. 
 ©iefer gaB tl^m f«>gleid^ fiinfunbjtoanjig (Sulben, toeld^e« 
 bamafe in ^^^rcl bie >S3«Io]^nung toar, bie ber Qtaat jal^Ite, 
 toenn jemanb einen SBotf gefangen l^atte. 
 
 n. Conversation. 
 
 The Questicais to be answered viva Toce. 
 
 1. So tocl^e eine arme 8. 2Ba6 toottte er am anbern 
 
 grau? aWorgen t^un? 
 
 2. aSie alt tear i^r @o^n? 9. Ba$ l^otte er bergeffen 
 
 3. W&simt^ berbiente er et» ju tl^nn? 
 
 tocig ®etb ? 10. 2Ber lam in bie ^apeCe ? 
 
 4. 2Bo fianb bie^-S'a^jeQe? 11. gBa8 tl^at ^epJpi rafd^? 
 6. SBer berlangte toon feiner 12. 3u toem ging ber ^naBe 
 
 aWutter @elb? bann? 
 
 6. aBag^oate-ertl^nn, lonnte 13. SSaS er^ielt er toon bem 
 
 fte ntc^t Begal^fen? 9iid^ter? 
 
 7. Sa«4flgte i$r ©e^)<3i? 14. 3!?er Belam bamal8 biefe 
 
 33eIo]^nung in 2;^roI? 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Eeading Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. Prepositions used with the genitive case. 
 
Lesson XXIII. 133 
 
 They are: — 
 
 "unJteit ' intttcl^ fraft and v-tofil^renb 
 
 (notfarfrom), (bymeansof), (by virtue ol), (^during), 
 lant berntpge ungea^tet 
 
 (according to), (in virtue of), (notwithstanding), 
 okrl^alB (above, and"ttntct^I5 (below, at the 
 
 at the upper part of) lower part ol), 
 -^ tnncrl^oI6 (within), and lau^etl^alB (without, outside), 
 ' BctrcffS (regarding), tnmittCtt (in the midst of), 
 
 / ftatt (or anftatt) (instead of ),"itm — ttiffctt (on account of), 
 - bte§fcit - ienfeit -^^alitn or — toegen 
 
 (on this side), (on that side), (for the sake of), 
 
 aBfcttg ^ittngg ' SMfoIg^ ^tto^ 
 
 (off from), (along), (according to), (in spite of). 
 
 ^aI6«n, toegen, and totHen are generally placed 
 after a noun or pronoun, and toitten is commonly 
 preceded by urn, as — 
 
 S^xei' S3ruber8 toegen, or um Si^reS SrubcrS toitten for 
 the sake of your brother. 
 
 2. Most German neuter verbs form their past 
 compound tenses with fciu (English 'have'); as — 
 faCen(fall):Pres. Perf. td^ bin gefatten I have fallen; 
 
 Past Perf id^ mar gefallen I had fallen; 
 Fut. Perf id^ tticrbc gefaCen fctn I shall have 
 
 fallen; 
 Past Conditional, td^ tofttbc gefaffen feitt 
 I should have fallen, 
 gel^en (go) : Pres. Perf t(^ Bin gegangen. 
 Past Perf. td^ tear gegangen. 
 
 3. If the demonstrative or relative pronouns as 
 nominative-subjects are followed by the copulative 
 verb fctn with a complement in the form of a noun 
 they do not agree with this latter but take the in- 
 flection of the neuter gender of the singular (whether 
 
134 Methodical Part. 
 
 the complement is in the singular or plural) con- 
 trary to English, Latin, and French. The verb fetn, 
 however, agrees with the complement; as — 
 btefcS (orbteS) tftfetne®c^tDefter(fem.); iftbtCjSbetnSSetter? 
 btefcS „ ftttb fetne @c|iDeftertt (pi.), 
 toeid^CiS (not toelc^e) finb betne S3tiiber (pi.)? 
 
 4. Compound adjectives are formed by joining 
 the cardinal numerals to *j[ct^rtg, as — einjS^rtg (one 
 year old), jtoetjol^rtg (2 years old), bretjal^rig (3 years 
 old); thus — 
 
 ber fteBenjcil^rtge ^rteg the Seven Years' War; 
 ber bretpgjci^rigc ^rteg the Thirty Years' "War; 
 fetn jel^njSl^rtger ©ruber his brother, ten years old. 
 Other compounds with the numerals are: — 
 
 1) jc gtoei by twos; jc bret by threes; etc. 
 
 2) etntttdl once; jtoeimat twice; brettltat three 
 times; etc. further the adjs. etnutdUg, Jtoets 
 tnattg, bretntoKg; etc. as — fetn breimatigcr 
 JBerlujl (loss). 
 
 3) etnerlet of one kind; jtoeterlci of two kinds; 
 etc. as — er fanfte gtoeterlei (undechned) ?Pa= 
 ^)ter (paper). 
 
 4) etnfail simple; jtoetfa^ twofold; bretfa^ three- 
 fold; etc. 
 
 Note. 'Both' ieibe (pi.) is declined strong, like the plural of bieftr, 
 or weak with the art. bie (pi.), as — bie betbett SSxttbcr both the brothers'; 
 'all the' before nonns should always be rendered by ber ganjc (m.), bie, 
 ganje (f.), baS gonje (n.) . .; 'all the' joined to a comparative is am fo . . 
 as — um fo beffer 'all the better'. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 5. The Infinitive Mood withoui gu is used in 
 German : 
 
 1) if joined to one of the auxiliary verbs of 
 Mood, as — fottcn, tooUcn, Knucti, miigctt, 
 bfttfcn and ttiilffctt. 
 
Lesson XXHI. 135 
 
 2) if joined to some other verbs, such as — 
 fflljicn (feel), j^orcn (hear), loffcn (let, allow), 
 
 jcl^cn (see), |ctf en (help), lel^rcn (teach), and tenten (learn). 
 
 3) if the Infinitive used substantively is the 
 subject of a sentence; 
 
 SJnrtten jiarit ben ®or^>er, 
 gymnastics strengthen the body. 
 Otherwise ju should be used before an Infinitive, 
 and if a purpose is expressed it is preceded by 
 «m; as — 
 
 er gtng auf ben S3erg, tm [for the purpose of] 
 bte ©lode 5tt Iciuten. 
 
 IV. Permutation-Exercises. 
 
 For Translation into Englist and German respectively. 
 
 JtBuna. 
 
 1) Untoett bee SDorfeS jle^t etne alte ^apeUe, bte 
 toebcr Stl^iir nod^ fjenfter ^at 2) ©er brei^tgj|%tge 
 ^rteg bauerte (lasted) tjon 1618 6t8 1648. 3) @r tear 
 juerfi etn 8teItgtonSfrieg ber ^rotefianten gegen bte ^= 
 tl^oUfen (Roman Cathohcs), U^ (until) baS latJ^oIifd^e 
 (Ebman Cathohc) ^Jranfrctd^ , gegen ben !ati^oK[c^ett 
 ^aifer toon ©eutfd^Ianb ju fec^ten Begann. 4) ®er ©olbat 
 trat ol^ne JBebenlen in bag $au8 unb f(^Io§ bie S^l^ilr. 
 5) 2)er SDorfrid^ter gaB bent armen SWanne etne 93efo^> 
 nung, toetl er ba« gefnnbene @elb ntd^t Bel^alten (kept) 
 ^otte* 6) aBer l^atte gebad^t, ha% bte[er ^rteg [o 
 lange bauerte! 7) Q^t ad^tjS^riger S3ruber ISutete bte 
 ©lode beS 5Dorfe«, toetl er etnen gro^en SBoIf oBer» 
 l^alB be8 Salbe8 gefel^en l^atte. 8) ^od^ oBen auf 
 bem Serge ftfet ber ^trt unb l^iitet bte ^^^. 9) SDer 
 ^auei^err jeigte bag S3ud^ betner (Sc^toefter, bte eBen (just 
 then) gelonmien tear. 10) Seld^eS ftnb bie ^reunbe beS 
 jungen CffijierS? ©te. ftnb nic^t l^ter; fte ftnb in baS 
 
136 Methodical Part. 
 
 SH^eater gegongen. 11) 25te Srflcfe (bridge) toiirbe in 
 ben gfu§ gefafien fetn, toenn ntnn fte nx^t geflii|t (sup- 
 ported) Ipatte. 12) ®er ^dxib, toddler bag ganje ?anb 
 toertoiijiete (laid waste), tourbe nad^ biermafigem ^atti:pfe 
 (fight) Bejtegt unb an8 bem Sanbe berttteBen (driyen). 
 13) fiannji bit ntorgen ju nitr fommen? 3c^ toilnfd^e 
 bit tnet« neue« ?Pferb gu getgen, ha9 tntr otein Onfel 
 gefd^enlt (given, made a present of) ^at. 14) 9d^ 
 laBe eg f^on geftern 9?ac^mtttag gefel^en, al8 e» bein 
 SSruber ritt. 15) SJiefe @tra§e fii^rt na($ jeneui ®orfe, 
 ba8 ©te in ber ^erne (at a distance) fe^en. 16) SDie 
 aBili^elmjira^e ift ni($t toeit (far) ton l^ier; fte Knnen 
 biefeWe toon bte[em ^au[e (aus)[el^en. 17) @ie l^aBen ben 
 nS(^fle« 2Beg nad^ ber (Station berfel^It (missed); gel^en 
 @ie toieber juriii unb nel^men @ie bic jtueite @tra§e 
 red^tS (on your right). 18) @ilen @ie! SDer 3og ge^t 
 in gtoei SKinuten o6. 19) 5Da8 Silfet (ticket) loftet 
 etncn ©ulben ton l^ter 6i8 jur nSd^jlen Station. 20) SDie 
 ©efc^toifter meineS ^Setters tool^nen nid^t toeit toon l^ier 
 airger^alB ber @tabt. 
 
 Exercise. 
 1) Most [of the] peasants that live in this village, 
 are rich. 2) Whenever the boy earned some money, 
 he gave some to his aged (aft) mother. 3) Her son, five 
 years old, saved a Httle girl that had fallen iato 
 the water. 4) Do not offend your Mends; they 
 have often helped you. 6) Yesterday I went up 
 (in) the mountains to visit the hermit (@tnftebrer, m.) 
 who is living there. 6) The landlord demanded 
 fifty five florins, but the peasant could give him 
 only twenty-two. 7) Please wake (toecfen) me early 
 (friil^) to-morrow morning; I am going for a long walk 
 over (in) the mountains. 8) Germany is a confedera- 
 , tion (ber ©nnb) of (bon) German states under the German 
 
Lesson XXHI. 137 
 
 emperor William 11, King of Prussia. 9) The king- 
 doms of Prussia, Bavaria, Saxony, and Wiirtem- 
 berg are the foremost (!^eri)orragenbft) German States 
 that belong to (ju) the German empire. 10) I must 
 give up (aufgeten) my journey, for the weather is 
 too bad; it hasnow been raining (=: it has rained, 
 geregnet) [for] the last three weeks. 11) How could 
 I tell your friend this, as I have not seen him 
 yet? 12) The officer whom you saw here last 
 night, fell from (off) his horse and broke his left 
 arm. 13) What a pity that you did not see my 
 young friend who has come from England to-day. 
 14) We intended to go hunting (render by: auf bie 
 3agb), but on account of the deep snow we had to 
 give up our plan. 15) I advise (raten, with dat.) 
 you to learn your lesson now, if you wish to go to 
 the theatre to-night; it is already late, and your 
 brothers and sisters are going by (mit) the 6 o'clock 
 train. 16) What is the matter with your father? 
 He seems to be offended and did not speak to your 
 cousin? 17) If I take this for granted, it is only 
 because you are. an old friend of mine (bon nttr). 
 18) The flames that raged the whole night and 
 destroyed almost the whole [of the] little town, could 
 be seen at (in) a distance of (toon) ten miles. 19) When 
 the messenger arrived from (the) town this morning, 
 he met a poor man on the road (untertoegS, adv.) 
 whom he had known at (the) school. 20) The 
 windows and doors of the old house were open, 
 but we could not discover (entbecten) anybody; the 
 whole place seemed deserted (tierlaffen), and not 
 a living thing (2Be[eit, n.) was to be seen. 
 
138 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 V. Vocabulary and Phrases. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 bte Selol^nung the reward 
 ba§ SDorf the village 
 Sterol the Tyrol 
 aCein alone 
 berbtenen (weak) earn 
 inbem (subord. conj.) as, 
 since 
 j^iiten (weak) tend, look 
 after 
 bag ®elb the money 
 baS ©d^af sheep % 
 
 baS ©e6trge the mountains 
 ber SKorgen the morning 
 bte ©rocEe the beU 
 ISuten (weak) ring 
 bte ^a^jeCe the chapel 
 l^oc^ obett high up 
 OTorgen to-morrow 
 ber ^auSl^err the landlord 
 ber ©ulben the florin 
 6egal^Ien (weak) pay 
 fonft otherwise 
 tretBen drive, turn 
 bie ^iitte the hut 
 gar fetti no ... at all 
 fc^on (is here pleonastic 
 and should not be trans- 
 lated) already 
 toteCetci^t perhaps 
 
 l^elfen {3^^ p. sing. Pres. er 
 ^Uft) (with dat.) help 
 ber KeBe ®ott God 
 ttef deep 
 
 bie ^a^t the night 
 fatten (ftel, gefatteit) fall 
 iaum ... al9 scarcely . . . 
 when, no sooner . . . than 
 treten (trat, getreten) in 
 enter 
 jufSffig by chance 
 bie Spr the door 
 offen laffen (Ite§, gda(fen) 
 leave open 
 toteber again 
 
 bag ©rftaunen the astonish- 
 ment 
 ber 2BoIf the wolf 
 l^eretrt+fotnmen come in 
 ol^ne S3eben!en without he- 
 sitation 
 f^jrtngen (fjjrattg, gef^srungen) 
 spring, jump 
 jur (= ju ber) S^iir J^tnauS 
 out of the door 
 fci^Ite^en ([c^Io§, gefd^Ioffen) 
 lock 
 eifen (weak) hurry, hasten 
 ber SDorfrtc^ter the bailiff 
 
Lesson XXIII. 
 
 139 
 
 geben (gaB, gegeBen) give 
 fogletd^ at once 
 ber ©taat the state, govern- 
 ment 
 
 baraale then, at that time 
 
 jal^ren (weak) pay 
 
 fangeti (ftng, gefangen) catch. 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 SBol^tn fii^rt biefe ©tra^e? 
 
 ®ie fiil^rt m^ bem^^be^arf, 
 ^onnen ©te miv fagen, ioo 
 
 bie Sil^elmftra^e tft? 
 
 3c^ Bebaure, id^ Bin in bte[er 
 
 ©egenb fetBft fremb. 
 
 S3itte, tooQen ®te tnt(^ m^ 
 
 bem 9tat^aufe toeifen? 
 SBoHen ®te miv gefafltgft 
 fagen, oB bieS ber nac^ffe SSeg 
 
 m^ ber ©tation ift? 
 
 Where does this street 
 
 lead to? 
 
 It leads to Hyde Park. 
 
 Can you teU me where 
 
 William Street is? 
 
 I am sorry I cannot; I 
 
 myself am a stranger here. 
 
 Will you, please, direct me 
 
 to the Mansion House? 
 
 WUl you teU me, please, 
 
 if this is the nearest way 
 
 to the Station? 
 
 Lesson XXIV. 
 
 Tor Beading aloud, 
 
 Readiag Passage. 
 
 Translation into English, 
 from Memory. 
 
 and Repetition 
 
 @tn ^reunb ber ^inbet. 
 SBenn ^rtebrtd^ ber ®ro§e, ^ontg toon ^reu^en, 
 na^ Seenbtgung beS fteBenjcil^rigen ^riegeS burd^ bie 
 @tra§en 35erKne ritt, fo tear jebeemal gro§er SuBel unter 
 ben ^naBen; fte unifd^tDarmten ben gelieBten ^ontg, fangen 
 Steber, toarfen i!^re Wii^m in bie ^olpe unb rtefen: „Sange 
 leBe unfer guter ^onig!" 3a, fte liefen BtStoeilen ganj 
 nal^e gu tl^nt «nb erfa§ten bie ©teigBiigel. ^rtebrid^ 
 bulbete biefeS ntuntere 2^rei6en frennblic^, fd^enlte tl^nen 
 ©ii^tgleiten, broBte il^nen aBer anc^ manc^mal mit feinem 
 
140 Methodical Part. 
 
 ©tode. 2ll8 e« bte Sungen aiev eine« Za^eS, eg tear 
 an eiitem @onna6enbs9Tad^mtttag, ja arg ntad^ten unb ber 
 ^ijntg faji gar jitd^t toeiter fommen lonnte, tief er orger* 
 lic^: „3unge«, gel^t KeBer in bte ©d^ule rnib lernt etloaSl" 
 „£)," ttefen bte i^uaBen tufttg, „l!5ater ^rt| toet§ ntd^t 
 einmal, bag ®am8tag« !eine @d^ule ifi!" 
 
 II. Conversation. 
 
 The Questions to be answered vivS voce. 
 
 1. SBer tear g^riebrid^? 
 
 2. Sie nannten il^R fetne ^eitgenojfen (contemporaries) ? 
 
 3. 2BaS t^at er oft? 
 
 4. Sa8 ge[ci^a!^ (happened) bann? 
 
 5. aSaS t^aten bie ^naBen? 
 
 6. SBaS-^erfagten fte? 
 
 7. Sag tl^at bann ber groge ^onig? 
 
 8. Ste tnad^ten e« bte 3ungen an etnem (SonnaBenb? 
 
 9. SSJaS fagte i^nen ^Jriebrid^? 
 
 10. fBa9 antVDorteten bte ^naBen? 
 
 11. 2Ba« fd^enlte griebrtc^ ben ^inbern? 
 
 12. S35a8 tl^at er aBer oud^ ntanc^mal? 
 
 13. aBa8 riefen bie tnaBen? 
 
 14. SBeI(i^en ^rieg l^atte griebrid^ Beenbet? 
 
 III. Grammar. 
 
 In accordance with the Readipg Passage. 
 a. Accidence. 
 
 1. Anomalous Declension of nouns. Its charac- 
 teristics are: strong genitive singular in =g, plural 
 scr (dat. ern), and modification of the root-vowels 
 a, 0, and u which become 3, 3, and Q. 
 To this declension belong: — 
 1) some masculine monosyllabic nouns, such as — 
 ber 3Wann (pi. SWiinncr) the man, 
 „ Oott („ ©iitter) „ god, 
 
Lesson XXIV. 
 
 141 
 
 
 ber SBafb (pi. SBfifbcr) the wood, 
 
 ®eijl ( „ ©etftcr) „ spirit, 
 
 SelB ( „ Setter) „ body, 
 
 SBitrm ( „ aBftrmcr) „ worm. 
 
 2) all nouns ending in =tltt»t (Engl, 'dom'), pi. 
 stutter, they are either masculine or neuter; 
 as — 
 
 ber 9iet(^tutn the wealth, ber 3rrtutn the error, 
 
 oaS gitrfientutn „ principahty, bag ^aif ertmn „ empire. 
 
 3) some dissyllabic neuter nouns with the pre- 
 fix ®e=: — 
 
 baS Oefic^t the face, baS (Semad^ tl» room, (pi. ®e* 
 
 madder), 
 „ ©emitt „ mind, „ Oefc^Ia^t „ race, 
 „ ©ef^enfl „ ghost, „ ©etoonb „ garment, 
 
 (pi. ©etofiubcr). 
 
 4) The greater number of monosyllabic neuter 
 nouns ; as — 
 
 bag 2lmt (pi. ^mtcr) the office. 
 
 Su<i^(„ Sftd^er) 
 
 gt („ (Stcr) 
 
 ®rae ( „ Olofcr) 
 
 ?anb ( „ £rtnbcr) 
 
 ^tnb ( „ ^nbcr) 
 
 2BetB(„ aSctScr) 
 
 S3ratt(„ Srgtter) 
 
 ^orf(„ ®8rfcr) 
 
 gelb ( „ gctbcr) 
 ©Snfcr) 
 
 book, 
 egg, 
 
 ?teb ( „ Siebcr) 
 
 I, 
 11 
 
 laxtd, 
 
 cMd, 
 
 woman, 
 
 leaf, 
 
 village, 
 
 field, 
 
 honse, 
 
 song, 
 
 iBoI! ( „ S3ijr!cr) (folks), the people, 
 %^(x\ ( „ %\jliitx) (dale), „ vEdley; 
 etc. etc. 
 
142 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 2. Adjectives and ordinal numerals in apposition 
 to a preceding proper name of person must agree 
 with this latter and are spelt with capital letters; 
 as — 
 
 ■^N". ^rtebrtd^ ber ®ro^c Frederic the Great 
 Gr. griebrt^? bci? ©rofcn of Frederic the Great 
 D. fjriebric^ bent ®ro§en to Frederic the Great 
 A. fjrtebrtd^ bctt ®ro§en Frederic the Great. 
 
 3. Observe that 'of in a title should always 
 be translated by Doit; ber ^iJnig toon ^reugen, bie 
 ^iJntgin toon ©ngknb. 
 
 4. Kender the following general expressions: — 
 'on Mondays', 'on Tuesdays', in the morning', etc. 
 
 by the genitive with or without the definite article 
 as — 
 (be«) 3Jiontagg, (bes) SDtenetagg, (be§) SWorgenI, etc. 
 'Saturday' may be rendered by either ber ©onnaBenb 
 or ber @am8tag. 
 But 'on Monday' is om (= an bent) SWontag, etc. 
 
 5. Complete scheme of the Passive Voice. 
 
 ©el^en (see), fal^, gefel^en. SoBen (praise), loBte, geloBt. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 (Strong and weak) 
 SingA.i^ toctbc 
 
 2. bu toirft 
 
 3. er ttiirb 
 /y«r.l. totrtoerben 
 
 2. i^r toerbet 
 
 3. jte tocrben 
 
 gefel^en 
 or geloBt 
 ' I am 
 seen or 
 praised. 
 
 (Strong and weak) 
 
 t^ merbe 
 
 bu toerbeft 
 
 er mctbc 
 
 totr toerben 
 
 tl^r toerbet 
 
 jte toerben 
 
 gefe^en 
 or geloBt 
 
 I be 
 seen or 
 praised. 
 
Lesson XXIV. 
 
 143 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 t^ Itiiitbe 
 
 bu toiirbeft 
 er toiirbe 
 toir toiirben 
 tl^r toiirbet 
 fxe toiirben 
 
 Present Perfect. . 
 i(Sf Bttt gef«]pen. t^ fct gefel^en. 
 
 I have been seen, 
 bu Bift. bu fetft. 
 
 &c., &c. 
 
 Smg. l.iHf taiurbc 
 
 2. bu tourbeji 
 
 3. er tourbe 
 P/ur. 1. totr tourben 
 
 2. tl^r tourbet 
 
 3. fte tourben 
 
 Sm£'. 1. 
 2. 
 
 gefel^en 
 or geloBt 
 ■ I was 
 seen or 
 praised. 
 
 ge[e!^en 
 or gefoBt 
 I were 
 seen or 
 praised. 
 
 Past Perfect. 
 ^ tear gefel^en — geloBt. i^ todrc gefel^eu — geloBt. 
 I had been seen — praised. 
 
 Future Indefinite. 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 1. ii^ toctbe gefelpen itietbett. i^ toerbc gefel^en taierben. 
 I shall be seen. 
 
 2. bu totrft gefel^en toerbeu, etc. bu tiretbeft gefel^en toerben. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 1. 1^ toctbc gefel^en toorben fcitt* ii| tocrbc gefelpen JtJDrbcn 
 
 I shall have been seen. fcill* 
 
 2. bu ttiirft gefei^en toorben fein. bu ittetbeft gefel^en toorben 
 
 &c., &c. fein. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 ^«V- f" laefe6en» ^" I SetoBt! be seen! 
 P/«^. fcibj 3^'^^"* fcibj be praised! 
 
 Infinitives. 
 Present, gefel^en (gu) toerbcit, (to) be seen. 
 geioBt (ju) toerben, (to) be praised. 
 
144 Methodical Part. 
 
 „ r |ge[e:^entoorbctt.(3tt) fcin, (to) have been seen. 
 erjec •■jggjp^tjjjoj.tjeij {^^ j-g},,^ ^to) have been praised. 
 
 Note 1. The Passive Voice is formed by joining the auxiliary verb 
 toerben (become) to the Perf. Part, of a transitive verb; thus the English 
 tenses of 'be' with a Perf. Part, correspond to the same tenses of 
 tDcrbcn, 'become'. The only difference between strong and weak verbs 
 is indicated by the inflections of the Perf. Participles. 
 
 Note 2. The Present Perfect, id) bin gtfe^en morben (abridged from 
 flC'tDorben"), and the Past Perfect, tc^ mar gefe^en worben, may drop 
 tDorben. But they should, therefore, not be mistaken for the Present 
 and Preterite tenses. 
 
 b. Syntax. 
 
 6. 'When' meaning 'as often as', 'whenever' is 
 in German tuenn both of present and past times; 
 toenu ic^ tl^n fal^, l^aBe tc^ il^ix ftete getoarnt (warned). 
 
 IV. Permutation-Exercises. 
 
 Tor Translation into English and German respectively, 
 iiBung. 
 1) ^riei>ttc^ t»er ®ro|e tfl ber gro§te ^ontg, ben 
 ^reugen \t gel^aBt \)<xi, 2) ®ein gangeS SeBen tear bcr 
 SBo^Ifai^rt (welfare) fetneS SSoIIe« getoibmet (dedicated, 
 given up), fiir beffen ®r6§e er ben Bluttgften (sangui- 
 nary) ^rieg f eineS Sal^rl^unberte (century) gefiil^rt (waged) 
 ^at. 3) OBgretd^ ^riebrid^ ber @ro§e, fajl nur toon 
 @ngtanb unterftiifet, alletn gegen 9iu§Ianb, S^jleretd^, gratil* 
 rei^, ©ad^fen unb anbere ©taaten I3m:|3fte, unb oBgletd^ 
 er in toerfd^iebenen gro^en gefbfc^Iac^ten (pitched battles) 
 gefd^Iagen toarb, fo berfor er bod^ nte ben 3Jtut unb Be= 
 enbtgte ben fieBenja^rigen ^rteg al8 ©ieger. 4) 2)te @r= 
 jie^ung (education) grtebrtd^« al« ^naBen tear fe^r 
 ftreng, ba fetn S3oter nnr 3nteref|e fiir rte[en^afte ®oI= 
 baten unb <S^)arfamfett l^otte unb bie Ittterartfd^e S^etgung 
 (literary inclination, disposition) bee jungen ^rtngen 
 beraBfd^eute (detested). 5) grtebri^ ber ®rB§e l^at juerft 
 t)on atten :f)reu§tf(i^en |)errfd^ern fetn S5oH fo (in such 
 a way) geBilbet (trained), ba§ ee f^jSter bie evfte 
 
Lesson XXIV. 145 
 
 ©tette (position, rank) in SDeutfci^Ianb einnel^men (oc- 
 cupy) unb baS beutfc^e dtd^ tBteberl^erfteQen (regene- 
 rate) lonnte, 6) @r felBfi l^atte feine ^tnber, unb 
 IteBte e8, toenn bie Serltner Qungen t^n umfd^toStmten. 
 7) dv kd^te iifier bag mnntere ^^retBen ber ^naBen, ga6 
 t^nen ©ii^tgleiten, brol^te tJ^nen aiev an^, toenn fte eS 
 ju arg mac^ten. 8) 2)er junge SSaner tear fo erfreut, 
 ba^ er feine 3Rii|e in bie ^o^e toarf unb ben Snngen 
 umatntte (embraced), 9) 5Der ^inimel ifi fo BetoCfft 
 unb bunlel, ba§ tc^ lieBer eine ®tunbe toarte, el^e (before) 
 ic^ auSgel^e; ic^ fiird^te, toir toerben in toenigen SKinuten 
 ein ©etoitter 6e!ommen. 10) S3iji bn fti^on in bent ^ott= 
 jert getoefen? 9tein, ic^ IteBe bie SRac^niittagSfonjerte 
 nld^t unb g'el^e KeBer l^eute aBenb in« Sweater, too man 
 SBagnerg „So!^engrin** gteBt. 11) SBeId^e8 finb betne 
 englifd^en SieBItngSo^ern (favourite operas)? (58 ftnb 
 ©uflibane „9JliIabo", ©oring Stl^oinae' „(S«meraft)a" unb 
 jjrtebric^ Sotoen« „St;^orgrtm". 12) 2H« toir Ie|te (last) 
 aSod^e im ©eBtrge toaren, Befamen toir ein futd^tBareS 
 ©etoitter, erreic^ten (we reached) aBer gliidfid^ettoeife (for- 
 tunately) etne ^iitte, in ber toir DBbod^ (shelter) fanben. 
 13) ®u lannji ben ©ed^S^Ui^r^ug uid^t mel^r Belomnten; 
 e8 iji je^t fd^on fiinf SWtnuten tor fed^8 unb e8 nimmt 
 (it takes) toentgftenS (at least) gel^n SWinuten toon l^ier 
 gur (Station, 14) ©el^r gut, bann fal^re (shall go) id^ ntit 
 bent nad^fien S^8 "«£ ^<^^^^ ©tunbe f^siiter. 15) ©oil 
 id^ bid^ niorgen nad^mittag aBlpoIen? 3d^ Bebaure, id^ 
 gel^e auf« (into) Sanb, unb toerbe erfi in btei S^agen 
 juritcffommen. 16) SBarum lauffi bu fo? SDu l^aft 3eit 
 genug ; unfer 3ug ^^^i "ft in jtoanjig SWinuten. 17) ^a^x\t 
 bu erfie ober jtoette Piaffe? 3^ fal^re nteifi (mostly) 
 jtoeite Piaffe, ©onnaBenbe (on S.) jebod^ (however) fal^re 
 id^ getoo^nlid^ (usually) erfte piaffe, ba bie jtoeite ftete 
 gebrcingt tooQ (very crowded) ifi. 18) S)er 2Bagen 
 
 10 
 
146 Methodical Part 
 
 !onnte xii^t toeiter fommm, ia etn« fetner dtdiet (wheel) 
 jetBrod^cn tear. 19) SSStr lonnten bemSBettrennen (race) 
 nt<^t 3u[e^en, ba bet ^lag gebrSngt toott tear unb Mo'xx ju 
 aHer^tnterfl (quite at the back) fianben. 20) S5er 
 ^onig, toel^er ben lufiigen ^naBen ettoaS 3U f(^en!en 
 :))flegte (used to), brol^te tl^nen etneS 2:oge8 mtt bem 
 @to(f, toetl fte e« gu arg ntad^ten. 
 
 Exereise. 
 1) If it were (Subj.) not so warm to-day, I 
 would go out for a walk with you. 2) You must 
 hurry if you want to catch (faffen) the five o'clock 
 train. 3) Look at these boys; they will soon be 
 punished as they are going too far. 4) You will 
 soon have to wear spectacles, if you are not more 
 careful (ac^tfam) with your eyes. 5) The train is not 
 signalled yet; it is already fifteen minutes late. 
 6) "What class did you travel when you were in 
 Germany? I used to travel third class, as there are 
 four classes in that country. 7) Let us hurry; I 
 am afraid we shall lose our train, as it is already 
 two minutes to four. 8) I am very sorry you 
 could not come yesterday; we had a fine time 
 (render by: we were very merry). 9) The principal 
 states of Germany are Prussia, Bavaria, Saxony, 
 and Wiirttemberg. 10) The German empire is a 
 confederation of all German states and has a popu- 
 lation (bte SeboIIerung) of (toon) more than forty-six 
 millions. 11) The King of Prussia is, at the same 
 time (jn gtei^et 3cit), German emperor; his capital 
 is BerHn which has nearly two milhons [of] inha- 
 bitants (Sintool^ner). 12) Have you a single or a 
 return-ticket? Neither (letnS toon Betben), I have 
 a season-ticket (baS ©SfonBtCet). 13) I was very 
 sorry I had to keep you waiting last night, but 
 
Lesson XXIV. 
 
 147 
 
 my train was half an hour (eine ^Me ©tunbe) late 
 on account of the dense (bt(f) fog (ber 9?e6el). 
 14) Frederic the Great waged a war that lasted 
 seven years. 15) Although he was supported by 
 England alone he defeated all his enemies, one after 
 the other, and remained the victor. 16) The youth 
 (bte Sugenb) of Frederic the Great, King of Prussia, 
 was very unhappy, as his father did not like the 
 young prince's literary inclinations. 17) "When the 
 great king was riding or driving in the streets, 
 the children used to swarm round him and throw 
 their caps up. 18) When the boys seijsed the old 
 man's stirrups, he laughed and threatened them 
 (dat.) with his stick. 19) Go and learn your lesson 
 now, it is very late and we shall soon go to the 
 concert. 20) It is much cooler outside; let us go 
 for a walk in the wood where there is a beautiful 
 lake (ber <3ee), 
 
 V. Vocabulary and Phrases. 
 
 To be committed to Memory. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 ber i^reunb the friend 
 ba« ^tnb the child 
 ^reu§en Prussia 
 ber ^rteg war 
 nad& Seenbtgung . . after . . 
 was over 
 fteBenjai^rtg seven years' 
 bte @tra§e the street 
 retten (rttt, gerttten) ride 
 jebeSmal each time 
 ber 3fuBeI joy 
 urafd^tuarmen swarm round 
 getteBt beloved 
 
 tcerf en(tDarf, getoorfen) throw 
 bte SD'Jit^e the cap 
 in bte ^o!^e (literal : in the 
 height) into the air, up 
 (high) 
 fang(e) long 
 leBen live 
 ja yes, nay , 
 (aufen (lief, gelaufen) run 
 6t8toeilen sometimes 
 ganj na^e ju quite close to 
 erfaff en (weak) seize 
 ber (SteigBitgel the stirrup 
 
 10* 
 
148 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 bulben (weak) suffer, allow 
 bag muntere StretBen (the), 
 their play merry 
 freunblid^ kmd(ly) 
 ber -Sunge the boy, lad 
 ber 9?ad^mtttag theaffcerroon 
 eg ju arg madden go to far 
 fc^enlen (einem ettoa§) give 
 (one something), make 
 one a present of 
 ®il§tgletten sweets 
 brol^en (dat.) threaten 
 m^ also 
 
 mati^mai sometimes 
 ber <Btod the stick 
 faft almost 
 toeiter+fommen advance, 
 
 get on 
 argerlic^ angrily 
 tte6er rather, better 
 gel^t lieber in you had 
 better go to 
 fernen learn 
 lufitg merrily 
 fjrt^ Fred. 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 .1. 
 
 SHJeld^ fd^ijner 2^ag! 
 @e tfi fe^r toarm l^eute. 
 ®eftern regnete eS ben ganjen 
 Stag. 
 S)er ^tntmel tft fel^r betoollt. 
 @e:^en ©te jene bunJeIn 
 aSoIIen! 
 3fc^ fitrc^te, h)tr toerben Balb 
 etn ©etoitter IpaBen. 
 @S tft fel^r fc^toiil l^eute 
 aBenb. 
 Dffnen ©te bag ^enftex, iH) ■ 
 glauBe braii§en ift eS tu^Uv. 
 as Bli^t unb bonnert. 
 
 What a fine day! 
 It is very warm to-day. 
 Yesterday it rained the 
 whole day. 
 The sky is very cloudy, 
 Look at those dark clouds ! 
 
 I fear we shall soon have 
 a thimderstorm. 
 It is very sultry (close) to- 
 night. 
 Open the window! I think 
 it is cooler outside. 
 It is lightening and thun- 
 dering. 
 
 SBiCft bu nut un8 tn« ^on= Will you come with us to 
 jert gc^en, 3)?arte? the concert, Marie? 
 
Lesson XXIV. 
 
 149 
 
 3ft e« l^eute ober ntotgen 
 aBenb ? 
 
 @e ift ein Sfiac^mittogSf ongert. 
 
 ®« fSngt l^eute nac^mtttag 
 um bier U^r an. 
 
 3d^ toerbe eud^ fe!§r gem Be* 
 gfeiten. 
 
 Sag freut uiiS fei^r. 
 
 S'd^ toerbe btd() um brei Ul^r 
 oBlpoIen. 
 
 @e|r gut! Si^ toerbe btd^ 
 m($t toarten laffeu. 
 
 ®e^ft bu auf ben 33a^u^of? 
 
 3a, i^ toil! nad^ Sonbon 
 fal^ren, 
 2BeI(^en 3u9 nimmft bu? 
 
 3c^ fal^re mtt bent fiinf It^r 
 
 ®ae tl^ut mtr fel^r letb; fo 
 
 f riil^ !ann tc^ noc^ ntd^t f al^r en. 
 
 3(^ toerbe mit etnem f^jateren 
 
 3uge ge^en. 
 
 ^aft bu btr fd^on etn SBiUet 
 
 genommen? 
 
 Seld^e flaffe fa^rft bu? 
 
 3d^ fal^re je|t ftete gtoette 
 
 Piaffe. 
 
 4 
 
 3?ein ^ug tft eBen ftgnoltftert. 
 
 @in 9tetour * S3ittet jtoeiter 
 
 ^raffe. 
 
 Will it be to-night or to- 
 morrow night. 
 It is an afternoon concert. 
 It begins at four o'clock 
 this afternoon. 
 I shall be very pleased to 
 go with you. 
 We are very glad of it 
 I shall call for you at 
 three o'clock. 
 Very well ! I shall not keep 
 you waiting. 
 5. 
 
 Are you going to the 
 
 station ? 
 
 Yes, I am going to London. 
 
 What train are you going 
 
 by? 
 
 I shall go by the five 
 
 o'clock train. 
 
 I am very sorry; I cannot 
 
 go so early. 
 
 J shall go by a later train. 
 
 Have you taken your 
 
 ticket? 
 
 What class do you travel? 
 
 I always go second class 
 
 now. 
 
 Your train is just signalled. 
 
 A second class return 
 
 ticket. 
 
150 
 
 Methodical Part. 
 
 SDiJetn^reunb l^at Bkue Stugen 
 
 itnb Braunee ^aar. 
 
 ©el^eti ©te gut? 3a, rnetn 
 
 ©efid^t tft borjiigltc^. 
 
 3ft 3^r ©ruber lurjftc^ttg? 
 
 3a, er ntu§ fc^on feit toielen 
 
 Soften eine JBritfe trageu. 
 
 ^aBen ©ic ben 33Itfe gefei^en? 
 
 ©el^eu ©ie ju, ba§ ®ie 
 
 fomnten liSnnen! 
 
 ©el^en ®ie ftd^ toot, ba§ ©te 
 
 ntd^t fallen! 
 
 ©e^en ©ie nad^ bem ^tnbe! 
 
 2Btr fallen bem ©:|3tele ju. 
 
 ©iei^ beiiien SSater an! 
 
 My friend has blue eyes 
 and brown hair. 
 Do you see well? Yes, 
 my sight is excellent. 
 Is your brother short- 
 sighted? 
 Yes, he had to wear spec- 
 tacles for many years. 
 Did you see the lightning? 
 Be sure to come! 
 
 Take care you don't fall! 
 
 Look after the cliUd! 
 "We watched the game. 
 Look at your father! 
 
II. 
 
 Systematie Grammar Part 
 For Repetition. 
 
Introduction. 
 
 The Grerman Alphabet. 
 
 1. The German alphabet is written as foUows: 
 a. Simple Letters. 
 
 Roman 
 Characters 
 
 German 
 Characters 
 
 Handwriting 
 
 Names 
 
 A, a 
 
 31, a 
 
 a ^ 
 
 ah 
 
 B, b 
 
 93, B 
 
 j^ J" 
 
 be.[y] 
 
 C, c 
 
 % c 
 
 /\ 
 
 tse[y; 
 
 D, d 
 
 2), b 
 
 a^^ J^ 
 
 de[y] 
 
 E, e 
 
 F, f 
 
 (B, c 
 
 S, f 
 
 €^/ 
 
 e[y] 
 
 ef 
 
 G. g 
 H, h 
 
 I, i 
 
 at 
 
 t 
 
 ge[yj 
 
 hah 
 ee 
 
 K, k 
 
 ^, f 
 
 
 yot 
 kah 
 
 L, 1 
 
 2,1 
 
 ^y 
 
 el 
 
154 
 
 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 Roman 
 Characters 
 
 German 
 Characters 
 
 Handwriting 
 
 Names 
 
 M, m 
 
 ; 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 em 
 
 N, n 
 
 m, n 
 
 ^« 
 
 en 
 
 0, 
 
 D, 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 P, P 
 
 ?. V 
 
 Z^ 
 
 pe[y] 
 
 Q, q 
 
 a, q 
 
 fz 
 
 koo 
 
 R, r 
 
 m, X 
 
 w ^ 
 
 er 
 
 S, s 
 
 ©, W 
 
 ^/^ 
 
 es 
 
 T, t 
 
 %t 
 
 ^ y 
 
 te[j] 
 
 U, u 
 
 n, u 
 
 ^/„- 
 
 oo 
 
 V, V 
 
 ^, t> 
 
 ^^ 
 
 fou 
 
 W, w 
 
 S, to 
 
 ^$^_ 
 
 ve[y] 
 
 X, X 
 
 ^rl 
 
 ^^ 
 
 iks 
 
 Y, y 
 
 % i) 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ipsilou 
 
 Z, z 
 
 3f 5 
 
 ^^ 
 
 tset 
 
 2. Under the influence oi a following i in Old 
 High G-erman the sound of the simple vowels a, 0, 
 and u was somewhat modified and represented by 
 the letters a, 6, u, now spelt a, 6, and li. They 
 are called modified vowels (this modification being 
 in German called 'Umlaut'). 
 
 The modified sample vowel-sounds are written : — 
 
The German Alphabet. 
 
 156 
 
 Eoman 
 Characters 
 
 German 
 Characters 
 
 Handwriting 
 
 
 Names 
 
 A a 
 
 t a 
 
 a\:' 
 
 a (in hare) 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 ^.'- 
 
 i (in bird) 
 
 iju 
 
 Uil 
 
 w ^ 
 
 ee. 
 
 (in keel) pro- 
 nounced with 
 protruded and 
 rounded lips. 
 
 b. Compound Letters. 
 Compound Vowels or diphthongs: 
 
 Roman 
 
 Characters 
 
 German 
 Characters 
 
 Handwriting 
 
 Names 
 
 Ai ai 
 
 9tt SIX 
 
 a.- 
 
 -<fc-*- 
 
 
 Ei ei 
 
 (Si ct 
 
 € 
 
 -r^-J 
 
 ei (in height) 
 
 Au au 
 
 2tu (lu 
 
 aJ:f 
 
 
 OW (in fowl) 
 
 Au au 
 
 ^U (ttt 
 
 aj:f 
 
 ., ^ 
 -^^^-r^ 
 
 oi (in boil) 
 
 Eu eu 
 
 (£u cu 
 
 ^^ 
 
 C^ 
 
 Eoman 
 Characters 
 
 German 
 Characters 
 
 Gh ch 
 
 6;^ (^ 
 
 Pf pf 
 
 ?f H 
 
 Ph ph 
 
 5P5*j5 
 
 Ou qu 
 
 Clu i\\x 
 
 Compound Consonants: 
 
 Handwriting 
 
 Names 
 
 '^^ 
 
 
 tse[y]-hah 
 pe[y]-ef 
 pe[y]-hah 
 koo-oo 
 
156 
 
 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 Roman 
 Characters 
 
 German 
 Characters 
 
 Handwriting 
 
 Names 
 
 Sch sch 
 
 (Bd) f(^ 
 
 ■^^ 
 
 es-tse[y]-hah 
 
 Th th 
 
 2:^ i^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 te[y]-hah 
 
 ck 
 
 d 
 
 ,^ 
 
 tse[y]-kah 
 
 is 
 
 ft 
 
 ^ 
 
 es-tset 
 
 tz 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 te[y]-tset. 
 
 Note 1. Capital Letters are used with all nouns (persons, or 
 things), and any word used as such; further with the pronouns of 
 the 2"* person: @ie you; and the corresponding possessive adjective 
 Si)X your. 
 
 Contrary to the English, t^ I, and all adjectives (including those 
 referring to nationality) are written with small letters; as — 
 engtif^ English, beutfdf) German, ftanjbfiffi^ French. 
 The only exceptions are adjectives ending in »ct, derived from 
 proper names of towns; they have a capital letter, as — 
 bet Sonbonet §anbel London commerce; 
 ber ^Potfbatner SSo^n^of Potsdam Station. 
 
 2. General Remarks on the Pronouaciation of German 
 Letters. 
 
 Vowels. 
 
 3) German a (long, or short) has only the one 
 sound of Engl, a in arm; O (long or short) always 
 sounds like Engl, o in note; and u (long or short) 
 like English u in sure. 
 
 4) The letter c has three distinct, pronunciations: 
 
 (1) when o/>en (or wide), it is pronounced like 
 English e in where, or a in share , as fc^cHen, 
 fc^ncH, tocr, bcr, bcffen. 
 
 (2) when c/ose (or narrow), it sounds like Eng- 
 lish e in gre[y] or a in case, suppressing 
 the following i-sound; as — 2Bc^, gcl^en, 9tcf), 
 (2ec, Sect 
 
Pronunciation of German Letters. 157 
 
 (3) in unaccented syllables, especially in prefixes 
 and sufixes it has the obscure mixed sound 
 of English e in ferocious, brother; as — ®C* 
 fa^r, S3crlu[t, 9?abcl, Srubcr. 
 
 Note. Open e is also spelled a which has the same sound; as — 
 SSar, §anbe, foUert, ©ewanber. 
 
 5) German t) is generally used as a vowel and 
 now pronounced i (long, or short) in words taken 
 from foreign languages, especially Greek; as — 
 ©^mnafiura, S^tinber, (Sl;rter, (SflniB^feS, ©l;ntay, 9)|>^tfon. 
 As consonant (English y in yes) it is rarely em- 
 ployed; notice S)anfee, 9)atagan, 9)orf, S)ufatan. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes 1) is pronounced like ii, which was formerly 
 its usual sound. 
 
 Note 2. Regarding loan words from the French the diphthong 
 eu sounds o, as — Stbieu, SJidljeur, ©ajipeur, ©iteue, Sitgenicur; and ot 
 is pronounced oa, as — OEtroi, SSouboit; and oy sounds oay, as — 
 loyal (=: loayal); ail and cnu are pronounced o, as — ©auce, SaBIcaii, 
 plateau; and ou sounds xi, as SBoubotr, SReffource, ©outexrotn, ©ouffleur, 
 ©ouBetttn, iSou))er. 
 
 6) German tc is generally a long i (as in Eng- 
 lish 'mien') ; in the final syllables of some loan words, 
 however, it is dissyllabic, as — Sfmatte (= Ama-h-e), 
 i^ami'iie, Smi'Ite, 
 
 German i (long, or short) always sounds like 
 Engl, ee in feel, or i in bit. 
 
 Consonants. 
 
 7) It should be observed that all jina/ con- 
 sonants are in German voiceless except the liquids 
 m, tt, ng, and r; thus final 6 and b are pronounced 
 ^) and t, even in compound words, as — 
 
 a6, SraB, Sanb, |)anb, 9iab, a6+f alien, StB^gang. 
 9Battb=tafeI, ^anb=f(^f(ig. 
 
 8) The most difficult letters are c, and ^. 
 
 a. c is pronounced in two different ways: — 
 (.1.) it sounds like k, which is now commonly sub- 
 
J^gg Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 stituted for it, before the back- vowels a, 0, 
 n, as — (Sato, ^uftur (or (Suttm), Sonfuf, 
 ^oraifer (or Sotniter), Sanbtbat. 
 (2) it sounds like ts, before the front-vowels i (or 
 ^), c (also a), b, and it when Grerman g is 
 frequently substituted for it as — S^Itiiber, 
 SinbereHa, (Sttrotie, SSfar, S^ruS, S^^ern. ?ace= 
 bcimomer, ^onjert (or Concert), ^jl^ontjifci^, O^ean. 
 
 Note. In words originally French; c (and 5) sound like double 
 B, as — ^Kalice, atinotice, SRace (commoner SRaffe), gajon. The final e 
 in these originally French words should be pronounced. 
 
 b. t^ is a simple sound but a compound letter. 
 It has no equivalent sound in English, and is 
 pronounced in two different ways, according 
 to the position or articulation of the preceding 
 vowel-sounds by which it is affected: 
 
 (1) after the guttural or back- vowels a, 0, u, 
 and the diphthong oit, it is the so-called a^- 
 sound, as — Sad^e, dia^e, fuc^en, 2od), bo(^, 
 ^and), ©traud^. 
 
 (2) after the front-vowels i, c (fi), 8, it, the diph- 
 thongs cu (and (iu) and et, in the diminutive 
 suffix — ^cn, and q/ier consonants, it is the 
 so-called it^-sound, as — ft(^er, St(^t, rac^en, 
 Siid^er, 3ei^en ; toeti^en, ^tx^txi, flretc^eln, ©trauc^e ; 
 ^tnb=c^en, 3)iab=d^en, SD?aI=c^en (from Slmalie), 
 2Wama»c^en; folder, @troI^, 3)oId^, toeld^er, 
 ^eld^, Serene. 
 
 Note 1. In words originally Greek, it sounds like I, as — S^ov, 
 Sljrifi, E^ronit, S^oratter; but (like 2) in S^emie, Sfjoronea, (Sf)aton, 3lrcf)i« 
 mcbcs, S^irutg, also S^inefe, Sf)tna. 
 
 Note 2. In words originally French it sounds like f^ (Engl. sh),. 
 as (S6arIotan, S^auffce, S^artreufe, S^aiiaitti«niu8, S^ef, Efiic, S^ifune. 
 
 Note 3. Before radical \ (8) it forms with it the compound sound 
 f+g (y), as — gladjs, ©adjf^e, ?ad|8, mac^f'en. 
 
 But if the following sibilant (f) belongs to a suffix (not to the 
 root), i) sounds regularly, according to the preceding back or front 
 vowel, as — @eru(^'finn, itoa^^fam, S8uct)»ftobe. 
 
Pronunciation of German Letters. 159 
 
 9) The letter g represents three distinct sounds : — 
 
 (1) The voiced explosive (in opposition to voi- 
 celess k), when initial in accented or unac- 
 cented syllables (English: good, be-gin), as — 
 gut, ©arten, ©iint^erj 6e=ginnen, 33e^gelpr, Sa* 
 gen, Ite*gen, (Sesgen. 
 
 (2) These two spirants: — 
 
 a. voiceless spirants (oi^-sound, and t^-sound), 
 when final in accented syllables, and in the 
 unaccented final =tg, as — ^ag, log, Strog, 
 S3ug, trug, genug, taugt; ©teg, SBeg, geig=te, 
 aeug=te, fieg-te, legate; ^(5=ntg, |)o«^ntg, ab(e)rtg, 
 tool'tig* It is the same sound as d^ (see 8, 
 6 (1), and (2). 
 
 b. voiced spirant, when initial in unaccented 
 syllables. The voiced explosive may, how- 
 ever, be indiscriminately substituted for 
 voiced spirant, as — @a=ge, ?au»ge, S®a«ge; 
 ©or=ge, 6or=gen, 2T?orsgen, ©e^toe^r, ®e=banfe. 
 
 Note 1. g (and j) in originally French words is the voiced fi^ — 
 sound (Engl, s in pleasure) which is wanting in original German; as — 
 !|3age, ®cnte, (Sontnal, ©erjeant). 
 
 Note 2, The explosives g (and t) are never mute before n, as — 
 ®nabe, ®noni, ®tiu, Snic, Snaoe. 
 
 10) qu should not be sounded like English ku, 
 but like English kv, as — Dual, Ciuelle, £litarf. 
 
 11) The sibilant f is written g when final in 
 words (also in compounds), and before b, f and ^, 
 as — ®Ia«, bteS, u>eg=toegen, ®Iae=bac^, beS^^'f^? S)reS= 
 ben, ^toSl, 2BeS^)e; and ff becomes § when final, 
 thus — S^Sffe but na§, 33ISffe but BIa§, l^affen but ^o§. 
 
 Pronounce f like English z in zeal, g ff and ^ 
 like English s in say or ss in brass. 
 
 Note. When an inflectional termination is added to a word ending 
 in (final) S, s is changed into f, as — ®ta0 but ©liifer, bteS but birf et ; 
 and ff becomes then % except after long vowels, as — na^ naffer, ga§, 
 (plur.) gaffer; but SKofi and (plur.) iKa^e, ©tug and gtugen. 
 
160 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 12) The right pronunciation of f)j, and ft (also 
 after prefixes) is f^:j), and ff^tj their pronunciation 
 corresponds to fc()I, fd^m, [c^n, fd^r, \^\o in ©d^faf 
 (sleep), [c^toimmen (swim), ©c^netber (Snider, tailor), 
 ©c^reiSer (scribe), (Sd^iDarm (swarm). 
 
 Thus — ©^Jrac^e, ®))a§, SSer4:|)red^en; ©tanb, ©telle, 
 SSer=ftanb, iBer=ftelIung; but when the f belongs to 
 the root, the pronunciation is f+^, and f+t, as — 
 2Bee=))e, garHtg, ^af4ig. 
 
 13) The letters t^ are sounded like single tj 
 t before i in the termination of loan words sounds 
 like ts (j), as — Station, patient. 
 
 14) The sound represented by the letter to 
 corresponds to English y in vain, as — toer, toaS, 
 too, toarum, SBanb, ©d^toalBe. 
 
 15) The simple letters jc, and j are compound 
 
 sounds, and represent respectively 1+8 (k+S, never 
 
 g+S, as in examen), and t+§ (t+s). 
 
 Notice the f — sound of ; in some foreign words, such as ^anjibot 
 (also ©onpot), SJejter (also SSSefiv), Vizier. 
 
 Elementary German Grammar. 
 
 Contents of Grammar. 
 Grammar consists of two main divisions: — 
 (I.) Accidence (called also Etymology) which treats 
 
 of the inflection of separate words. 
 
 (II.) Syntax which treats of the arrangement and 
 
 connection of words in a sentence. 
 
 I. Accidence. 
 
 Words may be distributed into six classes, called 
 Parts of Speech: — 
 
 1. Nouns. 2. Adjectives. 3. Pronouns. 4. Numerals. 
 5. Verbs. 6. Particles or Indeclinables : — 
 
Elementary German Grammar. 161 
 
 (1) Prepositions. 
 
 (2) Adverbs. 
 
 (3) Conjunctions. 
 
 (4) Jnterjections. 
 
 These so-called parts of speech may be divided 
 into three great groups; — 
 
 A. Those that undergo change through declension, 
 with its different inflections to mark gender, number, 
 and case: 
 
 I. Of Nouns, with their three genders. 
 II. Of Adjectives, with their degrees of 
 Comparison. 
 
 III. Of Pronouns. 
 
 IV. Of Numerals. 
 
 B. Those that undergo change through con- 
 jugation, with its different inflections to mark Voice, 
 Mood, Tense, Number, and Person: 
 
 V. Of Verbs. 
 
 1) Of Strong verbs. 
 
 2) Of Weak verbs. 
 
 C. Those words that are invariable (most of 
 which have been derived from variable words). 
 
 YI. They are also frequently called particles 
 or indeclinables. 
 
 1) Prepositions. 
 
 2) Adverbs. 
 
 3) Conjunctions; 4) Interjections. 
 
 II. Syntax. 
 
 A Sentence may be: — 1) a simple sentence 
 with its parts; or 2) a compound sentence with its 
 divisions. 
 
 A. The Simple Sentence. 
 1) Predicative relation: Subject-Nominative wi^ Verb. 
 
 11 
 
152 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 2) Attributive relation: Substantive or pronoun of 
 
 a sentence enlarged. 
 
 3) Adverbial relation: Adverbial adjunct defining 
 
 the signification of a verb, 
 adjective or adverb of which 
 it is independent. 
 
 4) Objective relation: Object of a verb towards 
 
 which the action of the verb 
 is directed, and upon which 
 it is dependent. 
 
 (1) Object as accusative. 
 
 (2) Object as dative. 
 
 (3) Object as genitive. 
 
 (4) Object with a preposition. 
 
 Note. All the words of a simple sentence must be arranged in 
 proper order, according to established usage. 
 
 B. The Compound Sentence. 
 
 It consists of two or more clauses joined to- 
 gether. It is: — 
 
 1) Coordinate, if the different clauses are inde- 
 pendent of one another, being connected by a co-or- 
 dinative conjunction (such as — unb and; ober or; 
 aBer, fonbern but). 
 
 2) Subordinate, if the construction of one clause 
 is dependent on that of the principal clause, the two 
 clauses being connected by a subordinative conjunction 
 (such as — toenn if; alg when; oBgleid^ although), 
 or a relative pronoun or adverb. 
 
 The dependent clause may be: — 
 
 (1) A substantival clause. 
 
 (2) An adjectival clause. 
 
 (3) An adverbial clause. 
 
 Note. All the words of a compound sentence must be arranged 
 in proper order, according to established usage. 
 
Gender of Nouns. 163 
 
 I. Elementary Accidence. 
 
 A. The Declension. 
 
 I. Nouns. 
 Gender of Nouns. 
 
 1. What classes of nouns belong to the mas- 
 culine gender? How do you get the root of a verb? 
 
 Write doAvn the meaning and the monosyllabic 
 
 roots of the following verbs which are masculine 
 when used as nouns: 
 
 fatten (fall) banlen (thank) 
 
 f(]^trnien (protect) gtiifen (greet) 
 
 ioufen (run) fiiffen (kiss) 
 
 rufen (call) l^angen (hang) 
 
 fd^Iafen (sleep) ftegen (be victorious) 
 
 jlreiten (quarrel) triigen (deceive). 
 
 Note. The vowel of such a root is never modified. 
 
 Exceptions. There are a few verbal roots that 
 are fem,]nine; 
 toitten (be in a rage) jSI^Ien (count) 
 
 2. What classes of nouns belong to the femi- 
 nine gender? 
 
 (1) Form feminine nouns from the following 
 masc. nouns by adding = tit (pi. ittttett) modifying 
 the root -vowels a, o, u (unless they are already 
 modified): — 
 
 ber @raf (the count) ber SBotf (wolf) 
 
 „ ^unb (dog) „ 23auer (peasant) 
 
 „ giirfl (prince) „ S(5toe (lion) 
 
 „ ^atfer (emperor) „ Sttger (tiger) 
 
 „ ^iinig (king) „ (gnglcinber (Englishman) 
 
 „ ^err (Lord, Master) „ grangofe (Frenchman) 
 „ Sei^rer (tea«?her) „ JRuffe (Kussian) 
 
 n* 
 
]^g4 Systematic Grammar Fart 
 
 Note. From the masc. appellations ending in =e, such as ber 
 SRuffe, the feminine noun is formed by dropping me final <e and then 
 adding 4n, without modifying the root-vowels. 
 
 Exception. Notice ber ^entfli^e (the German) and 
 bte Scittf^C (the German lady). 
 
 (2) The names of most rivers are feminine, with 
 a few exceptions, such as — ber Sil^ein the Rhine, 
 and what others? 
 
 (3) What derivative verbal nouns are feminine? 
 Form feminine derivative verbal nouns from 
 
 the following verbs with the endings =c, =b, =t, or 
 =ci (often seret; the word is then used contemptuously, 
 as — bte 9?ebe speech, but bte 8ieberet tattle). — 
 Itegeit (Pret. lag, He, Pret. fd^trtetd^eln (flatter) 
 
 tag) reben (talk) 
 jageit (chase) Ieil()en (lend) 
 
 liigen (tell a lie) l^flegen (nurse) 
 
 ^feifen (whistle) fd^etben (separate) 
 
 quetteit (well forth) Bitten (beg) 
 
 Stttben (bind) Ilagen (complain) 
 
 tcid^en (revenge) f:|)rec^en (Pret. f^5rac^, speak) 
 
 lel^ren (teach) fagen (say). 
 
 (4) Name some derivative noims in Aijixi, =fcit, 
 »fl|aft, =ttng, =at, and =cnb which are all feminine, 
 except — ber 3Jtj5itat (the month). 
 
 (5) Some nouns in =el, sen, *er are feminine; as: — 
 bie Stafel (table) bte ^ugef (bullet) 
 
 „ ^Jeffel (fetter) „ ^eter (feast) 
 
 „ ©d^fiiffel (dish) „ S^abel (needle, pin) 
 
 „ ©gutter (shoulder) „ ^antnter (bedroom). 
 
 3. What classes of nouns belong to the neuter 
 gender? 
 
 (1) When are proper names of place preceded 
 by bag? 
 
 (2) Notice the following proper names of place 
 
Declension of Proper Names. 
 
 165 
 
 that are not neuter and always have their article 
 before them: — 
 
 bic Stilrfet Turkey 
 „ SomBarbet Lombardy 
 „ ^ritn the Crimea 
 „ ^falj the Palatinate 
 „ ©d^toetj Switzerland 
 
 bic S3retagtte Brittany; and 
 aU the other provin- 
 ces of France. 
 bcr ?PeIo^onne'« the Pelo- 
 ponnesus 
 ba0 @Ifa§ Alsatia. 
 (3) Form diminutive nouns (with the ending 
 =^Ctl or =IctJt) irom the following nouns the root- 
 vowels of which will then be modified (except ba§ 
 ^raud^en httle woman) and the final se (if there is 
 one) dropped: 
 
 ber ^no6e 
 
 (boy) bae SetB (woman) 
 
 » Ijafe 
 
 (hare~) „ ^tnb (child) 
 (tree) „ ^ul^n (fowl) 
 
 „ S3autn 
 
 „ (Sto(f 
 
 (stick) „ §a§ (cask) 
 
 bte %xa.Vi 
 
 (woman, wife) „ 2t(|t (Hght) 
 
 „ ^oc^ter 
 
 (daughter) „ SBort (word) 
 
 „ (3an9 
 
 (goose) „ ^aar (pair, couple) 
 
 (4) Name some Infinitives used substantively 
 with bag. 
 
 (5) Name some metals that are neuter, except 
 ber (Sta!^I (meaning what?). 
 
 (6) Name some collective nouns that are neuter; 
 and notice: — 
 
 ber ®eBrouc^ (use) 
 „ ®erud^ (smell) 
 „ ©efong (song) 
 „ Oebanfe (thought) 
 
 bie Oebulb (patience) 
 „ ©efal^r (danger) 
 „ ®t\&j[&iit ^history) 
 „ ©efialt (form, figure) 
 
 4. What gender do compound nouns take? 
 
 Declension of Proper Names. 
 
 6. State how proper names of persons are 
 
1QQ Systematic Giajuhar I'art. 
 
 declined: (1) if they end, and (2) if tliey do not end, 
 in a hissing consonant. 
 
 6. State how proper na.mes of persons of ^/ie 
 ancients (mostly Greeks and Romans) are declined. 
 
 7. How are proper names of place declined? 
 
 8. How do you translate to before names of 
 place, and to before names of persons? 
 
 Declension of Common Nouns. 
 
 9. When is declension said to be strong^? 
 
 10. "When is it said to be weak^f 
 
 11. How are all feminine nouns declined in 
 the singular? 
 
 12. "What inflection do all nouns (without any 
 exception) take in the dative plural? 
 
 13. "What class of nouns (with what endiags) 
 do not take any inflection in the plural (except =n 
 for the dative)? 
 
 14. Notice that weak feminine nouns ending 
 in 4, »n, and --x (preceded by an unaccented vowel) 
 take the inflection »tt only (not *en); as — 
 
 bie geber, pi. bte ^ebernj 
 but „ Ulpr, „ „ Ul^rcn. 
 
 ' The older stages of the languaee through which the present 
 German language has passed are MiSme High German (M. H. G.) from 
 the IGtt to the 12«i century; and Old High German (O. H. G.), from 
 the 12"i to the 6^^ century. In O. H. G. some classes of nouns had 
 full sonant vowels distinct from one another for the different case- 
 endings and were on that account called 'Strong', in opposition to the 
 other classes of nouns which had only the indistinct consonant »tt for 
 the inflection of all cases alike and were therefore called 'weak'. 
 
 2 In O. H. G. and in M. H. G. weak femmme nouns took the 
 inflectional »n in the sing, (except nom.) as weU as in the plural. 
 Hence such remnants of this former declension as — gu (Sunjlen in 
 favour, ju @^ren in honour, iiitnitten in the midst of; and *w compounds 
 the first component of which is a weak feminine noun, such as — 
 greuben»feil feast of joy, @onnen<btume sun-flower, etc. 
 
Declension of Common Nouns. 1(57 
 
 The Strong Declension. 
 15. It includes nouns, with s(c)ig in the genitive 
 singular (except femin. nouns), and =c in ^q plural 
 (dat. pi. *Ctt). 
 
 All the strong feminine nouns modify in the 
 plural their root- vowels a, o, ti (= <i, ij, ii); the 
 strong neuter nouns never modify; and of the strong 
 masculine nouns the following do not modi/y in the 
 plural: — 
 
 ber 2lrtn (arm) ber SWorb (murder) 
 
 „ Stag (day) „ '^axl (park) 
 
 „ ^unb (dog) „ ©toff (stuff) 
 
 „ ©d^ul^ (shoe) „ ?aut (sound) 
 
 „ 2lal (eel) „ 2;i^ron (throne) 
 
 „ 5pfab (path) „ SSertuft (loss) 
 
 „ jiold^ (dagger) „ SSerfuc^ (attempt) 
 
 „ grfolg (success) „ Sefud^ (visit), pi. SBefud^C 
 
 etc. 
 To this declension belong: — 
 ' (1) Most masculine roots of verbs ^ and a few 
 monosyllabic nouns denoting things, as — ber ©c^Iag 
 (stroke); ber 2:tfc^ (table). 
 
 (2) Monosyllabic masculine nouns denoting living 
 beings. 
 
 (3) Derivative nouns ending in =Itng, 'X\% *ig. 
 
 (4) All loan-words (from the Greek, Latin, and 
 French) ending in =al, -m, »aft, Atx, and accented »or. 
 
 (5) Most monosyllabic feminine nouns, all of 
 which modify in the plural; as — ;^ 
 
 bte 2f;ct (axe), pi. bte ^jtc 
 
 „ 33anl (bench), „ „ SSiinlc 
 
 .,, gfauft (fist), „ „ %mt 
 
 ,, .^anb (liand), „ „ ^finbc 
 
 „ 5?iJ^ (co9f), „ „ Sii^c 
 
1(53 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 bte ^unft (art), pi. bte ^itnfic 
 „ aWoc^t (might), ,. „ Wl&i^tt (powers) 
 „ SRac^t (night), „ „ STific^tc; etc. 
 
 16. It includes further nouns that take =g in 
 the gen. sing, but no inflection in the plural (ex- 
 cept =n for the dat. pi.): — 
 
 (1) the nwsculine and neuter nouns in «cl, ^etl, 
 *IX, the following of which only modify in the 
 plural: — 
 ber Stder (field) 
 
 „ ar^fel (apple) 
 „ 33oben (ground, loft) 
 „ S3ruber (brother) 
 „ ©arten (garden) 
 „ OraBen (ditch) 
 „ ^afen (haven) 
 „ i^anbel (commerce) 
 „ Sabeti (shutter) 
 „ 3JiangeI (want) 
 „ 2RanteI (mantle) 
 
 (2) AU the neuter diminutive nouns ending ia 
 "^m, and 4cin. 
 
 (3) Neuter nouns ending in =c; except — bag 
 £>'i)X (ear), bag Sluge (eye), bag ®nbe (end) etc., which 
 take (e)n in the plural. They do not modify. 
 
 (4) 2)61 ^Sfe (cheese), gen. sing. be6 ^cifeg, pi. 
 bie «(ife. 
 
 (5) ®te SWutter (mother), and bte S^oc^ter (daughter) 
 which modify in the plural. 
 
 (6) And the nouns ending in =nt8 (pi. niffe), 
 and '\vX. 
 
 The Weak Declension. 
 
 17. It includes nouns that take =en (or sn) for 
 
 all cases of the singular (except femin. nouns) and 
 
 ber Sllagcl 
 
 (nail) 
 
 „ Dfen 
 
 (oven, stove) 
 
 „ ©attel 
 
 (saddle) 
 
 „ ©d^aben 
 
 (damage) 
 
 „ ©c^naBel (beak) 
 
 „ ^^\a<x%ix (brother-in- 
 
 
 law) 
 
 „ SSater 
 
 (father) 
 
 „ Sagen 
 
 (waggon. 
 
 
 cart) etc. 
 
Declension of Common Nouus. 169 
 
 plural. Those feminine nouns ending in *I, *n, and 
 unaccented =r take only -n (not =en) in the plural. 
 
 No weak noun modifies the root -vowel in the 
 plural. 
 
 They are: — 
 
 (1) AH masculine nouns that end now in -t ; and 
 the following that used to end in =e: — 
 
 ber 2l3n (ancestor) ber ^trt (shepherd) 
 
 „ Sar (bear) „ ^err (Mr., Lord) 
 
 „ %\ix\i (princely person) „ SlfJenfi^ (man; human 
 
 „ ^rinj (prince) being) 
 
 ,^ ®raf (count, earl) „ Si^rtft (Christian) 
 
 „ %^tix or '^axx (fool) „ ©efe'Q (companion) 
 
 „ ^elb (hero) „ Sum^ (vagabond) 
 
 Note. §etr makes §ettn in the sing., and §eircn in the plural. 
 And the following nouns that also end in =c 
 in the nominative sing, but, whilst admitting of an 
 additional =n in the nominative, must take now ia 
 the genitive sing, the strong inflection =8, besides 
 the weak »n; thus they take now in the gen. sing. 
 =ni?, all other cases sing, and plural *n. They are : — 
 ber f^rtebe (peace) ber ®ebanle (thought) 
 
 „ %\aiit (spark) „ ©fauBe (belief) 
 
 „ %t\% (rock) „ ©ante (seed) 
 
 „ S3uc^fta6e (letter of al- „ S'fame (name) 
 
 phabet) „ SBiHe (will) 
 „ ^aufe (heap, troop) 
 
 The neuter baS §erj (heart) also follows the 
 declension of these nouns (gen. sing. =cn§, ace. sing, 
 ^erj, all other cases sing. & plur. =en). 
 
 (2) All loan-words not ending in =oI, ^an, =aft, 
 =ier, and those ending in unaccented =or. 
 
 (3) All dissyllabic (of more than one syllable) 
 
170 
 
 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 feminine nouns (except SWutter and ^od^ter, and those 
 in =mS, and =f«0. Most of these end in ^et, 4n, '^Ui, 
 'itxi, -ft^aft, and ^ung. 
 
 (4) All feminine derivative verbal nouns ending 
 in sc, =b, and =t, besides the following monosyllabic 
 
 nouns: — 
 
 bte Slrt (kind) 
 
 
 bte 2BeIt (world) 
 
 „ 93a^ii (path) 
 
 
 „ (Slut (glow) 
 
 „ ^v^iii (bay) 
 
 
 „ 5)3oft (post-oface) 
 
 „ ^lur (field) 
 
 
 „ ^flic^t (duty) 
 
 „ S3urg (castle) 
 
 
 „ ©d^aar (host, troop) 
 
 „ ^rau (woman, 
 
 wife) 
 
 „ ©d^rtft (writing) 
 
 „ U^r (watch, ( 
 
 clock) 
 
 „ ©d^fad^t (battle) 
 
 „ %t>xxs\. (mould) 
 
 
 „ ©d^ulb (guilt) 
 
 „ ^(^1^ (chase) 
 
 
 „ S^at (deed) 
 
 „ ^^M (load) 
 
 
 „ SErad^t (dress) 
 
 „ ^rut (flood) 
 
 
 „ 3ett (time) 
 
 „ Oual (torture) 
 
 
 „ aSa^I (choice) 
 
 „ 2;^ur (door) 
 
 
 „ 3a^r (number). 
 
 The Mixed Declension. 
 
 18. It includes masc. and neut. nouns that take 
 the strong inflection =(c)!? in the singular, and the 
 weak (jc)lt in the plural. They do not modify in the 
 plural. 
 
 (1) The following masculines: — 
 
 (peasant) ber 'Bia.Q.i (state) 
 
 ber 93auer 
 
 „ ®orn 
 
 (thorn) 
 „ ®d|)merj (pain) 
 „ ©tad^el (sting) 
 „ ®ee (lake) 
 
 „ ©trol^t (ray) 
 
 „ Uittertl^an (subject of 
 
 state) 
 „ SSetter (male cousin). 
 
 (2) Masculine nouns ending in unaccented -vt, 
 as — ber 2)ottor (doctor), and a few other loan- 
 
Declension of Adjectives. 171 
 
 words such as — ber toilful (consul), bet ^riBun 
 
 (tribune), ber ^rSfe!t (prefect). 
 
 (3) The following neuters: — 
 
 bag Sluge (eye) bag ^erab (shirt) 
 
 „ Sett (bed) „' Snfeft (insect) 
 
 „ @nbe (end) „ Ol^r (ear). 
 
 The Anomalous Declension. 
 
 19. It includes masc. and neuter nouns that take 
 the strong sg in the gen. sing., and ^cr in the plural 
 (dat. pi. =crn). They all modify in the plural a, o, u, 
 and au (a, o, ii, ciu). 
 
 (1) Some masculines: 
 
 ber ®etft (spirit) ber Sianb (edge) 
 
 „ ®ott (god) „ SBatb (wood) 
 
 „ 3Jiann (man) „ SBurm (worm), pi. Sftr= 
 
 „ ?etb (body) met. 
 
 „ Ort (spot, place) 
 
 (2) All nouns ending in Avm (pi. =titmei;), and 
 a few in *mot (pi- -ntciler or =malc). 
 
 (3) Most neuter monosyllabic nouns, such as — 
 bag 9?eft (nest), ba8 Sanb (land), baS SSoI! (people) 
 
 „ ^inb (child), „ ®orf (viUage), „ ^au« (house); 
 pi. bte |)(iufcr, 356rfcr, ^tnbcr; etc. 
 
 II. Adjectives. 
 Declension of Adjectives. 
 
 20. What do you understand by predicative ad- 
 jectives? Are they declined? 
 
 21. How are adjectives (or participles) declined 
 if they are neither preceded hj article nor pronoun? 
 
 22. What do you understand by attributive ad- 
 jectives ? 
 
 23. What inflection does the nominative and 
 
172 
 
 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 the fern, and neut. accus. of the attributive adj. take, 
 if it is preceded: 
 
 (1) by the definite article, or one of the demonstra- 
 tive or relative pronouns? 
 
 (2) by the indefinite article^ or one of the posses- 
 sive adjectives meiti, betn, fetn, etc.? 
 
 (3) what inflections do the other cases of the 
 sing, and plural take? 
 
 24. Notice that l^od^ 'high' drops the c before 
 ]^ if an inflectional «c is added; as — ber ©erg tfl 
 1^0^, but ber l^opc 33erg. 
 
 25. Are adjectives (including those denoting na- 
 tionality, as 'English') spelt with small letters, or 
 with capital letters? 
 
 Write down the adjectives formed from the 
 following words: — 
 
 ber Siomer 
 
 the Eoman 
 
 „ 3taltener 
 
 „ Italian 
 
 ,, Siuffe 
 
 „ Russian 
 
 „ Sflrfe 
 
 „ Turk 
 
 „ Dflretd^er 
 
 „ Austrian 
 
 „ ©nglcitiber 
 
 „ Englishman 
 
 „ SDeutfd^e 
 
 „ Grerman 
 
 „ grangofe 
 
 „ Frenchman 
 
 „ @^)amer 
 
 „ Spaniard 
 
 „ Sater 
 
 „ Bavarian 
 
 „ ^reu§c 
 
 „ Prussian 
 
 „ «|Jortugtefe 
 
 ,, Portugese 
 
 „ Slmertlaner 
 
 „ American 
 
 „ ©d^otte 
 
 „ Scotsman 
 
 „ Ste 
 
 „ Irishman 
 
 „ (Sg^pter 
 
 „ Egyptian 
 
 „ Suro^)cfer 
 
 „ European 
 
 „ ©a(^fe 
 
 „ Saxon 
 
Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 173 
 
 ber SRortDege the Norwegian 
 „ ®ctne „ Dane 
 
 „ ©c^toebe „ Swede. 
 
 26. Are adjectives (or participles) used sub- 
 stantively spelt with small or capital letters? 
 gele^rt learned; reifenb travelling; bertoanbt related; 
 
 fremb strange. 
 Translate: — 
 learned man; learned men; traveller; travellers; re- 
 lative; relatives; stranger; strangers. 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 27. State how the comparative and superlative 
 of adjectives are formed. 
 
 28. State what inflections the superlative with 
 bet and am takes. ^ 
 
 29. Notice: if the superlative is in English pre- 
 ceded by 'a', it should be rendered in German by 
 ein fe^r (very) with the positive of the adj.; as — 
 
 'a most diligent boy' cin fcl^r ffet§tger ^naBe. 
 
 30. How do you translate 'than' after a com- 
 parative ? 
 
 31. The following adjectives modify their root- 
 vowels a, 0, u (ci, 0, it) in the comparative and super- 
 lative: — 
 
 alt, old. I^art, hard. franf, ill. f«i^fltf, sharp, 
 
 arm, poor, jung, young, furg, short, f ^toarj, dark. 
 groB, rough, folt, cold. lang, long, ftarf, strong. 
 gro§, great. Hug, clever, rot, red. toarm, warm. 
 
 Examples: — olt, atter, ber cifteftc. 
 
 toarm, to^rtner, am tuarmjien. 
 
 32. Notice: 'as . . . as' (eBen)fo . . .tote; 'not so 
 . . .as' nid^t fo ... tote; 'the (with comp.) ... the (with 
 comp.)' je (with comp.) . . . befto (with comparative) ; 
 
[74 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 as — je '^o^ev bet SSerg, befto ttefer baS ^'^at, 
 
 the higher the hill, the deeper the dale (valley). 
 'all the better' am fo 6effer. 
 
 33. Write down the comparative with cilt, and 
 the superlative with ant of the following adjectives 
 and adverbs: — 
 
 gut, ]^od^, gem, nal^e, gro§, Balb. 
 
 34. Form comparatives from ber erfte (first) 
 and ber le^te (last), and state their meanings. 
 
 III. Numerals. 
 Declension of cardinal and ordinal Numerals. 
 
 35. Write the cardinal numerals down from 
 1 to 20, and state how the ordinal numerals are 
 formed therefrom, 
 
 36. Wri^ the tens down from 20 to 100, and 
 state how the ordinals are formed therefrom. 
 
 37. When does ein (one) take an =S ? 
 
 38. Notice that the inflection =cr (genitive) is 
 added to jtoet and bret if they are not preceded by 
 an article, a pronoun, or a preposition; as — 
 
 bte ©d&toefier jtoetcr Sriiber, 
 but bie ©d^toefter ber gtoei 33ruber; 
 and all cardinals take the inflection scit (dative) if 
 not followed by a noun in the same case (dat.); as — 
 er ging rait filnfcn (dat.) feiner (genit.) gteun^e; 
 but, et ging rait fiinf ^teunben (dat.). 
 
 39. Of what gender are single cardinal nume- 
 rals used as substantives? 
 
 40. Name some adjectives derived from numerals. 
 
 IV. Pronouns. 
 
 Declension of the Pronouns. 
 
 41. There are six classes of pronouns: — 
 
Auxiliary Verbs of Tense. 175 
 
 (1) The Demonstrative adjectives and pronouns. 
 Enumerate them, and decline btefcr (masc), 
 btefc (fem.), btefcS (neut.) this. 
 
 (2) The Relative pronouns. 
 
 Enumerate them, and decline bet used as 
 relat. pronoun. 
 
 (3) The Interrogative pronouns. 
 Enumerate them, and decline toer? 
 
 (4) The Indefinite pronouns. 
 
 Enumerate them, and state how they are 
 declined. 
 
 (5) The Personal pronouns; they are \6!) — totr; 
 bit — il^r • er, fte, e« — fie. Decline t^ — toir. 
 
 (6) The Possessive adjectives and pronouns. 
 Enumerate them, and state the difference 
 between the two classes of adjectives and pro- 
 nouns. 
 
 Note. 'My people or friends' is generally rendered by bie iKeinigcn 
 (pi.), etc.; 'my property' by bag 2Bcintge, etc. 
 
 42. State when the pronouns of the 2^^ person 
 are rendered by bu (sing.) — t^r (pi.), and by ©ie 
 (sing. & pi.). 
 
 B. The Conjugation, 
 
 The formation of all the inflections and combinations used 
 to indicate Voice, Mood, Tense, Number, and Person of a verb. 
 
 V. Verbs. 
 
 The Auxiliary Verbs of Tense. 
 
 43. There are two classes of verbs, the strong, 
 and the weak. A verb forming the Preterite by an 
 internal vowel-change is called strong \ a verb for- 
 ming the Preterite by the addition to the root of 
 the inflection ^tc, foreign to its root, is called weak. 
 
 The Present, the Preterite, the Imperative, the 
 
176 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 Present Infinitive, and the Participles are the only 
 tenses of the Active voice formed by inflection. 
 
 All the other tenses of the Active and Passive 
 Voices are formed by means of the three verbs l^aBett 
 (have), fetn (be), and toerben (become), therefore called 
 auxiliary verbs of tense. 
 
 44. Conjugation of the auxiliary verbs of tense. 
 
 The auxiliary verb fetn is composed of three 
 roots: Bin (pres. Ind.), fet (pres. Subj.), tear (Pre- 
 terite, originally toaS from toefen, hke English 'was'). 
 The verb toerben is conjugated strong; l^aben is con- 
 jugated "weak and changes, by assimilation, 6 into 
 t if followed by te, but drops 6 before t in the 2^^ 
 and 3'^d persons sing, present indicative (bu Ipaft, er 
 l^ot); perfect participle gei^aBt retains 6. 
 
 (1) ©cin, be. (2) S93crbcn, become. (3) ^akn, have. 
 Simple Tenses : 
 
 Present 
 
 Ind. S. 1. id^ fitn, t(^ ttetbe, td^ l^oBc, I have 
 
 I am I become 
 
 2. bu bift bu totrft bu l^aft (from ^aB^t) 
 
 3. er tft er totrb er l^at (from l^aBrt) 
 PL 1. toir ftnb toir toerben totr ^aBen 
 
 2. tl^r fetb tl^r toerbet t^r l^aBet 
 
 3. fte ftnb fte toerben fte l^aBen 
 
 Subj.S.l, \6) fct, id^ toeibe^ td^ fjaBc, I have 
 
 I be I become 
 
 2. bu feift bu tocrbeft bu ^aBeft 
 
 3. er fet er tocrbc er l^aBc 
 PI. 1. totr feien totr toerben totr l^aBen 
 
 2. tl^r fetet t^r toerbet tl^r ^aBet 
 
 3, fte feien fte toerben fte BaBen 
 
Auxiliary Verbs of Tense. 
 
 177 
 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 
 Ind. S. 1. tc^ toar, 
 
 id^tiJarbortourbc, \^ ^attc (from 
 
 I was 
 
 I became 
 
 ^aB=te), I had 
 
 2. bu toarft 
 
 bu tourbeft 
 
 bu ^attefl 
 
 3. er mat 
 
 er hiatb or hjurbc er l^attc 
 
 PI. 1. hjir toaren toir tourben 
 
 toir l^atten 
 
 2 tl^r toarel 
 
 : il^r tourbet 
 
 i^r ^ttet 
 
 3. fte toaren 
 
 fie tourben 
 
 fie l^atten 
 
 Subj.SA. tc^ ttjftrc, 
 
 ic^ ttiftrbc, 
 
 x^ \)mz, I had 
 
 I were 
 
 I became 
 
 
 2. bu tofireft 
 
 bu tourbeft 
 
 bu l^attefi 
 
 3. er tocire 
 
 er toiifbe 
 
 er ^(ttte 
 
 PI. 1. toir toiiren 
 
 toir toiirben 
 
 toir l^atten 
 
 2. t^r tociret 
 
 il^r toSrbet 
 
 i^ ^ttet 
 
 3. fte toaren 
 
 fte toiirben 
 Imperative. 
 
 ^e Bfitten 
 
 S. fcl! be thou! 
 
 ttJcrbc! become 
 thou! 
 
 J^aBc! have thou! 
 
 fet er! be he! 
 
 toerbe er! let him 
 
 I^Be er! let him 
 
 
 become-! 
 
 \LSSIf%\ 
 
 PI. feten toir! let us 
 
 toerb€n toir! let 
 
 l^aBen toir! let us 
 
 be! 
 
 us become! 
 
 have! 
 
 feib (or feien 
 
 toerbet! become 
 
 l^aBet! have ye! 
 
 @ie)! be yes! 
 
 ye! 
 
 
 feien fte! let 
 
 toerben fte! let 
 
 l^aBen fte! let 
 
 them be! 
 
 them become! 
 Infinitives. 
 
 them have! 
 
 Pres. fein. 
 
 toerben. 
 
 l^aBen. 
 
 Perf. getoefen fein, 
 
 getoorben fein, 
 
 gel^aBt l^aBen, 
 
 have been. 
 
 have become. 
 Participles. 
 
 have had. 
 
 Pres. feienb, being. 
 
 toerbenb. 
 
 ^oBenb, having. 
 
 Perf. getoefen. 
 
 getoorben. 
 
 gel^aBt. 
 
 12 
 
178 
 
 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 Ind. S. 
 PI. 
 
 Subj. S. 
 PI. 
 
 Ind. S. 
 PI. 
 
 Subj. S 
 PI 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 1, 
 2. 
 
 Compound Tenses: 
 
 Future Indefinite. 
 
 \^ iucrbc 
 
 fetn - 
 I shall 
 be. 
 
 bu toirft 
 er totrb 
 totr toerben 
 il^r toerbet 
 3. fte toerben 
 
 1. ic^ toctbc 
 
 2. bu toerbcft 
 
 3. er tocrbc 
 
 1. totr toerben 
 
 2. tl^r toerbet 
 
 3. fie toerben 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 
 - toerben 
 
 I shall 
 
 become 
 
 — l^aBen. 
 I shall 
 have. 
 
 fetn — toerben 
 I shall I shall 
 be. become. 
 
 1. \^ Bin 
 
 2. btt Bift 
 
 3. er tft 
 
 1. totr pnb 
 
 2. i^r fetb 
 
 getoefen 
 
 I have 
 
 been. 
 
 gebiotben 
 
 I have 
 become. 
 
 getaiefen 
 
 I have 
 
 been. 
 
 gekootben 
 
 I have 
 become. 
 
 3. fte ftnb 
 
 .1. tc^ fci 
 
 2. bu feifi 
 
 3. er fet 
 
 1. totr feten 
 
 2. i!^r feiet 
 
 3. fte feten 
 
 Past Perfect. 
 
 ^ Jtjor gcUicfctt — gctttotbcn. tc^ ^attc gcl^nBt. 
 
 had been. Ihad become. I had had. 
 
 td^ ^aBe 
 
 bu ]^a|t 
 er l^at 
 toir l^aBen 
 tl^r l^aBt 
 fte l^afien 
 
 t(^ l^aBe 
 bu l^aBcft 
 er l^obc 
 totr l^aBen 
 i!^r l^aBet 
 fie !^aBen 
 
 ■ IpaBen. 
 I shall 
 have. 
 
 gel^aBt 
 
 I have 
 had. 
 
 gel^ttBt. 
 
 I have 
 had. 
 
 Ind, tc 
 I 
 
 Subj. \^ toorc— gctDcfctt— gctootbcn. \^ pttc gc|aBt. 
 I had been. I had become. I had had. 
 
The Weak Verbs. 179 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 Ind. tc^toerbe — getoefenfein — getoorbenfetn— gel^afet ^aBen. 
 
 I shall have been. I shall have I shall have 
 
 become. had. 
 
 butoirft — getoefenfein — getoorben fetn — gel^aBtl^aBeiu 
 Std)j. id^ toerbe — getoefen fetn — getoorbenf etn — ge^^aBt l^abeit, 
 
 bu toetbeft „ „ „ 
 
 Conditional Mood. 
 Present: t(| toiirbe fein — toerben — l^aBen, I should — 
 
 be — become — have. 
 Past: t(^ toiirbe getoefen fein — getoorben fein — ge^att 
 
 l^aBen. 
 I should — have been —have become — have had. 
 Note. '(To) be light' is SRcii^t ^aben; 'be wrong', UnreiJ^t l^oben, 'be- 
 come of, merben au« (dat.). Examples: — 
 er l^atte SRei^t, he was right, 
 rotr metben Unrec^t ftaben, we shall be wrong. 
 toaS tfl au8 S^tem greunbe getuorben? what became of your ftiend? 
 
 1. The Weak Verbs. 
 46. Characteristics: The Preterite takes the in- 
 flection =tc (or =etc), an abridged remnant of the 
 ancient Preterite of tl^un (do) corresponding to modern 
 t^at (did). The Perfect Participle takes the inflection 
 4, (or =ct), besides the prefix ge=. 
 
 46. If the stem of the weak verb ends in b, t, 
 and m or n preceded by another consonant (except 
 single ^ and r), the inflection =ctc is used for the 
 Preterite, and =ct for the Perf Participle, and also 
 the 'ifi^ and 3*^ persons of the Pres. Indie, take an 
 C before the inflections; as — 
 
 Pres. 1. ic^ rebe I talk, Pret. id^ rebctc P P. gcrebct. 
 
 2. bu rebcft bu rebetcft 
 
 3. er rebct er rebetc 
 
 Pres. 1. \^ jetd^ne I draw, „ ic^ jetd^nctc, „ gejeid^nct. 
 
 47. If the stem of a weak verb ends in a his- 
 
 12* 
 
180 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 sing-consonant (f, §, fd^, j, and y) the 2id person 
 sing, of tlie Pres. Ind. may take the inflection *cft, 
 or shortened into =t; as — 
 Pres. 1. ic^ reife I travel, 2. bu reifcft (or reift), 3. er retft. 
 
 48. Notice that this e before the inflection is 
 also retained in the Pres. Subjunctive, the 3'"i pers. 
 sing, of which ends in =c (not =t). The Preterite is 
 alike for both Indicative and Subjunctive and is never 
 modified. 
 
 49. Verbs of foreign origin end in Atxva and 
 do not admit the ges (in the Perf. Participle) which 
 is also omitted with any weak or strong verb having 
 one of the following inseparable prefixes: — 
 
 \^t', gc«, >Btber=, cm^=, tvA.-, jer=, 
 ini|=, cr=, l^tuter*, t)oII=, and t)cr=. 
 Thus — 
 
 marf (i^icrcn (march), Pret. marfd^icrtc, P- P. niarfc^tert; 
 
 cntbeien (discover), „ entbedtc, „ cntbecEt; 
 
 COTijjfangen (receive), „ em^jfing, „ cm:|»fangcn. 
 
 50. Name those weak verbs that undergo a 
 vowel-change, besides taking the inflection -it in the 
 Preterite, and »t in the Perf. Participle. In the Pret. 
 Subj. they retain, however, the e of the root. 
 
 The Pret. Subj. of Bringen (bring), and benfeii 
 (think) is formed by modifying the a of the Pret. 
 Indie, as — Pret. id^ Bra^te (Subj. t(^ Brad^te), td^ 
 bad^te (Subj. tc^ bSc^te I should think). 
 
 2. The Strang Verbs. 
 
 51. Characteristics: The Preterite (and most 
 Perf. Participles) are formed by a vowel-change (SlBs 
 laut) of the root; and the Per/. Part, retains ^cn of 
 the Infinitive, besides taking the prefix ge*. 
 
 The .1st and 3"^'^ persons plural of all tenses and 
 the 1st and S'"* persons sing, of the Pret. are ahke. 
 
The Strong Verbs. 
 
 181 
 
 52. According to the rootoowel of the stem 
 of a verb, and the vowel-change of the Preterite and 
 Perfect Participles we distinguish five classes of strong 
 verbs. 
 
 The Pret. Subj. is formed from the Pret. Subj. 
 by adding the inflection =c and modifying the root> 
 vowel of the Pret. Ind. 
 
 First Class. 
 
 (1) Root- Vowel a: Preterite, tC, and Perf Part., n. 
 The 2^^ and S'"*! persons of the Pres. Indie, take a 
 modification (ft). 
 
 53. fallen — ftcl — gcfflttcn — conjugation. 
 
 Infinitive. 3"i p. Pres. Ind. Pret. Ind. & Subj. Perf. Part. 
 
 Mafen (blow) Bliift Blicg (BItef e) geBIafen 
 
 fcraten (roast) Brftt (from 6ratet) briet (Brtete) geBraten 
 
 fatten (fall) fiillt 
 
 fangen (catch) ffingt 
 
 ^alten (hold) l^dlt 
 
 l^angen (hang) l^fitigt 
 
 taffen (let) lii^t 
 
 raten (advise) rftt 
 
 f^Iaf en (sleep) f d^fftft 
 
 Exception: f^oKcn (sound), 
 flatten. 
 
 (2) All the other strong verbs with the root- 
 vowel a not included in the above list take in the 
 Preterite the vowel it (Subj. ft), whilst the Perf. 
 Part, retains ti. 
 
 The a of the 2id and 3^^^ persons Pres. Ind. is 
 modified (a) except in fd^affen; further, 6acfen drops the c 
 before f, and fc^affen one f in the Pret. Ind. & Subj. 
 
 54. fasten (drive) — fu|i* — gcf o^ren — conjugation. 
 Thus — 6rt(fcn(bake) 6acft Buf (bufe) gcBoden 
 
 ft^affcn (create) f^afft, fdjuf (fc^ttfe) gef c^affen ; etc. 
 
 fief (ftefe) gefatten 
 fing (ftnge) gefangen' 
 l^ictt (pelte) gel^alten 
 
 l^ing (^tnge) ge^angen 
 Ue| (Ite^e) gelaffen 
 tiet (tiete) geraten 
 fti^Iicf (fc^ttefe) gefc^fafen 
 
 Pret. ft^oH, P. P. gc= 
 
182 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 Second Class. 
 
 Root- Vowel c before fi, t, and ^ followed by a vowel: 
 Preterite a, Perf. Part. c» 
 
 55. frcffcn — fra§ — gcfrcffcn — conjugation. 
 
 Infinitive. 3'dp. Pr. Ind. Preterite. Perf. Part. 
 
 freffen (eat, of animals) fri§t fra|(frci§e) gefreffejt 
 ^enefen (recover) geneft gcna§ (.gencife) genefen 
 
 gefd^el^en (happen) gefc^ic^t gcfd^fll^(gefd^a^e)ge[d^e^en 
 refen(read) Ueft kg (Icife) gelefen 
 
 meffen (measure) tnt§t ma^ (ttta§e) gemeffen 
 
 fe^en(see) fic^t M (fS^e) gefe^en 
 
 treten(step) tritt trat(trate) getreten 
 
 bergeffen (forget) toergiBt Jjcrgo^ (berga§e) bergeffen 
 
 Further, with some irregularities: — 
 effen(eat, ofman) igt 0^ (a§e) gegeffeit 
 
 . Notice the double t in bu trittft and er tritt, 
 and the change of e into t, or te in the 2^^ and 
 3rd perg_ gjiig. of the Pres. Ind., and in the sing, of 
 the Imperative; observe also gekn (give), Pret. gaB, 
 P. P. gcgeBcn. 
 Exceptions: gc^cn (go), Pret. ging, P. P. gegongcti; 
 fic^ctt (stand), „ llanb, „ gcjittnbcn. 
 
 Third Class. 
 
 (1) Root-vowel ct before 6), f, ff, and t: Pret. & Perf 
 Part, short i. 
 
 56. Bci^ctt — Bi§ — gcBiffen — conjugation. 
 
 The f and t are doubled after short t fin the 
 Pret. & Perf Part.). 
 
 Infinitive. Preterite. Perf. Part. 
 
 6ei§en (bite) U^ (Siffe) gcBiffcti ' 
 
 (fid^) 6eflet§en (apply one's self) kflt^ (Befltffe) Bcfltffctt 
 erBteic^en (turn pale) crWitf; (erSIii^e) erWid^cn 
 
The Strong Verba, 183 
 
 Infinitive. Preterite. Perf. Part. 
 
 gletd^en (resemble) glt^ (g^td&e) gcgttii^cn 
 
 gteiten (glide) gittt fglttte) gcgltttctt 
 
 greifen (seize) Qtijf (griffe) gcgrtffctt 
 
 Ineifen (pinch) fniff (!ntffe) gcfntffen 
 
 ^fe^icn (whistle) ))fiff (^ftffe) 9C.J>WC« 
 
 rei§en (tear) ri§ (tiffe) gcriffctt 
 
 reiten (ride) rttt (ritte) gcttttctt 
 
 fd^fai^en (sneak) f(!^U(i^ (f<^i(^e) gcf^li^tt 
 
 f<!^t«fcn (grind) ft^Iiff (fd^affe) gcft^ffcit 
 
 fd^taet^en (smite, fling) f^mt^ (fc^mtffe) gcf^tttiffcn 
 |d;retten (stride) j^ritt (fd^tttte) gcfri^rittcn 
 
 ftretd^en (stroke) fttt^ (^ri^e) 9«ftri^cn 
 
 ftretten (contend) ftrttt (ftrttte) gcftrtttCtt 
 
 toetc^n (yield) tiiiS) (totd^) gcta)t(i^ett 
 
 Notice farther Iciben (suffer), Pret. Utt, P. P. gc= 
 littCW, and ft^ttcibcil (cut), Pret. f^tlttt, P. P. gcf^tttttcil. 
 
 Exception: ^cifecn (be called), Pret. ]^lc§, P. P. gc= 
 
 (2) All the other strong verbs with root-vowel 
 ci not included in the above list take long i, spelt 
 tc, in the Preterite and Perf, Participle, 
 
 57. Bleifien — BUeB — gcBiicBcn — conjugation. 
 Thus — SteiBen (remain) BlteB (6Ite6e) gcWietett 
 lei^en (lend) Kc^ (tie^e) geltci^cn 
 
 ineibeii (avoid) micb (miebe) gemicbctt;etc. 
 
 Fourth Class. 
 
 Root-vowels ic, au; ft, i), it; further c before % % ^, 
 
 and I followed by any other consonant but t and f: 
 
 Preterite and Perf Part. o. 
 
 58. Ijtegcn — Bog — gcBogen — conjugation. 
 
 Infinitive. Preterite lud. & Subj. Perf. Part. 
 
 biegen (bend) 5og (6oge) gcfiogcti 
 
184 
 
 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 Preterite Ind. & Subj. Perf. Part. 
 
 (a) 
 
 iot (Bote) geBoten 
 
 ffoji (ftoge) geffottctt 
 
 fto^ (flo^e) gcfllo^en 
 
 Hog (fToffe) gcffoffeii 
 
 fror (friire) gcfrorcu 
 
 gCllDg (genoffe) genoffcn 
 
 flof (goffe) scgoffen 
 
 fro^ (Irod^e) gcfrod^en 
 
 log ((oge) gelogctt 
 
 roc^ (vod^e) gcro*ett 
 
 6ctrog (Betroge) tictrogen 
 
 uerior (feetloie) uertoren 
 
 (b) 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Bieten (bid, offer) 
 fitegen (fly) 
 flie|en (flee) 
 ffte|en (flow) 
 frieren (freeze) 
 gente^en (enjoy) 
 gie§eu (pour) 
 ftted^en (creep) 
 lilgen (tell a lie) 
 riec^en (smell) 
 Betriigen (deceive) 
 toertteren (lose) 
 
 Betoegen (induce) htWO^ (BetoBge) l^etttogett 
 
 erIof{i^en(be extinguished) crlofi^ (erlofd^e) erlof^ett 
 
 ertofig«n (consider) erjwog (CTtoiJge) etrwogett 
 
 fo^t (fot^te) g«fo4)tcn 
 
 f[o4)t (Pt^te) gefo^ten 
 
 ^06 (^oBe) gc^ofiett 
 
 molf (molfe) gemolfett 
 ff^molj (f(^ttt6f3e) gefc^moljcn 
 
 f^ttJor (f^^toore) gef^worcn 
 
 tt)ob (tooBe) gcwobcttjetc. 
 
 fec^ten (fight) 
 fted^ten (twist) 
 ^eBen (lift) 
 tttellen (milk) 
 fci^metjen (melt) 
 fd^iDflr«n (swear) 
 toeBen (weave) 
 
 Note 1. The e (and 6) of the 2nd and 3^3 persons sing, of the 
 Pres. Ind. of fec^ten, erWfd^n, fted^teii, quetten, f(i^eljtn, and fei^metten may- 
 be changed into i, as — iij fec^te, bu ftd^tp, er ftc()t; notice further jie^en 
 (pull), Rret. jog, P. P. gejogen. 
 
 Note 2. Double f after a short vowel is spelt ff, after a long 
 vowel ^. 
 
 Exceptions : Hegcn (lie, of place), Pret. lag^P.P.gcIegen; 
 Ittufcn (run), „ lief, „ gctaufcn; 
 
 ^antn (hew, beat), „ ^icb, „ geftauen. 
 
The Strong Verbs. 
 
 185 
 
 Fifth Class. 
 
 (1) Hoot-vowel t before double m or n, and e 
 before any other consonant than those in the 2^^ and 
 4*'^ classes: Preterite a, Perf. Part. o. 
 
 59. fteginncn — Jcgatin — Begonncn conjugation. 
 
 Infinitive. 3'ii p. s. Pres. Ind. Pret. Ind. & Subj. Perf. Part. 
 
 (a) 
 Beginnt Begtttttt (Beganne) Begonttctt 
 getoinnt 9Ctt»ann(getoctnne)gett»onncn 
 rinnt tann (ranne) Qcronncti 
 fd^totmmtf(i^tt>amm(f^toamme) gefriptti- 
 finnt tann (fcinne) gcfonnen 
 f^innt fijann (^anne) gcf^jonnen 
 
 (b) 
 
 Birgt Jttrg (^(irge) Qcborgcn 
 
 Befic^It Befall (6ef«^Ie) befo^len 
 
 Birft barfl (Barfte) geBorfiett 
 
 Btid^t Bra^ (Brad^e) geBrod^en 
 
 brifd^t brafc^(brafd^e) aebrof^cn 
 emijfie^lt empfaP (em^jf a^fej cnH)fo^= 
 
 Ictt. 
 
 •erfc^rtcft crfd^taf (er* ctfc^rorfen 
 
 fd^ra!e) 
 
 gift gait (galte) gcgolfcn 
 
 ^itft balfWe) gebolfcn 
 
 fommt fam (Ume) gel omtncn 
 
 na^m (nci^tne) gcnommcn 
 
 fc^itt f($ttlt a<3&afte) gefc^olten 
 
 fprid^t fprttd^ (f^tfl<^e) gefpw4ien 
 
 flic^t flo^ (ftSci^e) gefio^ctt 
 
 flie^rt ftttl)t(fta^Ie) gcftoMen 
 
 ftirBt ftarbCbutftutBe) gcftoi'den 
 
 trtfft trof (trafe) gctvoffen 
 
 Beginnen (begin) 
 getoinnen (win) 
 rtnnen (flow) 
 fd^totmtnen (swim) 
 jtnnen (muse) 
 i|5innen (spin) 
 
 Bergen (hide) 
 Befel^Ien(command) 
 Berften (burst) 
 Bted^en (break) 
 brefc^en (thrash) 
 emt)fe:^ten (re- 
 commend) 
 erfc^reden (be fright- 
 ened) 
 gelten (be worth) 
 |elfen (help) 
 fommen (come) 
 ne!^men (take) 
 f d^elten (scold) 
 f:|)red^en (speak) 
 fted^ett (sting) 
 fiel^Ien (steal) 
 fterBen (die) 
 treffen (hit ; meet) 
 
236 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 Infinitive. S'* p. s. Pres. Ind. Pret.Ind.&Subj. Perf. Part. 
 
 berberBen (spoil) uetbirBt jjerbfttJ (but ijcrborben 
 
 uerbiirBe) 
 toerBen (sue, woo) toirBt ttjarMbuttoilrBe) gcwotbctt 
 toerfen (throw) toirft ttiarf (toSrfe) geworfett 
 Notice the Pres. Ind. id^ nel^rae, bu nttttmji, er 
 nitntnt, toir ttel^men, &c.; and fommen (come), Pret. 
 tarn, P. P. gefommen. 
 
 Note, treffen drops an f in the Pret. Ind. and Subjunctive. 
 
 Exceptions: glimmen (gHmmer), Pret. glomtti, P P-9e= 
 ftommett; 
 flimmcn (climb), Pret. flomm, P P- ^t- 
 glommcn* 
 
 (2) All the strong verbs with root-vowel i be- 
 fore nb, tig, and nf take also a for the Preterite, 
 but u for the Perf Part. 
 
 60. binben — Mnt — geBunben — conjugation. 
 Thus — 
 Btnben (bind) Baitb (Bfinbe) gebunben 
 
 bringeti (press) brang (brange) gebrunoctt 
 
 em^^nben (feel) empfanb (em^sfSiibc) ctn^jfunbeti 
 
 finben (find) faub (fanbe) gcfuttbctt 
 
 gelingen (succeed) eS getttng ntir (geWnge) eg tfi ttitr 
 
 gelutigen 
 ftngen(sing) ftttttt (fange) -- gefungen 
 
 finfen (sink) f anf (fSiiIe) QCfuitlctt 
 
 jtotngen (compel) jJUfttig (jtomtge) gcjttJungenjetc. 
 Exceptions: bitten (beg), Pret. bat, P.P. gcbctcn 
 ft^c»(sit), „ \a^, „ gcfeffcn. 
 
 3. Tlie Anomalous Verbs. 
 These are the modal auxiliaries (besides totffen 
 'know', and tl^un 'do', Pret. tl^at, P. P. gefl^an). 
 
 ©oEen and tooKen do not take a modification of 
 
The Preposidons. 137 
 
 the root-vowel, and fiinnen, uiogen, biirfen, tniiffen, take 
 the modification only in the plural of the Present 
 Ind., in the whole Present and Preterite Subjunctive, 
 and in all tenses made up with the present Infinitive, 
 which is always modified. 
 
 C. Uninflected Words. 
 VI. Indeclinables (or Particles). 
 
 61. These Indechnables or connective words are 
 not inflected though mostly related to inflected words. 
 Their exact derivation is now frequently obscure, but 
 a great number of them belong to pronominal roots. 
 
 They help to define the relations of nouns and 
 verbs in a sentence, or of sentences to one another 
 On account of their relationship to inflected words 
 they form part of the Accidence, but will also have 
 to be specially dealt with in the Syntax as some 
 of them affect the construction of sentences. 
 The Prepositions. 
 
 62. Arrange the following prepositions into 
 classes, according to the different cases before which 
 they are placed, and state their meanings: — 
 
 au§, burc^, anftatt, mtt, Bet, tocil^renb, 
 D^ne, urn, laut, entgegen, tro^, 
 gegen, innerl^alB, wo.^^ fiir, itngead^tet, 
 au^er, ju, entlang, ftatt, neBjl:, toiber, 
 tnmitten, gema§, jufotge, felt. 
 
 63. JSTame those prepositions which may be 
 placed before a dative and an accusative case, and 
 state the difference. 
 
 64. Notice that l^alBen, loegen (on account of), 
 and toideit are placed after the case to which they 
 are to be joined, and that tottten is generally preceded 
 by what other preposition placed before a case? 
 
188 
 
 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 65. The preposition nac^ means what if placed 
 after a case? The preposition gema§ may be placed 
 after a case without changing its meaning, and ent= 
 lang should always be placed after a case. 
 
 Adverbs. 
 
 66. They are for the most part formed by means 
 of inflection, derivation, or composition, from nouns, 
 pronouns, and adjectives. 
 
 (1) The genitive of a noun used as an adverb: 
 oBenbi in the evening Beif^Jielgtoeife for instance 
 anfangg at first f(ugg quickly 
 attcrbtngg at all events tnorgeng in the morning 
 allcr^anb all kinds nad^t§ in the evening 
 
 ygettleBeng (for life), for ever. 
 
 (2) Pronominal adverbs: 
 
 ba, bort there 
 befi^alB therefore 
 barum thereupon 
 bal^tn thither, there 
 bann then 
 l^ier here 
 l^ter!^er hither 
 tmmer always 
 inbeS however 
 nimmer never 
 uon ba thence 
 
 t)on ^.tx hence 
 toarum why 
 tote how 
 too where 
 tool^tu whither 
 toolset whence 
 auf tmmer for ever 
 irgenbtoo somewhere 
 ntrgenbtoo nowhere 
 itSeraH everywhere 
 nte(miilg) never 
 
 (3) Cases of Adjectives used as adverbs: 
 
 anberS otherwise 
 Befonber§ especially 
 6ei toeitem far 
 J^oe^fteuS at the most 
 Iin!8 to the left 
 rec^tS to the right 
 
 '^tnetfteiie mostly 
 toergeSettg in vain 
 toon neuem anew 
 
 ■^ toentgftenS at least 
 juerft at first 
 gute^t at last 
 
The Simple Sentence. 189 
 
 (4) Adverbs formed by composition with lid^ (like): 
 fti^erliii^ surely -■ enblic^ at last 
 
 fretlt^ certainly toergeMtd^ in vain 
 
 toal^rlti^ truly fc&tDerlt^ hardly. 
 
 67. The uninflected positive, as well as the un- 
 inflected comparative of an adjective are used as ad- 
 verbs; as: — 
 
 er l^at ebcl ge^anbelt he acted nobly; 
 er l^at ebtcr al8 bu ge:^anbelt he ' acted nobler (more 
 
 nobly) than you; 
 the adverbial superlative is generally rendered by 
 am — fien: as: — 
 
 er l^at am ebetftcit (or fcl^r ebel) gel^anbelt 
 he acted most nobly. 
 
 Conjunctions. 
 
 68. Name two classes of conjunctions, and 
 enumerate six of each class. 
 
 69. State the difference between ale, toenn, and 
 toann, when? 
 
 Interjections. 
 
 70. These express some emotion of the mind 
 without entering, however, into the construction of 
 a sentence; as: — 
 
 ad^! ah! o toe!^! woe is me! 
 
 ad^ ^tmmel! alas! Brabo! well done! 
 
 ad^ Oott! G-ood gracious! ^urral^! hurrah! 
 6e]^flte(®ott)! God forbid! ^5fut! shame! 
 
 n. Elementary Syntax. 
 
 A. The Simple Sentence 
 
 1. What do you understand by a simple sentence? 
 Name its chief parts. 
 
 2. What is a predicative adjective? 
 
190 Systematic Grammar Part. 
 
 3. What do you mean by an inverted sentence? 
 
 4. Explain the position of an Infinitive or Perfect 
 Part, of a compound tense in a simple sentence. 
 
 5. What do you understand by a transitive verb? 
 
 6. May an Infinitive in German be used as a sub- 
 stantive, and with what article? 
 
 7. What do you understand by attributive adjec- 
 tives? Are they declined? 
 
 8. What place do adverbs generally take in a simple 
 sentence? 
 
 9. How may the object of a verb be expressed? 
 
 10. What do you understand by apposition ? Does it 
 agree in German with the noun to which it refers ? 
 
 11. What cases are used with expressions of time? 
 
 12. What do you understand by direct and indirect 
 objects of one and the same verb? 
 
 13. Complements joined to such copulative verbs 
 as — fein, toerben, are in what case? 
 
 14. What other tense is in German frequently used 
 for the Future Indefinite? 
 
 15. When is the Infinitive Mood without ju used? 
 
 B. The Compound Sentence. 
 
 1 6 . Explain what you understand by co-ordinate clause, 
 and by subordinate clause. 
 
 17. How are co-ordinate clauses with unb treated 
 when joined to a subordinate clause? 
 
 18. Explain the construction of a principal (simple) 
 sentence when placed after a subordinate clause 
 belonging to it. 
 
 19. What is the position of the verb in a co-ordi- 
 nate clause? 
 
 20. What is the position of the verb in a subordi- 
 nate clause? 
 
III. 
 
 German Reading Part 
 
 aad 
 
 Graduated Glossary„ 
 
Grerman Reader.*) 
 
 1. Der Kai. 
 
 Die Nachtigall sie wax entfernt, 
 Der Friihling lockt sie wieder; 
 Was Neues hat sie nicht gelemt, 
 Singt alte, iiebe Lieder. 
 
 Wolfgang Ton Goethe (1749—1852). 
 
 2. liamm nnd Knabe. 
 
 K. Lammchen, was schreist du so klaglich dort? 
 
 L. Meine liebe Mutter ist fort. 
 
 K. Furchtest du dich, dass in der Zeit 
 
 Irgend jemand dir thu' ein Leid? 
 L. Furchten, ich wiisste nicht was, ach nein! 
 
 Mochte nur gern bei der Mutter sein. 
 
 Wilhelm Hey (1789—1864). 
 
 3. Togel and Knabe. 
 
 „Knabe, ich bitt' dich, so sehr ich kann: 
 ruhre mein kleines Nest nicht an! 
 sieh nicht mit deinen Blicken hin! 
 Es liegen ja meine Kinder drin; 
 Die werden erschrecken und angstlich schrei'n, 
 Wenn du schaust mit den grossen Augen herein.' 
 
 Wilhelm Hey (1739-1864). 
 
 4. Das Tropflein. 
 
 Tropflein muss zur Erde fallen, 
 Muss das zarte Baumchen netzen, 
 
 , *) The English words, arranged progressively, will be found at 
 the end of the book. 
 
 13 
 
194 Juniors' German. 
 
 Muss mit Quellen weiter wallen, 
 Muss das Fischlein auch ergotzen, 
 Muss im Bach' die Miihle schlagen, 
 Muss im Strom' die Schiffe tragen, 
 TJnd wo waren denn die Meere, 
 Wenn nidit erst das Tropflein ware? 
 
 Wilhelm Hey (1789-1864). 
 
 5* ^tt mitt ttttd itt ssoif. 
 
 ©n @fel begegnete etnem ^ungrigen S33oIfc. „§aBe 3Ktt* 
 Mbttt nrit nrir," fagte t>er jitternbe ®{et; ic^ bin etn arraes, 
 franfes STter; pel^ nur, toa« ffir einen SDorn id^ mtr in ben gu^ 
 getreten l^obe!" — 
 
 „28a^r^ofttg, tii^ bebaittre btd^," ocrfe|te ber S33olf. „Unb 
 ic^ pnbe mit^ in ntetntm ©ewiffen berbunben, bid^ oott biefen 
 ©c^ttjen ya befttien." — 
 
 Sojmt toar baS SSBort gefagt, jo war ber ©fet jerrtffen. 
 
 31ai* ®ottfrieb Eefpttg (1789-1781). 
 
 6. Knabe and Schmetterling. 
 
 Enabe. Schmetterling, 
 
 Kleines Ding, 
 
 Sage, wovon du lebst, 
 
 Dass du nur stets in Luften schwebst? 
 Schm. Blumenduft, Sonnenschein, 
 
 Das ist die Nahrung mein. 
 
 Der Knabe der wollt' ihn fangen, 
 Da bat er mit Zittern und Bangen: 
 'Lieber Knabe, thu es nicht. 
 Lass mich spielen im Sonnenlicht. 
 Eh' vergeht das Abendrot, 
 Lieg' ich doch schon kalt und tot'. 
 
 Wilhelm Hey (1789-1864). 
 
 ©in junger ©betmann toor fel^r reid^, aber etn grower SBer^ 
 fd^ttenber. 3n hjenigen Safiren fiatte er fetn ^otbes SBermbgen 
 t)erjcl)wenbet. ©ner eon jeinen greitnbcn ^atte i^n lange beoba^tet. 
 (gine« Stagee frro^ er mit tl^m ilber fein berfifiwenberifd^ies geben 
 «nb jeigte t^m bie golgcn besjelben. „@ie l^aben 9te^t," fogte 
 
German Reading Part. 195 
 
 bet gbeftnann. „@8 ftel^t fdjttmm ntit mtr. 3(f) fiirifite, t^ 
 werbe ots Settfer fterkn." „!Da8 ift ni(|t baS ©djUmrafte/' ant* 
 wottete jeiit greunb. „®te wcrben a(8 Settfer tekn, unb bag ift 
 toeit fcfilimmer," 
 
 fieinric^ SaSiiati (1815— 1B61). 
 
 8. Wandersmann nnd licrche. 
 
 Wandersmann. Lerche, wie Mh schon fliegest du 
 Jauchzend der Morgensonne zu! 
 Lerche. Ich will dem lieben Gott mit Singen 
 Dank fur Leben und Nahmng bringen; 
 Das ist von Alters her mein Branch! 
 Wandersmann, deiner doch wohl auch? 
 
 Wilhebn Hey (1789-1854). 
 
 @in ^abtc^t ^otte einen ©^jerting gefongcn unb woHte ii^n 
 eben ocrjelren. 5Da fa§ er anf bem 5Dac|e eines §)aufe8 etnc 
 Saube. 5Diefe fc^ien il^ui eine be[fere Sente aU ber mogere 
 ©perting. <5ofort lie^ er ben <Spa^ fallen anb pog na(^ ber 
 Slaubc. jDiefe ^atte jeboif) t^cn geinb bemerft unb ^6) unter 
 baS '3^aS) tterfte(Jt. S)er ^abid^t !omtte fie nid^ fangen unb flog 
 na(^ bem Drt jurild, too er ben (S^ierltng gdaffen |atte. 5Doc^ 
 bicfer tear fort; eine Sa^e ^atte il^n gefreffen, unb ledte ^iS) bc= 
 l§ag(i(f) ben Sort unb rtef: „@te§ft bu, ^err §abic^t, cin @per= 
 ting itt ber §anb ift beffer at8 eine Stoube auf bem ®ai^c. 
 
 aiuguft @ot({teS aHeiSner (1763—1807). 
 
 10. Ellengrosse. 
 
 Die Pappel spricht zmn Baumchen: 
 'Was machst du dich so breit 
 Mit den geringen Pflaumchen?' 
 Es sagt: 'Ich bin erfreut, 
 Dass ich nicht bless ein Holz, 
 Nicht eine leere Stange!' 
 'Was', ruft die Pappel stolz, 
 'Ich bin zwar eine Stange, 
 Doch eine lange, lange!' 
 
 A. B. Prdhlloll (179«— 1865). 
 13* 
 
196 Juniors' German. 
 
 (<)la4 tie p.) 
 
 @tne fiftani iDoUte gern iiber ein SSaffer ge^en unb lonnte 
 ntil^t. @ie bot einen grofd^ um SRat unb §Ufe. ©er grofd) 
 war dn ©d^atf unb \px&i) ivx aKau«: ,,93inbe beinen Su^ an 
 meinen gu^, fo miC id^ fi^wimmen unb bid) ^tnitberjtel^en/' ©a 
 fie aber ouf8 ffiaffer lanten, tau^te bcr grof^ unter unb tooSte 
 bie 3Bau8 erMnfen. Snbem obet bte 3rtau8 fid^ toe^rt unb 
 arbeitet, fiiegt etne SBeil^e balder unb er^afi^t bie SWau8; gugtetd^ 
 aber jiel^t fie aud^ ben grofc^ nttt l^erauS unb frigt fie beibe. 
 
 tSlattin Sut^et; (U83— 1646). 
 
 13. Gott griisse dich! 
 
 1. Gott grusse dich! Kein andrer Grass 
 Gleicht dem an Innigkeit. 
 
 Gott grusse dich! Kein andrer Gruss 
 Passt so zu aller Zeit. 
 
 2. Gott grusse dich! Wenn dieser Gruss 
 So recht vom Herzen geht, 
 
 Gilt bei dem lieben Gott der Gruss 
 So viel wie ein Gebet. 
 
 Julias Sturm (1816). 
 
 13, ®e» &9t»e, bet Slav uni itt fS&olf, 
 
 (3ia4 SamerariuS). 
 
 gin fibwe unb ein SS'Av „mten in freunbfd^afttid^er SBer» 
 binbung ein ^irf^fatb ertegt. Uber bie 2;eiiung beefetben gerieten 
 fie aber in ©treit unb fampften teo^t eine ©tunbe gufammen, 
 bis fie beibe otemtoS ju ©obcn fanfen. 
 
 3n biefem Slugenbfide ging ein SEBoIf oorijber, fal^ bie D^n» 
 mad^t ber bciben, no^m breift ba8 ^irf^fatb fetbft i^inmeg unb 
 ging pl^nifd^ (o(|enb con bannen. 
 
 auguft ®ottlic6 SlHeiSner (1763—1807). 
 
 14. Das Teilchen. 
 
 Veilchen, unter Gras versteckt, 
 Wie mit Hoffnung zugedeckt, 
 Veilchen, freue dich mit mir, 
 Sonne kommt ja auch zu dir. 
 
German Reading Part. 197 
 
 Sonne scheint mir Liebesschein 
 Tief dir in dein Herz hinein, 
 Trocknet deine Thranen dir — 
 Veilchen, freue dich mit mir! 
 
 Hoffmann von I'alleTsleben (1798—1874). 
 (3!o# a f )).) 
 
 @tn iibcmta|tg fieifer ©otnmer l^atte einft cinen tiefen ©utnjjf 
 auggetrodnet. S)ie grbfi^e, bc[fen fiiSl^erige Sewol^ner, muften 
 nunmel^r mi) anbcrn aSBo^nBrtcrn fti) umje^en. B^ci oon i^nen 
 famen ju ctnem fe^r tiefen Srunnen, mo e8 beS 2Baffer8 genug 
 gab. — „^(^, fte^ ba," rtcf ber etne, „xoa9 broudien roir wetter 
 ju ge^n? 80^ un§ ^tev l^tnitnter ^iipfcn!" „9'ii(!^t fo f(^neC!" 
 ertDiberte ber anbere. „§inunterfpringen tft teii^t; bo(| toenn 
 au(^ btefer Srunnen Dertrodncte, wiirbc un8 ein quoIooCer SEob 
 fid^er fein; benn wir fiinnten ntd^t tntebcr l^eraus." 
 
 Stuguft Sottlieb SDleignet (1763-180V). 
 
 16. Fnchs nnd Bute. 
 
 F. Frau Ente, was schwimmst du dort auf dem Teich? 
 
 Komm doch einmal her an das TJfer gleich; 
 
 Ich hab' dich schon lange was woUen fragen. 
 E. Herr Fuchs, ich wusste dir nichts zu sagen. 
 
 Du bist mir so schon viel zu klug, 
 
 Drum bleib' ich dir lieber weit genug. 
 
 Herr Fuchs, der ging am Ufer hin 
 Und war verdriesslich in seinem Sinn. 
 Es lustete ihn nach einem Braten, 
 Das hatte die Ente gar wohl erraten. 
 Heut hatt' er so gerne schwimmen konnen; 
 Nun musst' er ihr doch das Leben gonnen. 
 
 Wilhelm Hey (1789—1864). 
 
 17. S)er ^fPe un» iet fSibtt. 
 
 (gin SIffe pva'iiitt unb fagte: „3(f| Bin fe^r Qt'\d)idt; xij tann 
 afieS no(|mac^en, was tc^ fef)e. ^etn anbre« 2;ter ift jo ebet mie 
 icf)." „ilS5o]^{on/' \pxaii) ber Siber ru^ig, „ba bu ofleS noc^mod^ft, 
 was bu fie^ft, fo »erfuc^e bag ju tl^itn, too8 tc^ bir je^t jetgen 
 
298 Juniors' German. 
 
 merbe. S)ottn tBttt tc^ betnen Slbel anerfennen." ©amit [j3rang 
 ev in bag SBaffer unb Derf(|tt)anb. 
 
 35er Slffe fprang i^m no(^ — unb ertranf. 
 
 2!Stl^e(m BUftBaxi (isu). 
 
 18. Togel am Fenster. 
 
 1. An das Fenster klopft es: Pick, pick! 
 Macht mir doch auf einen Augenblick! 
 Dick fallt der Schnee, der Wind geht kalt, 
 Habe kein Putter, erfriere bald. 
 
 Lieben Leute, o lasst mich ein, 
 Will auch immer recht artig sein! 
 
 2. Sie liessen ihn ein in seiner Not: 
 Er suchte sich manches Krumchen Brot, 
 Blieb frohlich manche Wocbe da. 
 
 Doch als die Sonne durchs Fenster sab, 
 
 Da sass er immer so traurig dort; 
 
 Sie macbten ibm auf, — busch, war er fort! 
 
 ■Wilhelm Hey (1789—1864). 
 
 19. ^ie Mta^ttt uni itv S&affttttu^* 
 
 (9!ac6 SlUienug.) 
 
 3»et burftige Srfil^en fattben einft ein ®efa§, ouf beffen 
 Soben fi(^ ein guteS Ztxi SBaffcr befanb. 5Da8 ©effig felbft toor 
 abet p i)o6) unb enge. @ie tierfud^ten eS umjufto^en ober ju 
 gcrbredien, boc^ afle SD?il^e ttar cergebUc^; eine ber SrSl^en flog 
 miemuttg toeg. 
 
 3lbet bte onbere blieb unb oerfuti^tc eg jute^t ouf etne neuc 
 airt. Unttett oon biejcm SEBafferfruge fagen ftetne @teine. @ie 
 l^otte fie mtt tl^rem ©d^nobct ^erbet unb warf fie mS) unb nad^ 
 inS aBaffer. 3mmer ^o^er unb ^B^er ftieg nun baSfetbe int 
 Sruge, unb e^e eine ^albe ©tunbe oergtng, lonnte bie ^al^e bequem 
 i^ren 5Durft ftitten. 
 
 Muguft SottlieB SUetJner (1V63— 1807). 
 
 30. Babe. 
 
 1. Was ist das fiir ein Bettelmann? 
 Er bat ein kohlschwarz Rocklein an 
 Und lauft in dieser Winterzeit 
 
German Reading Part. 199 
 
 Vor alle Thuren weit und breit, 
 Ruft mit betrubtem Ton: Eab'! Rab'! 
 Gebt mir doch auch einen Knochen ab! 
 
 2. Da kam der liebe Friihling an, 
 Gar woM gefiel's dem Bettelmann; 
 Er breitete seine Fliigel aus 
 Und flog dahin Aveit ubers Haus; 
 Hoch aus der Luft so frisch und munter 
 „Hab' Dank! hab' Dank!" rief er hinunter. 
 
 Willielm Hey (1789—1864). 
 
 (SRoc^ toantel Sotimonn.) 
 
 Sine ^rbt8:|3flan5e toudiS an etttem ^almboume empot unb 
 ftteg in wcnig S3«(^en bt8 on fcinen ©ipfel. „SBte alt bift bu 
 n)ol){?" fragtc fie t^n etnes Staged. — „^oUt l^unbert SSaijv." — 
 „^ttnbert So^r unb nidjt Ijij^er? <Stel^, fo f)abt id^ in weit 
 wenigeren S:agcn, ots bu Qai)vt jfil^tft, bii^ f^on iiberl|oIt." — 
 „llnb tDirft totlttxi, wte bu irui^feft — \^ntU\ (Sfjtitt SBinter 
 !ommt, bift bu fat)t unb tot." — „aBol^er tteift bu bai, UnglildS* 
 ^ro^^et?" — „9lu8 ber grfa^rung. S5cnn id) fa^ fd^on fo 
 nian(|en SBinter, unb fo man6)tx Mrbis ffetterte on mir era^jor, 
 ftof^ wie bu unb loie bu — DcrgSngtii^." 
 
 auBuft (Sottltet ajlei^tier (1763—1807). 
 
 22. Drei Paare nnd einer. 
 
 1. Du hast zwei Ohren und einen Mund; 
 Willst du's beklagen? 
 
 Gar vieles soUst dn horen und 
 Wenig drauf sagen. 
 
 2. Du hast zwei Augen und einen Mund; 
 Mach dir's zu eigen! 
 
 Gar manches sollst du sehen und 
 Manches Terschweigen. 
 
 3. Du hast zwei Hande und einen Mund; 
 Lern' es ermessen! 
 
 Zwei sind da zur Arbeit und 
 Einer zum Essen. 
 
 Fiiedrich BUckeit (1788—1866). 
 
200 Juniors' German. 
 
 33. ^tt ^itlfitin* 
 
 S5er ^atif SDlojnum bcjog etnen 35iamonten uon feltencr 
 ®rb^e unb ©c^Bn^ett, ben n bem ^ofjuwetier ju neuer ifaffung 
 flbergob. ©ntge 2^age ^crna^ toorf fid^ ber Sutoetter bem 
 ^afifen ju gil^en unb bat um ©nobe. (5r gog ou8 fetner SCoft^e 
 ben SDiamanten, in bier ©tiide jerbro(^en; ein 3lmbo^ war un= 
 gtudfit^erroetfe umgeftfirjtunb ^atte bteSUnl^eU angert^tet. aWantum, 
 o^ne bte garbe bed ®cfic^t6 ober ben S^on ber ©timme gu t)er= 
 finbern, fpro^: „S33o^lon, fo moc^e benn bier Dlinge boraus ftatt 
 
 beS etnen!" SoleC? »•>« Sommer^giurafioB (1771-1866.) 
 
 (Sefammelte Sc^riftcn. XTI. Sb($. 18«1. @. 62. 
 
 (gin Sanbmann ging mit feinem fteinen ©o^ne anf btn Htfer 
 i^inoue, um ju fe^en, ob ba8 ^orn batb retf fei. 
 
 „SSoter, h)ie fommt'8 bo^/' fagte ber Snabe, „ba^ einige 
 $oIme fid^ fo tief jur Srbe neigen, anbere aber ben So^jf fo ouf* 
 reei^t tragen? 5Diefe miiffen wol^t red^t oontel^m fein; bie anbern, 
 bie fid^ fo tief bor il^nen bflcEen, finb gewig biel fi^Ied^ter?" 
 
 £)er SSater pflMtt ein paar ^^ren ab unb fprad^: „©ie^ 
 biefe Stl^re ^ier, bie fi^ fo befe^eiben neigte, ift oott ber fd^iSnften 
 SBrner; biefe aber, bie fid^ fo ftolg in bie §b^e ftredEte, ift toub 
 unb teei*. SBie ben Sl^ren fo ge^t e8 ouc^ ben 3Kenfd^en." 
 
 S^tifto))^ bon Sc^mtbt (1768—1864). 
 
 25. Mopschen nnd Spitzchen. 
 
 Mopschen: Hor', Spitzchen, ich will dich was fragen; 
 Du sollst mir ganz heimlich sagen: 
 Wo hast du den schonen Knochen versteckt, 
 Dass ihn kein boser Dieb entdeckt? 
 
 Spitzchen: Nein, Mopschen, ich schweige lieber still; 
 Der Dieb ist's eben, der's wissen will. 
 
 Das Mopschen hat gesucht nnd gerochen, 
 Bis hinter dem Stall es fand den Knochen. 
 In seiner Schnauze hatt' es ihn schon, 
 Da bekam es gar einen schlimmen Lohn; 
 Herr Spitz, der fasst' es so derb am Kragen, 
 Da lief es davon mit Schreien nnd Klagen. 
 
 WUhelm Hey (1789-1864). 
 
German Reading Part. 201 
 
 36» Set! l^ungHge ^tahet, 
 
 ©in Slraber war oerirrt in ber SfiSiifte. S^^^ ^"96 ^atte er 
 niiiits itt effen unb war in ©efaljr, Bor hunger ju [terbm, bi§ 
 cr enbtii^ cine Don ben SBaffergruben ontraf, au8 benen bie 
 SReifenben i^re Samete tranfcn. §ier fol^ er im ©anbe eincn 
 ffeinen tebernen ©ad fiegcn. „®ott fei getobt/' jagte er, aii cr 
 ibn auf^ob unb anfii^tte, „ba8 ftnb, gtaube tdft, ©attcin ober 
 SfJuffe; icf) Witt mi^ an i^ncn erquidcn unb taben!" — Sn biefer 
 §)offnung warb er jcbocb graufom getaufcfet; benn ber @ad ent* 
 ^iett nid)tS atS foftbare ^erfen. SBfi^renb er fie aber nod) ftagcnb 
 betrac^tete, fa^ er in ber gernc jwei SJciter nol^en; ber cine oon 
 itinen wor ber Sigentflmcr ber ^ertcn, bie er ocrtoren l^attc. (Sr 
 erqutdte ben armen Slraber unb nal^m i^n ouf fcincm 9toffe mit 
 jur Sarawane juriid. 
 
 Stuauft 3aIob 2iebe3Iinb (1758-1793). 
 
 37. Gottes trene Hand. 
 
 1. Das Meer ist tief, das Meer ist weit, 
 Doch gehet Gottes Herrlichkeit 
 
 Noch tiefer als des Meeres Grand, 
 Noch welter als das Erdenrund. 
 
 2. So viele Fischlein wohnen drin, 
 Der Hen sieht freundlich auf sie bin, 
 Reicht alien ihre Speise dar 
 
 Fuhrt ab und auf sie wunderbar. 
 
 3. So hocb die wilden Wogen gebn, 
 Wenn er gebeut, sie stille stehn; 
 
 Da fuhret seine treue Hand 
 
 Das Scbifflein bin ins fernste Land. 
 
 ■Wilhelm Hey (1780—1854). 
 
 ®cr @tf, ber bie Sfumen tierjjftcgt unb in [titter 5Ra(^t ben 
 Xau barauf trSufett, fdjtummertc an einem grii^tingStoge im 
 ©d§ottcn eince 9?o{enftraud)8. 
 
 Unb at8 cr crwac^te, ba fpra(^ er mit freunbtid^em 3lntfi^: 
 „i8iebtid)fte8 meincr Sinbcr, id) banfe bir fiir beinen erquidenbeti 
 2Bof)tgerud^ unb fiir beine fiif)tenben ©i^otten. Sbnntcft bu mir 
 nod) etwaa erbitten, Wtc gem wiirb' id) e8 bir gewa^ren!" 
 
202 Juniors' German. 
 
 „®o fc^milde nttdf) mtt einem neuen SJetje!" — bat ber ®etft 
 bc8 5Rofenfttau^8. 
 
 Unb ber Sluntenelf fc^mitdte bie ^Bntgtn ber ©lumen mtt 
 einfad^em 3Koofe. 
 
 gtebtid^ ftanb fie ba in befd^eibenem @i|mu<I, bie 3JiooSrofe, 
 bie fd^iinfte i{)red @e[d^{e^te. 
 
 griebricS fltumma(^er (1767—1846). 
 
 Sin @fet trug einen ®aiJ mit @atj ouf feinem diMm unb 
 mu^te burd^ einen ttefen SSai) Qti)tn. 3)?itten in bemfetben 
 ftraui^elte er unb fief in8 SCBafftr. 2l{« er toieber aufftanb, merfte 
 er, bog feine Soft Diet teit^ter geworben war; benn ein grower 
 Jeit bee ©aljeS l^otte fic^ im SBoffer aufgelBft. „S)o8 Witt idEi 
 mir merfeu!" f^ira^ er ticrgniigt, unb ging weiter. 
 
 Sim anbern Stage ^atte er einen nii^t fe^r fi^ttcren <Sad 
 mit ©cfitoammen ju trogcn. 3lt« er nun toieber burc^ ein SBaffer 
 fam, Icgte er fi(^ abfi(|tti(^ nieber, um fo bie 8aft nod^ leid&ter 
 3u madden. 35ie ©c^tofimme jebod^ fogen baS SBaffer ein unb 
 njurben fo fd^toer, bag er feine Sitrbc nur mit griSgter Sinftrengung 
 fovtbringen fonnte. siac^ «(»),. 
 
 30. Der Habicht and die St5rche. 
 
 Ein HabicM stiess auf eine Lerche 
 Im Angesichte zweier Storche 
 Und wurgte, rupfte, speiste sie. 
 Ach, sprach ein Storch, die arme Lerche die! 
 Vorhin sang sie so artig noch! — 
 Storch, sprach der Habicht, spare doch 
 Die Seufzer nur! Den du verzehrt, 
 Der arme Frosch, der ist beklagenswert ! 
 Vorhin quakt' er so artig noch! 
 
 Wilhelm Gleim (1719-180S). 
 
 9ioc^ SitfotJ. 
 
 ©in ^o\d) \d) bon feinem ©um^jf au8 einen ©tier auf bev 
 Siefe weiben. „®taubt ii)x/' fragte er feine Sameraben, „bag ic^ 
 aucb fo grog bin toie bicfer ©tier, fobalb id) toiU?" SDiefe be« 
 iweifelten e8, unb ber l^oc^miitige grofd^ fagte: „3d^ toerbe eud^ 
 
German Reading Part. 203 
 
 fogtei^ ben ©eweis ttefern." Unb nun fing er an, fid^ ntit otter 
 Slnftrengung aufjubia^cn. „S3in xi) nun nid^t \o gro^?" fragte 
 cr. „Dij, ba fe^tt no^ tiiel!" IbermatS btS^te er ^x6) auf, aber 
 wteber tiie^ e8, ba^ er nod) tonge bte ©rBge beS ©ttereg ni(^t 
 erretc^t l^abe. 
 
 21(8 er no(^ tceiter fortful^r, fid) oufgublo^en, jerjjtafete er 
 
 ©n @fet wetbete auf ber 2Btefe; etn 9?abe, ber i^n ba er* 
 btidte, flog i^m auf ben 9?u(fen, unb mil er l^ter einc ttunbe 
 @tet(e fanb, ladte er ntit fctnem ©c^nobel in bag ro^e gteifc^. 
 jDer arnte @fel, ben bicfeS natiirficl fi^merste, gab fii^ atte mbg* 
 tid^e Tiaiji, ben ungejogenen ®aft Io8 ju roerben, aber bergebenS. 
 Unfern eon i^nt tag ber §iiter. @8 ^fitte biefem jwei ©^ritte 
 unb einen @c^fag gefoftet, fo mar ber dtabt berjagt. S)o^ be« 
 Seibenben ©priinge unb ©eberben beuc^ten i^nt fo brottig, ba§ er 
 mit lautem 8acf)en bicfcm Sluftritte jufa^. „0", rief ber (Sfet 
 enblict), „je^t fiif)!' xij boppett meine ©(^merjen, bo berjenige mxi) 
 austa^t, wetdier btttig mir §clfcn fotttc!" 
 
 auguft SottlieC aBeiSner (1753— isov). 
 
 3wei $ianbnierf«burfd)en, Qt)\tpi) unb fflcnebift, gingen einft 
 an bent Srautgartcn eineS SDorfeS oorbei. 
 
 „®ie^ boi|/' fagte Sofe^)^, „»aS bag fiir grogc trautfbpfe 
 finb!" 
 
 „@i," fagte Senebift, ber gem :pra^tte, „bie finb gar nid)t 
 grof. Sluf metner 2Banberfil)aft l^abe id) einmat einen ^rautfo^f 
 gefel^en, ber war biel grower als ba8 ^farr^auS bort." 
 
 Sofepl^, ber ein tu<)ferfd)mieb war, fprad) l&ierauf; „©a3 Witt 
 »iet fagen. 3nbe8 ^abe x6) einmat einen Seffet niac^en ^etfen, 
 ber war fo gro§ atS bie Sirc^e." 
 
 „9lber urn bes §irattte(8 witten," rief Senebitt, „wo3u l^atte 
 man benn einen fo grogen Seffct niStig?" 
 
 Sofep^ fagte: „30?an wottte bcinen gro|cn trauttopf barin 
 fo^ien." 
 
 e^riftoj)^ Bon ©i^mib (1768—1854). 
 
204 Juniors' German. 
 
 34. SScfonhetet ^if(i^. 
 
 ^crjog ^orf oon ^iirtemberg ^ot einmat int l^et^en ©onimer 
 in bem ©tabtd)en iRagotb ju aWtttag gegeffen ober eigentttd^ ge» 
 ytjcift, ttte bie grofcn §errcn t^un. Sommt etne Unjol^t oon 
 ijtiegen unb fpeift mit, unetngetaben, unb luntmen mtt einanber 
 unb laufett l^in unb l^er unb gel^Bren boc^ gar nid^t an eine fiirft 
 Iii|e STofet. ©a Wtrb ber ^trjog bB8 unb fagt ju ber SBirtin: 
 „3n8 Su(fuf« iRamcn, beden @ie ben aWilden befonbeta!" S)ie 
 SJirtin ift fttQ unb t^ut, wte il^r befofiten tft. 3fta(i^ etner Seile 
 trttt fie ttieber t)or ben §erjog, ntadit einen ^nirfS unb fagt: 
 „®ebe(ft ift, befel^Ien je^t ou^ (Sure ®urd|Iau^t, ba^ fid^ bie 
 aWiiden je|en!" 
 
 35. Der Schmetterling. 
 
 „S&hmetterling, was bist du schon! 
 Dieser Flugel reiche Pracht, 
 Dieser Tarben bunte Zier! — 
 Lass dich in der Nahe setin!" 
 
 Und der Knabe hat das Tier 
 Bei den Flugeln- leicht erwischt; 
 Ach, die Farben und die Pracht 
 Sind wie Stuub davon verwischt! — 
 Hatt' er jemals wohl gedacht, 
 Dass die Schonheit und die Pracht 
 Wie ein Hauch so schnell verlischt? 
 
 Robert Keiniok (lf05— 186^). 
 
 36. milt mit SB&tilt. 
 
 @tn Sul^rmonn fu^r abenbs rait einem \^tonm SBagen in 
 grB|ter Site ber ©tabt ju. „Somm' id^ nod^ Bor St^orf^jerre in . 
 bie ©tabt?" rief er einem 9?etfenben ju, an bem er tiorbei jagte. 
 „S) ja," fagte ber SReifenbe, „wenn 3f|r tangfomer fa^rt." 
 •©er gul^rmonn bad;te: „56er 3Jicn|d^ ift ni^t gefd^eit," 
 peitfd^te ouf feine ^ferbe to8 unb fu^r noc^ f^neUer ouf ber 
 ^otprigcn @tro|c, fo bo^ ^ferbe unb 9taber raud)ten. pupc^ 
 bvoc^ i^m ein kab, ber SBagen fiet um, unb Stften unb Suffer 
 tagen ouf ber ©tra^e unb im ®raben. ®er 9teifenbe ^fte ben 
 giiJirmann Ba(b ein unb fpya^: „®el^t 3^r nun, ba^ i(^ red^t 
 
German Reading Part. 205 
 
 l^Qtte? ^d) fomme ju gu| noc^ too^t in bie ©tabt, 3^r aber 
 mit guren oier 'iPferben fbnnt fie tjeute ni^t mc^r erreidien. 3^r 
 bac^tct mit @urem (Siten einige ^fennige ©pcrrgelb 3U erjparen 
 unb t)abt nun cinen ©i^aben oon mel^rercn aWort." 
 
 e^tiftotJ^ »on Sc^mib (1768-1864). 
 
 37. Die Kapelle. 
 
 Droben stehet die Kapelle, 
 
 Schauet still ins Thai hinab, 
 Drunten singt bei Wies' 'und Quelle 
 
 Froli und bell der Hirtenknab' . 
 
 Trauiig tont das Glocklein nieder, 
 
 Scbauerlich der Leichenchor; 
 Stille sind die froben Lieder, 
 
 Und der Knabe lauscbt empor. 
 
 Droben bringt man sie zum Grabe, 
 
 Die sicli freuten in dam Thai: 
 Hirtenknabe ! Hirtenknabe ! 
 
 Dir auch singt man dort einmal. 
 
 liUdwig Uhland (1787—1862). 
 
 38. ©in ^ttttgei! unb fJor^folger mu^ammtb^. 
 
 £)er ma^^tige Sottf §Qffan fo| bei Sifd^. @iner jeiner 
 ©ffaoen ccrji^uttete eine ©c^ate mit ^ei^cm Saffce unb oerbronntc 
 bie §anb jeines §errn. S)a8 ©efi^t beS gitrften murbe rot bor 
 3orn, aber ber t)iencr fief »or il)m nieber unb fpracti mit ben 
 SGBorten bc8 SoranS: „®a8 ^arabieS ift fur bie, welc^e t^ren ^oxa 
 be^errfd^en." S)er tolif ertuiberte: „3c^ bin niif)t mefir jornig 
 ouf bi(|." ®er ©ftooe fu^r fort: „Unb fiir bie, weli^e i^ren 
 Seteibigern tjerjei^en." @ein §err antmortete ernft, aber ru^ig: 
 „3dj) oergebc bir." ®a fagte SIH mteber aJiut unb fe^te nod) 
 {)in5u: „a3or aCem fiir bie, wetdEie IBiifeS mit ®utem uergeften." 
 Unb ber Satif wurbe iiber bie ®reiftig!cit beS tnecl^ts nid^t unge= 
 ^tten, fonbern entgegnete lad^etnb: „3d) fctjcnfe bir bie grei^eit 
 unb ben Dtgarten bc« f)ingeri^tetcn ©etim am 2Jteere." 
 
 SatI StoSer (1796-1865). 
 
206 Juniors' German. 
 
 39. Das Schwert. 
 
 1. Zur Schmiede ging ein junger Held, 
 Er hatt' ein gutes Schwert bestellt. 
 Doch als er's wog in freier Hand, 
 
 Das Schwert er viel zu schwer erfand. 
 
 2. Der alte Schmied den Bart sich streicht: 
 „Das Schwert ist nicht zu schwer noeh leicht, 
 Zu schwach ist Euer Arm, ich mein'; 
 
 Doch morgen soil geholfen sein." — 
 
 3. „Nein, heut', bei aller Eitterschaft! 
 Durch meine, nicht durch Feuers Kraft." 
 Der Jiingling spricht's, ihn Kraft durchdringt, 
 Das Schwert er hoch in Luften schwingt. 
 
 Ludwig TJhland (1787—1862). 
 
 gin ©otbat, ber auf SSor^Joften ftanb, murbe in etner bunfetii 
 ^ad)t unt)crje^en8 uon ben gctnben iiberfattcn, enttoapet unb 
 gefangen genomnten. @te no^men il^n in bie 2JJttte, rid^teten bie 
 Saionette ouf xijxi unb geboten i^m, fie jogfei^ md) bent Soger 
 p fiil^ren. SE^ue er bte«, fo joHe i|m bo8 8eben gefc^enft feinj 
 betm geringften Saute ieboc^, ben er oon fi^ an geben wagte, 
 ttjiirben [ie t^n ouf ber ©teHe tbten. S)er ©olbot ging ftifltg 
 mit, ttufte ober tool^I, was er t^un tooUti. ©otoie fie on bie 
 ©^ttbwoctien lomen, unb et gtouben fonnte^ bag er gd^ort toiirbe, 
 f^rie er mit lauter ©timme: ,^aUof), Someroben, l§ier finb 
 %mM" ..3to SlugenbUd toor bag gonje Soger ouf ben Setnen, 
 unb ber Uberfott wurbe bereiteft; ben treuen ©olboten ober fonb 
 man, bon bieten ©tiJgen burc^bo^rt, auf berfetben ©telle entfeelt 
 (iegen, too er feinen SBornungSri^ ou8gefto§en ^otte. 
 
 ^inti^ ^aipati (1816— 18S1), 
 
 41. Gate Xacht. 
 
 Gute Nacht! 
 Allen Muden sei's gebracht. 
 Neigt der Tag sich still zum Ende, 
 Euhen alle fleiss'gen Hande, 
 Bis der Morgen neu erwacht. 
 
 Gute Nacht. 
 
German Reading Part. 207 
 
 Geht zur Ruh' ! 
 Schliesst die miiden Augen zu! 
 Stille wird es auf den Strassen, 
 Nur deu Wachter hort man blasen, 
 ' Und die Nacht ruft alien zu: 
 
 Geht zur Ruh'! 
 
 Gnte Nacht! 
 Schlummert, his der Tag erwacht, 
 Schlummert, his der neue Morgen 
 Kommt mit seinen neuen Sorgen, 
 Ohne Furcht, der Vater wacht. 
 
 Gute Nacht! 
 
 Theodor KSmer (1791—1813). 
 
 Sine ^xMxHt ifatit ben fonberboren ginfall, bag gttegen 
 erlernen ju toottot, unb lat fid) Bom Slbler Unterri(|t bortn au«. 
 iJJergebenii ftefite biefer tl^r Mr, ba^ xi)v Sege^ren toiberfinntg fet, 
 bo bie Statur fie jum f rted^en unb nic^t ^um gtiegen angetoiefen 
 ^abe. Slber bie @^itb!ri5te lieg nic^t ob, ben ibter inftcinbig 311 
 bitten, fie nur einmot mit in bie §i5^e ju ne^men, too fie fi(^ 
 bonn fc^on fetbft weiter ^etfen moHe. 
 
 ®et Slbfer, beS fortwfil^renben ©rSngenS fd§Iie|fid^ miibe, 
 erltarte ftd^ enbli^ bereit, i^en 2Bunf^ ju crfiillen, fa^te fie mit 
 feinen ^tauen unb ftieg mit il^r auf. 3lf8 fie nun giaubte, »eit 
 genug oben jn fein^ lie^ er fie loS, unb bie UngtiicEti^e ftet l^erab 
 nnb serf^metterte fid^ auf einem iJelfen. ^aa, Sfot.. 
 
 43. Der Herbst. 
 
 Schon welken die Blatter am Baume,. 
 
 Schon spielt mit dem alternden Lauhe der Wind; 
 
 Es zog am fernen Zeitensaume 
 
 Herauf des Winters Enkelkind. 
 
 Zwar wehen die Lufte noch leise 
 
 Und schmeiohelnd umrauscht uns ihr neckischer Ton ; 
 
 Doch durch die althekannte Weise 
 
 Klingt's oft schon fremd wie grimmer Hohn. 
 
208 Juniors' German. 
 
 Kings falbet der Wald, und es klagen 
 Die Vogel schon trauemd in Flur und Hain; 
 Es nahet der Winter und Zagen 
 Zieht mit dem rauhen Fremdling ein. 
 
 Arthur Bartow (1S60). 
 
 31(8 Suptter bo8 gcft fetner SBerma^tung fcterte unb aUt 
 jTtere t^m ®e\djtnk broc^ten, oermi^te Suno baS ©d^af. „3So 
 bkibt bag ©(i)af?" fragte bie ©Btttn. „SBorum BcrfSumt ba« 
 ©d^af, un8 fctn wol^Igemeinteg ©efd^enf ju brtngen?" Unb ber 
 §unb na^m ba« 2Bort unb fprac^: „S^xm ni(J)t, ©titttn! 3(^ 
 l^obe bag ©(j^af nod^ Ijcute gefe^en; e§ war (e^r 6etrubt unb 
 jammerte taut." — „llnb marum jammerte baS ©d^af?" frogte 
 bie fc^on gcrit^rte ©Bttin. — ,,34 trtnfteS!" fo fprac^ e8. „3c^ 
 babe jc^t mebcr SSBoQc nodf) 9Diitd^; maS teerbe ti) bem 3upiter 
 fc^enfen! ©oil td^, t(^ oMn leer Dor i^m erfrf)etnen? Steber tt)ifl 
 ic^ l^ingel^en unb ben §irten bitten, ba^ er ntid^ i^m ojjfcre." 
 Snbem brang mit bcS §trten ©ebete ber 9tau4 bc8 geopferten 
 ©^afeS, bem 3uptter ein fii^er ®eru^, burd^ bie SBoIten. Unb 
 je^t ^fitte Jupiter bie erfte fe^rane geroeint, wenn ST^rSnen ein 
 unfterbttcf)e8 3luge bencfeten. ©ott^oib epi^ta™ seyfmg (1729-1781). 
 
 45. Alexanders Yermachtnis. 
 
 Als Alexander starb, yerordnet' er, 
 Dass man die Hand ihm aus dem Sarg liess liangen, 
 Damit die Menschen alle, die vorher 
 In seines Eeichtums Fiill' ihn sahen prangen, 
 Nun sehen mochten, dass mit Handen leer 
 Er sei des allgemeinen Wag's gegangen, 
 Und dass er von den Schatzen alien habe 
 Nichts als die leere Hand gebracht zum Grabe. 
 
 Friedricli Bflokert (1788—1866). 
 
 46. ^tittviiff iet &to^t unb fein ^age« 
 
 ©nft tag ber S'onig im genfter unb tiernal^m l^inter fi(^ ein 
 HetneS ®erauf(^. Sr fa^ barauf bur^ einc mit bem 2lrme ge» 
 mo^te siffnung, ba^ ber $age feine ©ofe Dom STifdje na^m, fie 
 betra^tete unb eine ^rifc foftete. ^^riebrid^ ftbrte t^n nic^t. Slber 
 norf) eincr ftcinen SBeile, ba er bas genfter tuieber jugemac^t 
 
German Reading Part. 209 
 
 fiatte, nal^m er bie 33ofe in bie §onb unb frogte ben ^agen: 
 „®efaat bit bie ®oie?" Seftarat fiber biefe grage, woHte ber 
 ^age anfitnglic^ niii^t antworten; ba fie aber isieberl^olt luuibe, 
 tagte er ixMiH) fc^fi^tern: „3a]", — „^m, ha ntmm fie!" fagtt 
 ber Sbnig; „fie ift bein, fflr iWei ift fie gu f(ein." 
 
 31u8 „3tnelkaten unb e^avalterittge aui bem Selien %neitiii» id (Broken 1851," 
 
 47. Im Walde. 
 
 1. Im Walde mocht' ich leben 
 Zur heissen Sommerzeit! 
 
 Der Wald, der tann uns geben 
 Viel Luft und Frohlichkeit. 
 
 2. In seine kuhlen Schatten 
 Winkt jeder Zweig und Ast; 
 Das Blumchen auf den Matten 
 Nickt mir: Komm, lieber Gast! 
 
 3. Wie sich die Vogel schwingen 
 Im hellen Morgenglanz! 
 
 Und Hirsch' und Rehe springen 
 So lustig wie zum Tanz. 
 
 4. Von jedem Zweig und Raise, 
 H5r' nur, wie's lieblich schallt! 
 Sie singen laut und leise: 
 Kommt, kommt in griinen Wald! 
 
 Heinrich Hoffmann Ton Falleisleben (1798—1871). 
 
 ^xiibvxij ber ©roge toax, wenn er in ben ftiflen @tro|en 
 feiner i^m Borjiigtic^ werten atefibenjftabt ^otsbam fi^ auf feinem 
 alten ©diimmet fe|en lie^, gewB^ntid^ toon einem ©t^teorme 
 ©tra^cnjungen umgeben, an benen er fetne greube l^atte. @ie 
 nannten i^n „^apo gri^", bep^jflen fein ^ferb, faften bie ®teig= 
 bfigel an, fiipen il^m bie giife unb fangen ©letmf^e Srieg8= unb 
 SBotfalieber, »ou benen ber atte ^err borjiigtid^ ba8 „8Siftoria! 
 init un8 ift ®ott, ber ftolje geinb liegt ba" gem I)i5rte. 3lt« fie 
 an etncm ©onnabenb SRac^mittag e8 mat ju arg moisten, l&ob 
 griebrtd^ feincn ifradftod in bie ^Bl^e mit ben SBorten: „@i^ofer, 
 gef)t in bie ©c^ute!" Unb bte frB]§tirf)en Snoben riefen tout: 
 „^a\ta gri^ weif nii^t mat, ba^ ©onnabenb noi^mittogS leine 
 
 ©d^Ute ift!" SRuIemann eijlert (1770-1852). 
 
 14 
 
210 Juniors' German. 
 
 5Dte feftreid^er toaren am 5. ©ejember 1757 oon griebrid^ 
 bem (Stolen bet geut^en gefd^tagen toorben unb jogen \i6) nad) 
 bcr ©tabt 8tffa jurild @a tuor mittterwcife 3lbenb geworben, 
 unb ba8 ^jreupfd^e fJu^foH war jum Siobe ermilbet, \o ba^ an 
 eine allgeraeine SSerfotgung bc3 geinbea ntd^t gcba^t merben 
 fonnte. — Stor griebrid^ fe^te mtt etncm ^rupia ^ujaren ben 
 ^einben nac^ unb lam babet bid noc^ Stffa. ®ofort teurbe auf 
 bie 3lnfiJmmtinge au8 ttiefen §fittf«rn gef^offen, o^ne bag bie 
 @(|ilffe jebod& eine SBirfung l^atten. 5Der ^Bnig, teetd^er bie 
 ©egenb genau launte, gttangte mit wenigcn ©egfettern unbe^inbert 
 bia an ba8 @<^og, in toeft^em bie bftreid^ifd^en Offijtere ein 
 Untertominen gefunben gotten. Sben woflten fie fi(^ jur STafet 
 begeben, ate fie burc^ baS ®erSufd^ ber onfommenben SReiter bis 
 an bie S^re^^je geloiJt wurben. ^ier trat i^nen ber ^5nig aCein 
 entgegen mit ben SBorten: „®ttten Stbenb, meine ^erren, ®ie 
 baben mic^ l^ier mol ni^t bermutet! Sann man noc^ mit unter^ 
 fommen?" SBfil^renb atle in gr&gter SBertuirrung bo ftanben unb 
 ben SBnig anftorrten, erfd^ien fein ©efolge unb na!§m bie feinb* 
 tic^en Dffijiere gefangen. Mujemann evtert (1770-1852). 
 
 50. €refiuiden. 
 
 1. Ich ging im Walde 3. Ich woUt' es brechen, 
 So fur micli hin, Da sagt' es fein: 
 
 Und nichts zu suchen, Soil ich zum Welken 
 
 Das war mein Sinn. Gebrochen sein? 
 
 2. Im Schatten sah ich 4. Ich grub's mit alien 
 Ein Blumchen stehn, Den Wurzlein aus, 
 
 Die Sterne leuchtend, Zum Garten trug ich's 
 
 Wie lutein schon. Am hubschen Haus 
 
 Und pflanzt' es wieder 
 Am stillen Ort; 
 Nun zweigt es immer 
 Und bluht so fort. 
 
 ■Wolfgang Ton Goethe (1749-1832). 
 
 §atun 9iaf(^ib tranmte, aCe fetne 3fi^«e feien i^m ouSge* 
 fatten. ®r lieg einen SraumauSteget lommen unb fragte, toas 
 
German Reading Part. 211 
 
 bev jTraum ju fiebcuten ijdit. „®ott woKe bt^ oor aflcm Ungtiicf 
 bewal^ren!" fagte ber 9tu8tegev ; „ber SCraum kbcntet, bag bu aGe 
 beine Serwnnbten fterben je^en toirft." ©er Sotif, ergiirnt fiber 
 i«e flbic 3lu6lcgung, tieg i^m ^unbert @to(fftret(|e gekn unb 
 eincn anbern Slusteger rufen. SDtefer atttwortrte ouf bie iJrage, 
 »a8 bet S^raum bebeute: „1)er §tm»net mode aKen beinen ln= 
 oeritanbten ein tangeS 8cben oetlet^enl Slber ber STraum be= 
 beutet, baf bu fie otic libcrtebcn totrft." 3)er Salif tte| il^m ^unbert 
 ■©ufaten gcben. 3m ©runbe ^atte ber eine unb ber anbere 3lug= 
 teger baSfetbe gejogt. @o titetes fotmnt on ouf 3lrt unb SBenbung 
 
 ber 9Jebe. gofeti^ uon Santm«v=sput8ftnn (1774-1856). 
 
 53. Die Gartnerin and die Biene. 
 
 Eine kleine Biene flog 
 Bmsig bin und her — und sog 
 Sussigkeit aus alien Blumen. 
 
 „Bienchen," spricht die Gartnerin, 
 Die sie bei der Arbeit trifft, 
 „Mancbe Blume bat docb Gift, 
 Und du saugst aus alien Blumen?" 
 
 „Ja," sagt sie zar Gartnerin, 
 „Ja, das Gift lass' ich darin!" 
 
 Wilhelm Gleim (1719—1803). 
 
 SRad) ber ©djloi^t bei get)rbettin, in wefd^er bie ©ditoeben 
 Bon ben Sronbenburgern gefifjtogen wurben, bat ein ouf ben Sotv 
 tierwunbeter Bd^weiit einen Dorilbergebcnben broubenburgif(|en 
 (Solbaten urn einen Slrunf. „©cn fottft bu l^oben, tomcrob," 
 fogte bieferj wa^renb er ober bie getbflofd^e to8nefte(t«, ergrtff 
 ber tiidijcfie @(|tt)ebe cine neben i^ni Itegenbe ^ifto(e unb feuerte 
 fie unoerfe^eng ouf ben gutntiitigen S3ronbenburger ob, fe^fte i^n 
 aber. „@8 war gut gejiett," fagte biefcr, „benn bie tuget ^jfiff 
 ntir juft ant SD^re oorbci, aber bi5fc gemeint, unb id) faun bid) 
 beswegen ntd)t ungeftroft faffen! @ic^, biefe gfafc^e ift ooQ guten 
 2Bein8, unb bu ptteft fie gonj befommeu, je^t aber befoutmft bu 
 fie nur l^olb!" — ©antit tf)at ber ©ranbenburger einen tiiditigen 
 @(^tu(f ou8 berfctben, gob fie bonn bent ©c^weben unb gina 
 ru^ig bat)on. S'invti* eastiart (lais— isei). 
 
 u* 
 
212 Juuiors' German. 
 
 54. Die Rache. 
 
 1. Der Knecht hat erstochen den edeln Herrn, 
 Der Knecht war' selber ein Ritter gern. 
 
 2. Er hat ihn erstochen im dunkeln Hain 
 Und den Leib versenket im tiefen Rhein; 
 
 3. Hat angelegt die Rustung blank, 
 
 Auf des Herren Ross sich geschwungen frank. 
 
 4. Und als er sprengen will uber die Bruck', 
 Da stntzet das Ross und baumt sich zuriick. 
 
 5. Und als er die giildnen Sporen ihm gab, 
 Da sohleudert's ihn wild in den Strom hinab. 
 
 6. Mit Arm, mit Fuss er rudert und ringt, 
 Der schwere Panzer ihn niederzwingt. 
 
 Iiudwig Uliland (1787-1862), 
 
 55* &tXifitubttt»iniun^» 
 
 21I« griebttd)« be8 ©rogen Sifter unb SeibeSft^mSi^e ju« 
 na^men, begegnete ed t^m einigemat, ba^ er etroai I&nger fi^Iief, 
 ots er ftc!^ oorgefefet l^atte; er firgerte fic^ barilber unb befo^t 
 fctnem Sammerbiener, tl^n nit^t Wnger ols bis auf bie befttmmte 
 aJiinute fc^tafen ju (affen unb i^n mit ®ewa(t gu weden. (Sinft 
 fam ein Sebienter, ben ber ^bnig erft angcnommen ^atte, urn 
 btefen ©cfel^t ju erfilflen. „8ag mit^ boc^ no(^ ein wentg fc^Iofen, 
 id) bin noc^ gar gu miibe!" — „31&re 3Kaj|eftat l^aben mir be> 
 fof)teK, t(|i follte fo friif) fomraen." — „5Rur no^ eine eiujige 
 aStertefftunbe, fag' t^." — ,^einc SWinute, 36re SKajeftfit; c8 ift 
 Dter Ul^r; id) taffe xaxH) nt(|t abmeifcn." — „9iun, bo8 ift brao," 
 rief ber ^bnig ; „bu tcttrbeft ttbe( angefommen fein, toenn bu mi(^ 
 ^tteft liegen taffcn." 
 
 3(uS „3(iie{boten unb S^aratter^ttge aug bent Seben Sciebtic^S II." 
 
 56. ^a, totnn fein Mammet^ttx^i to&ttl 
 
 3lt« grtebrii^ 11. fi^ ©ansfouci, etnen SEempet ber aJiufcn, 
 einfad^, erl^aben unb ftitl, angelegt ^atte, betiiftigte i^n bie na^e 
 gcfcgene SSinbrafi^te. 3^ faft unauf^brti(J)e8 Siaufd^en unb ein* 
 lonigeg ©etlapper ftBrte t^n in f etnen Setraditungen, unb er 
 iuiinfc^te es ou8 feinen O^ren ^inioeg. Sr tie^ atfo ben benad)» 
 
German Reading Part. 213 
 
 batten aSittbmMcr ju fid) foramen, ©tefer abet tooUtt md) fiir 
 bte ^o^e ©umnte, metdie il^m oon bent tenigttc^en §crr(d}er ge* 
 boten wurbe, bte in ber ^JS^e ber ©tobt gut unb ^od^ gctegene 
 S8?tnbmii]|{e ntd^t tierfaufen. ,,©(i)on mein ©rogoater unb SBoter," 
 jogte er, „^aben fie befeffen; t^ unb ntctnc ©efd^wifter finb auf 
 xf)x geboren; fie gewfi^rt ntir ntcin 93rot unb tft mir ju eincm 
 tteben unb werten gamtttengute gercorben." grtebrtc^ gab gute 
 SBorte unb fteigerte fein ®ebot. 2l{« ber aBinbmiifler aber etgen= 
 finntg eon feinem SBeftijtume nti^t (affen woHte, ttitrbe ber SiJnig 
 oerbrte^tid^ unb fagtc: „2Benn & md)t gutmiSig twtfl, fo befcf)!' 
 td^'8 3^m; unb wiH Sr nttr nic^t ge^orrficn, fo nc^m' ic^ bie 
 mtr rotberwiirttge Wl^k." jDer SDMfler onttnortete bretft: „f)o, 
 fo ge^t'« nic^tl So, wenn !ein Sommergerti^t ware!" gricbrt(!^ 
 erfonnte bte SOBal^r^eit unb fii^fte bie ©rfiarfe biefer freimijtigcn 
 3)ro^ung. @r e^rte bie burdi ba8 ®efe^ gcfid^crtc ^etfigfcit be3 
 ©gentuntS, Derfc^tudte bte ^fle, tie^ ben $3inbntuIIcr in gricben 
 jiefen unb l^brte gebutbig bo8 Oetfapper ber ajfiif^le, bie auf ifirer 
 ©telle ftefien btieb unb nod) ^eute fte^t. 
 
 SRutemann ffiblett (1770—1852). 
 
 ©n befannter arabifc^er ^erbebieb erjS^tte fofgenbcrmagen, 
 was i^ttt einft in ber SBiifte begegnet wor: 3d) ^ottc mi^ ju 
 einent ©tamme ©ebutnen »erirrt, ber mid) gaftfreunbfid^ aufna^m. 
 aiQe Slage fd)(o^teten fie meinctwegen cin Somet. dd) bat ^wax, 
 fie mBc^tcn fic^ ni^t fo Diet Ungelegen^eit mat^cn unb mid) jie^en 
 iaffen, aber be«ungcod)tet ^ielten fie ntte^ juriid unb fc^Iadjteten 
 jeben Zaq ein Samcf. 
 
 @nb(i^ crfa;^ t^ eineS Stages bie ©etegen^eit, trieb ein \i)mU 
 laufenbeS Samet ab, fe^te mid) barouf unb eifte booon. SDcr 
 Sigentiimer, ber mi(| unb baS Samet batb oermip ^atte, !am 
 ^ort Winter mtr geritten. 3118 er mi(^ einge{)ott ^atte, Wie8 er 
 auf eine ©c^knge l^in, bie im ©anbe tag. „©ie^ft bn," fprad) 
 er, „ben @d)Weif ber ©d^fange bort? Qi) wtH i^n treffen mit 
 biefem ^feil." @r briictte ab, unb ber ^feil buri^bo^rte bie ©pi^c 
 be8 @d)Weifc8. „Unb mit biefem ^feile," fagte er, inbem er 
 einen jWeitcn l^eroorjog, „werbe i^ ben Sopf treffen." ©r fc^og 
 ben ©d^tangentopf entjwei. „®u fie^ft nun wo^I," fpradt) er, 
 „ba| tdf) mit biefem britten ^feife beine SSruft nti^t tierfe^Ien 
 wiirbc, unb bu oerbienteft e8, weil bu unfere greunbfc^aft burd} 
 
214 Juniors' German. 
 
 gtuc^t unb ©iebfla^t belofinft. — Slbcr weil bu un[er ®aft marft, 
 fo jtel^ ^in in ®otte« Sflamen, unb wci^te btr noiJ) awanjtg cinberc 
 
 ^ameetel" Sofet)* son Sammer^iPutflftad (1774-1856). 
 
 58. Schafers Sonntagslied. 
 
 Das* ist der Tag des Herrn! 
 Ich bin allein auf weiter Flur*, 
 Noch* eine Morgenglocke nur, — 
 Und Stille nah und fern. 
 
 Anbetend knie' ich hier. 
 susses Graun*! geheimes Wehn*! 
 Als* knieten viele ungesehn 
 Und beteten mit mir. 
 
 Der Himmel, nah und fern, 
 Er* ist so klar und feierlich, 
 So ganz, als woUt' er offnen sioh: 
 Das ist der Tag des Herrn! 
 
 Ludwig Uhland (1787-1862). 
 
Graduated German and English 
 Glossary. 
 
 1. ^tt aWot. — May. 
 
 1) ©te Siad^ttgatl the nightingale. 2) mar was. 3) mU 
 ferttt away. 4) 5)er griil^ting spring. 5) locfen call. 6) fie her, it. 
 7) Wtefaer back. 8) WaS neue8, (something new) anything new. 
 9) fie ^at m6}t geternt she (it) has not learnt. 10) fingen 
 sing. 11) alte, ttebe Sieber, old dear songs; an adj. without 
 article or pronoun is declined like btefet, plur. btefe. 
 
 2, £amm unb Stnb. — The Lamb and the Child. 
 
 1) SOBaS f(!^reift bu what are you 
 
 crying (for). 
 
 2) fo !(8gti(|, so miserably, 
 
 pitifully. 
 
 3) metne ttebe 3)?utter, my dear 
 
 mother. 
 
 4) ift fort, is away, is gone. 
 
 5) filrd^teft bu bid), do you fear, 
 
 are you afraid? 
 
 6) ba^, conj. that. 
 
 7) tit ber 3"t/ meanwhile. 
 
 1) titobe, boy. 
 
 2) xi) bitt' bic^, I beg of you. 
 
 3) fo fe^r id) tann, as much 
 
 as I can, most earnestly. 
 
 little lamb. 
 9) bir t^u' ein 8etb, may hurt 
 8) trgenb iemanb, somebody, 
 you, might do you harm. 
 
 10) furd^tett, be afraid. 
 
 11) id) tDii^temd^ttoag, I should 
 not know of what. 
 
 12) 0^ nettt! oh no! 
 
 13) bet ber 3Jiutter, with (my) 
 mother. 
 
 14) (id)) tnBc^te nur gem fein . . . 
 I should only like to be. 
 
 3. SSogcI. — The Bird. 
 
 4) ril^re nid^t an, pray do not 
 touch. 
 
 5) mein tteineg Sflcft, my little 
 nest. 
 
216 
 
 Juniors' German. 
 
 6) fie^ nic|t l^in, pray do not 
 stare at it with your eyes. 
 
 7) e8 tteflen barin, there lie in 
 it (therein). 
 
 8) ja, don't you see. 
 
 9) mctne ^nber, my little ones. 
 10) bte hjetben etfd&wifen, they 
 
 (these) will be frightened. 
 
 11) fd^ret'n, cry. 
 
 12) fingftlt^, fearful of danger, 
 timorously. 
 
 13) tuenn bu fd^ouft l^eretn, if 
 you look at it (into it). 
 
 14) ntit be« grofen 3Iugett, with 
 your large eyes. 
 
 4. 35fl« StiJ^iPein. — The Little Drop. 
 
 1) e8 IMU§ faSen, it must fall. 
 
 2) gur (= JH bcr) @rbe, to the 
 
 ground. 
 
 3) ne^ea, moisten, refresh. 
 
 4) bag 33fittm»(^eji, the little tree. 
 
 5) jart, tender. 
 
 6) hJciierVDaHetijWanderfarther. 
 nrit Oueflen, in fountains, 
 (little brooks), 
 erg&^n, delight. 
 
 17) erft, first of all, 
 
 7) 
 8) 
 
 9) bo8 55tf(^=Ietn, the little fish. 
 
 10) bie Wlitijk fdilagen, work the 
 mill, lit. strike the m. 
 
 11) im Sad^, in the brook. 
 
 12) tm ©trom, in the stream. 
 
 13) trogen, bear, carry. 
 
 14) bie ©d^iffe, the ships. 
 
 15) too wfiren benn, where would 
 be then. 
 
 16) bie aWeere, the seas. 
 
 18) wenn nic^t . . . mare, if there were not. 
 
 Note. The verb is removed to the end of a clause beginning with 
 the subordinate conjunctions tvenn, if; when; ba6, that; etc.; and the 
 Infinitive is always the last word in a simple sentence. 
 
 5. Set @fel ttnb bet SBoIf. — The Donkey and the Wolf. 
 
 1) begtgiien (with dative) meet. 2) ein l^ungrtger aSoIf a 
 hungry wolf. 3) §abe SKttleiben mit mtr! have pity on me! 
 4) fagen say. 5) 5Der jitternbe gfel, the trembling donkey. 
 6) ein arme«, fronfeS STter a poor sick animal. 7) fie^ nur, 
 only see! look! 8) toaS fiir etnen ©orn (ace. governed by ge* 
 treten) what a thorn. 9) t(| nttr in ben guf getreten ^abe 
 I have run into my foot; mir in bctt = in meinen. 10) roa^x^ 
 l^afttg indeed. 11) beboaern pity; bic^ (thee), you. 12) oerfe^en 
 reply. 13) xiS) finbe mic^ I feel. 14) in meinem ©etoiffen oerbunben 
 bound in conscience; literally; in my consc. bound. 15) bDn 
 btefen ©(i^merjen from this pain. 16) befreieii deliver. 17) fount 
 war ba8 SBort gefagt no sooner were these words said. 17) jo 
 wor ber @f«I jertiffen than the donkey was torn to pieces. 
 
Graduated Glossary. 217 
 
 6. Stiafic nttb Si^mtttttlm^. — The Boy and the Butterfly. 
 
 1) Seines ICtng little thing. 2) wotion bu lebft on what 
 you live. 3) I5)a| bu nur ftets in Silften fcfiwebft that you 
 float so easily in the air; from f^weben. 4) ©tumenbuft 
 flower-dust; lit. fragrancy of flowers. 5) ©onttenft^etn sunshine. 
 6) bte ^Wal^rung metn =• ntetne Stal^rung my food. 7) ber 
 Sjwbe ber = b«r ^abe, the article being frequently repeated 
 in simple poetry. 8) woUt' i^n fangen would catch it. 9) ha 
 bat ct mtt Bittern unb ®ongen then it begged panting with 
 fear; 3ittern unb S'^S^ ^''^^ Infinitives used substantively and 
 then written with capital letters. 10) (ieb dear. 11') t^u' c8 
 ntc^t! don't do it! 12) ta^ ntid^ fpieten! let me play! 13) baS 
 ©onnenttdit the sunshine. 14) e|(e) ere, before; conjunction. 
 15) Btrge^en vanish. 16) boS Slbenbtot the setting sun. 
 17) ttegen lie (of place). 18) boc^ f(^on to be sure. 19) fait 
 unb tot cold and dead. 
 
 7. S)er SSetfii^nber. — The Spendthrift. 
 
 1) jung young. 2) ber (Sbelntann the nobleman. 3) fe'^r 
 retiJ) very rich. 4) abet but; conjunction. 5) gro^ great. 
 6) ber ^r^diwenber the spendthrift. 7) wenige 9fa^re a few 
 years. 8) jetn ^atbe« aSerntiJgen half his fortune. 9) oerf(j^menben 
 squander awayi the P. Part, does not take the prefix ge. 
 10) einer eon feinen greunben one of bis friends. 11) tongc 
 for a long time. 12) beobad^ten observe. 13) eineS Stages 
 one day; Indefinite expressions of time are put in the 
 genitive case in answer to the question: when? They take 
 the accus. in answer to: how long? 14) \pxa^ er mit 
 t^m he spoke to him; notice the inverted order. 15) itbev 
 fein t)erf^wenberi|(^e8 Sebcn about his extravagant life. 16) jetgcn 
 point at, show; (with dat.) if)m to him: 17) bte ^tiqtxi beSfetbcn 
 its consequences ; bti'-'iti.hm from ber^fefbe the same. 18) 9?ecS)t 
 l^aben be right. 19) eS fte^t fdifimm mtt mir, I am in a bad 
 plight, my affairs are in a bad state. 20) filrcf)ten fear, be 
 afraid. 21) tdE) werbe fterbtn, fut. Indef. of fterben die. 22) ala 
 ®ett(er (as) a beggar. 23) ba8 fd^Ummfte the worst. 24) ont= 
 ttorten answer. 25) tcben live. 26) tocit jc^timnter (by) far 
 worse. 
 8, gBanberSmann nnb Settle. — The Traveller and the Lark. 
 
 1) aSte frii^ how early. 2) fd)on already. 3) fltegen fly. 
 
218 Juniors' German. 
 
 4) jaud^jenb jubilant. 5) ber SDiorgcnfonne ju, towards the 
 morning sun. 6) vo'xU 5DanI bringen, will pay (my) thanks. 
 7) ber ttebe ®ott God. 8) fitr 8cben unb S^ta^rung, for my 
 life and food. 9) baS ift . . . raein S3rau^, that is (= has 
 been) my habit. 10) Don 2l(ter8 ^er of old. 11) bciner bod) 
 h)ol§t auc|, yours as well I daresay, 
 
 9, ©cr giertge ^abii^t. — The greedy Hawk. 
 
 1) §otte had. 2) eincn ©petting gefangen caught a sparrow. 
 
 3) unb toollte il^n eben berje^ren, and was just going to eat it. 
 
 4) ©a fol^ er etne S^aube when he saw a pigeon. 5) auf (with 
 dat.) upon. 6) la& S)a(^ eineS §aufe8 the roof of a house. 
 7) btefe fd^ien t^m etne beffere Seute this appeared him better 
 prey. 8) afS than (after a comparative). 9) ntager meagre, 
 lean. 10) ber ©petting the sparrow. 11) fofort at once. 
 12) tte^ er ben ©pag fatten, he dropped the sparrow; from 
 taffen — tiei — getoffen let. 13) ftog nad^ ber 2;anbe flew 
 after the pigeon ; from fliegen — flog — gcftogen fly. 14) jebod^ 
 howeyer. 15) ber gcinb the enemy. 16) bemerfen notice, 
 perceive; it does not admit of the prefix ge of the P. Part. 
 17) unb fid) unter b<n& 5Dad^ oerftedt, and had hidden (itself) 
 under the roof. 18) Sonnte fie ntti^t fangcu/ could not catch 
 it; from fiJnnen — fonnte — gefonnt. 19) pog nac^ bent Orte 
 gurild flew back to the place. 20) wo where. 21) loffen leave; 
 strong verb. 22) bod) yet, but. 23) fort away, gone. 24) etne 
 So^c a cat. 25) freffen (fra| — gefteffen) eat (of animals), 
 effcn of man. 25) teden lick. 26) bel^agttd^ comfortably, with 
 satisfaction. 27) ber SBavt the beard. 28) ttef, from rnfen 
 (— rief — gerufen) call out, say. 29) fie^ft bu you see; 2nd 
 p. sing, Pres. Ind. 30) §err ^aVidjt Master Hawk. 31) bie 
 $anb the hand. 32) beffer (gut — beffet — beft) better. 
 
 10. ©Kengtb^e. — Yard-greatness. 
 
 (e. g. greatness measured by the yard instead of merit.) 
 
 1) 5Die poppet the poplar. 2) fpriii^t, Bnd p. sing. Pres. 
 Ind. of fpred^cn speak, say. 3) ba8 ©Sumd^en the little tree. 
 4) h)a8 mad)ft bu bid) fo brett why do you boast? liter, why 
 do you clain so much room for yourself? toa9 is frequent for 
 worum why. 5) nitt ben gettngcn ^pumd^en of your poor tiny 
 plums. 6) erfreut glad. 7) ba^ ic^ nid^t btog etn §otj, that 
 
Graduated Glossary. 219 
 
 I (am) not only a piece of wood. 8) nicf)t eine teere ©tange, 
 not a barren pole; understand bin (am) at the end of the 
 dependent clause. 9) ftolj proudly. 10) jwar it is true. 
 11) tang long; (a good long one). 
 
 11. S)et: Srofd) unb bie SJiauS. — The frog and the mouse. 
 
 1) wollte gem iiber ein 2Baffer ge^cn, would like to cross 
 a stream. 2) fonnte ntd^t, could not do it; the aux. verbs of 
 mood may be used elliptically; understand t^un do. 3) fie 
 bat einen grofcE) it (she) asked a frog; from bitten — bat — 
 gebcten. 4) um 8iat unfa §t(fe, for advice and help. 5) ein 
 ©djal! a rogue. 6) binbe tie; imperative. 7) bein gu^ your 
 foot. 8) an ntcinen gu^ to mine. 9) jo witl ti^ fd)Wimmen 
 then I will swim; notice the inverted order of the principal 
 sentence if preceded by a dependent clause. 10) ^tnilber* 
 jte^en carry across. 11) bo when; conj.; verb last. 12) aber 
 but, however. 13) aiifS Staffer tamen were in the water. 
 14) tau(^te ber %xo\&) untcr, the frog dived; inverted order: 
 see note 9. 15) crtranfen drown. 16) inbem bie aJJauS fi^ 
 we^rt unb arbeitct while the mouse resists and struggles. 
 17) fliegt eine SGSeil^e balder a kite comes flying along; see 
 note 9 on inversion. 18) er^af(!|en catch, take hold of. 19) ya.' 
 gtetd) at the same time. 20) jie^t fie au^ ben Srojc^ mit 
 ^erauS it (she) also pulls the frog out of the water; inversion 
 of simple sentence as the nominative does not stand first. 
 21) fti|t fie beibe eats both of them; frigt is 3'^ pers. sing. 
 Pres. Ind, of freffen. 
 
 12. (^oit gtiljje bid)! — God's blessing upon you! 
 
 (literally: May God [greet] bless you!) 
 
 1) tein onbrer ®ru| no other greeting. 2) gleirfien equal. 
 3) bem = biefem. 4) an Snmgfeit in heartiness. 5) ^laffen be 
 suitable. 6) ju atter ^eit at any time. 7) wenn if. 8) fo 
 rei^t oom ^erjen from the very heart. 9) ge^en go, come. 
 10) bet bem fieben ®ott with our Lord. 11) gift ber ®x\x% 
 fooiet ttie ein ®ebet the greeting is worth as much as a prayer ; 
 gift is 3rii p. sing. Pres. Ind. of gelten. 
 
 13. 2)er Siime, bet SSar unb bet SSoIf. — The Lion, the Bear 
 and the Wolf. 
 
 1) 3n freunbf^afttidjev SSerbinbung in friendly union. 
 
220 Juniors' German. 
 
 2) fatten cin ^irfi^fafb criegt had slain a fawn. 3) fiber bcr 
 ^ieilung beSfetbcn aber about its partition, however. 4) gcrtetcn 
 fie in ©treit they got into a quarrel; Pret. of gevaten. 5) uiib 
 ffim^jften wol^I etne ©tunbc jufammen and fought for about an 
 hour. 6) bis fie betbe atemfoS ju ©oben fanfcn until both of 
 them fell down exhausted. 7) in btcfem Slugenbticte at this 
 moment. 8) gtng ein SBoIf tiorflber a wolf passed bj; ging is 
 Pret. of gcl^en. 9) fal^ bte D^nmod^t ber beiben, saw their 
 weakness. 10) nal^m bretft bag §trfrf)!alb felbft (l^tntoeg) 
 boldly took the fawn to himself. 11) unb ging ^5f)nif(^ fad^enb 
 t)on bonnen, and went away sneering and laughing, 
 
 14. 3)a§ aSeilii^en. — The Violet. 
 
 1) Untcr ®ra8 tierftedt, hidden under grass. 2) hJte mit 
 §offnung jugebedt, covered, as it were, with hope. 3) frene 
 bti^ mit mtr, rejoice with me. 4) ©onne fontmt (jo) aaH) jju bir, 
 the sun comes to you also. 5) f<]^eint nttt 8tcbe8f(^etn, shines 
 with sweet love. 6) ticf bir in bein §erj ^inein, into your 
 inmost heart. 7) trocfnet beine 2:^rfinen bir dries your tears. 
 Observe the addition of the emphatic personal pronoun bir to 
 bein §erj and beine Sl^rfinen, though grammatically useless. 
 
 15. 2)te betbcn ^riif^e. — The two Frogs. 
 
 1) @in iiberma§ig l^etf er ©ommer, an extremely hot sum- 
 mer. 2) §atte etnft einen tiefen ©umjjf au«getro(fnet, once had 
 dried up a deep pool. 3) 5Deffen biSl^erigc SSewol^ner, its former 
 inhabitants. 4) mugten nunme^r nai^ onbern SBol^nBrtern fid) 
 umfel^en had now to look out for other dwelling-places. 5) jmci 
 »on t^nen, two of them. 6) fomen, Pret. of fommcn come. 
 7) ju einem fe^r tiefen Srunnen, to a very deep well. 8) mo 
 e8 beS SEofferS genug gab, that contained plenty of water; 
 where there was plenty of water. 9) 9ld), fic^ ba Oh, look there. 
 10) rtef ber einc cried the one; rief is Pret. of rufen. 11) »qS 
 broui^en h)ir weiter ju geljcn? Why should we go (any) further? 
 12) Ia§ imS let us! 13) l^inunter ^ilpfen jump down. 14) ?Rtc^t 
 fo frfinefl, stop! not so fast! 15) erwiberte ber anbere replied 
 the other. 16) ^inunterf^iringen ift tcid^t it is easy to jump 
 down. 17) bod^ wenn oui^ biefer fflrunnen oertrodnete, but if 
 this well should dry up also. 18) wflrbe un8 ein qualDoflcr 
 Zot filler fein, we should be certain of a painful death. 
 
Graduated Glossary. 221 
 
 19) benn wtr fBnttten nm toieber t)evau8, for we should not be 
 able to get out again. 
 
 16. i^n^i unb (Snte. — The Fox and the Duck. 
 
 1) grou ente, Mrs. Duck. 2) ttjaS J^wimmft bu bort aiif 
 bent jEei^, why are you swimming there on the pond? 
 3) tomra bod) ctnmal fjer art bad Ufer gteii^! just come to the 
 shore for once please! 4) 3cf) f)ab' bid) ji^on tange mag woflen 
 fragen, I have (already) long wished to .ask you something. 5) ^err 
 giid)8, Mr. Vox. 6) i^ B)ii|te bir ntd)t8 ju fagen I should not 
 know what to teU you, 7) fo fc^on as it is. 8) mir tiiet ju 
 f[ug far too sharp for me. 9) brum therefore. 10) bteiben 
 remain. 11) biv wett genug at a good distance. 12) tieber 
 rather. 13) ^txv gu^8 ber gtng is colloquial for ber §err 
 gu^8 ging. 14) am Ufer ^in along the bank. 15) oerbriegtid^ 
 in (einem ©Uitt in a bad humour; lit. angry in his heart 
 (mind). 16) e8 Wftete i^n na(i^ einem Svaten, he longed for 
 a dainty dish. 17) ba« ^atte bic Snte gar tooi)l erraten, this 
 the duck had well perceived. 18) ^eut l^att' er fo gerne filmim^ 
 men tSnuen to-day he would have much liked to be able to 
 swim. 19) nun mu^t' cr il^r bod^ bas Seben giJnncn but as it 
 was he was forced to spare her (life). 
 
 17. 35er 2tffe unb bet SStlier. — The Ape and the Beaver. 
 
 1) Sin Slffe an ape. 2) :pva^Ien unb jagen brag and say. 
 3) je^t gejdildt, very clever. 4) ic^ fann allea nat^mac^en, wag 
 id) Jel^c, I, can imitate everything I see. 5) fein anbreS Xiix 
 no other animal. 6) ebet noble. 7) So^tan well. 8) rul^tg 
 quietly. 9) ba ba aUti nac^ma^ft, Wo8 bu fte^ft, since you 
 imitate (copy) everything you see. 10) (fo) berfu^e ba8 ju ttjun, 
 tiy to do. 11) was id^ bir je^t jetgen werbe, what I now shall 
 show you. 12) bann xoili id) beineu 3lbet ancvfennen, then I 
 will acknowledge your superiority (nobility). 13) bomit fprong 
 cr in ba8 iBaffer, therewith (thereupon) he jumped into the 
 water; observ-e the inverted order of words. 14) oerfdimanb, 
 ditsappeaxed; Pret. of betfc^wtnbcn. 15) fprang t^m nad^, jumped 
 after him. 16) er ertran!, he (it) was drowned; Pret. of er* 
 Ivinfen. 
 
 18. aSogel am ^eaftet. — The Bird at the Window. 
 
 1) 3ln baS'genfter fto^ft e8 ^td, \)id, there is a knocking 
 
222 Juniors' German. 
 
 at the window panes peck ! peck ! 2) TiaS)t mir boiJ) auf pray 
 open the window. 3) etnen 2tugen6(icE, for a moment. 4) bid 
 failt ber (£cf)nee, the snow (is falling) lies thick. 5) ber SBinb 
 gel^t fait, the wind is (hlowing) cold. 6) l^abe fetn gutter, (I) 
 have no food. 7) erfriere batb, (I) am nearly dying with cold, 
 I am half frozen. 8) (3^r) Iteben 8eute, good people. 9) o ia^t 
 m\^ etn, let me in, I pray. 10) roitt avi6) tmmer xtiS)t arttg 
 fetn, I promise I will always behave well, be a good bird. 
 11) fie Ite^en i^n ein in feiner "iRot, they let (it) him in as he 
 (it) was in distress. 12) er \\xd)te fitf) mmd)t^ Sriimc^en Srot 
 it picked up many a little crumb (of bread). 13) btieb frb^ItiJ) 
 manc&e S55od)e ba, stayed there gladly many a week. 14) boc^ 
 afg bie ©onne burd^g , genfter fol), but when the sun (looked) 
 shone through the window. 15) ba fag er (inverted order) 
 imnier fo trourtg bort, he (it) always sat there so sad. 16) fie 
 moci^ten t^m auf, they opened the window for him (it). 17) ^ufd;, 
 teat er fort, quick! he (it) had gone. 
 
 19. SCie Bt'dlfttt unb ber SSaffetfrug. — The Crows and the 
 
 Pitcher. 
 
 1) SHJ" burfttge SrS^en, two thirsty crows. 2) fanben 
 etnft, once found; Pret. of finben. 3) ein Oeffig, a vessel. 
 4) ouf beffen Soben, at the bottom of which. 5) fid) ein gut 
 5Eet£ SBaffer befanb, was a good deal of water. 6) bag ®efag 
 fetbft, the vessel (itself). 7) ju i}od) unb enge, too high and 
 narrow. 8) oerfuifien unijuftolen, try to upset. 9) ju jer= 
 Bremen, to break to pieces. 10) bod^ but. 11) aHe Tiiiljt 
 all their efforts. 12) oergebtid), in vain. 13) eine bcv 
 Srdl^en, one of the crows. 14) flog nii|mutig weg, flew 
 away in disgust; Pret. of wcg-j-fliegen. 15) bie anbere blieb, 
 the other stayed; Pret. of bteiben. 16) berfuc^en try. 17) 311= 
 tefet, at last. 18) auf cine neue 9lrt, (in) a new manner. 
 
 19) unweit eon btef<m SBafferhuge, not far from this pitcher. 
 
 20) (agen fleine ©teiue, lay small pebbles; (agen is Pret. of 
 tiegen, lie. 21) fie l^otte fie l^erbei, she (it) fetched them. 
 22) mtt i^rem ©c^nabet, with her (its) beak. 23) worf nad) 
 unb nad), threw by degrees ; Pret. of werfen. 24) ing SBaffer, 
 into the water. 25) imnter ^B^er unb ^b^er, continually higher 
 and higher. 26) ftteg nun basfetbe, it rose now ; Pret. of fteigcn. 
 27) iijt eine ^albe ©tunbe Oergtng, before half an hour had passed. 
 
Graduated Glossary. 223 
 
 Pret. of Berge'ften. 28) fonnte i^rcn 5Durft ftillen> could (was 
 able) to quench her (its) thirst. 29) bequem, at ease, easily. 
 
 20. mait. — The Raven. 
 
 1) SBaS flir etn SQtttdmaxm, what a beggar is he (that). 
 2) er ffat an, he wears. 3) etn fo^tfcf)»ar3[eS] Sibdtetn, a coal- 
 black (little) coat. 4) tSuft, is running ; 3rd pers. Sing. Pres. 
 ind. of taufen. 5) bie SSBinterjett, winter-time. 6) oor atte 
 St^ren, before all the doors. 7) mit unb breit, far and wide. 
 
 8) ruft mit betriibtem STon, he croaks with a pitiful voice. 
 
 9) gebt mir boc^ auc^ ab, pray, give me also. 10) einen £no(i)en, 
 a bone. 11) ©a tarn an, there arrived. 12) bcr Itebe %x\ii)' 
 ting sweet (dear) spring-tide. 18) gar wo^t gcfiet'8 right well 
 to the liking. 14) er breitete feine gtiiget au8, he spread out 
 his wings. 15) unb flog ba^tn, and flew away. 16) wett iiberS 
 ^ouS far over the houSe-top. 17) ^od) au8 ber 8uft, high in 
 the air. 18) frtj^ unb munter lustily and merrily. 19) ^aV 
 S)onf, ^ab ©anl, thanks, thanks to you! 20) rief er l^inuntcr, 
 he called down, back. 
 
 21. 2)er fiilrtiS unb bet ^almianxtu — The Pumpkin and the 
 
 Palm-tree. 
 
 1) gtne SarbtS^jflanje wu(^8 an einem ^atmbanmc empor, 
 a pumpkin (-plant) grew up round a palm-tree. 2) unb ftieg, 
 and rose; from ftetgen. 3) in wentg SGBoc^en, in a few weeks. 
 4) bis an feinen ®tpfef„ up to its top. 5) tote alt btft bu tt)oI)(, 
 how old are you, please. 6) fragte fie t^n, she (it) asked 
 him. 7) etnea SEageS, one day. 8) Oofle 100 3o^r, quite a 
 hundred years. 9) l^b^er, higher; compar. of l^od^. 10) fief), 
 look. 11) fo l^abe ic^ bici) fd^on flberl^olt, then I have already 
 overtaken you. 12) in loeit wentgeren Xa^m, in far less days. 
 
 13) a(8 bu 3a]^re jS^Ift, than you count (= have) years. 
 
 14) unb ttirft melfen, and (you) will fade. 15) wie bu loudjfeft, 
 as you have grown. 16) f^neH, quickly. 17) e^e ber SSBtnter 
 lommt, ere the winter comes. 18) fo^t unb tot withered and 
 dead; notice the Pres. tense bu btft for the Future Indef. 
 19) wofier wei^t bu ba«, how do you know that? 20) Ung(itd8= 
 pxopfft*, croaker; lit. evilprophet. 21) au8 bcr Srfal^rung, from 
 experience. 22) benn ii^ fo^ fc^on, for I have seen (already). 
 23) fo ntan^en ©inter, many a winter; the ace. (is governed 
 
224 Juniors' Gennan. 
 
 by ii^ fa^). 24) mand^n Surbia, many a pumpkin. 25) !fetterte 
 an mtr tm\sot, climbed up to me. 26) ftofi tote bu, proud as 
 you, 27) oergangli^, perishable, transient. 
 
 23. Slrei $aote uub eiuer. — Three Couples and One. 
 
 1) S)a8 D^r, the ear. 2) ber SKunb, the mouth. 3) ttittft 
 bu'8 beftagen, will you complain of it. 4) gar BteleS, many a 
 thing. 5) foUft bu ^ijren you shall hear. 6) wenig brauf fagen, 
 (you shall) say little in reply. 7) baS Sluge, the eye. 8) ma^' 
 bir'a ju eigeu, keep it in your mind, remember it. 9) fe^en 
 see. 10) oerfc^wetgen keep secret. 11) bie §onb, the hand. 
 12) tern' e8 trmeffen, learn to appreciate it. 13) gur Sttbett 
 for work. 14) einer jum Sffen, one for eating; notice the 
 terminations — ettter (masc), etne (f.), eineS (neut.) if the 
 word is used substantively. 
 
 23. Set ©bdfteiit. — The Jewel. 
 
 1) 35ev ^attf aWamun, the caliph Mamun. 2) bffa^ einen 
 jDiamanten, owned a diamond; Pret. of befifeen, befog, be[effen. 
 
 3) toon fettenet ®rij|e unb ©t^bni^eit, of rare size and beauty. 
 
 4) ben et iibergab, which he handed; from iibergeben, Pret. 
 iibergob, P. P. iibergeben. 5) bem ^ofjumefier to the court- 
 jeweler. 6) gu neuer |?affung to set it anew. 7) einige S^age 
 ^ernai^, a few days later. 8) warf fid) threw himself; Pret. 
 of fid) werfen. 9) ju ben ^il^ta beS Salifen, to the caliph's feet. 
 10) bat urn ®nabe, begged his pardon. 11) er jog aui f einer 
 2;afd)e ben ©tamanten he took the diamond out of his pocket. 
 12) in bier ©tiide ^txbvo(i)tn, broken into four pieces. 14) un* 
 gtiiinc^crmeife, unfortunately. 14) ein 3lmbo§ mar umgeftitrit, 
 an anvil had been upset. 15) ^atte bie8 Un^eit angerid^tet 
 had done this mischief. 16) o^ne ju OerSnbern, without changing. 
 
 18) bie f^arbe bee ®efiil)t8, his countenance (the colour of his 
 face). 18) ober ben Ston ber ©ttmme, or the tone of his voice. 
 
 19) tDOl^tan, well. 20) fo ntadie benn titer 9iinge barauS then 
 make four rings of it. 22) ftatt einen instead of one; generally 
 the genitive is used — ftatt etneS. 
 
 24. 3)ie Sorniil^ren. — The Ears. 
 
 1) gin ganbmann, a farmer. 2) ging auf ben aider ^inauS, 
 -went out to his field. 3) mit feinem fkinen ©ol^ne, with his 
 
Graduated Glossary. 225 
 
 little son. 4) ran p je^en, in order to see. 5) 06 bo8 Sotn 
 both reif jet, if the corn would soon be ripe. 6) SSatet, tote 
 tommt'a bo4, father, how is ii 7) ba^ einige §atme fti^ neigen, 
 that some stalks bow. 8) tief jur @rbe, deep to the ground. 
 
 9) onbere abet btn ^ojjf trogen, while others keep their heads. 
 
 10) aufrtJ^t, ereet. 11) bteft milffcn rec^t oorne^m jein, these 
 must be very distiugoished. 12) wol^t, I suppose. 13) bie 
 anbcrit, the others. 14) bie ft(^ |o tief oor i^ncit b&dm, that 
 bow so deep before them. 15) jlnb geJmf oiel ^te(^ter, cer- 
 tainly are_of much inferior quality. 16) ber SSotet jifKldte 
 ein paat tiiftta ab, the father gathered some ears. 17) fieJ) 
 btefe 2t^re ^ier, behold this ear. 18) bie fii^ fo befi^eiben neigte, 
 that bowed so modestly. 19) ift Bott ber ft^Sujien SSmer is 
 fall of the finest gtaia. 20) biefe aber, but that one. 21) bie 
 fi^ fo polj in bie ^ii^e ftredte, that stretched itself up so 
 proudly. 22) taub unb her, dead and empty. 23) mie ben 
 S:^ren, fo ge^t e6 auc^ ben SOtenfc^en, like ears like men. 
 
 25, 3Sl»^^(Spt nab ©^li^^en. — The Pug and the (Pomme- 
 ranian) Spitz. 
 
 1) §br', 16) Witt bt(^ ttaa fragen, listen I will ask you 
 something. 2) gang l^eimlii^, quite secretly. 3) roo l^oft ba »erfte(ft, 
 where did you hide. 4) ber fd^Bne Snod^en, that fine bone. 
 5) bo§ fein bbfer 35ieb i|n entbcdt, lest a wicked thief should 
 discover it. 6) netn, id) fd^wetge tieber fttfl, no, I rather keep 
 silent, I'll rather not mention it. 7) ber ©ieb tft'8 eben, it is 
 fust the thief. 8) jDer'8 ttiffen mitt, who wants to know. 
 9) ffat gtfuc^t, has sought, searched. 10) unb gerod^en, and 
 snuffled. 11) US e8 fanb ben Snotfien, until it found the bone. 
 12) l^inter bem ©talle, behind the stable. 13) in feiner 
 @(|nou3e, in its mouth. 14) f)att' e8 il^n f^on, it just had it. 
 15) ba bcEara ci gar etnen f^Ummen 8ol^n, when (then) it 
 received a pretty bad reward. 16) ^ert ®pt|, Mx. Spitz 
 (Pommeranian dog). 17) ber fa§t' e8 am Sragen, he seized it 
 by the collar. 18) fo berb, so roughly. 19) ba fief e8 bauon, 
 then it ran away. 20) (mit) ®(J)reten unb Stagen, whining 
 and weeping. 
 
 26. 2)et l^nngrtge Sfralier. — The hungry Arab. 
 1) tear Oerirrt, had gone astray, 2) in ber aSiifte, in the 
 
 15 
 
226 Juniors' German. 
 
 desert. 3) jtoet SToge, for two days. 4) ntci^t« ju effen, nothing 
 to eat. 5) in ©efa^r, in danger. 6) Bor §u«gcr ^u fterben, 
 to die of hunger. 7) biS er enbfic^ oittraf, until he at last 
 met, came across; Pret. of an+treffen. 8) eine tion ben 
 SBaffetgruben, one of the tanks, cisterns. 9) au8 benen from 
 which. 10) ber JReijenbe the traveller. 11) bo6 Samcel tx'intm, 
 give tiie camels some drink. 12) l^er ^ff er, here he saw. 
 
 13) ein Heiner, lebcrncr ©ad, a small leather-hag. 14) ttegen 
 lie. 15) tin ©cmbe, in the sand. 16) ®ott fet getobt, God be 
 praised, heaven be thanked. 17) atS er tl^n auf^ob unb an» 
 fiil^e, when he picked it up and felt it. 18) baS finb ©attein 
 ober Slaffe, those are dates or nuts. 19) gtanben think. 20) er= 
 qaidfen unb faben, refresh and comfort. 21) in btefer ^offnung, 
 in this hope. 22) toarb er jebod^ gronfam getfiufd^t, he was, 
 however cruelly disappointed. 23) bemt, for. 24) entl^ttt, 
 contained; Pret. of entl^otten. 25) xiicifi^ ate foftbore ^erfen, 
 nothing but precious pearls. 26) tta^renb er fie ober nod) bt' 
 trai^ttte, but while be was (still) looking at them. 27) Hagenb, 
 lamenting. 28) ber SReiter the horseman. 29) xia^, approach. 
 30) in ber gerne, m the distance. 31) tjon il^nen, of them. 
 32) ber Stgentttmer, the owner. 33) bie er oertoren ^atte, 
 which he bad lost; P. P. of oerlteren. 34) er erquidte, he 
 refreshed. 35) noJ^ iijTct, took him. 36) baS SRo^, the horse. 
 37) (mit) ivx ^aratjane ivnM, back to the caravan; lit. mit 
 = mit ft(^ (dat.) with him. 
 
 27. ®otte« treue ^anb, — The true hand of God. 
 
 1) 35a8 3D?eer the sea. 2) toeit^ wide. 3) bod) bie ^errltd^feit, 
 but Ibe (splendour) power. 4) gel^et nod) ttefer, reaches still deeper. 
 5) ate beg 3Keere8 Ornnb than the bottom of the sea. 6) nod^ 
 wetter ate ba» grbenrunb, still farther than the world's globe. 
 7) fobtefe gififtein tooi^nen brin, many small fish though are 
 fiving in it. 8) ber ^err fiel^t auf fie ]§in, God looks at 
 them. 9) fr<ttnblt^, kindly. 10) retd)t bar, gives. 11) tl^re 
 ©|)eife, (their) food. 12) atten, to all. 13) fii^ren, lead. 
 
 14) auf unb ob, up and down. 15) tounberbar, marvellously. 
 16) fo f)od), however high. 17) bie Wilben SBogen, the wild 
 waves. 18) gel^cn, go. 19) wenn er gebeut, if (whenever) he 
 commands. 20) fit ftttte ftel^en, they stop (motionless). 21) trcu 
 faithful. 22) bo8 ©d^tfflein, the little ship. 23) (^in) ins 
 fernfte 2ani^, to the farthest country. 
 
Graduated Glossary. 227 
 
 28. S)ic SJiooStofe. — The Moss-rose. 
 
 1) ®er gif, the elf. 2) ber bte Stumen oer^jftegt, who 
 takes care of, nurses the flowers. 3) unb S^ou barauf trfiufctt 
 and sprinkles dew on them. 4) in ftiCer '^a(i)t, in (the) quiet 
 night. 5) jif)tumnter=n, slumher. 6) an einem grill^IingStoge, 
 (on) one spring-day. 7) im ©d^atten, in the shade. 8) ber 
 9tof enftraui^ , the rose-bush. 9) eriuac^en, wake up. 10) ba8 
 3lnttt^, the face, countenance 11) ticbli(^fte8 ntetner Sinber, 
 dearest of my children. 12) tc^ banfe bit, I thank you. 
 13) fiir, for (ace). 14) ber erquidenbc SBo^(geru(^, the re- 
 freshing scent, fragrant odour. 15) ber ffl^tenbe @(|otteii^ the 
 cooling shade. 16) ^Bnnteft bu (btr) no^ ettta^-erbitten, would 
 you hke to ask for something; mi), more. 17) toie gem, 
 how gladly. 18) gewa^ren, grant. 19) fd^mikfen, adorn. 
 20) mit einem neuen 3Iei^e, with a new charm. 21) bat ber 
 ®eift be8 3?oJenfttau(!^8, asked the spirit of the rose-bush, Pret. 
 of bitten, Pret. bat, P. P. gebeten. 22) ber Stumenetf, the 
 flower-elf; the fairy. 23) bte Siinigtn ber ©Innten, the queen 
 of flowers. 24) nttt einfai^em SSJIoofe, with simple moss. 
 25) IkUiiS) ftanb fie ba, loTely she stood there. 26) in be= 
 fc^cibenem ©(^ud, in (her) modest attire. 27) jd^n, beautiful. 
 28) i^reS ©efditec^ta, of her kind, sex. 
 
 29. 2)ct belabene <5fel. — The loaded Donkey. 
 
 1) trug einen ©ad mit @ot^, carried a sack of salt, 
 tragen — trng — getragen. 2) auf feinem diMen, on his back. 
 3) mu^te, had to. 4) bur^ einen tiefen SSad), through a deep 
 brook. 5) mitten in bemfelben, in the midst of it. 6) ftrau^etn, 
 stagger, make a false step. 7) fatten — fiet — gefattea, fall. 
 8) bag aSBaffer, the water. 9) at8 er (wteber) aufftanb, when 
 he rose, got up. 10) merfen, perceive. 11) bie Soft, the 
 burden. 12) tttet teid^ter, much lighter. t3)_ etn grower SEett 
 beS ©atjeS, a large portion of the salt. 14) l^atte ftd^ anfgetBft, 
 had been dissolved. 15) SDaS toitt t(^ mir merfen, I shall keep 
 that in my mind. 16) oergniigt, delighted. 17) gtng weitet 
 and went on; ge^en — gtng — gegongen go. 18) am anbern 
 jLage, the following day. 19) fd^tter, heavy. 20) ber ©d^tuamm, 
 the sponge. 21) ot8 when. 21) legte er fid^ obfidittii^ nieber, 
 he lay down intentionally. 22) um ju modfien, in order to 
 render. 23) jebo^, however. 24) ein+faugen, (Pret. fog etn, 
 
 15* 
 
228 Juniors' German. 
 
 P. P. etngefogen), suck in (up). 25) tie Sitrbe, the burthen, 
 load. 26) bie Slnftrengung, the effort. 27) fort-|-bringen, bring 
 away, remove. 
 
 30. 2)er §a6t^t unb bic Stiitii^e. — The Hawk and the Storks. 
 
 1) ftofen — ftie| — geftofen auf pounce upon. 2) bie 
 8erd)e the lark. 3) im 3lngefi(^te in sight of, in the presence 
 of. 4) tniirgen, rupfen, jlpeifen, kill, pluck, eat. 5) a6), alas. 
 6) arm, poor. 7) ttor^in, a little while ago. 8) ftngen — Jang 
 — gejungen sing. 9) fo arttg no^, so pleasantly, nicely, 
 
 10) l^are bo(^ bie ©eufjer n«r, leave off with your sighs. 
 
 11) ber grofi^, the frog. 12) ben bu oerje^rt [^aft], which you 
 have eaten. 13) ber for er. 14) beKagenSiuert, to he pitied. 
 15) qitafen, croak. 
 
 31. 2)er §rof(^ unb ber ©tier. — The Frog and the Bull. 
 
 1) oon jetnem ©umpf auS, from his pool. 2) fafi; from 
 fcl^en, '\af) — gejefien, see. 3) wetben, graze. 4) bie ©ie[e, the 
 meadow. 5) gtauJen, believe. 6) fo — tote, as — as. 7) fo^ 
 batb, whenever. 8) bejtoeifefn, doubt. 9) ^oi^miitig, haughty. 
 
 10) fogtet^ ben SetoeiS tiefern, at once afford (give) the proof. 
 
 11) fing cr on; from an-ffangcH, fing an, ongcfangen, begin. 
 
 12) fid) aufjuMci^n, puff oneself up. 13) mit attcr 3lnftrengung, 
 with all (his) force. 14) frogen, ask. 15) o, ba fel^tt no^ 
 Btef, Oh! much is wanting still. 16) abcrmatS, again. 17) aber 
 toiebcr ^ie^ e§, but again they said. 18) baf er noi^ lange bie 
 ®ro|e be8 @tiere6 ni^t errei(^t ^abe, that he was far from 
 having attained (reached) the size of the bull. 19) aU er 
 nod) wetter fortfu^r (from fort-j-fo^ren) when he went on (con- 
 tinued). 20) 3er:p{o^cn, burst. 
 
 32. 2)er ©fel, ber SRobe unb ber §irt. — The Donkey, the 
 Raven and the Herdsman. 
 
 1) erbltden, behold. 2) f(og i^m ouf ben dOidtn, flew on 
 his back, = flog ouf fetnen ^Mixi from fliegen — flog — ge= 
 flogen. 3) toett because. 4) bie tuunbe ©telle, the sore spot. 
 5) finben — fanb — gefunben, find. 6) ^aden, pick. 7) ber 
 ©d&nobet, the beak. 8) bag ro^e Steif^, the raw flesh. 9) ben 
 btcfeS notiirtic^ fi^mer^te, who was of course much hurt. 10) gab 
 fill; olle mog!td)e SDfii^e, took all possible pains. 11) ber unge= 
 .^ogene ©aft the unwelcome (naughty) guest. 12) toSjutoerben, 
 
Graduated Glossary. 229 
 
 to get rid of. 12) ttergeben8, in Tain. 13) unfern t)on i^m, 
 not far from him. 14) tag (from: tiegen — log — getegen) 
 ber 5>8ter was the herdsman [lying]. 15) e8 l^fitte btefem ge» 
 foftet, it would have taken (cost) him. 16) ber ©d^ritt, the 
 step, pace. 17) ein <B(i)laq, one blow. 18) fo tear ber 9tabe 
 derjagt, (and the raren was driven away) to drive the raven 
 away. 19) bo^ beS 8etbenbcn ©^jrflnge unb ©eberben, hut the 
 sufferer's bounds and gestures. 20) beuc^ten il^ fo brofltg, 
 appeared to him so funny. 21) bent Sluftritte jnfe^en, looked 
 om the scene. 22) (aute8 Socmen, loud laughing, laughter. 
 23) rtef; from rufen — rief — gerufen call. 24) enbtt^, at 
 last. 25) fii^t' idf) boppett uteinc ©li^merjen, I feel my pain 
 doubly much. 26) berjemge — toeld^r he — who. 27) ba . . 
 mt(^ att*fa(|t, as he laughs at me. 28) bttttg, justly. 29) ^elfen 
 (with a dat. object) help. 
 
 33. 2)et gto^e Sol^Ifo^jf. — The big Cabbage-head. 
 
 1) 3wei §anbtDerts6urJd^en, two journeymen. 2) gingen 
 einft uorbei (from Borbei-|-ge^en) once passed. 3) an bent Sraut= 
 gmrteti, the kitchen-garden. 4) ba§ 4)orf, the vUlage. 5) fie^ 
 bod^, just see! 6) fta« filr gro§e SrautBpfe what big cabbage- 
 heads. 7) baS ftnb those are ; notice the neuter form of pro- 
 nouns with fetn 'be'. 8) @i, Oh! 9) ber gern ^Dra^tte, who 
 was fond of bragging. 10) gar nici^t grof, not big at all; 
 bie = fte. 11) auf metner SBanberfd^aft, on my travels. 12) einmat 
 once. 13) bag ^farrl^ouS bort, yonder rectory. 14) ber Supfer= 
 fd^mteb, the copper-smith, tinker. 15) |terauf thereupon. 
 16) bai tutQ t)tel fagen, (that will say much), that goes a long 
 way. 17) 3nbe8, however. 18) ber Seffet the kettle. 19) bie 
 ^xx<i)i, the church. 20) unt beS ^tntntetSWiHen, for heaven's 
 sake. 21) IBop f^attt man benn niittg, what did they want — for? 
 22) man tnoUte fod^cn, they wished to boil. 23) barin in it. 
 
 34. Scfonbcrcr S^if^. — The special table. 
 
 1) §erjog ^ar( oon 2Biir(emberg Duke Charles of Wurtem- 
 berg. 2) ju SJiittag effen, take lunch; from effen — o| — gc= 
 geffen. 3) tm l^ei^ett ©ommcr, on a hot summer-day. 4) in 
 bcm (Stfibt(i)en S'lagofb in the little town of Nagold. 5) ober 
 eigentHc^ gcfpeift, or, properly speaking he dined. 6) ttie btc 
 grogen ^erren t^un, as the great lords do. 7) ^ommt etne 
 
230 Juniors' German. 
 
 Slnjo^t Bon gitegen there came (lit. come) a large number of 
 flies. 8) uub fpeift mit, and partake of his meal, (lit. dine 
 with [him]. 9) unetngetabeB uninTlted. 10) fummen mit ein= 
 anber are buzzing to and fro. 11) taufen 6in unb ^er and 
 running up and down. 12) ge^bren on belong to, fit-for. 
 13) bie filrftltclie Safet, the princely table. 14) ^a then. 
 15) bbg tuerben, get angry. 16) bie SBirttn, the landlady. 
 17) 3n« ^ududS Siittnten, for heaven's sake. 18) becEen ®te 
 ben MMtn befonberS, lay special covers for the flies, (gnats). 
 19) ftifl, quiet. 20) t^ut »te i^ befo^ten ift, does as she has 
 been bidden; from t!^un — t^at — getl^an, 21) na^ einer 
 SBeife, after a while. 22) tritt fie Dor ben ^erjog, she comes, 
 (steps) before the duke; from treten (er tritt) — trat — ge= 
 treten. 23) maijt einen SnidS, curtsey. 24) ©ebedt ift, the 
 table-cloth is laid. 25) befe^ten je^t audi gro. ©urd^Iauci^t, ba^ 
 firiE) bie 3D?it(fen fe^en, please your Serene Highness to bid the 
 flies sit down. 
 
 35. 2!)ct S^ntettetltng. — The Butterfly. 
 
 1) SDBag btft ba f^n! how beautiful you are! 2) biefer 
 ^[ilgcf reit^e ^coji&t, Ohl the rich splendour of these wings. 
 3) biefer gorben bmtiz ^kt, the variegated beauty of these 
 cdours. 4) tag bi<i^ in btx Sfta^e fe^n, let me see you near. 
 5) ber Snabe, the boy. 6) baS Ster the animal, little thing. 
 7) ertptfd^cn catch; leiii^t easily. 8) bet ben gfiigetn, by the 
 wings. 9) oij^, bie garben uub" bie ^radit, alas! the splendour 
 of the colours. 10) finb baoon oerttitfiiit, are wiped off. 11) tok 
 @taub, hke dust. 12) ^iitt' er jematS (icol^O geba^t, had he 
 ever thought; (from benfcn — ba^te — gebad^t). 13) tote eht 
 §aud) fo f^netl berlifi^t, fade away, like a breath. 
 
 36. (£tle mit SScile. — The more Haste, the less Speed, 
 (festina lente = hasten slowly.) 
 
 1) ©n gul^rmann, a carrier. 2) fu^r abenbg bcr <Stabt 
 gu, drove, in the evening, towards a (the) town. 3) ber SSJagen, 
 the cart. 4) in grbftcr Site, in a hurry. 5) fomme tit) nod^ 
 in bie ©tabt, shall I reach the town in time. 6) noif) oor 
 SEl^orfperre, before the closing of the gates. 7) p-|-rufen call 
 to. 8) ber 9?etfenbe the traveller. 9) an bent er uorbeijagte, 
 whom he drove past. 10) D, ja, surely. 11) wenn i^r lang= 
 
Graduated Glossary. 231 
 
 famer fol^rt, if you drive more slowly. 12) bet 3Jienfd6 this 
 (the) fellow. 13) nid^t gefii^eit a little cracked. 14) ^jettfi^te 
 auf feine ?Pferbe (08, went on beating his horses. 15) unb fu^r 
 nod^ jdjncCer auf ber l^otprigen ©trage and drove still quicker 
 on the rough road. 16) fo baf ^ferbe unb JRciber rauc^ten, 
 that the horses and the wheels were hot and foaming. 
 
 17) ^tB^Kd^ bva6) (i^ui) etn 9tab, suddenly a wheel broke. 
 
 18) ber aSagen fiel um, the cart was upset. 19) Siftett unb 
 gaffer, boxes and barrels. 20) tagen auf ber ©tra^e, were 
 lying about on the road. 21) ber ©robcn the ditch. 22) ^olte 
 . . . etn, from etn-j-^oten overtake. 23) fel^t il^r nun, do you 
 now perceive. 24) re^t l^aben, be right. 25) xiS) hrmm no(|i 
 »ol^I in bie ©tobt, I easily reach the town. 26) ju guf , on 
 foot. 27) baS «Pf<rb, the horse. 28) !iJnnt fie ^eute nic^t 
 (mel^r) errei^en, cannot reach it to-day. 29) 3£^r bac^tet p 
 erf<3aren, you intended to save. 30) einige ^fennige @^errgeO), 
 a poll-tax of a few pence! 31) etnen @(^oben a loss. 32) toon 
 nte^reren SSKarl^ of several marks. 
 
 37. 2)ie ^aptUe. — The Chapel. 
 
 1) !Droben ftt^et bie So^jeCe, there (high) above stands 
 the chapel. 2) f(^auet ftiH l^iuab, looks quietly down. 3) xa& 
 Sr^at, into the valley. 4) ©runten ftngt ber ^irtenteab', there 
 (down) below the shepherdsb»y sings. 5) bei 2B«J' unb Qmfle 
 on meadow and by the fountain. 6) fro^ unb ^eC, gaily and 
 clear. 7) traurtg, mournfully. 8) baS ©IMfein the little bell. 
 9) tBnt nieber sends down its peal, sounds. 10) ft^uerUi^ 
 awfully. 11) ber 8etii^end()or the funeral choir. 12) bie frozen 
 8ieber, the merry songs. 13) finb ftitte have ceased. 14) taufi^t 
 empor is looking up Sstening. 15) bringt man fie jum ®rabe 
 all those are buried. 16) bie fti^ freuten, who made merry. 
 17) bir aud^, for you also. 18) fingt man bort etnmoC, they 
 will once sing there. 
 
 38. ©in ^iinget unb SRod^foIger aJiu^antmebS. — A disciple 
 and successor of Mahomet. 
 
 1) mfic^tig mighty. 2) ber f altf the caUph. 3) fa^ bet 
 STtfc^, was sitting at table. 4) einer fetner ©Kaben, one of 
 his slaves. 5) Derfd^iltten, spill over. 6) eine ®^ale mit l^ei^em 
 Saffee, a cup of hot coffee. 7) oerbrannte, from t)erbrennen — 
 
232 Jmriois' Gennan. 
 
 oerbrannte — eerBtannt scald. 8) ber fterr, (the) his master. 
 9) baS <Bi\ldjt beS gfirften, the prince's face. 10) murbe tot 
 Oor ^ofH/ got red, flushed with anger, 11) fiet Oor i^m niebcr 
 (from nieber-j-faden) fell on his knees before him. 12) intt 
 ben SBorten bc8 Soran8, with the words of the Koran. 13) bo« 
 ^arobieS the Paradise. 14) be^errfci^en, master, overcome. 
 15) erwibern answer. 16) ni(^t me^r jorntg, no longer angry. 
 17) ouf bid^, with you. 18) bcr ©Kaoe fu^r fort, the skve 
 went ou, continued; from fort-}-fo^ren. 18) ben ©eiribtgern 
 tierjei^en, pardon the offenders. 19) ernft earnestly, with gra- 
 ■vity. 20) rul^tg, quietly. 21) oergeben, forgive. 22) ba fo^te 
 iDteber fStnt, then took heart agaia. 23) fe^te noti) l^inju, added. 
 24) oor oHcnt above all, especially. 25) SiJfeS mit @utem oer* 
 getten, reward good for evil. 26) ungel^atten angry. 27) fiber 
 bie iDreiftigfeit be8 ®ne(!^te8; at the servant's boldness. 28) ent= 
 gegnete lixd)tivb, replied smiling. 29) id^„ j(^enfe bir bie gteil^it, 
 I set you free. 30) unb gebe bir ben Dtgarten and give you 
 the oUve garden. 31) be8 l^ingerid^teten ©etim of Selim who 
 was executed. 32) out SOteere, by tJie sea. 
 
 39. 2)aS <B(ifiottt. — The Sword. 
 
 1) ^ur ©^miebe, to the smithy. 2) ber §elb, the hero. 
 3) befteHen, order. 4) ba8 @^Wert, the sword. 5) bod) ate 
 er'S toog, but when he brandished it. 6) in freier §anb, in 
 his outstretched hand. 7) ba8 ©t^toert er erfonb, he deemed 
 (found) the sword. 8) loiet ju \6)mx much too heavy. 9) ber 
 @<]^mieb the smith. 10) ben ©art fic^ (= frinen Sarf) ftret^t, 
 str(*es his beard. 11) ni^t ju f^mer noc^ teid^t, neither too 
 heavy nor too li^t. 12) ju \iijitoad) ift euer arm, too feeble 
 is your arm. 13) id^ metn', I suppose. 14) bod^ morgen, but 
 to-morrow. 15) foil gel^olfen fetn, it shall be mended. 16) bet 
 oOer SRttterfd^aft, by all knighthood. 17) burt^ meine, ni^t 
 bur^ iJeuerS ^oft, through my own strength, and not through 
 fire. 19) er fprtd^t'8, so saying. 20) i|n graft burc^brtngt 
 strength comes over the youth. 21) fc^wingen brandish. 
 22) l^od^ in 8iifteu high in the air. 
 
 40. @tn itattt Solbat. — An honest Soldier. 
 
 1) ber auf SSorpoften ftanb, who did duty as a senlanel. 
 2) unoerfe^ena unawares. 3) iibetfaBen attack. 4) bie bunfcte 
 
Graduated Glossary. 233 
 
 iRac^t the dark night. 5) bcr gcinb the enemy. 6) entwaffnen 
 unb gefongen ne^men (Pret. na^m, P. P. genomraen) disarm 
 and take prisoner. 7) in bte SOtttte between them. 8) xi(f)tetcn 
 bte SSajonette auf tl§n pointed the bayonets at him. 9) gc« 
 bieten — gebot — gebeten order them. 10) jogtetc^ at once. 
 11) fii^en lead. 12) nad) bcm Soger, to the camp. 13) tt)uc 
 et bte8, if he would do so. 14) (fo) fofic t^tn ba8 Seben gc» 
 fd^enlt fetn, his life should be spared. 15) betm gcringften 
 8oute iebo^, at the least sound however. 16) ben er toon fii^ 
 jtt geben wogte, he dared to utter. 17) tottrben fie i^n tijten, 
 they would Mil him. 18) oaf bcr ©tetle on the spot. 19) ber 
 ©otbat ging ttifltg mit, the soldier readily went with them. 
 20) tott|te; from wiffen — hjugte — gewuft know. 21) fotote 
 fie on Me @(^itbtoo4e fomcn, as soon as they approached the 
 aentinels. 22) unb er gkuben fonnte, and he could think. 
 23) bof er ge^rt loiirbe, that he would be heard. 24) mit 
 fanter ©ttmme, with a loud voice. 25) fc^reien — fd&rte — ge= 
 f^teen cry. 26) §otto^, Someroben! hallo, comrades! 26) itn 
 |[ugenbtt(f, in a moment. 27) auf ben SBeinen alarmed. 28) bcr 
 ttberfafi the surprise. 29) on'citefn, frustrate. 30) trcu faith- 
 ful. 31) Bon bieten @tB|en burt^bo^t pierced by many thrusts. 
 32) entfeelt liegen, lying lifeless. 33) ouf berjelben ©telle, at 
 the same spot. 34) ao er au8gcfto|en l^otte, where he had 
 given; from ou8+fto^n. 35) feinen SG3ornung8ruf the alarm. 
 
 41. @nit Siaii^t! Good Night! 
 
 1) mm SRiiben, to all [who are] tired. 2) fei'S gebrodjt 
 may it be (brought) said. 3) 9ieigt ber 5Cog ftd^ fttK sum 
 gnbe when the day quietly passes away. 4) rul^en rest. 
 5) oHe flei^'gen ^Snbe, all toiling hands. 6) bt8 till, until. 
 7) ber SWorgen the morning. 8) neu ermoc^t, awakes anew. 
 
 9) ®e^' 3ur 9t«]^'! go to rest! 9) fiJitie^t 3U, close, shut. 
 
 10) bie milbcn Slugcn, your sleepy eyes. 11) fttflc mirb e« it 
 is getting quiet. 12) ouf ben ©trogen, in the streets. 13) bcr 
 SDBoc^ter, the watchman. 14) btofen, mark (sound) the hours. 
 15) ruft oHcn ju, says (calls) to everybody. 16) fdjfunimert, 
 slumber. 17) bi8 bcr Slog erwo^t, until the day awakes 
 (breaks). 18) mit feinen ncuen ©orgen, with its new cares. 
 19) ol^ne gurdit, (without fear), do not fear. 20) bcr SBoter 
 ttioi^t, our (the) father (in heaven) is keeping watch. 
 
234 Juniors' German. 
 
 42. 2)ie B^imt'ite mi in m>ln. — The Turtle and the 
 
 Eagle. 
 
 1) S)er fonberbare ©nfaK, the strange fancy (idea). 2) bag 
 f^Itegcn erternen ju moHen, of wishing to learn how to fly. 
 3) unb bot fid^ au8 asked for. 4) ber Unterric^t barttt instruction 
 in it. 5) ftellte btefer t^r tior, he (this one) demonstrated, 
 showed her. 6) baS IBegel^ren the demand, request. 7) wiber* 
 finnig absurd. 8) bte ^atnx, nature. 9) an-f-tt)etfen, ttteS an, 
 ongcwiefen direct. 10) gum ^ie^en, to crawl along. 11) fteg 
 nid|t ob (from ab+Ioffen) did not desist. 12) tnftSnbtg bitten, 
 implore earnestly. 13) in bte §B^e gu ne^men, to take her 
 up; mit = mit fi(^ with him. 14) nur einmat, once only. 
 15) too where. 16) fic^ fd)on felbft toeiter i^elfen get on by 
 itself (herself). _ 17) beS fortmSfirenbcn SDrfingens fi^Iiegtid^ 
 mitbe, at last tired of its (her) continual requests. 18) fti^ 
 enblii^ bereit erttfiren declare oneself willing at last. 19) er= 
 futten, fulfil. 20) ber 3&m\6) the wish. 21) faffeit take; 
 bte Sloue, the talon; ftteg auf (from auf+ftetgen, ftieg ouf, oufge* 
 fttegen) rise. 22) gtauben, think. 23) wett genug oben high eAough. 
 
 24) Ite§ er fie to8 (from to6-|-faffen) he dropped it (her). 
 
 25) bje UnglMItd^e the miserable creature. 26) ^erob down. 
 27) [i(^ gerf(^mettern be crushed. 28) ber getfen, the rock. 
 
 43. 3)et ^erfift. — Autumn. 
 
 1) njctfen wither. 2) bai Slatt the leaf: 3) am = an 
 (dat.) bem. 4) ber S3aum the tree. 5) fpteten play. 6) mit 
 (dat.) with. 7) atternb withering. 8) ba« 8onb the foKage, 
 leaves. 9) ber 2Btnb the wind. 10) jte^en — gog — gegogen 
 march, come. 11) l^erauf up, on, near. 1^ am= an (dat.) 
 bem. 13) fern far, distant. 14) ^ettenfaum border of time, 
 horizon. 15) ber SDinter winter. 16) baS gnfeffinb the great 
 grand-child. 17) gmar it is true. 18) lue^en blow. 19) bte 
 8uft the air. 20) Ictfe gently, 21) no^ stHl. 22) f^met(^eln 
 flatter. 23) umrouf^en rush, flow round. 24) nedif^ playful, 
 teasing. 25) ber STon the tone, voice. 26) boc^ yet, but. 
 27) buri^ (ace.) through. 28) o(tbe!annt long known. 29) bie 
 SBetfe the tune. 30) titngen sound. 31) oft fc^on now and 
 then. 32) fremb strange. 33) tote like. 34) grtmm grim, 
 wrathful. 35) ber §of)n the scorn, mockery. 36) Kingt'8 
 = e8 ftingt . . . fremb; render by 'some strange noise' . . . 
 
Graduated Glossary. 235 
 
 37) rings all round. 38) fallen turn fallow. 39) ber SBafb 
 the wood. 40) flagen weep, bewail. 41) trauernb mourDful(ly). 
 42) fc^on already. 43) glut unb §ain fields and meadows. 
 44) na|cn approach. 45) 3i9^f anxious fears; the infinitive 
 used (with baS) substantively. 46) jtel^t — etn, from ein-|- 
 jiel^en enter, penetrate; understand perhaps in unferc ^er^en 
 into our hearts. 47) rau^ rough. 48) ber grcmbfing the 
 stranger. 
 
 44. S)a§ S^af. — The Sheep. 
 
 1) feiern celebrate. 2) baS gcft feiner SSermSl^Iung, his 
 wedding-feast. 3) bo« Ster the animal. 4) iijxa to him. 
 5) ©ejc^en! present. 6) ttermiffen miss. 7) SBo 6tetbt why 
 does . . . stay away. 8) frogen inquire. 9) bte ©ottin the 
 goddess. 9) ttarmn why. 10) Berfamnen baS fromme does . . . 
 neglect. 11) fromm pious, devout. 12) unS to us. 13) xoo^U 
 gcnteinteS ©efi^enf well-meant present. 14) ber §unb the dog. 
 15) uafpn baS SBort began to speak. 16) gitrne nic^t do not 
 be angry. 17) no^ ^eute only (still) torday. 18) gefel^en, 
 P. P. of jefien — fa^ see. 19) fcl^r betrilbt very sad. 20) tout 
 jantmern lament loud. 21) fragte from fragen ask. 22) fd^on 
 gerii^rt already moved. 23) id) SrmfteS, how wretched I am. 
 24) jo thus. 25) j[e|t now. 26) toeber SBoIIe nodE) 3Jitti3^ neither 
 wool nor milk. 27) f(^cnfcn present to. 28) (oil ic^ shall I, 
 am I to. 29) attein alone. 30) »or i^m erf(^einen appear 
 before him. 31) tieber Witt x6) ^tnge^en I will rather go. 
 32) ben |)trten bitten ask the shepherd. 33) ba| er mic^ i^m 
 o^)fere to offer me to him. 34) inbent ber 9?ou(^ bcs geopferten 
 @(^afe8 at this moment the smoke from the offering of the 
 sheep. 35) brang, pret. of brtngen — brang — gebrungcn rise. 
 
 36) niit beS ^irten ®ebcte together with the shepherd's prayer. 
 
 37) jijger ®eru(| sweet smell. 38) bte SBoIfen the clouds. 
 39) getoeint p. p. of wetncn shed. 40) bte S^rSne the tear. 
 41) hjcnn if. 42) bene^'-en moisten. 43) unfterbti(J)c« Stuge 
 immortal eye. 
 
 45. SttlegOttbetS aSetmSd^tniS. — Alexander's will. 
 
 1) ftarb pret. of fterben — ftarb — geftorben die. 2) tter< 
 orbnen order. 3) i^m bte ^anb = feine §anb. 4) ^angen 
 hang. 5) ber ©org the coffin. 6) bamit in order that. 7) bte, 
 relat. pronoun. 8) border formerly, before. 9) ^jrongen shine, 
 
236 Juniors' German. 
 
 in his splendour. 10) fa^en, pret. of fel^en — fa^ — gefe^en, 
 see. 11) in feineS 9tei^tum8 giiff, in the abundance of his 
 wealth. 12) nun fel&en mBc^ten, might see now. 13) bag cr 
 fet beS otlgemeinen SGBegS gegangcn, that he had gone the 
 common way; notice the genitive. 14) mit §anben leer = ntit 
 teeren ^Sttben with empty hands. 15) gebrac^t, past part, 
 of brtngcn — brad^te bring, 16) ben ©^fi^en alien = Don 
 alien @ii)a^en ; plur. of ber <S^a% the treasure. 17) nic^tS aU 
 nothing but, 
 
 46. gnebttc^ ber ©to^c unb fein ^age. — Frederick the Great 
 and his Page. 
 
 1) (Sinft once. 2) tag, pret, of liegcn — tog — gelegen 
 he, be leaning, 3) baS genfter the window, 4) oerna^m pret. 
 of Dernel^mcn hear. 5) etn ffetncg ©erfiufc^ some noise. 6) l^tnter 
 fid^ behind him. 7) barauf then, thereupon. 8) burc^ eine 
 mit bem Slrme gemac^tc Offnung, through a hole made with 
 his bent arm. 9) bte ®ofe the snuff-box. 10) oom SEifi^e 
 nal^m took from the table; na^m, pret. of ncl^nten — na^m 
 — genommen take. 11) betrod^ten look at, 12) bie ^rife the 
 pinch. 13) foften try. 14) ftiiren disturb. 15) ober na^ 
 etnev Heinen SBctfc but after a little while. 16) ba, conj, as, 
 (Wiebcr) 5ugemac^t l^ttc, from ju+macfien shut, 17) nal^nt in 
 bie §anb took up the snuff-box, 18) gefSHt bir, do you like. 
 19) beftiitjt iiber bie grage perplexed at the question, 20) an= 
 ffinglid^ at first, 21) antirorten answer, 22) toieber^oten repeat, 
 23) cnbtid^ at last. 24) fd^arf)tern timidly, 26) nun well. 
 26) ba nimm fie take it then. 27) fie ift bein it is yours. 
 28) fflr for, prep, 29) ju ffein too small. 
 
 47. ^m SBoIbe. — In the Wood. 
 
 1) 9Kod§t' \i) (ebcn, I should like to live, 2) jur l^eigen 
 ©ommerjeit, in the hot summer-time. 3) ber =: er. 4) oiet 
 8uft unb grB^ti(|feit pleasure and delight, 5) fii^ten ©(fatten 
 cool shades, 6) winfcn invite, 7) ^weig unb 3lft branch 
 and bough, 8) bo8 33(ilmtetn the little flower, 9) bie 5Katten 
 the meadows. 10) niden beckon. 11) (tcber ®aft dear guest. 
 
 12) ftte ftcl) bie SSBgef f(^h)tngen how the birds are soaring. 
 
 13) f)tU bright. 14) ber SKovgenglanj the glow of morning. 
 15) §irf(^ unb 9te^e fprtngcn stags and roes are leaping. 
 
Graduated Glossary. 237 
 
 16) tufttg merry. 17) »te jum STanj as if they went to dance. 
 
 17) bo8 ^JJeiS twig. 18) §Br' itur, only hark! 19) tuie'S (icb* 
 lic^ fc^aOt how lovely it sounds. 20) fingen sing, warble. 
 21) lout unb (etfc loud and soft. 22) in [ben] griinen SBatb 
 into the green wood. 
 
 48. {Jttebrit^ ber ®to^e nub bie Strogenjitngen. — Frederick 
 
 the Great and the Street-boys. 
 
 1) mcnn whenever. 2) fii^ fe^en tie§ (tie§ — ge(affen) 
 showed himself. 3) ftiti quiet. 4) bte ©tro^e the street. 
 5) t3or3ugtt(^ Wert particularly dear, favourite. 6) ^Refiben^ftabt 
 residence, capital, seat of the court. 7) alt old. 8) ber 
 (S^tmmct white horse. 9) gcttbfinltiJ) usually. 10) wn einem 
 ©^warme ©tro^eniungen umgeben surrounded by a crowd of 
 street Arabs. 11) an benen er fetne greube l^atte of whom he was 
 very fond. 12) fie nannten ii^n they called him. 13) bejupfen 
 pat. 14) bag ^ferb the horse. 15) fasten bie ©tetgbiiget an 
 touched the stirrups; from an-j-faffen. 16) tiiffen Mss. 
 17) il^m bie giige = feine giige; ber gii| the foot. 18) fangen, 
 from fingen — fang — gefungen sing. 19) ©tetraf^e ^teg«* 
 unb 25otf«(ieber warlike and popular songs by Gleim. 20) tion 
 benen bet atte ^etr tjor^itgftc^ gem l^Brte, of which the old 
 gentleman hked especially ; lit. gem ^orte heard with pleasure. 
 
 21) aSiftoria, mtt «n« tfi ®ott Victory, God with us is. 
 
 22) ber ftotje geinb liegt ba the proud enemy lies there = is 
 crushed. 23) an einem ©onnabenb Sfta^mittag, on a Saturday 
 afternoon. 24) fie e8 mat ju org mac^ten they for once went 
 too far. 25) l^ob, pret. of ^eben — bob — gc^oben raise. 
 
 26) ber Srii(IftO(J the crutch-cane [which he used to carry]. 
 
 27) ba^ SSort the word. .28) @d|ofer, gc^t in bie ®d)ule 
 little rascals, go to school. 29) bie frb^ltc^en Snaben the 
 jolly boys. 30) riefen (aut, cried loud; from rufen — rief 
 
 — gerufen. 31) Weil nidit mat, does not even know. 32) feine 
 Sc^ule no school. 33) ©onnobenb S^lai^mtttag? on Saturday 
 afternoons. 
 
 49. fjtiebriii^ ber ©ro^e in Siffo. — Frederick the Great at Lissa. 
 
 1) Dftreid^er Austrian. 2) waren gefc|(agen ttorben had 
 been beaten. 3) am 5. ©ejember on the fifth of December. 
 4) bet ficut^en at Leuthen. 5) jogen fi(i) juriid retreated ; from 
 
238 Juniors' German. 
 
 fief) jurii(f-l-3ic^en. 6) md) ber ©tabt 8tffa towards the town of 
 Lissa. 7) mtttterwctte meanwhile. 8) 3lbenb evening; render 
 the phrase by 'it' had grown dark. 9) ba8 prcupf^e gugooll 
 the Prussian infantry. 10) jum STobe ermiibet tired to death. 
 11) fo bag an ntd^t gebad^t werben fonnte so that.. . could not 
 be thought of; bcnten — boifite — gebacfit think. 12) allgc= 
 mein general. 13) bie SSerfoIgung the pursuit. 14) ber geinb 
 the enemy. 15) nur only, 1 6) fe^tc ben getnben nod^ pursued 
 the enemy; from nad^-|"l^fe^n- 1''') '^" STrup^s ^ufaren a troop 
 of hussars. 18) babet thereby, thus. 19) bii mi) as far as. 
 20) fofort at once. 21) wurbc auf bie Slntbmmtinge gefc^offen 
 the newcomers were fired upon; from f(!^te|en — fd^o| — ge< 
 fcfioffcn shoot. 22) au8 cielen ^Sujern from many houses. 
 23) ol^ne bag bie ©i^iiffe . . . cine S03tr!ung l^atten the shooting 
 not having any effect. 24) jeboi^ however. 25) bie ®egenb 
 the locality, neighbourhood. 26) genau fannte knew well; 
 from fennen — fannte — gefonnt. 27) getangen arrive, reach. 
 28) ttenige Segtettct a few companions, followers. 29) faft 
 unkl^inbert almost unmolested. 30) ba« ©d^tog the castle. 
 31) bie Bftreii^ifd^en Dffijiere the Austrian officers. 32) ein 
 Untcrfommcn finben (fanb — gefnnben) find or take shelter. 
 33) eben just. 34) fiifi jur 2;afcl begeben go to dine, sit down 
 to dinner. 35) baS ©erSuf^ noise. 36) an+fonimen arrive. 
 37) ber SRetter the horseman. 38) bt8 an bie Ztipifi getodt 
 wurben were attracted to the stair-case. 39) trat i^ncn ent= 
 gegcn met them. 40) guten 3lbenb, meine §ctren good evening 
 gentlemen. 41) fto^t render by 'I dare say'. 42) oerntuten 
 (eermutete — tiermutet) expect. 43^ fann man noc^ (mit) unter= 
 tontmen can we get lodging here ; ntit = mit 3^nen with you. 
 44) wa^renb whilst. 45) in grbgter SBerwirrnng in the great- 
 est confusion. 46) baftanben or ba ftanbcn from fiel^en — 
 ftanb — geftanben stand there. 47) an+ftarren stare at. 
 
 48) erfdiien pret. of erf(|cxncn — erf(f)ten — erfi^tcnen appear. 
 
 49) bag ©efolge his suite. 50) no^m gefangen took prisoners. 
 51) feinbtic^ hostile. 
 
 50. ©cfnnben. — Found. 
 
 1) 3cf) ging, pret. of gefien — ging — gegongen go, walk. 
 2) fo fiir mi^ ^tn quite absorbed in thought. 3) ju futfien 
 to seek. 4) ©inn mind, mood. 5) ber ©(gotten the shade. 
 6) idE) fal^, pret. of fel^en see. 7) ein ffltiimd^en fte^en a little 
 
Graduated Glossary. 239 
 
 flower standing, 8) ttite ©terne Icu^tenb shining like stars. 
 9) tute tuglein jii)Bn like beautiful eyes. 10) ^6) wotlt' e« 
 bred^en I was going to pluck it. 11) fein gently, softly. 
 12) foU ii) gebro(J)en fein shall I be broken, plucked and lie 
 there. 13) gum SBctfcn for withering. 14) id) grub'g ouS 
 (= grub e8 oug) I dug it up. 15) fate SBiirjIetn its little 
 roots. 16) trug tc^'6 {= trug i^ e8) I carried it. 17) om 
 = an bent by, near. 18) ^jftansen plant. 19) toicbct again. 
 20) am ftitlen Drt at a quiet spot. 21) jttetgt es tmmer 
 now it is putting forth branches. 22) unb btfl^t fo fort and 
 goes on blooming; fort expresses 'continuation'. 
 
 51. ©ef^trfte SRebe. — Clever speech. 
 
 1) traumcn dream. 2) faer B^^n, pi. 3"^ne toot^i- 
 3) feieH/ Subj. in indirect oration. 4) il^m auSgefatten had 
 gone ; from au8-l-fa{Ie«. 5) er tte^ etnen STraumouSteger fommcn 
 he sent for an interpreter of dreams. 6) frogen ask. 7) waS 
 ber Siroum ju bebeuten ^obe what the dream meant. 8) ttoDe 
 btcb beiDo^rcn may preserve you. 9) bor aUcm Ungfiid from 
 all misfortune. 10) jc^en see; Future Indef. 11) bctne JBer* 
 wanbten your relatives. 12) fterben die. 13) erjiirnt fiber 
 angry at. 14) bie iibfe STuSlegung the evil interpretation. 
 15) Iie§ ifpn geben had given him. 16) @tocEfc^(ag stroke with 
 a stick. 17) unb (lie^) rufen and sent for. 18) antmortcn 
 auf reply to. 19) fate t^rage the question. 20) ber §tmnicl 
 heaven. 21) WoCe oertet^en may grant, give. 22) ein tangeS 
 geben a long life. 23) otien betnen Stnoerftanbten dative plural. 
 24) fiberleben survive. 25) ©ufaten ducats. 26) tm ©runbe 
 in reality. 27) baSfetbe the same thing. 28) fo Diet !ommt 
 an ouf so much depends on. 29) bie 3Irt unb SBenbung ber 
 9tebe the manner and construction of speech. 
 
 52. 2)ic ^iirtttettM unb bie Sieue. — The Gardener's wife 
 and the Bee. 
 
 1) flog, Pret. of fitegen — f(og — geflogcn fly. 2) emfig 
 l^in unb ^cr busily to and fro. 3) fog, pret. of fougen — fog 
 — gefogen suck. 4) ©a^igfeit sweetness. 5) auS alien S3(umen 
 from all flowers. 6) 33ien(f)en diminutive of 93tcne. 7) fj3rti)t, 
 3ri p. sing. pres. ind. of fprec^en say. 8) bie is relative pron. 
 9) bet ber Slrbett at work. 10) trifft, S^d pers. sing. pres. ind. 
 of treffcn meet. 11) mand^e 33turae many a flower. 12) ba& 
 
240 Juniors' German. 
 
 ®ift poison, venom. 13) boc^, here 'to be sure', 'don't you 
 know'. 14) (off id) barin I leave (in them) i. e. behind. 
 
 53. 3>ie ^ftlk ^lof^e. — Half the Bottle. 
 
 1) ')flaci) ber ©c^taifit bet after the battle of. 2) in wetd^cr 
 bie ©^imebcn gcfi^tagen wurbcn in which the Swedes were 
 beaten; from fi^tagen — fd)(ug — gcf(i)lQgen. 3) oon ben 
 Sranbenburgern by the Brandenburgers ; they formed the 
 nucleus from which Prussia sprang, 4) 6at ein auf b«n 5tob 
 oerwunbetcr ©i^wcbe a Swede wounded to death. 5) 6at, pret. 
 of bitten — bot — gebcttn ask. 6) uoriibergel&enb going past 
 (him). 7) urn eincn Slrunf for a drink. 8) ben = biejen '^ 
 i^n it. 9) fottft bu ^oben, Somerab you shall have comrade. 
 10) iDS^renb aber but whilst. 11) bie gelbflaf^e the canteen. 
 12) to6nefte(n loosen, untie. 13) ergriff pret. of ergreifen — 
 crgriff — ergrifftn seize. 14) tiicEifii^ malignant, knavish. 
 
 15) eine nebcn iijm ttegenbe ^iftote a pistol lying by his side. 
 
 16) feucrn auf discharge at. 17) gutmiitig good natured. 
 18) unoerJel^enS who did not suspect such a thing; an 
 adverb. 19) fe^fen miss. 20) gut gejielt well aimed. 21) benn 
 for. 22) bie Sugcf the bullet. 23) (jfiff mir juft am D^re 
 norbti whistled just past my ear. 24) biJfe gemcint ill meant. 
 25) bi(^ begwegen ungeftraft taffcn leave you unpunished for 
 it. 26) biefe gfafdie ift ooti gutcn SBeinS this bottle is full of 
 good wine. 27) ganj befoitimen get all. 28) l^alb half of it. 
 29) bomit t^at bcv ^ronbenburger einen tuditigen ©(^{u(f aue 
 berfefben thereupon the Brandenburgher took a good draught 
 from it. 30) gab fie bann bem ®(|webcn handed it then to 
 the Swede. 31) baoon-J-gel^cn go away. 
 
 54. Site diai^t. — The Revenge. 
 
 1) !X)er Snedit the churl. 2) crftedien — erftad^ — er= 
 ftocfien stab. 3) ber ebte §err the noble lord, master. 4) ttSr' 
 jetber ein 9Jttter gem would have liked to be a knight himself. 
 
 6) im biin!(en §ain in the dark grove. 6) ber 8eib the body. 
 
 7) oerfenfen im sink, bury. 8) ber ticfe $R^cin the deep Rhine. 
 9) anlegcn, put on. 10) bie 9?iiftung btonf the shining coat 
 of mail. 11) baS 9{o| the horse. 12) fprengen gallop. 13) iiber 
 bie SBxM' over the bridge. 14) ba ftu^et ba8 JRof the horse 
 startles. 15) fi(| juriid bfiumen and prances. 16) bie giilbnen 
 
Graduated Glossary. 241 
 
 @j)oren sets the golden spurs. 17) ba fd/fcubcrt'S i^n xoilb in 
 ben ©tront ^tnab it (he) fariously flings him down into the 
 stream. 18) rubern unb ringen row and struggle. 19) ber 
 ^anjer the mail. 20) meberjWingen weigh, force down. 
 
 55. SelBftiiBctlotniiung. — Self-control. 
 
 1) Decline — grtebric^ ber ®rofe. 2) otS . . . 9Ittcr 
 unb SeibeSfd^tottdie pno^men when age and infirmity in- 
 creased. 3) begegnete c8 t^m etmgcmat it sometimes happened 
 to him. 4) etmaS Knger a httle longer. 5) f(^(afen — fc^lief 
 — gef^fafen sleep. 5) ^16) Bor-|-|e^en intend. 6) \\(S) borilber 
 argern be vexed at it. 7) befel^ten — befot)t — befol^fen order. 
 8) ber Sammerbtener valet. 9) ju taffen to allow. 10) at8 biS 
 auf bte beftintmte Srttnute than to the appointed minute. 
 11) ntit Oewatt mecfen awaken him by force. 1^) ein SSebtenter 
 a valet. 13) on+ne^nten, ni^tn an, angenommen engage. 
 14) erft only a short time ago. 15) urn biefen Sefel^I ju er» 
 fiiHen in order to fulfil this order. 16) ta^ mi^ boc^ noc^ 
 ein Wenig fc^Iafen let me sleep a little longer, please. 17) nod) 
 got JU ntflbe still too tired. 18) S^re 5Dfaje[tot ^aben mtr be« 
 fo^ten Tour Majesty has ordered me. 19) frii^ early. 20) etne 
 einjtge SSiertelftunbe one quarter of an hour more. 21) bier 
 U^t four o'clock. 22) iii) toffe mt^ nii|t abinetfen I am not 
 to be sent back. 23) nun, bo8 ift brab well that is right. 
 24) bu ttjarbeft iibet ongefommen fein you would have fared 
 badly. 25) tiegen taffen allow to stay in bed. 
 
 56. S<»^ ttienn fetn Satntnevgeti(!§t toSre. — Yes, if there was 
 no supreme Court of Justice. 
 
 1) ftd& an-f-tegen found, build; <San8fouci is the name of 
 his favourite castle. 2) einen Ztraptl ber 9J?ufen a temple of 
 the Muses. 3) einfod^, er^aben unb ftitt simple, sublime, and 
 quiet. 4) betfiftigen molest. 5) bte nol^e getegene 3Btnbmil^te 
 the neighbouring wind-mill. 6) i^r faft unaufl^brttdieS 3Jaufc^en 
 its almost incessant rushing. 7) unb etntbnigeS @ef(a^))3er and 
 monotonous rattling. 8) ftbren disturb. 9) bte Setroi^tung 
 the contemplation. 10) ^intt)eg»-|-tcilnf^en wish removed. 
 11) ou8 fetnen D^ren from his hearing. 12) p fi(^ tomnten 
 taffen send for. 13) alfo therefore. 14) ber benocEjbarte S55inb= 
 miiHer the neighbouring wind-xailler. 15) cer!aufen sell. 
 
 16 
 
242 Juniors' German. 
 
 16) oudf) ntd)t filr bie l^o^e ©umrne not even at the high sum. 
 
 17) bietcn — bot — geboten offer. 18) bcr Wntgtidie §crrjc^er 
 the royal Lord. 19) in ber SHaijt ber @tabt near the town. 
 20) getegen situated. 21) ©ro^oater unb SBatcr my grandfather 
 and father. 22) befcffen — bcfo| — bcfeffcn possess. 23) bie 
 Oef^tDiftcr brothers and sisters. 24) [inb auf i^r geboten have 
 heen born in it. 25) fie gemat)rt ntir mein ©rot it affords me 
 a living. 26) tft mir ju etnem lieben unb werten garaitiengute 
 getoorben and has become, to me a dear and valued heirloom, 
 family-estate. 27) grtcbrt(^ gab gute SBorte Frederic tried to 
 win him over. 28) baS ®ebot ftcigern raise the offer. 29) etgen= 
 finnig xiidjt taffen stubbornly decline. 30) don fetnem S3efi^» 
 tume to renounce his property. 31) Berbrte|Ii(i^ vexed. 32) gut= 
 tttflig ttotlen consent voluntarily. 33) \o befe^f tc^'« 3^m I 
 command you to do so. 34) ge^or^en obey. 35) ttibcrtoartig 
 objectionable. 36) breift boldly. 37) ^a, \o ge^t'8 ntcEit ha, 
 that would not do. 38) ja, wenn Ictn ^ammcrgcric^t ware yes, 
 if there was no supreme Court of Justice. 39) erfennen ac- 
 knowledge. 40) bie SBo^rl^ett the truth and felt the acuteness 
 of this candid threat. 41) el^ren respect, honour. 42) bie 
 burc^ has ©efe^ gcfi^erte §etltg!ett the inviolabiUty secured 
 by law. 43) cerfd)Iu(!cn bie ^itle swallow the pill. 44) in 
 f^ieben ta[fen leave alone. 45) gebulbig patiently. 46) bai 
 ©eflojjper the ratthng. 47) bie ouf il^rer ©telle fte^en btieb 
 that remained at its place. 48) unb noc^ l^eute fte^t and 
 still exists to the present day. 
 
 57. SttaBtfc^e @aft{tennbf^aft« — Arabian Hospitality. 
 
 1) befannt well known. 2) ^Pferbebteb horse-stealer. 3) er= 
 jS^ten relate. 4) wa« il^m einft in bcr 2Bii[te begegnet ton 
 what once had happened to him in the desert. 5) fo(genber= 
 nta§en in the following manner. 6) 36) ijatti mid) Berirrt I 
 had gone astray, lost my way. 7) ju (dat.) to. 8) ber ©tantm 
 Sebmnen the tribe of Bedouins. 9) ber, relative pronoun. 
 
 10) oufno^m from ouf+ne^raen, na^m ouf, aufgenommen receive, 
 
 11) gnftfreunblicb hospitably. 12) Stfle Sioge every day. 
 13) fd)tad^ten kill. 14) baS ^ameel the camel. 15) metnet»Begen 
 for my sake. 16) 3^ bat jwor I begged indeed; from bitten 
 ^ bot — gebeten. 17) fie mBcfiten fid) ni^t fo aiel Ungetegen= 
 ^cit rttad^en they would not take so much trouble. 18) unb 
 mic^ jie^en taffen and allow me to depart. 19) abet beffen= 
 
Graduated Glossary. 243 
 
 ungeaii^tet but nevertheless. 20) l^ieftcn fie mti^ guriid they 
 detained me; from juri}(f-|-^a(ten. 21) enbIi(J| at last. 22) ctnes 
 Stages one day. 23) erfafi, from erfe^en — crfa^ — erfe^cn 
 watch, take. 24) bte ©etegen^eit the opportunity. 25) trieb 
 ab, from ab-)-tretbert drive off. 26) fc^nefl laufenb fast running. 
 27) fe^te tnic^ barauf seated myself upon it, mounted. 28) eiltc 
 baoon from babon+eiten hasten away. 29) ber ©igentiimer 
 the owner. 30) balb soon. 31) oermiffen miss. 32) loin 
 ^att l^inter mtr geritten came riding hard after me ; notice the 
 past part, after fomnten. 33) ats when. 34) einge^ott, from 
 etn+|o{en overtake, come up. 35) wteS er ouf eine ©c^tonge 
 ^tn he pointed to a snake, from ^in+weijen — wteS ^in 
 — I^ingetoiefen. 36) bie im ©anbe tag lying in the sand; log, 
 from liegen — tog — getegen. 37) ftefift bu, 2nd. p, ging. pros, 
 ind. of fe^en see. 38) ber @(f)ttetf the tail. 39) bie ©d^tonge 
 the snake. 40) fproc^ er said he; from fjirec^en — \pxa(l) — 
 gefpro^en. 41) xdi) toxU I will. 42) treffen hit. 43) ber ^fet{ 
 the arrow. 44) er briicfte ob, from ab^-briitlen discharge, 
 shoot. 45) buri^bo^rte, from burcfibol^ren go through, pierce. 
 46) bie ®pi%t the end, point. 47) inbent er einen peiteti 
 ^erDor^og drawing forth another, from ^erDor-j-jtel^en — gog 
 l^eroor — ^erborgejogen. 48) ber ^o^3f the head. 49) er fi^o| 
 ben @(J)langen!opf entgtoei he shot the head of the snake in 
 two; (6)0^ from jc^iefen — fd^of — gejc^offen. 50) hn fiel^ft 
 nun tDo^l I suppose, you perceive now. 51) ber brttte th& 
 third. 52) bie Sruft the breast, heart. 53) tierfol^ren miss. 
 54) uerbtenen deserve. 55) toeil because. 56) betol^nen re- 
 compense. 57) bie greunbfd^oft friendship. 58) bnr(| gtutllt 
 unb ©iebfto^I with flight and theft. 59) aber but. 60) ber 
 (Soft the guest. 61) jtef| l^in in ©otteS Stomen go in heaven'& 
 name. 62) tbfi^Ien choose, take; btr here 'for yourself. 
 63) nocE) jwonjig anbere ^onieele twenty more camels. 
 
 58. ©chafers Sonntoggliel). — Shepherd's Sunday-Song. 
 
 1) ®cr ^og be8 §errn the Lord's day. 2) ottetn alone. 
 3) ouf tteiter i^lur on the wide plain, meadows. 4) no(!^ stUl, 
 besides. 5) eine SKorgengtode nur only one moming-belL 
 6) Stifle calmness, quiet. 7) no^ unb fern far and near. 
 8) onbetcn adore, pray. 9) fnieen kneel. 10) ^ter here. 
 11) fii^eS ®roun sweet awe. 12) gel^eimeS SBel^n secret breeze, 
 
 16* 
 
244 Juniors' German. 
 
 render by 'secret charm, spell'. 13) aii = otS ob . . . as if. 
 14) oietc many people. 15) ungefe^n unseen. 16) beten pray. 
 17) ber ^immel the sky, 18) tlax unb fetertt^ clear and 
 solemn. 19) fo ganj, ot8 tooHt' et bffnen fi^ (juite as if it 
 would open. 
 
 Diaok Ton I'l. Au^. Eapel in Soudcnlntuson.